WELCOME TO BMW.
Owner's Manual.
Thank you for choosing a BMW.
The more familiar you are with the vehicle, the better control you will have
on the road. We therefore strongly suggest the following:
Read this Owner's Manual before starting off in your new BMW. Also
use the Integrated Owner's Manual in the vehicle. It contains important
notes on vehicle operation that will help you make full use of the technical
features available in your BMW. The manual also contains information de-
signed to enhance operating reliability and traffic safety, and to contribute
to maintaining the value of your BMW.
At the time of production at the plant, the printed Owner's Manual is the
most current resource. After a vehicle software update – such as a Re-
mote Software Upgrade – the Integrated Owner's Manual for the vehicle
will contain the latest information.
You can find supplementary information in the additional brochures in the
onboard literature.
We wish you a safe and enjoyable ride.
3
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A88D30 - VI/23
OwnersManuals2.com
TABLE OF CONTENTS
After a vehicle software update – such as a Remote Software Upgrade
– the Integrated Owner's Manual for the vehicle will contain the latest
information.
NOTES
Information ........................................................................................................... 6
QUICK REFERENCE
Getting in ............................................................................................................. 16
Set-up and use ................................................................................................... 19
On the road ......................................................................................................... 22
CONTROLS
Dashboard .......................................................................................................... 30
Sensors of the vehicle ....................................................................................... 35
Operating condition of the vehicle .................................................................. 40
BMW iDrive ......................................................................................................... 44
BMW Remote Software Upgrade ................................................................... 64
Personal settings .............................................................................................. 68
Opening and closing ......................................................................................... 74
Seats, mirrors and steering wheel ................................................................ 104
Transporting children safely .......................................................................... 120
Driving ................................................................................................................ 126
Displays .............................................................................................................. 141
Light and view .................................................................................................. 162
Safety ................................................................................................................. 174
Driving stability control systems .................................................................... 212
Driver assistance systems .............................................................................. 216
Parking .............................................................................................................. 243
Driving comfort .................................................................................................. 271
Climate control ................................................................................................. 274
Interior equipment .......................................................................................... 290
Storage compartments .................................................................................. 300
Cargo area ....................................................................................................... 304
4
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A88D30 - VI/23
OwnersManuals2.com
DRIVING TIPS
Things to remember when driving .............................................................. 308
Saving fuel ......................................................................................................... 313
MOBILITY
Refueling ........................................................................................................... 318
Wheels and tires .............................................................................................. 320
Engine compartment ..................................................................................... 348
Operating materials ......................................................................................... 351
Maintenance .................................................................................................... 358
Replacing components .................................................................................. 360
Breakdown Assistance .................................................................................. 364
Vehicle Care ...................................................................................................... 372
REFERENCE
Technical data ................................................................................................. 378
Appendix .......................................................................................................... 380
Everything from A to Z ................................................................................... 382
© 2023 Bayerische Motoren Werke
Aktiengesellschaft
Munich, Germany
Reprinting, including excerpts, only with the written consent of BMW AG, Munich.
US English ID8 VI/23, -
Printed on environmentally friendly paper, bleached without chlorine, suitable for recycling.
5
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A88D30 - VI/23
OwnersManuals2.com
Information
Using this Owner's Manual
Orientation
The fastest way to find information on a partic-
ular topic is by using the index.
For an overview of the vehicle, we recommend
reading the Quick Reference Guide in the Own-
er's Manual.
Validity of the Owner's Manual
Production of the vehicle
At the time of production at the plant, the
printed Owner's Manual is the most current
resource. Due to updates after the editorial
deadline, differences may exist between the
printed Owner's Manual and the Integrated
Owner's Manual in the vehicle.
Notes on updates can be found in the appen-
dix of the printed Owner's Manual for the vehi-
cle.
After a software update in the vehicle
After a vehicle software update such as via Re-
mote Software Upgrade the Integrated Own-
er's Manual for the vehicle will contain the lat-
est information.
Owner's Manual for Navigation,
Entertainment, Communication
The Owner's Manual for Navigation, Entertain-
ment, and Communication is available as a
printed book from an authorized service cen-
ter.
The topics are also discussed in the Integrated
Owner's Manual in the vehicle.
Media at a glance
General information
The contents of the Owner's Manual are avail-
able in various media formats. The following
Owner's Manual media formats are available:
▷ Printed Owner's Manual.
▷ Integrated Owner's Manual in the vehicle.
Printed Owner's Manual
The printed Owner's Manual shows all stand-
ard, country-specific, and optional equipment
that is currently available, or may become
available in the future, for specific models.
Integrated Owner's Manual in the
vehicle
Principle
The Integrated Owner's Manual shows all
standard, country-specific, and optional equip-
ment that is currently available, or may be-
come available in the future, for specific mod-
els. The Integrated Owner's Manual can be
displayed on the control display.
Selecting the Owner's Manual
1.
Apps menu
2. "All apps"
3. "Owner's Manual"
4. Select the desired method of accessing the
contents.
Scrolling through the Owner's Manual
Swipe up or down until the next or previous
contents are displayed.
Seite 6
NOTES
Information
6
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A88D30 - VI/23
OwnersManuals2.com
Context help
General information
The Integrated Owner's Manual can be ac-
cessed from any menu. Depending on the
selected function, either the associated de-
scription or the main menu of the Integrated
Owner's Manual will be displayed.
Selecting context help from a menu
1. Press and hold the desired menu item.
2. "General help"
Selecting context help from a Check Control
message
Directly from the Check Control message on
the control display:
"Owner's Manual"
Supplementary Owner's Manuals
Also follow the Supplementary Owner's Man-
uals, which are included in addition to the on-
board literature.
Additional sources of
information
Authorized service center
An authorized service center, e.g., a BMW
dealer or service center, will be happy to an-
swer any questions you may have.
Internet
Vehicle information and general information on
BMW such as on technology are available on
the Internet: www.bmwusa.com.
BMW Driver’s Guide app
The BMW Driver's Guide app shows all stand-
ard, country-specific, and optional equipment
that is currently available, or may become
available in the future, for specific models. The
app can be displayed on smartphones and
tablets.
BMW Driver’s Guide Web
The BMW Driver's Guide website shows all
standard, country-specific, and optional equip-
ment that is currently available, or may be-
come available in the future, for specific mod-
els. The BMW Driver’s Guide Web can be
displayed in any current browser.
Icons and displays
Icons in the Owner's Manual
Icon Meaning
Precautions that must be followed in
order to avoid the possibility of injury
to yourself and to others as well as
serious damage to the vehicle.
Measures that can be taken to help
protect the environment.
"..." Texts in vehicle used to select
individual functions.
›...‹ Verbal instructions to use with the
voice activation system.
››...‹‹ Responses generated by the voice
activation system.
Action steps
Action steps to be carried out are presented as
a numbered list. These steps must be carried
out in the order shown.
1.
First action step.
2. Second action step.
Bulletpoint lists
Items or actions without strict order or alterna-
tive options are shown as a bulletpoint list.
Seite 7
Information
NOTES
7
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A88D30 - VI/23
OwnersManuals2.com
▷ First possibility.
▷ Second possibility.
Icons on vehicle parts
This symbol on a vehicle component
indicates that further information on the
component is available in the Owner's Manual.
Vehicle features and options
This Owner's Manual shows all standard,
country-specific, and optional equipment that
is currently available, or may become available
in the future, for specific models, i.e., model
series. Therefore, this Owner's Manual also
describes and illustrates equipment, systems
and functions that are not available in a vehi-
cle, for example due to the following situations:
▷ Selected optional equipment
▷ National-market version or national-market
equipment
▷ Options for later release and software up-
date
This also applies to safety functions and sys-
tems.
Before starting a journey, verify whether the
described equipment or function is available
in the vehicle. For information on whether a
function is currently available in the vehicle or
when the function can be installed in the ve-
hicle, contact an authorized service center or
another qualified service center.
A claim for the availability of equipment, a sys-
tem or a function in the vehicle cannot be de-
rived based on the description in the Owner's
Manual.
When using these functions and systems, the
applicable laws and regulations must be ob-
served.
For any equipment and models not described
in this Owner's Manual, refer to the Supple-
mentary Owner's Manuals.
An authorized service center is happy to an-
swer any questions that you may have about
the features and options applicable to the vehi-
cle.
Status of the Owner's
Manual
Basic information
The manufacturer of the vehicle pursues a pol-
icy of constant development to ensure that our
vehicles continue to embody the highest qual-
ity and safety standards. In rare cases, there-
fore, the features described in this Owner's
Manual may deviate from those in the vehicle.
Validity of the Owner's Manual
Production of the vehicle
At the time of production at the plant, the
printed Owner's Manual is the most current
resource. Due to updates after the editorial
deadline, differences may exist between the
printed Owner's Manual and the Integrated
Owner's Manual in the vehicle.
Notes on updates can be found in the appen-
dix of the printed Owner's Manual for the vehi-
cle.
After a software update in the vehicle
After a vehicle software update such as via Re-
mote Software Upgrade the Integrated Own-
er's Manual for the vehicle will contain the lat-
est information.
For Your Own Safety
Intended use
Heed the following when using the vehicle:
Seite 8
NOTES
Information
8
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A88D30 - VI/23
OwnersManuals2.com
▷ Owner's Manual.
▷ Information on the vehicle. Do not remove
stickers.
▷ Technical vehicle data.
▷ The traffic, speed, and safety laws where
the vehicle is driven.
▷ Vehicle documents and statutory docu-
ments.
Warranty
The vehicle is technically configured for the
operating conditions and registration require-
ments applicable in the country of first delivery,
also known as homologation. If the vehicle is
to be operated in a different country it might
be necessary to adapt the vehicle to potentially
differing operating conditions and registration
requirements. Noncompliance with homologa-
tion requirements in a certain country may
affect warranty coverage. Please consult the
New Vehicle Limited Warranty Booklet for fur-
ther information on warranty matters.
Maintenance and repairs
Advanced technology, for instance the use of
modern materials and high-performance elec-
tronics, requires suitable maintenance and re-
pair work.
The vehicle manufacturer therefore recom-
mends having necessary work performed by
an authorized service center, e.g., a BMW
dealer or service center. If a different repair
shop is selected, BMW recommends select-
ing a workshop that performs the appropriate
work such as maintenance and repair accord-
ing to BMW specifications with properly trained
personnel. In the Owner's Manual, such work-
shops are referred to as "another qualified
service center or repair shop".
If work is not carried out properly, for instance
maintenance and repair, there is a risk of sub-
sequent damages and related safety risks.
Improperly performed work on the vehicle
paintwork can lead to a failure or fault of com-
ponents, e.g., the radar sensors, and thereby
result in a safety hazard.
Parts and accessories
BMW recommends the use of parts and acces-
sory products approved by BMW.
Approved parts and accessories, and advice
on their use and installation are available from
an authorized service center.
BMW parts and accessories have been tested
by BMW for their safety and suitability in BMW
vehicles.
BMW warrants genuine BMW parts and acces-
sories.
BMW does not evaluate whether each individ-
ual product from another manufacturer can be
used with BMW vehicles without presenting a
safety hazard, even if a country-specific official
approval was issued. BMW does not evaluate
whether these products are suitable for BMW
vehicles under all usage conditions.
California Proposition 65 Warning
For vehicles sold in California, the law requires
vehicle manufacturers to provide the following
warning:
Warning
Engine exhaust and a wide variety of Au-
tomobile components and parts, including
components found in the interior furnishings
in a vehicle, contain or emit chemicals known
to the State of California to cause cancer
and birth defects and reproductive harm. In
addition, certain fluids contained in vehicles
and certain products of component wear con-
tain or emit chemicals known to the State
of California to cause cancer and birth de-
fects or other reproductive harm. Battery
posts, terminals and related accessories con-
tain lead and lead compounds. Batteries also
contain other chemicals known to the State
of California to cause cancer. Wash your
hands after handling. Used engine oil con-
Seite 9
Information
NOTES
9
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A88D30 - VI/23
OwnersManuals2.com
tains chemicals that have caused cancer in
laboratory animals. Always protect your skin
by washing thoroughly with soap and water.
For more information go to www.P65Warn-
ings.ca.gov/passenger-vehicle.
Warning
Operating, servicing and maintaining a pas-
senger vehicle or off-highway motor vehicle
can expose you to chemicals including en-
gine exhaust, carbon monoxide, phthalates,
and lead, which are known to the State of
California to cause cancer and birth defects
or other reproductive harm. To minimize ex-
posure, avoid breathing exhaust, do not idle
the engine except as necessary, service the
vehicle in a well-ventilated area and wear
gloves or wash your hands frequently when
servicing the vehicle. For more information
go to www.P65Warnings.ca.gov/passenger-
vehicle.
Service and warranty
We recommend that you read this publication
thoroughly. The vehicle is covered by the fol-
lowing warranties:
▷
New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
▷ Rust Perforation Limited Warranty.
▷ Federal Emissions System Defect War-
ranty.
▷ Federal Emissions Performance Warranty.
▷ California Emission Control System Limited
Warranty.
Detailed information about these warranties
is listed in the New Vehicle Limited Warranty
Booklet.
The vehicle has been specifically adapted and
designed to meet the particular operating con-
ditions and homologation requirements in your
country and continental region in order to de-
liver the full driving pleasure while the vehicle
is operated under those conditions. If you wish
to operate the vehicle in another country or
region, you may be required to adapt the vehi-
cle to meet different prevailing operating con-
ditions and homologation requirements. You
should also be aware of any applicable war-
ranty limitations or exclusions for such country
or region. In such case, please contact Cus-
tomer Relations for further information.
Maintenance
Maintain the vehicle regularly to sustain the
road safety, operational reliability and the New
Vehicle Limited Warranty.
Specifications for maintenance measures:
▷ BMW maintenance system.
Maintenance, refer to page 358.
▷ Maintenance Booklet, available online and
accessible via a QR code in the New Vehi-
cle Limited Warranty Booklet.
▷ Warranty and Service Guide Booklet for
Canadian models.
If the vehicle is not maintained or is improperly
maintained, this could result in serious dam-
age to the vehicle.
A failure to maintain the vehicle or improper
maintenance may affect your warranty cover-
age. Please consult the New Vehicle Limited
Warranty Booklet for further information on
warranty matters.
Refer to section on engine oil change re-
garding recommended service intervals for oil
changes.
Data memory
General information
Electronic control devices are installed in the
vehicle. Electronic control units process data
they receive from vehicle sensors, self-gener-
ate or exchange with each other. Some con-
trol units are necessary for the vehicle to func-
tion safely or provide assistance while driving,
Seite 10
NOTES
Information
10
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A88D30 - VI/23
OwnersManuals2.com
for instance driver assistance systems. Fur-
thermore, control units facilitate comfort or in-
fotainment functions.
Information about stored or exchanged data
can be requested from the manufacturer of the
vehicle, in a separate booklet, for example.
Personal reference
Each vehicle is marked with a unique vehicle
identification number. Depending on the coun-
try, the vehicle owner can be identified with the
vehicle identification number, license plate and
corresponding authorities. In addition, there
are other options to track data collected in the
vehicle to the driver or vehicle owner such as
via the ConnectedDrive account that is used.
Operating data in the vehicle
Control units process data to operate the vehi-
cle.
For example, this includes:
▷ Status messages for the vehicle and its
individual components, e.g., wheel RPM,
wheel speed, deceleration, lateral accelera-
tion, engaged seat belt indicator.
▷ Ambient conditions, e.g., temperature, rain
sensor signals.
The processed data is only processed in the
vehicle itself while the vehicle is being oper-
ated. Data is not stored beyond the operating
time.
Electronic components, e.g. control units and
vehicle keys, contain components for storing
technical information. Information about the
vehicle condition, component usage, mainte-
nance recommendations, events or faults can
be stored temporarily or permanently.
This information generally documents the
state of a component, a module, a system, or
the surrounding area, for instance:
▷
Operating states of system components
such as fill levels, tire pressure, battery sta-
tus.
▷ Malfunctions and faults in important sys-
tem components, for instance lights and
brakes.
▷ Responses by the vehicle to special driving
situations such as airbag deployment or
engagement of the driving stability control
systems.
▷ Information on vehicle-damaging events.
The data is required to perform the control unit
functions. Furthermore, it also serves to detect
and correct malfunctions, and helps the vehicle
manufacturer to optimize vehicle functions.
The majority of this data is stored temporarily
and is only processed within the vehicle itself.
In some circumstances the vehicle may store
some data for an additional but limited period
of time.
When servicing, for instance during repairs,
service processes, warranty cases, and quality
assurance measures, this technical informa-
tion can be read out from the vehicle together
with the vehicle identification number.
An authorized service center or another quali-
fied service center or repair shop can read
out the information. The diagnostic socket re-
quired by law in the vehicle is used to read out
data.
The data is collected, processed, and used
by the relevant organizations in the service
network. The data documents technical condi-
tions of the vehicle, which can be used to de-
termine vehicle maintenance status, and facili-
tate quality improvement.
Vehicle fault and event memories can be re-
set by an authorized service center or another
qualified service center or repair shop when
performing repair or servicing work.
Seite 11
Information
NOTES
11
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A88D30 - VI/23
OwnersManuals2.com
Data entry and data transfer into
the vehicle
General information
Depending on the vehicle equipment, comfort
and individual settings can be stored in the
vehicle and modified or reset at any time.
For example, this includes:
▷ Settings for the seat and steering wheel
positions.
▷ Chassis and climate control settings.
If necessary, data can be transferred to the en-
tertainment and communication system of the
vehicle, for instance via smartphone.
This includes the following depending on the
respective equipment:
▷ Multimedia data such as music, films or
photos for playback in an integrated multi-
media system.
▷ Address book data for use in conjunction
with an integrated hands-free system or an
integrated navigation system.
▷ Entered navigation destinations.
▷ Data on the use of Internet services.
This data can be stored locally in the vehicle or
is found on a device that has been connected
to the vehicle, e.g., a smartphone, USB stick or
MP3 player. If this data is stored in the vehicle,
it can be deleted at any time.
This data is only transmitted to third parties
upon personal request as part of the use of on-
line services. The transmission depends on the
selected settings for the use of the services.
Incorporation of mobile devices
Depending on the vehicle equipment, mobile
devices connected to the vehicle, for instance
smartphones, can be controlled via the vehicle
control elements.
The sound and picture from the mobile devi-
ces can be played back and displayed through
the multimedia system. Certain information is
transferred to the mobile devices at the same
time. Depending on the type of incorporation,
this includes, for instance, position data and
other general vehicle information. This opti-
mizes the way in which selected apps, for in-
stance navigation or music playback, work.
There is no further interaction between the
mobile device and the vehicle such as active
access to vehicle data.
How the data will be processed further is de-
termined by the provider of the particular app
being used. The extent of the possible settings
depends on the respective app and the operat-
ing system of the mobile device.
Services
General information
If the vehicle has a wireless network connec-
tion, it will enable data to be exchanged be-
tween the vehicle and other systems. The
wireless network connection is realized via an
in-vehicle transmitter and receiver unit or via
personal mobile devices brought into the ve-
hicle, for instance smartphones. This wireless
network connection enables 'online functions'
to be used. These include online services and
apps supplied by the vehicle manufacturer or
by other providers.
Services from the vehicle manufacturer
Where online services from the vehicle man-
ufacturer are concerned, the corresponding
functions are described in the appropriate
place, for instance the Owner's Manual or
manufacturer's web page. The relevant legal
information pertaining to data protection may
also be found on the manufacturer’s website.
Personal data may be used to perform online
services. Data is exchanged over a secure con-
nection, for instance with the IT systems of the
vehicle manufacturer intended for this purpose.
Any collection, processing, and use of personal
data above and beyond that needed to pro-
vide the services must always be based on a
Seite 12
NOTES
Information
12
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A88D30 - VI/23
OwnersManuals2.com
legal permission, contractual arrangement or
consent. It is also possible to activate or deac-
tivate the data connection as a whole. This ex-
cludes functions and services required by law
such as Assist systems.
Services from other providers
When using online services from other provid-
ers, these services are the responsibility of the
relevant provider and subject to their data pri-
vacy conditions and terms of use. The vehicle
manufacturer has no influence on the content
exchanged during this process. Information on
the way in which personal data is collected and
used in relation to services from third parties,
the scope of such data, and its purpose, can
be obtained from the relevant service provider.
Event Data Recorder (EDR)
This vehicle is equipped with an event data
recorder (EDR). The main purpose of an EDR
is to record, in certain crash or near crash-like
situations such as an air bag deployment or
hitting a road obstacle, data that will assist
in understanding how a vehicle’s systems per-
formed. The EDR is designed to record data
related to the driving dynamics and safety sys-
tems for a short time: max. 30 seconds, typi-
cally less.
The EDR in this vehicle is designed to record
the following data, for example:
▷
How various systems in the vehicle were
operating.
▷ Whether or not the driver and passenger
seat belts were fastened.
▷ How far, if at all, the driver was depressing
the accelerator and/or brake pedal.
▷ How fast the vehicle was traveling.
This data can help provide a better un-
derstanding of the circumstances in which
crashes and injuries occur.
EDR data is recorded by the vehicle only if a
nontrivial crash situation occurs; no data is re-
corded by the EDR under normal driving condi-
tions and no personal data, for instance name,
gender, age, and crash location, are recorded.
However, other parties such as law enforce-
ment could combine the EDR data with the
type of personally identifying data routinely ac-
quired during a crash investigation.
To read data recorded by an EDR, special
equipment is required, and access to the vehi-
cle or the EDR is needed. In addition to the
vehicle manufacturer, other parties such as law
enforcement that have the special equipment
can read the information if they have access to
the vehicle or the EDR.
Vehicle identification
number
General information
Depending on the national-market equipment,
the vehicle identification number is located in
different positions in the vehicle. This chapter
describes all possible positions for the series.
Engine compartment
The engraved vehicle identification number
can be found in the engine compartment, on
the right-hand side of the vehicle.
Seite 13
Information
NOTES
13
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A88D30 - VI/23
OwnersManuals2.com
Right nameplate
The vehicle identification number can be found
on the nameplate, on the right-hand side of
the vehicle.
Left nameplate
The vehicle identification number can be found
on the nameplate, on the left-hand side of the
vehicle.
Windshield
The vehicle identification number can also be
found behind the windshield.
iDrive
It is also possible to display the vehicle identifi-
cation number via iDrive.
1. Apps menu
2. "All apps"
3. "Mobile devices"
4. "Settings"
5. "Vehicle ID (VIN):"
Reporting safety defects
For US customers
The following only applies to vehicles owned
and operated in the US.
If you believe that the vehicle has a defect
which could cause a crash or could cause in-
jury or death, you should immediately inform
the National Highway Traffic Safety Adminis-
tration (NHTSA), in addition to notifying BMW
of North America, LLC, P.O. Box 1227, West-
wood, New Jersey 07675-1227, Telephone
1-800-831-1117.
If NHTSA receives similar complaints, it may
open an investigation, and if it finds that a
safety defect exists in a group of vehicles, it
may order a recall and remedy campaign.
However, NHTSA cannot become involved in
individual problems between you, your dealer,
or BMW of North America, LLC.
To contact NHTSA, you may call
the Vehicle Safety Hotline toll-free at
1-888-327-4236 (TTY: 1-800-424-9153); go to
http://www.safercar.gov; or write to: Adminis-
trator, NHTSA, 1200 New Jersey Avenue, SE.,
Washington, DC 20590. You can also obtain
other information about motor vehicle safety
from http://www.safercar.gov.
For Canadian customers
Canadian customers who wish to report a
safety-related defect to Transport Canada, De-
Seite 14
NOTES
Information
14
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A88D30 - VI/23
OwnersManuals2.com
Getting in
Opening and closing
Vehicle key
Buttons on the vehicle key.
Icon Meaning
Unlock.
Lock.
Stationary climate control.
Open the cargo area.
Panic mode.
Pathway lighting.
Access to vehicle interior
Unlocking with the vehicle key
Press the button on the vehicle key.
If only the driver's door and fuel filler flap have
been unlocked due to the settings in place,
press the button on the vehicle key again to
unlock the other vehicle access points.
Locking with the vehicle key
1. Close the driver's door.
2. Press the button on the vehicle key.
All vehicle access points are locked.
Buttons for the central locking
system
Overview
The central locking buttons are located on the
front door.
Lock.
Unlock.
Locking the vehicle
Press the button with the front doors
closed.
The fuel filler flap remains unlocked.
Unlocking the vehicle
Press the button.
Seite 16
QUICK REFERENCE
Getting in
16
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A88D30 - VI/23
OwnersManuals2.com
Panic mode
You can trigger the alarm system if you find
yourself in a dangerous situation.
▷ Press the button on the vehicle key
and hold for at least 3 seconds.
▷ Briefly press the button on the vehi-
cle key three times in succession.
To switch off the alarm: press any button.
Access to the cargo area
Opening the cargo area
▷ Unlock the vehicle and then press the but-
ton on the trunk.
▷ Press and hold the button on the
vehicle key for approx. 1 second.
Depending on the setting, the doors
may be unlocked.
Closing the cargo area
Press the button on the inside of the cargo
area.
Displays, control elements
In the vicinity of the steering wheel
1 Light switch
2 Turn signal indicator, high beams
3 Instrument cluster
4 Wipers
Indicator/warning lights
The indicator/warning lights can illuminate in a
variety of combinations and colors.
Several of the lights are checked for proper
functioning and illuminate temporarily when
drive-ready state is turned on.
Driver's door
1
Opening the door
2 Safety switch
3 Power windows
4 Exterior mirrors
5 Seats, comfort features
6 Seat setting
Seite 17
Getting in
QUICK REFERENCE
17
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A88D30 - VI/23
OwnersManuals2.com
7 Central locking system
8 Cargo area
Switch console
1 Start/Stop button
2 Controller
3 My Modes
4 Assistance systems
5 Parking brake, Automatic Hold
6 Selector lever
BMW iDrive
Principle
BMW iDrive is the vehicle’s display and oper-
ating concept and includes a wide range of
functions.
Buttons on the Controller
Button
Function
Call up the main menu.
Go to Media menu.
Go to Phone menu.
Button Function
Go to Navigation menu.
Go to previous menu.
BMW Intelligent Personal Assistant
Principle
The BMW Intelligent Personal Assistant is a
personal assistant that enables natural voice
operation of various vehicle functions.
Activating the voice control system
1.
Press the button on the steering
wheel briefly.
2. Say the command.
Canceling voice control
▷ Press the button on the steering
wheel again.
▷ ›Cancel‹
▷ Slide the Controller to the right or left.
▷ Press the Controller.
Seite 18
QUICK REFERENCE
Getting in
18
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A88D30 - VI/23
OwnersManuals2.com
Set-up and use
Seats, mirrors and steering
wheel
Adjusting seats
1 Backrest tilt/head restraint
2 Height/longitudinal direction
3 Seat tilt
Adjusting the head restraint
Adjusting the height
Press switch up or down.
Adjusting the distance
▷ Back: press the button and push the head
restraint toward the rear.
▷ Forward: pull the head restraint toward the
front.
After setting the distance, make sure that the
head restraint engages correctly.
Adjusting the exterior mirrors
Icon Meaning
Fold the exterior mirror in and out.
Adjust the exterior mirrors.
Seite 19
Set-up and use
QUICK REFERENCE
19
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A88D30 - VI/23
OwnersManuals2.com
Icon Meaning
Select left exterior mirror.
Select right exterior mirror.
Adjusting the steering wheel
position
Press the switch to adjust the steering wheel
forward/back position and height to the seat
position.
Memory function
Principle
The following settings can be stored and, if
necessary, retrieved using the memory func-
tion:
▷
Seat position.
▷ Exterior mirror adjustment.
▷ Steering wheel position.
▷ Lumbar support position.
▷ Height of the Head-up display.
Overview
The memory buttons are located on the front
doors.
Storing settings
1.
Set the desired position.
2. Press the button. The LED illumi-
nates.
3. Press the desired memory button 1 or 2
while the LED is illuminated. A signal
sounds.
Calling up settings
Press the desired memory button 1 or 2.
Infotainment
Navigation destination input
1.
Navigation menu
2. "Destination input"
A search box and entered information such
as the search history are displayed.
3. Select the desired entry or the search box.
4. When selecting the search box, enter char-
acters or choose one of the POI categories
displayed.
If necessary, select to display more
information, e.g. to preview a map.
Apply the suggested search keywords as
necessary
Seite 20
QUICK REFERENCE
Set-up and use
20
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A88D30 - VI/23
OwnersManuals2.com
5. Select the desired entry.
6. "Start guidance"
Entertainment
Depending on the vehicle type, the following
buttons are installed on the center console or
on the instrument panel:
Button Function
Turning the thumbwheel: ad-
justs the volume.
Pressing the thumbwheel:
turns sound output on/off.
Change the entertainment
source.
Press once: changes the sta-
tion/track.
Press and hold: fast for-
ward/rewind the track.
Using the mobile phone
General information
After the mobile phone is connected once to
the vehicle, the mobile phone can be operated
using iDrive and the steering wheel buttons.
Activate Bluetooth® on the mobile phone.
Connecting via Bluetooth®
1.
Apps menu
2. "All apps"
3. "Mobile devices"
4. "Connect new device"
Mobile phones in range are displayed on
the control display.
5. Select the desired mobile phone.
6. Compare the control number displayed on
the control display with the control number
in the display of the mobile phone, and con-
firm that they match.
7. If necessary, select the connection mode:
"Use Bluetooth®"
The device is connected and displayed in the
device list.
Accepting a call
Depending on the equipment, incoming calls
can be answered in several ways.
▷ Via iDrive:
"Accept"
▷
Press the button on the steering wheel.
▷ Use the thumbwheel on the steering wheel
to select from the list in the instrument clus-
ter: "Accept"
Dialing a number
1.
Communication menu
2. "More"
3. "Dial number"
4. Enter the numbers.
5. Select the icon. The connection is es-
tablished via the mobile phone to which this
function has been assigned.
Seite 21
Set-up and use
QUICK REFERENCE
21
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A88D30 - VI/23
OwnersManuals2.com
On the road
Driving
Drive-ready state
Turning on the drive-ready state
1. Depress the brake pedal.
2. Press the Start/Stop button.
Turning off drive-ready state
1.
When the vehicle is stationary, apply the
parking brake.
2. Press the Start/Stop button.
The engine is switched off.
The vehicle switches into standby state.
The READY indicator goes out and a signal
tone sounds.
Auto Start/Stop function
The Auto Start/Stop function helps save fuel.
The system switches off the engine during a
stop, for instance in traffic jam or at traffic
lights. Drive-ready state remains switched on.
The engine starts automatically under the fol-
lowing preconditions:
▷
By releasing the brake pedal.
▷ When Automatic Hold is activated: step on
the accelerator pedal.
Steptronic transmission
Engaging selector lever position D, N,
R, S
▷ D is drive.
▷ N is neutral.
▷ Reverse R.
▷ S Sport mode.
To prevent the vehicle from moving after en-
gaging drive or reverse, maintain pressure on
the brake pedal until you are ready to drive off.
Engage selector lever position R only when the
vehicle is stationary.
Sport program: the gearshift behavior is de-
signed for a sportier driving behavior.
Engaging selector lever position P
Press the button.
The transmission lock is engaged and the
parking brake is engaged.
Seite 22
QUICK REFERENCE
On the road
22
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A88D30 - VI/23
OwnersManuals2.com
Parking brake
Setting the parking brake
Press the button.
The LED on the button and the indica-
tor light in the instrument cluster are
illuminated.
The parking brake is engaged and transmis-
sion lock is engaged.
Releasing the parking brake
Press button with selector lever posi-
tion P and activated drive-ready state.
With the brake pedal pressed and
drive-ready state switched on, press the but-
ton.
The LED and the indicator light go out.
The parking brake is released.
Parking
Make sure the parking brake is engaged.
Light and view
Turn signal, high beams, headlight
flasher
Turn signal
▷ Flashing: press the lever past the resist-
ance point.
▷ One-touch signaling: lightly tap the lever up
or down.
▷ Brief flashing: press the lever to the resist-
ance point and hold it there for as long as
you want the turn signal to flashing.
High beams, headlight flasher
Press the lever forward or pull it backward.
▷
High beams on, arrow 1.
The high beams illuminate when the low
beams are switched on.
▷ High beams off/headlight flasher, arrow 2.
Seite 23
On the road
QUICK REFERENCE
23
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A88D30 - VI/23
OwnersManuals2.com
Lights and lighting
Buttons in the vehicle
Icon Function
Exterior lighting menu.
Automatic headlight control.
Low beams.
Exterior lighting off.
Exterior lighting off.
Functions via iDrive
Icon Function
Automatic headlight control.
Low beams.
Parking lights.
Exterior lighting off.
Left roadside parking light.
Right roadside parking light.
Window wiper system
Turning on window wiper system
Press the lever up until the desired position is
reached.
▷ Resting position of the wipers, position 0.
▷ Rain sensor, position 1.
▷ Normal wiper speed, position 2.
▷ Fast wiper speed, position 3.
Turning off the window wiper system
and flick wipe
Press the lever down or forward.
▷
Turning off: press the lever down, arrow 1,
until it reaches the 0 position.
▷ Flick wipe: press the lever down from the
0 position, arrow 1, and press the lever in
position 0 or position 1 forward, arrow 2.
The lever automatically returns to its 0 po-
sition when released.
Seite 24
QUICK REFERENCE
On the road
24
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A88D30 - VI/23
OwnersManuals2.com
Activating/deactivating rain sensor
Enable: press lever up once from the 0 posi-
tion, arrow 1.
Disable: press lever back into the 0 position.
Adjusting the rain sensor sensitivity
Turn the thumbwheel on the wiper lever.
Cleaning the windshield
Pull the lever.
Climate control
Climate control functions
Functions in the Climate menu
Icon Function
Turn the climate control sys-
tem on/off.
Automatic program.
Temperature.
Air conditioning.
Maximum cooling.
Air recirculation mode.
Automatic recirculated-air con-
trol.
Fresh air.
Air flow.
Air distribution.
SYNC program.
Seat heating.
Panel heating.
Seite 25
On the road
QUICK REFERENCE
25
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A88D30 - VI/23
OwnersManuals2.com
Icon Function
Seat cooling.
Steering wheel heating
Buttons, automatic climate control
Icon Function
Defrost function.
Rear window defroster.
Rear automatic climate control
Icon
Function
Turning the rear automatic cli-
mate control on/off.
Automatic program.
Temperature.
Air flow.
Air distribution.
Seat heating.
Panel heating.
Seat cooling.
Seite 26
QUICK REFERENCE
On the road
26
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A88D30 - VI/23
OwnersManuals2.com
Intermediate stop
Refueling
Fuel cap
1. To open the fuel filler flap, press on the rear
edge, arrow. The fuel filler flap opens.
2. Turn the fuel cap counterclockwise.
3. Place the fuel cap in the bracket attached to
the fuel filler flap.
Wheels and tires
Tire pressure specifications
The tire inflation pressure specifications can be
found in the tire inflation pressure table in the
printed Owner's Manual.
After correcting the tire pressure
If equipped with a Tire Pressure Monitor, the
corrected tire pressures are applied automati-
cally. Make sure that the correct tire settings
have been made. With tires that cannot be
found in the tire pressure values on the control
display, reset the Tire Pressure Monitor (TPM).
If equipped with a flat tire monitor, reinitialize
the flat tire monitor.
Checking the tire pressure
Regularly check the tire inflation pressure and
correct it as needed:
▷ At least twice a month.
▷ Before embarking on an extended trip.
Electronic oil measurement
Functional requirements
A current measured value is available after ap-
prox. 30 minutes of normal driving with the
combustion engine running.
Displaying the engine oil level
1.
Apps menu
2. "Vehicle"
3. "Vehicle status"
4. "Engine oil level"
The engine oil level is displayed.
Adding engine oil
General information
Safely park the vehicle and switch off drive-
ready state before adding engine oil.
Seite 27
On the road
QUICK REFERENCE
27
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A88D30 - VI/23
OwnersManuals2.com
Adding engine oil
1. Opening the hood.
2. Open the lid counterclockwise.
3. Add engine oil.
4. Close the lid.
Providing assistance
Hazard warning system
Hazard warning system button
ConnectedDrive
BMW Assistance
Contact BMW Assistance for information and
support for all aspects of the vehicle.
1.
Apps menu
2. "All apps"
3. "BMW Assist"
4. Select the desired service.
Follow the displays on the control display.
A voice connection is established.
BMW Teleservices
Teleservices are services that help to maintain
vehicle mobility.
Teleservices can comprise the following serv-
ices:
▷ BMW Roadside Assistance.
▷ BMW Accident Assistance.
▷ Teleservice Call.
▷ An authorized service center.
Seite 28
QUICK REFERENCE
On the road
28
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A88D30 - VI/23
OwnersManuals2.com
Dashboard
Vehicle features and options
This chapter describes model-specific equip-
ment, systems, and functions that are currently
available, or may become available in the fu-
ture, even if they are not present in the vehicle.
Additional information:
Vehicle equipment, refer to page 8.
In the vicinity of the steering wheel
1 Doors and windows menu 47
2 Safety switch 103
3 Power windows 99
4 Exterior mirror adjustment button 115
5 Opening and closing cargo area
86
6 Seating comfort features
Memory function 118
Seat settings menu 47
7 Seat setting 104
8 Buttons for central locking system 93
Unlocking
Locking
Seite 30
CONTROLS
Dashboard
30
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A88D30 - VI/23
OwnersManuals2.com
9 Door and light
Opening and closing the door au-
tomatically 82
Exterior lighting menu 47
Automatic High Beam Assistant
163
Driving lights automatic 165
Low beams 165
Adaptive lighting functions 168
Exterior lighting off 165
10 Turn signal lever
Turn signal 162
High beams, headlight flasher
162
11 Steering wheel buttons, left
Turn speed control systems on/off
218
Select speed control system 218
Store speed 218
Set speed 218
12 Shift paddles 131
Sport Boost function 133
13 Instrument cluster 141
14 Steering wheel buttons, right
Settings, instrument cluster 141
Settings, Head-up display 143
Volume, see Owner's Manual for
Navigation, Entertainment and
Communication 6
Audio, see Owner's Manual for
Navigation, Entertainment, Com-
munication 6
Voice control, BMW Intelligent
Personal Assistant 53
Telephone, see Owner's Manual
for Navigation, Entertainment and
Communication 6
Selection of configuration menus
for instrument cluster and Head-
up display 141
Using selection lists 151
Accessing and resetting trip data
156
Resetting the G-Meter values
158
15 Wiper lever
Wipers 170
Rain sensor 171
Cleaning the windshield 172
16 Horn, entire surface
17 Adjusting the steering wheel 117
18 Unlocking the hood, behind the
footwell trim 349
Seite 31
Dashboard
CONTROLS
31
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A88D30 - VI/23
OwnersManuals2.com
19 Opening the door 93 20 Door emergency unlocking 93
In the vicinity of the center console
1 Control display 48
2 Hazard warning system 364
Defrost function 281
Rear window defroster 282
Glove compartment 300
3 Ventilation 284
4 Controller with buttons 50
5 Operating elements for entertainment sys-
tem, see Owner's Manual for Navigation,
Entertainment, Communication 6
Adjusting the volume
Station/title forward
Station/title back
6 My Modes 134
Seite 32
CONTROLS
Dashboard
32
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A88D30 - VI/23
OwnersManuals2.com
7 Parking assistance systems 243
Vehicle settings menu 47
Two-axle ride level control 271
8 Automatic Hold 139
Parking brake 137
9 Selector lever 128
10 Turning drive-ready state on/off
126
In the vicinity of the headliner
1 Emergency Call, SOS 366
2 Camera
Gesture control 59.
Interior camera 296
3 BMW Theater Screen, see Own-
er's Manual for Navigation, Enter-
tainment, Communication 6
4 Reading lights 169
Seite 33
Dashboard
CONTROLS
33
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A88D30 - VI/23
OwnersManuals2.com
Sensors of the vehicle
Vehicle features and options
This chapter describes model-specific equip-
ment, systems, and functions that are currently
available, or may become available in the fu-
ture, even if they are not present in the vehicle.
Additional information:
Vehicle equipment, refer to page 8.
Overview
Depending on the equipment, the following
cameras and sensors are installed in the vehi-
cle:
▷ Front camera.
▷ Camera behind the windshield.
▷ Top view cameras.
▷ Rearview camera.
▷ Front radar sensor.
▷ Radar sensors, side, front.
▷ Radar sensors, side, rear.
▷ Ultrasonic sensors in the front/rear bump-
ers.
▷ Ultrasonic sensors, side.
Cameras
Front camera
The front camera is located in the radiator
grille.
Camera behind the windshield
The camera behind the windshield is located
near the interior mirror.
Seite 35
Sensors of the vehicle
CONTROLS
35
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A88D30 - VI/23
OwnersManuals2.com
Top view cameras
One exterior mirror camera is located at the
bottom of each exterior mirror housing.
Rearview camera
The rearview camera is located in the badge
on the rear of the vehicle.
Functional requirement of the
cameras
The areas of the cameras are clean and clear.
Additional information:
▷
Washing the vehicle, refer to page 372.
▷ Vehicle care, refer to page 374.
System limits of the cameras
The function of the cameras can be limited or
may indicate something wrong, for instance in
the following situations:
▷
In heavy fog, wet conditions, or snowfall.
▷ On steep hills, in steep depressions or in
tight curves.
▷ When the camera field of view is covered,
for instance by a fogged up windshield or
labels.
▷ If the camera lens is dirty or damaged.
▷ With exterior mirrors folded in.
▷ With open doors or open cargo area.
▷ When driving toward bright lights or strong
reflections, e.g., because of a setting sun.
▷ When it is dark outside.
▷ The camera has overheated due to exces-
sive temperatures and temporarily turned
off.
▷ During calibration of the camera immedi-
ately after vehicle delivery.
If applicable, a Check Control message will be
displayed when the system limits are reached.
Radar sensors
Safety information
Warning
The vehicle radar sensors and thus also the
driver assistance systems can be impaired by
external influences, e.g., interference. There
is a risk of accident. Watch the surrounding
traffic situation closely, be ready to take over
steering and braking at any time, and actively
intervene where appropriate.
Seite 36
CONTROLS
Sensors of the vehicle
36
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A88D30 - VI/23
OwnersManuals2.com
Front radar sensor
The front radar sensor is located in the radiator
grille.
Radar sensors, side, front
The radar sensors are located to the side in
the front bumper.
Radar sensors, side, rear
The radar sensors are located on the side in
the rear bumper.
Functional requirement of the radar
sensors
The areas of the radar sensors are clean and
clear.
Additional information:
▷ Washing the vehicle, refer to page 372.
▷ Vehicle care, refer to page 374.
System limits of the radar sensors
The function of the radar sensors may be re-
stricted or not available, for instance in the fol-
lowing situations:
▷ In case of dirty sensors.
▷ In case of iced-up sensors.
▷ If sensors are covered such as by labels,
films or a license-plate carrier.
▷ If the sensor is not aligned correctly, for in-
stance due to parking damage.
▷ If the radiation range of the sensors is cov-
ered, e.g., by protruding cargo.
▷ When the field of view of the sensors is cov-
ered, e.g., by garage walls, hedges, snow
hills, vehicles or trailers.
▷ After improper paint work on the vehicle in
the area of the sensors.
▷ On steep hilltops or in sharp dips in the
road.
If applicable, a Check Control message will be
displayed when the system limits are reached.
Seite 37
Sensors of the vehicle
CONTROLS
37
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A88D30 - VI/23
OwnersManuals2.com
Ultrasonic sensors
Ultrasonic sensors, front
The ultrasonic sensors of the parking assis-
tance systems are located in the front bumper.
Ultrasonic sensors, rear
The ultrasonic sensors of the parking assis-
tance systems are located in the rear bumper.
Ultrasonic sensors, side
The ultrasonic sensors of the parking assis-
tance systems are located on the side in the
front and rear bumpers.
The ultrasonic sensors for the automatic doors
are located near the door handles and below
the door opening in the sill.
Functional requirement of the
ultrasonic sensors
The areas of the ultrasonic sensors are clean
and clear.
Additional information:
▷ Washing the vehicle, refer to page 372.
▷ Vehicle care, refer to page 374.
System limits of the ultrasonic
sensors
The detection of objects with ultrasonic meas-
urements can run into physical limits, e.g., in
the following situations:
▷
For piles of snow and ice as well as snow-
covered objects.
▷ If the sensors are dirty or covered, e.g., by
stickers.
▷ If the sensor is not aligned correctly, for in-
stance due to parking damage.
▷ After improper paint work on the vehicle in
the area of the sensors.
▷ For small children and animals.
▷ For persons with certain clothing, for in-
stance jacket.
▷ For objects covered by fabric, e.g., tents.
▷ With obstacles and persons at the edge of
the lane.
Seite 38
CONTROLS
Sensors of the vehicle
38
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A88D30 - VI/23
OwnersManuals2.com
▷ In case of external interference with the
ultrasonics, for instance from passing ve-
hicles, loud machines or other ultrasonic
sources.
▷ Under certain weather conditions, e.g., high
moisture, wet conditions, snowfall, cold, ex-
treme heat, or strong wind.
▷ With tow bars and trailer hitches of other
vehicles.
▷ For handlebars, pedals, or other bicycle or
motorcycle attachments.
▷ For thin or wedge-shaped objects, e.g., ad-
jacent parked vehicle with open door, pillars
turned 45°.
▷ With moving objects.
▷ With elevated, protruding objects such as
ledges.
▷ With objects with corners, edges, and
smooth surfaces.
▷ For objects with fine surfaces or structures,
e.g., wire mesh fences, shopping carts, lad-
ders, scaffolding.
▷ For objects with porous surfaces.
▷ With small and low objects, for instance
boxes.
▷ For protruding objects, e.g., handles on
strollers or wheelchairs, mirrors on adjacent
vehicles.
▷ For horizontal objects without support
structure on ground, e.g., chains, tables.
▷ Low objects already displayed, for instance
curbs, can be outside of the detection
ranges of the sensors.
▷ For soft obstacles or obstacles covered
with foam, e.g., hoses.
▷ With plants and bushes.
▷ In automatic car washes.
▷ For uneven surfaces, e.g., speed bumps,
damaged curbstones.
▷ Due to heavy exhaust.
▷ Cargo that extends beyond the perimeter of
the vehicle is not taken into account by the
ultrasonic sensors.
If applicable, a Check Control message will be
displayed when the system limits are reached.
Seite 39
Sensors of the vehicle
CONTROLS
39
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A88D30 - VI/23
OwnersManuals2.com
Operating condition of the vehicle
Vehicle features and options
This chapter describes model-specific equip-
ment, systems, and functions that are currently
available, or may become available in the fu-
ture, even if they are not present in the vehicle.
Additional information:
Vehicle equipment, refer to page 8.
General information
Depending on the situation, the vehicle is in
one of the three states:
▷ Idle state.
▷ Standby state.
▷ Drive-ready state.
Idle state
Principle
When the vehicle is in idle state, it is switched
off.
General information
The vehicle is in idle state prior to opening
from the outside and after exiting and locking.
Safety information
Warning
An unsecured vehicle can begin to move and
possibly roll away. There is a risk of accident.
Before leaving the vehicle, secure the vehicle
against rolling away.
In order to ensure that the vehicle is secured
against rolling away, follow the following:
▷
Set the parking brake.
▷ On uphill grades or on downhill slopes,
turn the front wheels in the direction of
the curb.
▷ On uphill grades or on downhill slopes,
also secure the vehicle, for instance with
a wheel chock.
Warning
Unattended children or animals in the vehicle
can cause the vehicle to move and endanger
themselves and traffic, for example, due to
the following actions:
▷ Pressing the Start/Stop button.
▷ Releasing the parking brake.
▷ Opening and closing the doors or win-
dows.
▷ Engaging selector lever position N.
▷ Using vehicle equipment.
There is a risk of accidents or injuries. Do not
leave children or animals unattended in the
vehicle. Take the vehicle key with you when
exiting and lock the vehicle.
Establishing the sleep mode
automatically
The sleep mode is established automatically
such as in the following situations:
▷
After several minutes, if no operation takes
place on the vehicle.
▷ If the charge state of the vehicle battery is
low.
▷ Depending on the configuration via iDrive:
one or both front doors will be opened after
driving when exiting the vehicle.
Seite 40
CONTROLS
Operating condition of the vehicle
40
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A88D30 - VI/23
OwnersManuals2.com
In some situations, the idle state is not set au-
tomatically, for instance during a phone call or
when the low beams are switched on.
Establishing idle state when
opening the front doors
After a trip, the sleep mode can be established
by opening the front doors. For this purpose,
all passengers must exit the vehicle.
1. Apps menu
2. "Vehicle"
3. "Doors and windows"
4. "Lock/unlock"
5. "Turn off after opening door"
Establishing the sleep mode
manually
To establish idle state in the vehicle after com-
pletion of trip:
Press and hold the thumbwheel
in the center console until the
OFF indicator in the instrument
cluster goes out.
Deep sleep mode
Principle
Deep sleep mode is activated to prevent the
vehicle battery from discharging when the ve-
hicle is stationary for several weeks.
In deep sleep mode, the vehicle functions are
limited to the essentials.
Activating deep sleep mode
1.
Apps menu
2. "Vehicle"
3. "System settings"
4. "Deep sleep mode"
5. Select the desired setting.
Press the button on the trunk to access the
vehicle in deep sleep mode.
Deactivating deep sleep mode
▷ Turn off the function on the control display.
▷ Driving with the vehicle.
Standby state
Principle
When standby state is switched on, most func-
tions can be used while the vehicle is station-
ary. Desired settings can be adjusted.
General information
The vehicle is in the standby state after the
front doors are opened from the outside.
Manually setting to standby
General information
Standby can be switched back on after the ve-
hicle is automatically set to idle state.
Via thumbwheel
Press thumbwheel in the center
console. The control display and
the instrument cluster illuminate.
Seite 41
Operating condition of the vehicle
CONTROLS
41
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A88D30 - VI/23
OwnersManuals2.com
Via start/stop button
Press the Start/Stop button. The
control display and the instru-
ment cluster illuminate.
Display in the instrument cluster
OFF is displayed in the instru-
ment cluster. The drivetrain is
switched off and standby state
switched on.
Drive-ready state
Principle
Turning on drive-ready state corresponds to
starting the engine.
General information
Some vehicle functions can only be used with
the drive-ready state switched on.
Safety information
DANGER
If the exhaust pipe is blocked or ventilation is
insufficient, harmful exhaust gases can pene-
trate the vehicle. The exhaust gases contain
pollutants which are colorless and odorless.
In enclosed areas, exhaust gases can also
accumulate outside of the vehicle. There is a
danger to life. Keep the exhaust pipe free and
ensure sufficient ventilation.
Warning
An unsecured vehicle can begin to move and
possibly roll away. There is a risk of accident.
Before leaving the vehicle, secure the vehicle
against rolling away.
In order to ensure that the vehicle is secured
against rolling away, follow the following:
▷ Set the parking brake.
▷ On uphill grades or on downhill slopes,
turn the front wheels in the direction of
the curb.
▷ On uphill grades or on downhill slopes,
also secure the vehicle, for instance with
a wheel chock.
NOTICE
Repeated attempts to start the engine or re-
peated starting of the vehicle in rapid suc-
cession can cause the starter to overheat.
This also results in unburned or inadequately
burned fuel, and can cause the catalytic con-
verter to overheat. There is a risk of damage
to property. Avoid repeated starting of the
vehicle, particularly repeated starting in rapid
succession.
Turning on the drive-ready state
General information
Drive-ready state is switched on
via the Start/Stop button.
Turning on the drive-ready state
1.
Depress the brake pedal.
2. Press the Start/Stop button.
Seite 42
CONTROLS
Operating condition of the vehicle
42
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A88D30 - VI/23
OwnersManuals2.com
The ignition is activated automatically for a
brief time and is stopped as soon as the en-
gine starts.
Most of the indicator/warning lights in the in-
strument cluster illuminate for a varied length
of time.
Gasoline engine
Depending on the motorization, the full drive
power may not be available for approximately
30 seconds after starting the engine. In this
case, the vehicle will not accelerate as usual.
Additional information:
Power gauge, refer to page 153.
Display in the instrument cluster
The activated drive-ready state is indicated
in the instrument cluster, depending on the
equipment, by the display of information re-
quired for driving or the READY display.
Turning off drive-ready state
1.
When the vehicle is stationary, apply the
parking brake.
2. Press the Start/Stop button.
The engine is switched off. The vehicle
switches into standby state.
Seite 43
Operating condition of the vehicle
CONTROLS
43
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A88D30 - VI/23
OwnersManuals2.com
BMW iDrive
Vehicle features and options
This chapter describes model-specific equip-
ment, systems, and functions that are currently
available, or may become available in the fu-
ture, even if they are not present in the vehicle.
Additional information:
Vehicle equipment, refer to page 8.
Display and operating
concept
Principle
BMW iDrive is the vehicle’s display and oper-
ating concept and includes a wide range of
functions.
General information
Depending on vehicle equipment, the functions
can be operated as follows:
▷ Via the control display.
▷ Via the Controller.
▷ Via the touchpad.
▷ Via the BMW Intelligent Personal Assistant.
▷ Via BMW Touch Command.
▷ Via the gesture control.
▷ Via the operating elements on the steering
wheel.
Additional information:
Instrument cluster, refer to page 141.
Safety information
Warning
Operating the integrated information systems
and communication devices while driving can
distract from surrounding traffic. It is possi-
ble to lose control of the vehicle. There is
a risk of accident. Only use the systems or
devices when the traffic situation allows. As
warranted, stop and use the systems and de-
vices while the vehicle is stationary.
Main menu
General information
The main menu is divided into different areas.
Overview
1 Widgets
2 Status information
3 Configuration bar for main display
4 Temperature setting
5 Menu bar
Seite 44
CONTROLS
BMW iDrive
44
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A88D30 - VI/23
OwnersManuals2.com
Menu bar
Menu Apps
Access to apps and vehicle functions. A
filter can be selected. If necessary, change the
filter to see the apps you want.
▷ "All apps": All apps and functions are dis-
played.
▷ "Infotainment": Only infotainment apps are
displayed.
▷ "Vehicle": Only vehicle adjustment func-
tions are displayed.
▷ "Recently used": The most recently used
apps are displayed.
Media menu
Access to entertainment system functions,
e.g., radio stations or external device pairing.
Communication menu
Access to telephone and message function
as well as pairing and management of mobile
devices, e.g., smartphones.
Navigation menu
Access to navigation system, destination
entry, and traffic information. Configurable
map views and other functions such as points
of interest.
Climate menu
The Climate menu provides access to all
climate control functions.
Apple CarPlay© menu
Depending on national-market version with
associated function: Access to Apple CarPlay.
Apple CarPlay enables the secure use of cer-
tain functions of a compatible Apple iPhone via
iDrive.
Android Auto© menu
Depending on national-market version with
associated function: Access to Android Auto.
Android Auto enables the secure use of certain
functions of a compatible Android smartphone
via iDrive.
Widgets
Widgets show real-time information and dy-
namic content such as current media or paired
smartphones. The widgets also serve as but-
tons and allow jumping to the relevant menu.
Main display
The main display shows real-time information
and dynamic content such as the navigation
map. This display also contains buttons and
lets you jump to the desired menu.
Status information
General information
The status field can be found in the upper area
of the control display. Status information is dis-
played in the form of icons. Depending on the
equipment and national-market version, differ-
ent icons are available.
Telephone status information
Icon
Meaning
Active call.
Signal strength.
SIM card missing.
Entertainment status information
Icon
Meaning
USB audio.
Bluetooth audio.
Smartphone audio.
Seite 45
BMW iDrive
CONTROLS
45
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A88D30 - VI/23
OwnersManuals2.com
Icon Meaning
Connected Music with Spotify.
Time shift.
Wi-Fi.
Apple CarPlay.
Android Auto.
Satellite radio is switched on.
Status information messages
Icon Meaning
Number of notifications.
Check Control message.
Suppress private information.
Do not disturb.
Message.
Additional information:
Owner's Manual for Navigation, Entertain-
ment, and Communication, refer to page 6.
Other status information
Icon
Meaning
Sound output active.
Sound output deactivated.
Activation word active.
BMW ID or driver profile.
Destination guidance active.
Go to quick access.
Wireless charging active.
Park Distance Control: sound active.
Park Distance Control: sound deacti-
vated.
Input and display
Letters and numbers
Letters and numbers can be entered using the
controller, touchpad, control display, or voice
control, depending on vehicle equipment.
Icon Function
Change between capital and
lower-case letters.
Enter a blank space.
Switching between languages.
Use voice control.
Confirm entry.
Shift the input area to the left
or right.
Entry comparison
When entering data from a database such as
contacts, the selection is gradually narrowed
down for each character entered, with charac-
ters being added as necessary.
Activating/deactivating the functions
Some menu items are preceded by an icon.
Selecting the menu item enables or disables
the function.
Icon
Meaning
Function is activated.
Function is deactivated.
Enabling/disabling audible feedback
For some functions, audio confirmation is
given, e.g., sounds are emitted when operating
the control display.
1.
Apps menu
2. "Vehicle"
3. "System settings"
Seite 46
CONTROLS
BMW iDrive
46
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A88D30 - VI/23
OwnersManuals2.com
4. "Sound"
5. Select the desired setting.
Quick access
The quick link provides access to shortcuts,
certain settings, and app recommendations.
Input Operation
Show
quick link.
Swipe from top to bottom on the
control display.
Slide the controller up.
Tap the icon on the status
bar.
Hide
quick link.
Swipe from the bottom up on the
control display.
Slide the controller down.
Activating/deactivating pop-ups
For some functions, pop-ups are displayed
automatically on the control display. Some of
these pop-ups can be activated or deactivated.
1.
Apps menu
2. "Vehicle"
3. "System settings"
4. "Pop-ups"
5. Select the desired setting.
Shortcuts
General information
The iDrive functions can be stored on the
shortcuts and called up directly, for instance
radio stations, navigation destinations, phone
numbers and menu entries.
Storing a function
1.
Select the desired function.
2. Press and hold the desired function.
3. "Add to shortcuts"
Shortcuts can only be created with an active
BMW ID or a driver profile.
Executing a function
1. Swipe from top to bottom on the control
display.
2. Tap the desired shortcut.
The function will work immediately. This
means for instance that the connection is es-
tablished when a phone number is selected.
Deleting shortcuts
1.
Swipe from top to bottom on the control
display.
2. Press and hold the desired shortcut.
3. "Delete shortcut"
Direct access
General information
The vehicle has buttons that can be used to
access menus for the respective function di-
rectly on the control display. Then continue the
operation via iDrive.
Overview
Seite 47
BMW iDrive
CONTROLS
47
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A88D30 - VI/23
OwnersManuals2.com
Button Function
Go to the Driving Settings menu.
Go to the Exterior Lighting menu.
Go to the Interior Lighting menu.
Go to the Seat Settings menu.
Go to the Doors and Windows
menu.
BMW Curved Display
Principle
The BMW Curved Display is a single-screen
display in the instrument panel that is curved
towards the driver. The BMW Curved Display
comprises the instrument cluster on the driv-
er's side and the control display.
General information
Follow instructions for cleaning the BMW
Curved Display in the Care chapter.
Additional information:
Caring for special components, refer to
page 375.
Overview
1 Instrument cluster 141
2 Control display 48
Control display
Principle
The iDrive functions are displayed on the con-
trol display.
Safety information
Warning
Devices connected to the vehicle via a cable
such as mobile phones or loose objects can
be thrown through the vehicle interior while
driving such as in the event of an accident,
braking or evasive maneuver. There is a risk
of injury and risk of damage to property. Se-
cure loose objects or devices that are con-
nected to the vehicle via a cable.
Warning
Objects in the area in the front of the control
display can slip and damage the control dis-
play. There is a risk of injury or risk of dam-
age to property. Do not place objects in the
area in front of the control display.
Seite 48
CONTROLS
BMW iDrive
48
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A88D30 - VI/23
OwnersManuals2.com
Overview
Control display
Switching the control display on/off
automatically
The control display is turned on automatically
when the vehicle is unlocked or as soon as the
control display is needed for operation.
In certain situations, the control display is
switched off automatically, for instance if no
operation is performed on the vehicle for sev-
eral minutes.
Switching the control display on/off
manually
1.
Swipe from top to bottom on the control
display.
2. "Screen off"
Tap the control display to turn it on again.
Setting the brightness
1.
Apps menu
2. "Vehicle"
3. "Displays"
4. "Control display"
5. "Brightness at night"
6. Make the desired setting.
Depending on the light conditions, the bright-
ness control may not be clearly visible.
System limits
In the case of very high temperatures on the
control display, for instance due to intense so-
lar radiation, the brightness may be reduced
down to complete deactivation. Once the
temperature is reduced, for instance through
shade or air conditioning system, the normal
functions are restored.
Controller
Principle
The Controller can be used to select menu
items and enter the settings. The buttons can
be used to open the menus directly.
Overview
Controller
Buttons on the Controller
Button
Function
Call up the main menu.
Go to Media menu.
Go to Phone menu.
Seite 49
BMW iDrive
CONTROLS
49
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A88D30 - VI/23
OwnersManuals2.com
Button Function
Go to Navigation menu.
Go to previous menu.
Operation
▷ Rotate the Controller to switch between
menu options, for example.
▷ Press the Controller to select a menu
option, for example.
▷ Slide the Controller in four directions to
switch between menus, for example.
Operating via the Controller
Opening the main menu
Press the button.
The main menu is displayed.
Selecting menu items
1. Turn the Controller until the desired menu
item is highlighted.
2. Press the Controller.
Adjusting the main display
The main display can be adjusted in the main
menu.
1.
Press the button.
2. If necessary, tilt the Controller to select the
main display.
3. Tilt the Controller to the right.
4. Select the desired main display.
Selecting a widget
1.
Use the Controller to select widgets.
2. If necessary, turn the Controller until the de-
sired widget is selected.
3. Press the Controller.
Switching between menus
A new display opens after a menu item is se-
lected.
▷
Slide the Controller to the left.
The current menu closes and the previous
menu is displayed.
▷ Press the button.
The current menu closes and the previous
menu is displayed.
Seite 50
CONTROLS
BMW iDrive
50
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A88D30 - VI/23
OwnersManuals2.com
Entering letters and numbers
Input
1. Turn the Controller: select letters or num-
bers.
2. : confirm entry.
Additional information:
Setting the system language, refer to page 55.
Deleting an entry
Icon Function
Press Controller: delete a letter or num-
ber.
Hold the Controller down: delete all let-
ters or numbers.
Using alphabetical lists
For alphabetical lists with more than 30 en-
tries, the letters for which an entry exists can
be displayed in a text box.
1.
Turn the Controller to the left or right
quickly.
2. Select the first letter of the desired entry.
The first entry of the selected letter is dis-
played in the list.
Operation via touchpad
General information
Depending on vehicle equipment, some iDrive
functions can be operated with the controller
touchpad.
The touchpad is located on the Controller.
Touch the touchpad with your fingers. Do not
use any objects.
Selecting functions
1. Apps menu
2. "Vehicle"
3. "System settings"
4. "Touchpad"
5. Select the desired setting.
Entering letters and numbers
▷ Enter characters as they are displayed on
the control display.
▷ Always enter associated characters such as
accents or periods so that the letter can be
clearly recognized.
▷ The set language determines what input
is possible. Where necessary, enter special
characters via the Controller.
Additional information:
Setting the system language, refer to
page 55.
Entering special characters
Function Operation
Delete a charac-
ter.
Swipe to the left on the
touchpad.
Enter a blank
space.
Swipe to the right in the
center of the touchpad.
Enter a hyphen. Swipe to the right in the
upper area of the touch-
pad.
Enter an under-
score.
Swipe to the right in the
lower area of the touch-
pad.
Using the map
The map in the navigation system can be
moved via the touchpad.
Tap the map on the control display and then
continue operation using the touchpad.
Seite 51
BMW iDrive
CONTROLS
51
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A88D30 - VI/23
OwnersManuals2.com
Function Operation
Move map. Swipe in the appropriate di-
rection.
Display menu. Tap once.
Using alphabetical lists
Alphabetical lists with more than 30 entries
permit a direct jump to letters for which an en-
try exists.
Enter the first letter on the touchpad.
The first entry of the entered letter is displayed
in the list.
Operation via control display
General information
Depending on the equipment version, the con-
trol display is equipped with a touchscreen.
You can tap on menu items and widgets.
Touch the control display with your fingers. Do
not use any objects.
Opening the main menu
Tap on the icon.
The main menu is displayed.
Adjusting the main display
The main display can be adjusted in the main
menu.
1.
Tap on the icon.
2. Swipe the configuration bar on the right
side of the screen to the left.
3. Select the desired main display.
Sorting apps
To resort the app icons, press and hold the de-
sired icon and move it to the desired location.
Switching between menus
A new display opens after a menu item is se-
lected.
Select the arrow symbol.
The current menu closes and the previous
menu is displayed.
Calling up the context menu
Depending on the menu item, a context menu
with additional options can be displayed.
Press and hold the desired menu item.
The menu consists of various areas, for in-
stance:
▷ "General help": Go to the Integrated Own-
er's Manual.
▷ "Add to shortcuts": define menu item as
shortcut.
Entering letters and numbers
Input
1.
If necessary, tap the icon or control
display.
2. Enter desired letters and numbers.
Deleting an entry
Icon
Function
Tap icon: delete a letter or a number.
Press and hold the icon: delete all let-
ters or numbers.
Using the map
The navigation map can be moved on the con-
trol display.
Seite 52
CONTROLS
BMW iDrive
52
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A88D30 - VI/23
OwnersManuals2.com
Function Operation
Move map. Swipe in the appropriate
direction.
Enlarge/shrink
map.
Drag in or out with the fin-
gers.
Display menu. Tap once.
Using alphabetical lists
For alphabetical lists with more than 30 en-
tries, the letters for which an entry exists can
be displayed in a text box.
1.
Tap the letter in front of the list.
A letter box is displayed.
2. Tap the first letter of the desired entry.
The first entry of the selected letter is dis-
played in the list.
BMW Intelligent Personal
Assistant
Principle
The BMW Intelligent Personal Assistant is a
personal assistant that enables natural voice
operation of various vehicle functions. The
Personal Assistant makes it easier to operate
the vehicle by providing proactive suggestions
and automating habits.
General information
▷
BMW Intelligent Personal Assistant is avail-
able depending on national-market version.
▷ The system includes special microphones
on the driver side and front passenger side.
▷ Say the commands and numbers fluently
as well as with normal volume, emphasis,
and speed.
▷ ›...‹ identifies commands that can be spo-
ken.
Functional requirements
▷ A language that is supported by the Per-
sonal Assistant must be set via iDrive.
Setting the system language, refer to
page 55.
▷ Always say commands in the configured
system language.
For the full range of functions, you must acti-
vate, configure, or purchase the following func-
tions:
▷ Online speech processing, refer to
page 56.
▷ For all settings under
Data protection, refer to page 68.
▷ Activation word, refer to page 54.
▷ BMW ID or a driver profile.
▷ Relevant ConnectedDrive services from the
ConnectedDrive Store.
▷ Get suggestions, refer to page 56.
Activating the voice control system
General information
There are various methods for activating the
voice control feature:
▷
Press the button on the steering
wheel briefly.
The microphone on the driver's side is ac-
tive.
▷ Speaking the activation word.
The microphones on the driver's or front
passenger's side are active with the follow-
ing voice control, depending on where the
activation word was spoken.
Then say the command. The activation word
and the command can be spoken without
pause in one sentence.
Seite 53
BMW iDrive
CONTROLS
53
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A88D30 - VI/23
OwnersManuals2.com
Microphone button on steering wheel
1. Press button briefly.
2. Say the command.
Activation word
General information
Saying the activation word will start the Per-
sonal Assistant. The Personal Assistant lis-
tens.
Preset activation word
›Hello BMW‹: The default activation word can
be activated and deactivated.
1.
Apps menu
2. "Vehicle"
3. "System settings"
4. "Voice control"
5. "Personal Assistant (BMW)"
6. "Wake word"
7. ""Hello BMW""
Personal activation word
In addition to the preset activation word, a
personal activation word can be set up with
an active BMW ID or a driver profile. The per-
sonal activation word can also be changed or
deleted.
The activation word should consist of multiple
syllables to ensure good recognition.
›Hello‹: The additional phrase is not necessary
for the activation word and does not need to
be spoken.
1.
Apps menu
2. "Vehicle"
3. "System settings"
4. "Voice control"
5. "Personal Assistant (BMW)"
6. "Wake word"
7. "Personal wake word"
8. "Set"
9. "Start recording"
Activation word from third-party providers
Depending on the national-market version,
some third-party providers provide digital voice
assistants such as Siri or Amazon Alexa.
To use Siri, the smartphone must be con-
nected via Apple CarPlay.
The activation word from connected third-
party providers can be used in addition to your
preset or personal activation word from BMW.
1.
Apps menu
2. "Vehicle"
3. "System settings"
4. "Voice control"
5. Select the desired voice assistant.
6. Select the desired setting.
Canceling voice control
▷
Press the button on the steering
wheel again.
▷ ›Cancel‹
▷ Slide the Controller to the right or left.
▷ Press the Controller.
Possible commands
General information
Commands can be used to give instructions
or ask questions, with the Personal Assistant
providing assistance.
For example, you can call contacts, navigate
to an address, apply settings, or ask questions
about a vehicle function. Most vehicle functions
can be operated via voice commands, e.g., the
Automatic Parking Assistant.
Seite 54
CONTROLS
BMW iDrive
54
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A88D30 - VI/23
OwnersManuals2.com
Most content on the control display can be
spoken as commands, e.g., menu items or list
entries.
Help for voice control
▷ ›Voice commands‹: have possible example
commands suggested.
▷ ›General information on voice control‹: have
information on the operating principle of the
voice control announced.
▷ ›Help‹: have tips and example commands
for voice control announced.
▷ Additional example commands for the cur-
rent context are displayed in the widget of
the BMW Intelligent Personal Assistant.
Sample commands
▷ ›Call John Smith‹
▷ ›Drive me to JFK airport‹
▷ ›Play a classical music station‹
▷ ›Is my tire pressure still OK?‹
▷ ›Activate the climate control‹
▷ ›Increase the ACC distance‹
▷ ›Sport mode‹
Additional example commands can be dis-
played on the control display.
1.
Apps menu
2. "All apps"
3. "Personal assistant"
4. "Help"
5. "Example commands"
Sample commands for the current context are
displayed in the BMW Intelligent Personal As-
sistant widget.
Additional information:
Adjust widgets, refer to page 52.
Menu items
The Personal Assistant can bring up menu
items directly. Say the menu items as they are
displayed on the control display. You do not
have to follow the order of the menu items
when speaking them out loud.
1. Activate the voice control system.
2. ›Media‹
3. ›Presets‹
The stored stations are displayed on the
control display.
Owner's Manual via voice operation
You can ask simple questions about vehicle
functions and the operation of the vehicle.
The voice activation system and the feed-
back it provides do not replace the printed
or Integrated Owner's Manual. The function
is available depending on the national-market
version. The speech recognition and quality of
the feedback may vary.
Example command: ›How can the passenger
airbag be deactivated?‹
The Personal Assistant returns feedback.
When stationary, the section of the integrated
Owner's Manual is displayed on the control
display.
Settings
Setting the system language
1.
Apps menu
2. "Vehicle"
3. "System settings"
4. "Language"
5. Select the desired setting.
Setting the response length
You can set the Personal Assistant to use
standard dialog or a short version. In case of
the short version, the announcements by the
Seite 55
BMW iDrive
CONTROLS
55
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A88D30 - VI/23
OwnersManuals2.com
Personal Assistant are played back in an ab-
breviated version.
1. Apps menu
2. "Vehicle"
3. "System settings"
4. "Voice control"
5. "Personal Assistant (BMW)"
6. "Response length"
7. Select the desired setting.
Speaking during voice output
It is possible to answer during inquiries of the
Personal Assistant. The function can be dis-
abled if requests are often canceled uninten-
tionally, for instance due to background noise
or conversations in the vehicle.
1.
Apps menu
2. "Vehicle"
3. "System settings"
4. "Voice control"
5. "Personal Assistant (BMW)"
6. "Speaking during voice output"
Suggestions
General information
The Personal Assistant helps with individual
suggestions.
Activating/deactivating suggestions
1.
Apps menu
2. "Vehicle"
3. "System settings"
4. "Voice control"
5. "Personal Assistant (BMW)"
6. "Receive suggestions"
Adapting suggestions
Suggestions can be adapted, for example, by
category or to output a signal tone.
1. Apps menu
2. "Vehicle"
3. "System settings"
4. "Voice control"
5. "Personal Assistant (BMW)"
6. Select the desired setting.
Online speech processing
Online speech processing improves the quality
of the speech recognition and search results
for points of interest. To use the functions,
data is transmitted to a service provider via an
encrypted connection and stored locally there.
An active ConnectedDrive contract is required
for online voice processing. ConnectedDrive is
available depending on the national-market
version. Online speech processing is not avail-
able in all languages.
1.
Apps menu
2. "Vehicle"
3. "System settings"
4. "Voice control"
5. "Personal Assistant (BMW)"
6. "Online speech processing"
Configuring the visualization
How the Personal Assistant is visualized can
be set.
1.
Apps menu
2. "Vehicle"
3. "System settings"
4. "Voice control"
5. "Personal Assistant (BMW)"
6. "Visualization"
Seite 56
CONTROLS
BMW iDrive
56
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A88D30 - VI/23
OwnersManuals2.com
Voice control from third-party
providers
Depending on vehicle equipment, third-party
voice control can be enabled by pressing and
holding the microphone button on the steering
wheel.
1. Apps menu
2. "Vehicle"
3. "System settings"
4. "Voice control"
5. "Long press"
6. Select the desired setting.
Voice control in rear
Depending on vehicle equipment, the Personal
Assistant can be started and operated from
the rear by saying the activation word.
1.
Apps menu
2. "Vehicle"
3. "System settings"
4. "Voice control"
5. "Personal Assistant (BMW)"
6. "Rear voice control"
Adjusting the volume
Turn the volume button during the voice guid-
ance until the desired volume is set.
The volume remains constant even if the vol-
ume of other audio sources is changed.
Using the voice activation of the
smartphone
Depending on the device, a smartphone con-
nected to the vehicle can be used via voice
control.
The device must be connected via Apple Car-
Play or Android Auto.
1. Press and hold the button on the
steering wheel for approx. 3 seconds.
The voice activation of the smartphone is
activated.
If activation is successful, a confirmation
appears on the control display.
2. Press and hold the button on the
steering wheel to cancel voice control of the
smartphone.
Amazon Alexa Car Integration
Principle
Amazon Alexa Car Integration is available de-
pending on vehicle equipment and national-
market version. Alexa is a digital assistant
from Amazon. With Amazon Alexa Car Integra-
tion, Alexa can be used in the vehicle. For
safety reasons, the use of some Alexa func-
tions may be restricted while driving your vehi-
cle.
Functional requirements
▷
A BMW ID or driver profile is activated.
▷ An active Amazon account must exist.
Activating Amazon Alexa Car
Integration
Amazon Alexa Car Integration is activated in
the vehicle and My BMW app if necessary.
Follow the instructions from the Amazon Alexa
app to set it up in the vehicle.
1.
Apps menu
2. "All apps"
3. "Amazon Alexa"
4. Select the desired setting.
Seite 57
BMW iDrive
CONTROLS
57
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A88D30 - VI/23
OwnersManuals2.com
After setting it up, use Amazon Alexa in the
vehicle as follows:
Say the activation word "Alexa" and the de-
sired command.
Information about the active function is dis-
played on the control display. If the function
is restricted, reconnect Bluetooth and Wi-Fi as
necessary.
Automating routines
General information
The Personal Assistant can automate routines,
for instance the automatic opening of windows
in the same place. Rules are created for this
purpose, which can be activated and deacti-
vated at any time.
Activating/deactivating routines
1.
Apps menu
2. "All apps"
3. "Automate habits"
4. Select the desired setting.
System limits
▷
The Personal Assistant provides informa-
tion about vehicle functions that may not be
installed in the vehicle.
This also applies to safety functions and
systems.
▷ Certain noises can be detected and may
lead to problems. Keep the doors and win-
dows closed.
▷ Noises from the front passenger or occu-
pants can impair the system. Avoid making
other noise in the vehicle while speaking.
▷ Major language dialects can cause prob-
lems with the speech recognition feature.
▷ A poor data connection affects the re-
sponse time of the Personal Assistant and
search function.
BMW Touch Command
Principle
BMW Touch Command is a touchscreen used
to operate vehicle functions.
General information
The following functions can be operated:
▷ Audio sources.
▷ My Modes.
▷ Interior lighting.
▷ Sun protection.
▷ Rear seats.
▷ Climate control in the rear.
▷ BMW Theater Screen.
▷ Wireless charging tray in rear.
▷ Some phone features.
Overview
BMW Touch Command is located in the door
handle of the rear doors.
Switching on BMW Touch
Command
BMW Touch Command is switched on auto-
matically after unlocking the vehicle.
If necessary, tap BMW Touch Command.
Seite 58
CONTROLS
BMW iDrive
58
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A88D30 - VI/23
OwnersManuals2.com
Screensaver
General information
If no input is made via BMW Touch Command,
the screen saver switches on after 30 seconds.
After 60 seconds, the screen saver is dimmed.
Temperature control remains possible when
the screen saver is switched on.
The background of the screen saver depends
on the selected My Modes Design.
Additional information:
My Modes, refer to page 134.
Disabling the screen saver
To disable the screen saver on the touch-
screen, swipe from bottom to top.
Operating BMW Touch Command
Function Operation
Call up the main menu.
Tap the icon.
Adjusting volume.
Tap the icon.
Scroll. Drag up or down.
Confirm the selection. Tap the screen.
Settings
Brightness
1.
"Display"
2. "Touch Comm."
3. Select the desired setting.
Disabling functions
Individual functions of BMW Touch Command
can be disabled on the control display.
1. Apps menu
2. "Vehicle"
3. "System settings"
4. "Rear settings"
5. Select the desired setting.
In addition, certain functions can be disabled
with the safety switch.
Additional information:
Safety switch, refer to page 103.
BMW Gesture Control
Principle
Several iDrive functions can be operated by
hand motion using BMW Gesture Control.
Overview
The camera in the headliner detects gestures
that are carried out in the area of the center
console at the height of the control display.
The camera of the gesture control uses an in-
visible Class 1 laser.
Activate/deactivate gesture control
1.
Apps menu
2. "Vehicle"
3. "System settings"
Seite 59
BMW iDrive
CONTROLS
59
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A88D30 - VI/23
OwnersManuals2.com
4. "Gesture control"
5. "Gesture control"
Settings
1. Apps menu
2. "Vehicle"
3. "System settings"
4. "Gesture control"
5. Select the desired setting.
Carrying out gestures
▷ Perform gestures underneath the interior
mirror and next to the steering wheel.
▷ Execute gestures clearly.
▷ The gestures can also be executed from
the front-passenger side.
Possible gestures
Gesture Operation Function
Move extended index finger forward and
backward in the direction of the control
display.
Accept call.
Select a highlighted entry in a
list during voice control.
Confirm pop-up.
Swipe the hand in front of the control
display in the direction of the passenger
seat.
Reject call.
Close pop-up.
End voice control.
Move extended index finger slowly in a
clockwise circular movement.
Gesture is detected after one circular
movement.
Increase the volume.
Move the extended index finger counter-
clockwise in a circular movement.
Gesture is detected after one circular
movement.
Reduce the volume.
Depending on the
equipment:
Bring thumb and index finger together
and move the hand to the right or left.
Turn vehicle in the Live Vehi-
cle view.
3D view: rotate camera view.
This gesture can only be exe-
cuted while the vehicle is sta-
tionary.
Seite 60
CONTROLS
BMW iDrive
60
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A88D30 - VI/23
OwnersManuals2.com
Gesture Operation Function
Move fist with thumb extended to the left
back and forth.
Reverse Skip function.
The previous title is played.
Move fist with thumb extended to right
left back and forth.
Forward Skip function.
The next title is played.
With the index and middle fingers ex-
tended, point into the direction of the
control display.
Perform individually assigna-
ble gesture.
Stretch out five fingers, form a fist and
stretch five fingers out again.
Perform individually assigna-
ble gesture.
Assigning gesture individually
General information
Two gestures can be assigned individually and
can be configured as shortcut for certain func-
tions such as:
▷ Destination guidance to home address.
▷ Mute/Playback
▷ Control display on/off
Gesture shortcuts can only be created with an
active BMW ID or a driver profile.
Configure gesture shortcut
The desired function can be selected directly in
every menu and configured as shortcut.
1.
Press and hold the desired menu item.
2. "Add to gesture shortcuts"
3. Select the desired gesture.
Select function
Some defined functions can be selected di-
rectly in the menu for gesture control.
1. Apps menu
2. "Vehicle"
3. "System settings"
4. "Gesture control"
5. "Point two fingers at display" or "Show five-
o-five fingers"
6. Select the desired setting.
System limits
Gesture recognition by the camera in the
headliner can be disturbed by the following cir-
cumstances:
▷ The camera lens is covered.
▷ Objects are located on the interior mirror.
Seite 61
BMW iDrive
CONTROLS
61
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A88D30 - VI/23
OwnersManuals2.com
▷ The camera lens is dirty, clean camera
lens.
Sensors and camera lenses, refer to
page 374.
▷ The gesture is executed outside of the de-
tection range.
▷ Wearing of gloves or jewelry.
▷ Smoking in the car's interior.
Connecting mobile devices
to the vehicle
Principle
Various connection types are available for us-
ing mobile devices in the vehicle. The connec-
tion type to select depends on the mobile de-
vice and the desired function.
General information
Detailed information on the functions and con-
nection types can be found in the following
media in the Owner's Manual under the speci-
fied keyword:
▷
Integrated Owner's Manual in the vehicle.
▷ Printed Owner's Manual for navigation,
communication and entertainment.
The following information sources can also be
used:
▷ Driver’s Guide app.
▷ Driver’s Guide Web.
Safety information
Warning
Operating the integrated information systems
and communication devices while driving can
distract from surrounding traffic. It is possi-
ble to lose control of the vehicle. There is
a risk of accident. Only use the systems or
devices when the traffic situation allows. As
warranted, stop and use the systems and de-
vices while the vehicle is stationary.
Overview
The following overview shows possible func-
tions and the suitable connection types for
them. The range of functions depends on the
vehicle equipment and the mobile device.
Function Connection type Icon on the con-
trol display
Making calls via the hands-free sys-
tem.
Using phone functions via iDrive.
Keyword: calling via Bluetooth.
Bluetooth.
Keyword: Bluetooth connection.
Playing music from a mobile device.
Keyword: audio.
Bluetooth audio.
Keyword: Bluetooth connection.
Calling without a mobile phone.
Keyword: calling with the Personal
eSIM.
Personal eSIM.
Keyword: Personal eSIM.
Seite 62
CONTROLS
BMW iDrive
62
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A88D30 - VI/23
OwnersManuals2.com
Function Connection type Icon on the con-
trol display
Data exchange between mobile de-
vice and vehicle.
Wi-Fi.
Keyword: vehicle WLAN.
Use Internet access via the personal
hotspot.
Wi-Fi via personal hotspot.
Keyword: personal hotspot.
Using Apple CarPlay via iDrive and
via voice control.
Keyword: Apple CarPlay preparation.
Bluetooth and Wi-Fi.
Keyword: Bluetooth connection and
vehicle Wi-Fi.
Using Android Auto via iDrive and via
voice control.
Keyword: Android Auto preparation.
Bluetooth and Wi-Fi.
Keyword: Bluetooth connection and
vehicle Wi-Fi.
Playing music from a USB device.
Keyword: audio.
USB.
Keyword: USB connection.
Additional information:
USB port, refer to page 293.
Seite 63
BMW iDrive
CONTROLS
63
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A88D30 - VI/23
OwnersManuals2.com
BMW Remote Software Upgrade
Vehicle features and options
This chapter describes model-specific equip-
ment, systems, and functions that are currently
available, or may become available in the fu-
ture, even if they are not present in the vehicle.
Additional information:
Vehicle equipment, refer to page 8.
BMW Remote Software
Upgrade
Principle
Remote Software Upgrade can be used to up-
date the entire software of the vehicle. This
makes new functions, functional enhance-
ments or quality improvements available.
General information
BMW recommends performing the Remote
Software Upgrade as soon as it becomes
available.
Safety information
Warning
Unattended children or animals in the vehicle
can cause the vehicle to move and endanger
themselves and traffic, for example, due to
the following actions:
▷
Pressing the Start/Stop button.
▷ Releasing the parking brake.
▷ Opening and closing the doors or win-
dows.
▷ Engaging selector lever position N.
▷ Using vehicle equipment.
There is a risk of accidents or injuries. Do not
leave children or animals unattended in the
vehicle. Take the vehicle key with you when
exiting and lock the vehicle.
Functional requirements
▷ Active ConnectedDrive contract.
▷ The integrated SIM card in the vehicle has
been activated.
▷ Cellular network reception.
▷ Consent to transmit the corresponding data
was given in the Data Protection menu.
Additional information:
Data protection, refer to page 68.
Search for an upgrade
Functional requirement
Standby must be turned on to search for a
Remote Software Upgrade.
Automatic search
The vehicle regularly searches for updates in
the background.
Manual search
1.
Apps menu
2. "All apps"
3. "System settings"
4. "Remote Software Upgrade"
5. "Search for upgrades"
6. Follow the instructions on the control dis-
play.
Seite 64
CONTROLS
BMW Remote Software Upgrade
64
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A88D30 - VI/23
OwnersManuals2.com
Download of an upgrade
Automatic download
If available, the data for a Remote Software
Upgrade is automatically downloaded to the
vehicle. No download consent is required.
Via My BMW App
If an upgrade is available, information on the
new software version is displayed in the My
BMW App.
The data for the upgrade can then be down-
loaded to a mobile device, for instance via an
existing WLAN connection.
Data can then be sent from the mobile device
to the vehicle.
This transmission method accelerates the
download of the data, for instance in areas
with limited mobile network availability.
1.
Download the upgrade using the My BMW
App on your smartphone.
2. Follow the instructions in the My BMW App.
3. Connect your smartphone to the vehicle via
Bluetooth audio and Wi-Fi.
Data for the upgrade is sent from the mo-
bile device to the vehicle both while driving
and when stopped. Depending on the size
of the upgrade, it may be necessary to drive
your vehicle to complete the data transfer.
4. Follow the instructions on the control dis-
play.
Additional information:
Connecting mobile devices to the vehicle,
see Owner's Manual for Navigation, Entertain-
ment, Communication.
Information about the version
General information
The information about the version contains a
description of the updates included in the Re-
mote Software Upgrade. During the download
and after the installation has been successfully
completed, the information about the version
can be displayed on the control display.
This information is also available in the Con-
nectedDrive customer portal.
Displaying information
Display in the vehicle:
1. Apps menu
2. "All apps"
3. "System settings"
4. "Remote Software Upgrade"
5.
▷ Display currently installed version:
"Installed version:"
▷ Display new available version:
"Information on version"
6. Follow the instructions on the control dis-
play.
Display in the ConnectedDrive customer portal:
www.bmw-connecteddrive.com.
Installing the upgrade
General information
▷
Installation of the Remote Software Up-
grade may result in the deletion of software
changes, e.g., performance increases not
made by the manufacturer of the vehicle.
▷ Modifications to the electrical system of the
vehicle, for instance to control units, that
have not been made by the vehicle manu-
facturer can lead to an interruption of the
installation.
▷ The installation does not occur until the
consent was given.
▷ The installation may take around 20 to
30 minutes.
▷ The installation cannot be terminated.
Seite 65
BMW Remote Software Upgrade
CONTROLS
65
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A88D30 - VI/23
OwnersManuals2.com
▷ The vehicle cannot be used during the in-
stallation.
▷ The vehicle can be exited during the instal-
lation.
Prerequisites for the installation
▷ The state of charge of the vehicle battery is
sufficient.
▷ The outside temperature is above
14 ℉/-10 ℃.
▷ The vehicle is parked in a horizontal posi-
tion.
▷ The hazard warning system is turned off.
▷ The selector lever position P is engaged.
▷ The engine is turned off and sufficiently
cooled down.
If applicable, follow the notes for further pre-
requisites on the control display.
Your vehicle can establish some prerequisites
automatically. Follow the instructions on the
control display.
If the prerequisites are not met such as a suffi-
cient vehicle battery charge state, the upgrade
will not be offered for installation.
Pay attention to an offer for installation, e.g.,
after longer trips.
Preparing the vehicle
▷
Park the vehicle safely away from the public
road.
▷ Cellular network reception must be ensured
so that a fault message can be sent to the
vehicle manufacturer, for instance if the in-
stallation is terminated.
▷ Close the windows.
▷ Close the trunk.
▷ Remove energy consuming devices such as
a mobile phone.
▷ The vehicle key must be located in the vehi-
cle for the consent for installation.
▷ Switch off the exterior lighting.
▷ Remove the devices connected to the diag-
nostic socket.
Installing immediately
The upgrade can be installed immediately
when all prerequisites have been met.
1. Apps menu
2. "All apps"
3. "System settings"
4. "Remote Software Upgrade"
5. "Start upgrade now"
6. Follow the instructions on the control dis-
play.
Installing with timer
When the trip is completed, a timer can be
used to install the upgrade automatically at
a configured time such as during the night.
A later installation may make sense to meet
functional requirements, e.g., a sufficiently
cooled down engine.
1.
Apps menu
2. "All apps"
3. "System settings"
4. "Remote Software Upgrade"
5. Select the desired settings.
The installation starts automatically when:
▷
All prerequisites for the installation have
been established correctly.
▷ All prerequisites continue to be met at the
time of installation.
The timer is turned off when the drive-ready
state is turned on.
Installing via the My BMW App
If all requirements are met, you can also start
the upgrade installation via the My BMW App.
Follow instructions in the My BMW App.
Seite 66
CONTROLS
BMW Remote Software Upgrade
66
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A88D30 - VI/23
OwnersManuals2.com
Functional limitations
During the upgrade, the majority of functions is
temporarily unavailable, for instance:
▷ Hazard warning system.
▷ Central locking system and, if necessary,
Comfort Access.
▷ Parking lights.
▷ Horn.
▷ Alarm system.
▷ Emergency call.
▷ Power windows.
▷ Sun protection.
▷ Glove compartment.
▷ Checking the fuel filler flap lock.
▷ Operate the tailgate or trunk lid.
▷ Exit warning if needed.
In vehicles with frameless doors, the window
may no longer close completely.
The driver's door can be locked and unlocked
from the outside using the integrated key.
In vehicles with an electrical lock, the lock may
temporarily not work. In this case, the vehicle
can be exited by unlocking the driver's door
manually.
Additional information:
Buttons for central locking system, refer to
page 93.
After successful upgrade
The vehicle can be used again immediately.
Booked services such as Advanced Real Time
Traffic Information or Remote Services are au-
tomatically reactivated during the next trip.
After an extended stationary period, charge
the vehicle battery with an extended drive.
Malfunction
In the event of a malfunction, follow the in-
structions on the control display or in the My
BMW App.
If the malfunction cannot be corrected, contact
an authorized service center or another quali-
fied service center or repair shop.
Validity of the Owner's Manual
Production of the vehicle
At the time of production at the plant, the
printed Owner's Manual is the most current
resource.
After a software update in the vehicle
After a vehicle software update such as via Re-
mote Software Upgrade the Integrated Own-
er's Manual for the vehicle will contain the lat-
est information.
Seite 67
BMW Remote Software Upgrade
CONTROLS
67
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A88D30 - VI/23
OwnersManuals2.com
Personal settings
Vehicle features and options
This chapter describes model-specific equip-
ment, systems, and functions that are currently
available, or may become available in the fu-
ture, even if they are not present in the vehicle.
Additional information:
Vehicle equipment, refer to page 8.
Data protection
Data transfer
Principle
The vehicle offers different services, whose
use requires a data transfer to BMW or a serv-
ice provider.
General information
The data transfer can be deactivated for some
services. When the data transfer is deacti-
vated, the respective service cannot be used.
Settings
The data transfer can be configured in different
stages or individually for separate services.
1.
Apps menu
2. "Vehicle"
3. "System settings"
4. "Data privacy"
5. Select the desired setting.
Deleting personal data in the vehicle
Principle
Depending on the usage, the vehicle stores
personal data such as stored radio stations.
This personal data can be permanently de-
leted using iDrive.
General information
Depending on the equipment, the following
data is deleted:
▷ BMW IDs or driver profiles.
▷ Stored radio stations.
▷ Stored shortcuts.
▷ Navigation, for instance stored destina-
tions.
▷ Phone book.
▷ Online data, for instance Favorites, cookies.
▷ Office data, for instance voice memos.
▷ Login accounts.
▷ Digital key.
Altogether, the deletion of the data can take
up to 15 minutes. In addition, the vehicle is re-
moved from the My BMW App and Connected-
Drive customer portal so that remote functions
can no longer be used.
Functional requirements
▷
Data can only be deleted while stationary.
▷ The vehicle key must be in the vehicle.
Deleting data
The personal data in the vehicle will be deleted
when the vehicle is reset to the factory set-
tings.
Additional information:
Resetting vehicle data, refer to page 68.
Reset vehicle data
All individual settings can be reset to the fac-
tory settings when the drive-ready state is
Seite 68
CONTROLS
Personal settings
68
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A88D30 - VI/23
OwnersManuals2.com
switched off. Data can only be deleted while
the vehicle is stationary. The vehicle key must
be in the vehicle.
1. Apps menu
2. "Vehicle"
3. "System settings"
4. "Reset vehicle data"
5. "Reset vehicle data"
If the synchronization of settings has been en-
abled for a BMW ID in the vehicle, the personal
settings are kept in the BMW Cloud.
BMW ID/driver profiles
Principle
In ConnectedDrive countries, the BMW ID is
the personal login for all relevant offers for the
BMW brand. The BMW ID can be used in the
vehicle to store and activate personal vehicle
settings.
In non-ConnectedDrive countries, the personal
vehicle settings can be stored in driver profiles.
If a vehicle is used by several people, each per-
son can use their own BMW ID in the vehicle. If
a BMW ID is activated, the settings stored for it
are applied to the vehicle.
General information
The BMW ID must be registered once. A BMW
ID can be registered via the My BMW App, in
the ConnectedDrive Portal, or through an au-
thorized service center.
A driver profile is created in the vehicle.
Many of the settings that are stored for a BMW
ID in the vehicle can be synchronized with the
BMW Cloud. This makes these settings availa-
ble in any vehicle where the same BMW ID is
used to log in.
The vehicle can store seven BMW IDs or seven
driver profiles.
With driver recognition, a BMW ID or driver
profile can be activated as soon as you unlock
your vehicle. For this, a vehicle key or digital
key must be linked with the BMW ID or driver
profile. After unlocking, you can change the
BMW ID or driver profile.
If no BMW ID or driver profile is activated when
the vehicle is unlocked, the vehicle loads the
guest profile.
Functional requirements
The vehicle must be stationary to create,
change, delete, or edit a BMW ID.
Logging in the vehicle with a BMW ID and
synchronization with the BMW Cloud are only
possible when the vehicle has cellular network
reception.
Welcome window
After unlocking the vehicle, a Welcome window
is shown on the control display. The type of
the welcome depends on the following prereq-
uisites:
▷
The vehicle does not have a stored BMW
ID or driver profile:
The welcome is neutral. An option to add a
BMW ID or create a driver profile is offered.
▷ The vehicle key or the digital key has not
been assigned to a BMW ID or a driver pro-
file:
The welcome is neutral. The stored BMW
IDs or the stored driver profiles are offered
for selection. Additionally, it is possible to
add a new BMW ID or create a new driver
profile.
▷ A BMW ID or driver profile has been as-
signed to the vehicle key or digital key:
The welcome is personalized, the stored
settings are activated. The BMW ID or the
driver profile can be changed.
As soon as the drive-ready state is turned on
or the control display is tapped outside of the
Welcome window, the welcome will be hidden.
Seite 69
Personal settings
CONTROLS
69
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A88D30 - VI/23
OwnersManuals2.com
Adding the BMW ID
1. Tap the BMW ID icon or the personal
image on the status bar.
2. "Add BMW ID"
3. Scan the displayed QR code with your
smartphone.
4. Follow the instructions on your smart-
phone.
▷ If you have installed the My BMW App
on your smartphone and saved your
BMW ID, the BMW ID is automatically
transferred to the vehicle.
▷ If you do not have a BMW ID yet, you a
new BMW ID can be registered.
5. Select the other settings you want to
change, e.g., to configure driver recognition
as desired.
▷ To configure driver recognition, the cor-
responding vehicle key or digital key
must be detected in the vehicle.
Driver recognition can be set or changed in
the settings at a later time.
6. Change any additional settings as neces-
sary.
Alternatively, the BMW ID can be registered by
an authorized service center and added to the
vehicle. The BMW ID must then be confirmed
on the control display in the corresponding ve-
hicle.
The vehicle is added to the user’s My BMW
App.
The vehicle is added to the user’s My BMW
App.
Confirming a BMW ID
If the BMW ID was created by an authorized
service center and added to the vehicle, you
must then confirm the BMW ID in the vehicle:
1. Select the BMW ID.
2. Scan the QR code shown.
3. Follow the instructions on your smart-
phone.
My BMW app
If a BMW ID has been added to a vehicle, the
vehicle is automatically added to the My BMW
App. This means that My BMW App functions
can be used for this vehicle. To do so, the My
BMW App must be used with the same BMW
ID.
Alternatively, an authorized service center can
add a vehicle to the My BMW App. In this case,
the BMW ID must then be confirmed on the
control display in the corresponding vehicle.
In rare cases, the use of My BMW App func-
tions for this vehicle may be restricted. More
information is shown on the control display.
Creating a driver profile
In countries where BMW ConnectedDrive is not
available, driver profiles can be created.
1.
Tap the icon or personal picture in the
status bar.
2. "Add driver profile"
3. Enter the name for the driver profile.
4. Select the desired setting:
"Transfer settings"
If the vehicle is in the guest profile, the set-
tings of the guest profile will be applied.
Primary user
The primary user is the person who first adds
their BMW ID to the vehicle and first adds the
vehicle to their My BMW App. Alternatively, the
Seite 70
CONTROLS
Personal settings
70
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A88D30 - VI/23
OwnersManuals2.com
primary user can be defined by an authorized
service center.
The primary user has access to the following
settings, for example:
▷ Removing BMW IDs stored in the vehicle.
▷ Transferring the primary user role to an-
other BMW ID.
▷ Change vehicle-wide data protection set-
tings.
▷ Create the main digital key.
Additional information:
BMW Digital Key, refer to page 90.
Automatic driver recognition
If driver recognition has been established, au-
tomatic activation of the BMW ID or driver pro-
file is triggered by the following actions:
▷ By unlocking the vehicle using the button
on the assigned vehicle key.
▷ By unlocking the vehicle using an external
door handle. The assigned vehicle key or
the assigned Digital Key must be carried
with you.
▷ By automatic unlocking when approaching
the vehicle. The assigned vehicle key or the
assigned Digital Key must be carried with
you. Depending on the country, it may not
be possible to recognize the Digital Key.
If there are several vehicle keys or Digital Keys
in the vicinity of the vehicle, activation of the
BMW ID or driver profile is done according to
the following priority:
▷
The key that unlocks the vehicle triggers
the activation of the assigned BMW ID or
the assigned driver profile.
The guest profile is activated when the ve-
hicle is unlocked using a key that is not as-
signed to a BMW ID or driver profile.
▷ If a vehicle key and a Digital Key are
detected at the same time, the Digital
Key triggers the activation of the assigned
BMW ID or the assigned driver profile.
▷ If another key is detected on the driver's
door after activating the BMW ID or the
driver profile, the BMW ID or the driver pro-
file of the last key detected is activated.
If no BMW ID and no driver profile are as-
signed to this key, the guest profile is acti-
vated.
Setting synchronization
If synchronization is switched on, settings from
the following areas, for example, are continu-
ously synchronized:
▷ BMW ID, e.g., profile picture.
▷ Navigation, e.g., recent destinations, home
address, or map settings.
▷ Media, e.g., favorites or saved radio sta-
tions.
▷ iDrive, e.g., main menu configuration, lan-
guage, or units.
▷ Personal Assistant, e.g., suggestions or ac-
tivation word.
▷ Exterior lighting, e.g., one-touch signaling
and home lights.
Settings from the following areas are only
synchronized when you log in for the first time:
▷
Seating and climate comfort, e.g., driver’s
seat position or temperature setting.
▷ Data protection menu.
Selecting the BMW ID/driver profile
If the BMW ID or driver profile could not be
recognized when unlocking the vehicle, select
the BMW ID or driver profile on the welcome
window.
Seite 71
Personal settings
CONTROLS
71
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A88D30 - VI/23
OwnersManuals2.com
The BMW ID or driver profile can be changed
at any time via iDrive:
1. Tap the icon or personal picture in the
status bar.
2.
▷ "Change BMW ID"
▷ "Change driver profile"
3. Select the BMW ID or driver profile.
4. If necessary, enter the PIN.
The BMW ID or the driver profile are activated,
the stored settings are loaded.
Guest profile
The guest profile can be activated and
changed by anyone.
In the following cases the guest profile is auto-
matically active:
▷ A BMW ID has not yet been added or a
driver profile has not yet been created.
▷ No BMW ID or driver profile has been as-
signed to the vehicle key or the digital key
that was used to unlock the vehicle.
The following limitations apply to the guest
profile:
▷
Certain functions are not available, e.g.,
navigation functions or saving favorites.
▷ The guest profile cannot be renamed.
▷ It is not possible to assign a PIN to the
guest profile.
▷ It is not possible to assign driver detection
to the guest profile.
▷ In ConnectedDrive countries, the synchroni-
zation with the BMW Cloud is not possible.
The guest profile is selected on the Welcome
screen or via iDrive:
1.
Tap the icon or personal picture in the
status bar.
2.
▷ "Change BMW ID"
▷ "Change driver profile"
3. "Continue as guest"
Deleting the BMW ID/driver profile
1. Tap the icon or personal picture in the
status bar.
2.
▷ "Manage BMW IDs"
▷ "Change driver profile"
3. Tap the icon of the desired BMW ID or
the desired driver profile.
Removing a BMW ID from the vehicle causes
the vehicle to be removed from the My BMW
App. If the BMW ID has been synchronized
with the BMW Cloud, the data stored in the
BMW Cloud is retained after the BMW ID is
deleted. If the currently active BMW ID is re-
moved, the guest profile is activated.
Removing a vehicle from the My BMW App
removes the corresponding BMW ID from the
vehicle. If the BMW ID was synchronized with
the BMW Cloud, the BMW ID data stored in the
BMW Cloud will be retained.
If the vehicle is removed from the primary us-
er’s My BMW App, it will also be removed from
the My BMW App of the other users. The cor-
responding BMW IDs are removed from the
vehicle.
If the vehicle is reset to factory settings, it is
removed from each user’s My BMW App, and
all BMW IDs are removed from the vehicle.
Transfer of the vehicle key
A vehicle key that is assigned to a BMW ID or
a driver profile can be used to view or change
the stored personal settings.
Before a vehicle key is transferred to other per-
sons, any assigned driver detection should be
canceled. Changes to the driver detection can
be made in the settings of the BMW ID or the
driver profile.
The BMW Digital Key provides the option to
transfer a digital key to permit other persons
the use of your own vehicle.
Additional information:
BMW Digital Key, refer to page 90.
Seite 72
CONTROLS
Personal settings
72
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A88D30 - VI/23
OwnersManuals2.com
Settings
General information
Settings added when adding a BMW ID or cre-
ating a driver profile can be changed.
1. Tap the icon or personal picture in the
status bar.
2. "Settings"
The following settings are available for the
BMW ID:
▷ The type of driver detection.
▷ The profile picture.
▷ The synchronization with the BMW Cloud.
▷ The personal salutation.
The following settings are available for the
driver profile:
▷ The type of driver detection.
▷ The profile picture.
▷ The profile name.
Selecting a profile picture
The profile picture can be selected from the
predefined profile pictures:
1.
Tap the icon or personal picture in the
status bar.
2. "Settings"
3. "Manage profile picture"
4. "Select profile picture"
The personal profile picture for a BMW ID can
be adopted from the profile in the My BMW
App. This requires that the synchronization
with the BMW Cloud is activated in the set-
tings. After transferring the profile picture from
the My BMW App, you can only select one of
the predefined images if the profile picture in
the My BMW App is deleted or synchronization
is deactivated.
System limits
A clear driver detection via the vehicle key or
the digital key may not always be possible in
the following cases, for example:
▷ The driver changes, but the vehicle is not
locked and unlocked.
▷ When multiple vehicle keys or multiple digi-
tal keys with an assigned BMW ID or driver
profile are located in the outer area on the
driver's side of the vehicle.
▷ When the vehicle was unlocked via the My
BMW App.
The use of personal settings that are stored for
a BMW ID in other vehicles is subject to techni-
cal limitations. For example, settings may be
stored for a system that is not available, or
available in a non-compatible version, in other
vehicles.
Seite 73
Personal settings
CONTROLS
73
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A88D30 - VI/23
OwnersManuals2.com
Opening and closing
Vehicle features and options
This chapter describes model-specific equip-
ment, systems, and functions that are currently
available, or may become available in the fu-
ture, even if they are not present in the vehicle.
Additional information:
Vehicle equipment, refer to page 8.
Vehicle key
General information
Two vehicle keys are included in the scope of
delivery, each containing an integrated key.
Each vehicle key contains a replaceable bat-
tery.
Depending on the equipment and national-
market version, various settings are possible
for the button functions.
A BMW ID or a driver profile with personal set-
tings can be assigned to a vehicle key.
To provide information on maintenance rec-
ommendations, the service data is stored in
the vehicle key.
To prevent possible locking in of the vehicle
key, take the vehicle key with you when exiting
the vehicle.
Safety information
Warning
The vehicle key has a button cell battery.
Batteries or button cell batteries can be swal-
lowed and lead to serious or fatal injuries
within two hours, for example due to internal
burns or chemical burns. There is a risk of
injury or danger to life. Keep the vehicle key
and batteries out of reach of children. Imme-
diately seek medical help if there is any sus-
picion that a battery or button cell battery has
been swallowed or is located in any part of
the body.
Overview
Buttons on the vehicle key.
Icon Meaning
Unlock.
Lock.
Stationary climate control, refer to
page 286.
Open the cargo area.
Panic mode.
Pathway lighting, refer to page 167.
Additional vehicle keys
Additional vehicle keys are available from an
authorized service center or another qualified
service center or repair shop.
Seite 74
CONTROLS
Opening and closing
74
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A88D30 - VI/23
OwnersManuals2.com
Loss of vehicle keys
A lost vehicle key can be disabled and re-
placed by an authorized service center or an-
other qualified service center or repair shop.
If the lost vehicle key has an assigned BMW ID
or driver profile, the connection to this vehicle
key must be deleted. A new vehicle key can
then be assigned to the BMW ID or driver pro-
file.
Replacing the battery
NOTICE
Improper batteries in a battery-operated de-
vice can damage the device. There is a risk
of damage to property. Always replace the
discharged battery with a battery with the
same voltage, the same size and the same
specification.
1.
Press and hold the button, arrow 1, and
push the cover, arrow 2, forward and re-
move it from the side.
2. Remove the battery housing from the vehi-
cle key to the side.
3. Remove the battery from the battery hous-
ing.
4. Insert a CR2032 3V battery with the posi-
tive side facing down.
5. Insert the battery housing into the vehicle
key.
6. Insert the cover into the vehicle key.
Have old batteries disposed of by an
authorized service center or another
qualified service center or repair shop,
or take them to a collection point.
Integrated key
General information
The vehicle can be locked and unlocked with-
out the vehicle key using the integrated key.
Depending on the national-market version, the
integrated key will fit in the glove compart-
ment.
Seite 75
Opening and closing
CONTROLS
75
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A88D30 - VI/23
OwnersManuals2.com
Safety information
Warning
For some national-market versions, unlock-
ing from the inside is only possible with par-
ticular knowledge.
If persons or animals spend a lengthy time
in the vehicle and are thereby exposed to ex-
treme temperatures, there is a risk of injury
or danger to life. Do not lock the vehicle from
the outside when there are people or animals
in it. Do not leave babies, toddlers or animals
alone in the vehicle.
Removing the integrated key
1.
Press and hold the button, arrow 1, and
push the cover, arrow 2, forward and re-
move it from the side.
2. Slide out the integrated key at the open
side of the vehicle key.
3. Remove the integrated key from the vehicle
key.
Unlocking the vehicle manually
1. Press the cover cap in.
The cover cap is slightly opened.
2. Pull the cover cap to the side so that the
door lock is clearly visible.
3. Unlock the door lock with the integrated
key.
4. Remove the integrated key from the door
lock.
5. Press the cover cap in to close it.
6. Press the cover cap in again to open it
slightly.
Seite 76
CONTROLS
Opening and closing
76
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A88D30 - VI/23
OwnersManuals2.com
7. Pull on the cover cap until the door opens.
8. Open the driver's door.
9. Press the central locking button to unlock
the other doors.
With the vehicle de-energized: pull the lever
in the other doors from the inside.
Locking the vehicle manually
General information
To avoid locking the vehicle key in the vehicle,
do not place the vehicle key in the vehicle.
Locking the vehicle
1.
Lock the doors to be locked with the
integrated key using the side door lock on
the front of the doors.
2. Close the locked doors.
Alarm system
If the vehicle is unlocked with the integrated
key via the door lock, the activated alarm sys-
tem will be triggered when the door is opened.
In this case, use the vehicle key emergency
detection to switch off the alarm.
If the vehicle is locked with the integrated key
via the door lock, the alarm system will not be
activated.
Emergency detection of the vehicle
key
It is not possible to switch on the drive-ready
state if the vehicle key has not been detected.
Proceed as follows in this case:
1.
Hold the rear of the vehicle key against the
mark on the steering column. Pay attention
to the display in the instrument cluster.
2.
▷ If the vehicle key is detected:
Turn on drive-ready state within 10 sec-
onds.
▷ If the vehicle key is not detected:
Slightly change the position of the vehi-
cle key and repeat the procedure.
Malfunction
A Check Control message is displayed where
applicable.
Vehicle key detection by the vehicle may mal-
function under the following circumstances:
▷
The battery of the vehicle key is discharged.
▷ Fault of the radio link from transmission
towers or other equipment with high trans-
mitting power.
▷ Shielding of the vehicle key due to metal
objects.
Do not transport the vehicle key together
with metal objects.
Seite 77
Opening and closing
CONTROLS
77
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A88D30 - VI/23
OwnersManuals2.com
▷ Fault of the radio link from mobile phones
or other electronic devices in direct proxim-
ity to the vehicle key.
Do not carry the vehicle key in close prox-
imity to other electronic devices.
▷ Fault of radio transmission by a charging
process of mobile devices, for instance
charging of a mobile phone.
▷ The vehicle key is located in direct proximity
of the wireless charging tray.
Place the vehicle key in a different location.
In the case of interference, the vehicle can also
be unlocked and locked from the outside with
the integrated key. Use the Emergency detec-
tion of the vehicle key to turn on drive-ready
state.
Access to vehicle interior
Safety information
Warning
People or animals in the vehicle can lock the
doors from the inside and lock themselves in.
In this case, the vehicle cannot be opened
from the outside. There is a risk of injury.
Take the vehicle key with you so that the ve-
hicle can be opened from the outside.
Warning
For some national-market versions, unlock-
ing from the inside is only possible with par-
ticular knowledge.
If persons or animals spend a lengthy time
in the vehicle and are thereby exposed to ex-
treme temperatures, there is a risk of injury
or danger to life. Do not lock the vehicle from
the outside when there are people or animals
in it. Do not leave babies, toddlers or animals
alone in the vehicle.
Warning
Unattended children or animals in the vehicle
can cause the vehicle to move and endanger
themselves and traffic, for example, due to
the following actions:
▷ Pressing the Start/Stop button.
▷ Releasing the parking brake.
▷ Opening and closing the doors or win-
dows.
▷ Engaging selector lever position N.
▷ Using vehicle equipment.
There is a risk of accidents or injuries. Do not
leave children or animals unattended in the
vehicle. Take the vehicle key with you when
exiting and lock the vehicle.
Actions during unlocking
Depending on the settings, the following func-
tions are performed when unlocking the vehi-
cle:
▷
Only the driver's door and the fuel filler flap
will be unlocked or all access to the vehicle
will be unlocked.
▷ The unlocking of the vehicle can be con-
firmed with a light signal or a sound signal.
▷ The welcome light can be turned on when
the vehicle is being unlocked.
In addition, the following functions are exe-
cuted:
▷
If a BMW ID or a driver profile was assigned
to the vehicle key, this BMW ID or driver
profile will be activated.
▷ The interior lights are switched on, unless
they were manually switched off.
▷ Depending on vehicle equipment, folded-in
exterior mirrors are folded out.
If the exterior mirrors were folded in via the
button in the vehicle interior, they will not
be folded out during unlocking.
Seite 78
CONTROLS
Opening and closing
78
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A88D30 - VI/23
OwnersManuals2.com
▷ Anti-theft protection is switched off.
▷ The alarm system is switched off.
Additional information:
▷ Settings, refer to page 95.
▷ Welcome lights, refer to page 166.
▷ BMW ID/driver profiles, refer to page 69.
Actions during locking
Depending on the settings, the following func-
tions are performed when locking the vehicle:
▷ The locking of the vehicle can be confirmed
with a light signal or a sound signal.
▷ Depending on vehicle equipment, the exte-
rior mirrors can be folded in automatically
when locking. The exterior mirrors are not
folded in when the hazard warning flashers
are switched on.
The following functions are executed:
▷ All doors, the tailgate, and the fuel filler flap
are locked.
▷ Anti-theft protection is switched on. This
prevents the doors from being unlocked us-
ing the lock button or door opener.
▷ The alarm system is switched on.
If the drive-ready state is still turned on when
you lock the vehicle, the vehicle horn will honk
twice. In this case, the drive-ready state must
be switched off by means of the Start/Stop
button.
Additional information:
Settings, refer to page 95.
With the vehicle key
Unlocking the vehicle
Press the button on the vehicle key.
If only the driver's door and fuel filler flap have
been unlocked due to the settings in place,
press the button on the vehicle key again to
unlock the other vehicle access points.
The lighting functions may depend on the am-
bient brightness.
Opening and closing automatic doors
When opening and closing manually, the doors
are motor-assisted. Depending on the set-
tings, the doors can also be opened and
closed automatically using the vehicle key.
Additional information:
Automatic doors, refer to page 82.
Locking the vehicle manually
1.
Close the driver's door.
2. Press the button on the vehicle key.
All vehicle access points are locked.
On the external door handle
Principle
The vehicle can be accessed without operating
the vehicle key.
The vehicle key is automatically detected near
the vehicle.
General information
The function is available with Comfort Access.
Depending on the national-market version, the
vehicle can also be unlocked and locked at the
external door handle with compatible smart-
phones with a digital key.
Additional information:
BMW Digital Key, refer to page 90.
Seite 79
Opening and closing
CONTROLS
79
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A88D30 - VI/23
OwnersManuals2.com
Functional requirements
▷ Carry the vehicle key with you, e.g., in your
pants pocket.
▷ Bluetooth must be activated on the smart-
phone to unlock and lock using the Digital
Key.
▷ To lock the vehicle, the vehicle key must be
outside of the vehicle near the doors.
▷ After locking, approx. 2 seconds must
elapse before unlocking is possible.
Unlock vehicle on front door
Reach into the recessed grip of a front door.
Unlocking the vehicle at the rear door
Press and hold the button in the recessed grip
to unlock the vehicle and open the rear door.
Opening and closing automatic doors
When opening and closing manually, the doors
are motor-assisted. The doors can also be
opened and closed automatically on the exter-
nal door handle.
Additional information:
Automatic doors, refer to page
82.
Locking the vehicle
1. Close the driver's door.
2. Touch the grooved surface on the external
door handle of a closed front door with your
finger for approx. 1 second without reaching
into the recessed grip.
Malfunction
Wet or snowy conditions may disrupt the lock-
ing request detection on the external door han-
dles.
In the case of a malfunction, unlock and lock
the vehicle using the buttons of the vehicle key
or use the integrated key.
Touchless unlocking/locking of the
vehicle
Principle
When the driver approaches the locked vehicle
with the vehicle key, the vehicle is unlocked.
When the driver walks away from the unlocked
vehicle with the vehicle key, the vehicle will be
locked.
General information
The function is available with Comfort Access.
The vehicle will be unlocked when an author-
ized vehicle key is detected in the unlocking
zone.
The unlocking zone is located within a radius
of approx. 5 ft/1.50 m around the vehicle.
Seite 80
CONTROLS
Opening and closing
80
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A88D30 - VI/23
OwnersManuals2.com
The vehicle will be locked when the vehicle key
leaves the locking zone.
The locking zone is located within a radius of
approx. 9 ft/2 m around the vehicle.
Depending on the national-market version,
touchless unlocking and locking is also possi-
ble for compatible smartphones with a digital
key. Enable Bluetooth on your smartphone to
do so.
If the vehicle key is located in the unlocking
zone for an extended period of time without
movement, the vehicle will be locked automati-
cally.
If someone is detected on a seat while locking
the vehicle, the following restrictions apply:
▷ The vehicle will be locked but not secured
against theft.
▷ The fuel filler flap remains unlocked.
Additional information:
BMW Digital Key, refer to page 90.
Actions during unlocking
If the settings specify that only the driver's
door and the charging socket flap will be un-
locked, note the following:
The driver's door and the charging socket flap
will only be unlocked when the driver is within
the unlocking zone of the driver's door.
Settings, refer to page 95.
Functional requirements
▷
Carry the vehicle key with you, e.g., in your
pants pocket.
▷ Bluetooth must be activated on the smart-
phone for contactless unlocking and locking
using the Digital Key.
▷ Automatic unlocking and locking must be
activated in the settings.
▷ The drive-ready state must be turned off.
▷ If the vehicle has been in the idle state for
several days, contactless unlocking/locking
will only be available after the vehicle has
been driven.
Additional information:
Settings, refer to page 95.
With the Key Card
Principle
The Key Card is a chip card on which the digi-
tal key is installed. The Key Card can be used
to unlock and lock the vehicle.
Additional information:
Key Card, refer to page 89.
General information
The Key Card is available with Comfort Access.
Locking/unlocking the vehicle
Hold activated Key Card directly on the center
of the external door handle of the driver's door.
When locking the vehicle with the Key Card,
make sure that all doors and the trunk are
closed.
If the Key Card is not detected, slightly change
the position of the Key Card and repeat the
procedure.
With the BMW Digital Key
Principle
Depending on vehicle equipment and national-
market version, a digital key can be installed
Seite 81
Opening and closing
CONTROLS
81
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A88D30 - VI/23
OwnersManuals2.com
on a compatible smartphone and used to un-
lock and lock the vehicle.
Additional information:
BMW Digital Key, refer to page 90.
Locking/unlocking the vehicle
Hold the near field communication antenna of
the smartphone directly and centered on the
external door handle of the driver's door. The
position of the near field communication an-
tenna depends on the smartphone model.
When locking the vehicle with the smartphone,
make sure that all doors and the trunk are
closed.
Frequently Asked Questions
What precautions can be taken to be able to
open a vehicle, despite accidentally locking in
the vehicle key?
▷
The app’s remote services offer the option
to lock and unlock a vehicle.
This requires an active BMW Connected-
Drive contract, and the app must be instal-
led on a smartphone.
▷ Unlocking the vehicle can be requested via
the BMW ConnectedDrive Call Center.
An active BMW ConnectedDrive contract is
required.
Automatic doors
Principle
The automatic doors open and close automat-
ically. If necessary, the doors can also be oper-
ated manually.
General information
Multiple doors can be opened and closed at
the same time.
The driver’s door can be opened contactlessly.
When opening and closing manually, the door
movement is motor-assisted.
Safety information
Warning
Body parts can be jammed while operating
the doors. There is a risk of injury. Make sure
that the area of movement of the doors is
clear while opening and closing.
Warning
The system does not release the driver from
their responsibility to assess the traffic and
their surroundings. Based on the limits of the
system, it cannot independently react to all
traffic situations. Otherwise, there is a risk
people may be injured or property damaged.
Observe traffic and surroundings and actively
intervene in corresponding situations, e.g.,
manually interrupt the door movement.
Functional requirements
▷
The vehicle tilt is less than 10° in the longi-
tudinal and transverse directions.
▷ The vehicle is at a standstill.
▷ The safety function is switched off. When
the safety function is switched on, the rear
Seite 82
CONTROLS
Opening and closing
82
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A88D30 - VI/23
OwnersManuals2.com
doors cannot be operated in the interior nor
operated with the vehicle key.
Additional information:
Safety switch, refer to page 103.
Detection of obstacles
When the doors are opened automatically, sta-
tionary and moving obstacles are detected un-
der the following circumstances:
▷ The stationary obstacles are not closer
than 10 in/25 cm to the vehicle.
▷ The stationary obstacles are located below
the window line.
▷ The detection area for moving obstacles
corresponds to that of the Exit Warning.
Exit Warning is only triggered if the doors
are opened from the inside.
Detection range for stationary obstacles.
If an obstacle is detected, a visual warning is
issued on the respective door and on the con-
trol display. Movement of the respective door
is stopped.
Additional information:
Exit warning, refer to page 188.
Ultrasonic sensors, refer to page 38.
Opening/closing the driver’s door
contactlessly
Principle
The driver’s door opens automatically when
the driver approaches the closed vehicle with
their digital key. If the driver moves away from
the open vehicle with their digital key, the driv-
er’s door closes automatically.
General information
The function is available with Comfort Access.
Function availability depends on national-mar-
ket version.
The driver’s door opens automatically when an
authorized digital key is detected in unlocking
range.
The unlocking range is the radius of approx.
5 ft/1.50 m around the vehicle.
The driver’s door closes and locks when the
digital key leaves locking range.
The locking range is the radius of ap-
prox. 9 ft/2 m around the vehicle.
Safety information
NOTICE
If the function for automatically opening/clos-
ing the driver’s door is activated, the driver’s
door may open unintentionally, e.g. when
washing the vehicle. There is a risk of dam-
age to property. In situations where the driv-
er’s door must remain closed, deactivate the
hands-free opening/closing function.
Functional requirements
▷
The Digital Key has been activated and au-
thorized for the vehicle.
▷ Contactless opening/closing of the driver's
door is activated in the settings.
Additional information:
BMW Digital Key, refer to page 90.
Seite 83
Opening and closing
CONTROLS
83
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A88D30 - VI/23
OwnersManuals2.com
On the external door handle
Principle
The vehicle can be accessed without operating
the vehicle key.
The vehicle key is automatically detected near
the vehicle.
General information
Depending on the national-market version, the
vehicle doors can also be opened and closed
automatically with the external door handle us-
ing a compatible smartphones with a digital
key.
Additional information:
BMW Digital Key, refer to page 90.
Opening the door automatically
1.
Press the button in the illuminated spot, ar-
row.
2. Leave the door's travel path if necessary.
If the person opening the door is detected
as an obstacle, the door stops, arrow 1. If
the door’s travel path is exited immediately,
arrow 2, the door continues to move.
Pressing the button again stops the door
movement.
If the door does not continue to move, open
the door manually.
Opening the door manually
Reach into the recessed grip of the door and
pull the door outward.
The movement of the door is motor-assisted.
Closing the door automatically
▷
Press the button in the illuminated spot, ar-
row.
Pressing the button again stops the door
movement.
▷ Push the door briefly.
Closing the door manually
Close the open door slowly and press slightly
against the vehicle. The door closes automati-
cally.
Seite 84
CONTROLS
Opening and closing
84
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A88D30 - VI/23
OwnersManuals2.com
With the My BMW app
The My BMW app can be used to open and
close automatically. To do so, a digital key
for the vehicle must be installed on the smart-
phone.
Additional information:
BMW Digital Key, refer to page 90.
In the interior
Operating the front door
Press the button in the door to unlock
the door.
Push the door outward.
Press the button next to the steering
wheel to open or close the door auto-
matically.
Operating the rear doors
Press the button to unlock the door.
Push the door outward.
Press the button to open or close the
door automatically.
Closing the driver’s door with the brake
pedal
Depress the brake pedal to close the driver’s
door.
This function must be activated in the settings.
Additional information:
Settings, refer to page 95.
Operating doors on the control display
Doors can be opened, closed, and stopped in
motion, separately or together.
1.
Apps menu
2. "Vehicle"
3. "Doors and windows"
4. "Automatic doors"
5. Select the desired function.
Operation of individual doors:
Icon Meaning
Open the closed door.
Close the open door.
Stop the door movement.
Seite 85
Opening and closing
CONTROLS
85
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A88D30 - VI/23
OwnersManuals2.com
Access to the cargo area
General information
It may not be possible to open the cargo area
when the vehicle is in valet parking mode.
Additional information:
Valet parking mode, refer to page 95.
Safety information
Warning
Body parts can be jammed when operating
the trunk lid. There is a risk of injury. Make
sure that the travel path of the trunk lid is
clear while opening and closing.
Warning
While opening, the trunk lid pivots back and
up. There is a risk of injury and risk of dam-
age to property. Make sure that the travel
path of the trunk lid is clear while opening
and closing.
With the vehicle key
General information
To avoid locking the vehicle key in the vehicle,
do not place the vehicle key in the cargo area.
Depending on vehicle equipment and national-
market version, the following settings can be
changed:
▷
Unlocking the cargo area with the vehicle
key also unlocks the doors.
▷ Before unlocking the cargo area with the
vehicle key, first unlock the vehicle.
Functional requirements
Selector lever position P must be engaged to
open the cargo area with the vehicle key.
You must enable the setting for opening with
the vehicle key.
Additional information:
Settings, refer to page 95.
Opening the trunk
Press and hold the button on the vehi-
cle key for approx. 1 second.
On the trunk
General information
With Comfort Access, the cargo area can be
accessed without activating the vehicle key.
The key is automatically detected near the ve-
hicle.
Depending on the national-market version,
compatible smartphones with a digital key are
also detected automatically. In this case, the
cargo area can be opened with a smartphone.
Additional information:
BMW Digital Key, refer to page 90.
Functional prerequisites
▷
Carry the vehicle key with you, e.g., in your
pants pocket.
▷ Bluetooth must be activated on the smart-
phone to detect the Digital Key.
Opening the trunk
Seite 86
CONTROLS
Opening and closing
86
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A88D30 - VI/23
OwnersManuals2.com
▷ Unlock the vehicle and then press the but-
ton on the trunk.
▷ With Comfort Access: carry the vehicle key
with you and press the button on the trunk.
Locked doors are not unlocked.
Closing the cargo area
▷ Press the button on the trunk.
▷ Press the button on the trunk.
The vehicle is locked after closing
the cargo area. To do so, the driv-
er's door must be closed and the vehicle
key must be outside of the vehicle near the
cargo area.
▷ Pull the trunk lid down slightly. The trunk lid
closes automatically.
In the interior
Functional prerequisite
The vehicle key or digital key must be located
inside the vehicle in order to close the cargo
area using the button in the vehicle interior.
Opening the trunk
Press the button in the driver's door.
Closing the cargo area
Pull and hold the button in the driver's
door.
An acoustic signal sounds before the trunk is
closed.
Interruption of the opening
procedure
The opening procedure is interrupted in the
following situations:
▷ When the vehicle starts moving.
▷ By pressing the button on the outside of
the cargo area. Pressing it again closes the
cargo area again.
▷ By pressing the button on the inside of the
cargo area. Pressing it again closes the
cargo area again.
▷ By pressing the button on the vehicle key.
Pressing the button again continues the
opening process.
▷ By pressing or pulling the button in the
driver's door. Pressing again continues the
opening procedure.
Interruption of the closing procedure
The closing procedure is interrupted in the fol-
lowing situations:
▷
If the vehicle drives off with a jerky move-
ment.
▷ By pressing the button on the outside of
the cargo area. Pressing it again opens the
cargo area again.
▷ By pressing the button on the inside of
the cargo area. Pressing it again opens the
cargo area again.
▷ By releasing the button in the driver's door.
Pulling again and holding continues the
closing motion.
Seite 87
Opening and closing
CONTROLS
87
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A88D30 - VI/23
OwnersManuals2.com
Opening and closing the cargo area
contactlessly
Principle
You can open the cargo area contactlessly
when carrying the vehicle key on your person.
With automatic tailgate activation, the cargo
area can also be closed contactlessly.
Two sensors detect a forward-directed foot
movement in the central rear area and the
cargo area is opened or closed.
General information
Function availability depends on vehicle equip-
ment and national-market version.
If the vehicle key is within the sensor range, the
cargo area may open or close inadvertently if
you unintentionally move your foot or if a foot
movement is detected.
The sensor has an approximate range of
5 ft/1.50 m extending from the rear area.
If contactless opening is used for the cargo
area, the locked doors will not be unlocked.
Depending on the national-market version,
contactless opening and closing of the cargo
area is also possible for compatible smart-
phones with a Digital Key.
Additional information:
BMW Digital Key, refer to page 90.
Safety information
Warning
During no-touch activation, vehicle parts may
be touched such as the hot exhaust system.
There is a risk of injury. When moving your
foot, make sure you have a firm stance and
do not touch the vehicle.
Warning
Body parts can be jammed when operating
the trunk lid. There is a risk of injury. Make
sure that the travel path of the trunk lid is
clear while opening and closing.
Warning
While opening, the trunk lid pivots back and
up. There is a risk of injury and risk of dam-
age to property. Make sure that the travel
path of the trunk lid is clear while opening
and closing.
Functional requirements
▷ To close the cargo area contactlessly, the
automatic tailgate must be installed.
▷ To open and close the cargo area contact-
lessly, selector lever position P must be en-
gaged.
▷ Contactless opening and closing of the
trunk must be activated in the settings.
▷ Bluetooth must be activated on the smart-
phone to open and close the cargo area
contactlessly using the Digital Key.
Additional information:
Settings, refer to page 95.
Opening the cargo area
1.
Stand in the middle behind the vehicle at
approx. one arm's length away from the
rear of the vehicle.
2. Wave a foot under the vehicle in the driv-
ing direction and immediately pull it back.
Seite 88
CONTROLS
Opening and closing
88
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A88D30 - VI/23
OwnersManuals2.com
With these movements, the leg must pass
through the ranges of both sensors.
Before the cargo area opens, the hazard warn-
ing system flashes.
Moving a foot again will stop the opening proc-
cedure. The subsequent foot movement will
close the cargo area again.
Closing the cargo area
Perform the foot movement for opening the
cargo area.
The hazard warning system flashes and an
acoustic signal sounds.
Moving a foot again will stop the closing proc-
ess. The subsequent foot movement will open
the cargo area again.
System limits
The detection of the foot movement may be
limited due to the following external conditions:
▷
Ice, snow or slush on the rear of the vehicle.
▷ Dirt or road salt on the rear of the vehicle.
Movement in range of the sensors may cause
unintended opening of the cargo area, for in-
stance due to water running down when clean-
ing the vehicle or with heavy rainfall. To pre-
vent such unintended opening of the cargo
area in such cases, keep the vehicle key at a
sufficient distance from the rear of the vehicle.
Trunk emergency unlocking
Pull the handle inside the cargo area.
The trunk is unlocked.
Malfunction
In the event of an electrical malfunction, oper-
ate the unlocked trunk lid manually with a slow
and smooth motion.
Key Card
Principle
The Key Card allows the vehicle to be unlocked
and locked, as well as started.
General information
Key Card availability depends on vehicle equip-
ment and national-market version.
A digital key that has already been paired with
the vehicle is installed on the Key Card. The
digital key must be activated via iDrive.
Before leaving the vehicle, deactivate the Key
Card or take the Key Card with you because
the active Key Card can be used to start the
vehicle. Always take the vehicle key with you to
a service appointment.
Seite 89
Opening and closing
CONTROLS
89
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A88D30 - VI/23
OwnersManuals2.com
Safety information
NOTICE
If the Key Card and a mobile device are in the
wireless charging tray at the same time, the
Key Card could become damaged. There is a
risk of damage to property. Do not place the
Key Card in the wireless charging tray at the
same time as a mobile device.
Activating/deactivating Key Card in
the vehicle
General information
When the BMW Digital Key is activated for the
vehicle, a digital key can be used instead of the
vehicle key.
A deactivated Key Card remains in the list of
paired digital keys.
Functional requirement
A vehicle key must be located in the vehicle to
activate and deactivate the Key Card.
Activating Key Card
1.
Place Key Card in the center of the smart-
phone tray.
2. Follow instructions on the control display.
Deactivating Key Card
1.
Apps menu
2. "Vehicle"
3. "Doors and windows"
4. "Digital Key"
5. "Key Card"
6. "Deactivate Key Card"
A deactivated Key Card remains in the list of
paired digital keys.
Unlocking and locking the vehicle
The vehicle can be unlocked and locked with
the activated Key Card.
Additional information:
Access to the vehicle interior, refer to page 78.
Turning on the drive-ready state
1.
Place activated Key Card in the center of
the smartphone tray.
2. Press the Start/Stop button.
After drive-ready state is switched on, the Key
Card can be removed from the tray.
Malfunction
The detection of the Key Card by the vehicle
may be disrupted by objects between the sen-
sors and the Key Card such as a wallet or a
smartphone cover.
BMW Digital Key
Principle
BMW Digital Key allows the vehicle to be un-
locked and locked, as well as started, with a
compatible smartphone.
Seite 90
CONTROLS
Opening and closing
90
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A88D30 - VI/23
OwnersManuals2.com
General information
BMW Digital Key availability and functionality
depend on vehicle equipment and national-
market version.
BMW Digital Key can be used with a compat-
ible smartphone or other compatible mobile
devices.
To unlock and start a vehicle with a compatible
smartphone, this function must be offered by
the smartphone manufacturer. The My BMW
app can be used to check if the smartphone
and vehicle are compatible and which func-
tions are supported.
A BMW ID or a driver profile with individual
settings can be assigned to a digital key.
When using a smartphone as a digital key, it is
helpful to carry the deactivated Key Card in the
vehicle. In situations where the vehicle is to be
given to another person, they can be given the
Key Card instead of the smartphone. To do so,
the Key Card must be activated via iDrive.
Always take the vehicle key with you to a serv-
ice appointment.
Additional information:
▷
BMW ID/driver profiles, refer to page 69.
▷ Key Card, refer to page 89.
▷ www.bmw.com/digitalkey
Functional requirements
▷
The smartphone is compatible with BMW
Digital Key
▷ The vehicle is linked with the Connected-
Drive account of the vehicle owner.
▷ The rechargeable battery of the smart-
phone has a sufficient charge. The neces-
sary minimum charge of the rechargeable
battery depends on the smartphone.
Enabling the main digital key
Vehicle owner's smartphone is enabled as a
main digital key in the vehicle. The vehicle
owner must prove his authorization for the ve-
hicle for this purpose.
You can begin the authorization process us-
ing the My BMW app or using your activation
code in the corresponding smartphone func-
tion, e.g., the Wallet app. Both vehicle keys
must be in the vehicle during activation.
Follow the activation instructions in the Digital
Key menu in the app or on the control display.
Sharing digital keys
General information
Digital key allows the sharing of digital keys
with other people. This option is available via
the smartphone that is enabled as main digital
key. This function must be supported by the
smartphone.
Forwarding authorization
To share the digital key, select the correspond-
ing function on the smartphone, for instance in
the Wallet app.
As soon as a digital key is shared with another
person, the person will receive an invitation.
When the invitation is accepted, the digital key
on the recipient's smartphone will be activated.
Limiting the range of functions
Certain functions of the digital key can be lim-
ited before handing it over. For instance, if the
Digital Key is passed on to a novice driver, the
switch-off for driving stability control systems
can be disabled and the engine power can
be reduced. For more information, refer to the
ConnectedDrive Portal and My BMW app.
Authentication
Depending on the recipient’s smartphone
model, an authentication may be required for
security and safety reasons.
An authorized vehicle key, the main digital key
or another method may be used for authenti-
Seite 91
Opening and closing
CONTROLS
91
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A88D30 - VI/23
OwnersManuals2.com
cation. Follow the corresponding instructions
on the smartphone or the control display.
Deleting digital keys
General information
Deleted digital keys will be removed from the
list of enabled digital keys.
Deleted digital keys cannot be restored.
Deleting the main digital key
The main digital key can be deleted from the
smartphone or via iDrive.
The deletion of the main digital key is com-
pleted immediately.
Deleting a shared key
Shared keys can be deleted using the smart-
phone with the master Digital Key, using the
smartphone with the shared key to be deleted,
or via iDrive.
The deletion via the smartphone using the
main digital key will not be performed until the
vehicle is used with a key other than the key to
be deleted.
If the smartphone associated with a shared
key or iDrive is used to delete a shared key, it
will be deleted immediately.
Deletion via iDrive
To delete a digital key via iDrive, there must be
an authorized vehicle key in the vehicle, or the
master Digital Key must be in the smartphone
tray.
1.
Apps menu
2. "Vehicle"
3. "Doors and windows"
4. "Digital Key"
5. If necessary, select the digital key.
6. Delete the Digital Key.
Resetting the function
To reset the BMW Digital Key function, an au-
thorized vehicle key must be located in the ve-
hicle.
When resetting the BMW Digital Key function,
all digital keys including the main digital key
will be deleted. The Key Card digital key is not
deleted.
After the reset, the vehicle can no longer be
unlocked, locked or started with a digital key.
The main digital key must be enabled again to
be able to use BMW Digital Key again.
1.
Apps menu
2. "Vehicle"
3. "Doors and windows"
4. "Digital Key"
5. "Reset function"
Unlocking and locking the vehicle
The vehicle can be unlocked and locked as fol-
lows:
▷
Via the external door handle.
▷ With Comfort Access: depending on the na-
tional-market version, the vehicle can be
locked and unlocked with no-touch activa-
tion.
Bluetooth must be activated on the smart-
phone for contactless unlocking and locking
using the Digital Key.
BMW Digital Key availability and function-
ality depend on vehicle equipment and na-
tional-market version.
Additional information:
Access to the vehicle interior, refer to page 78.
Seite 92
CONTROLS
Opening and closing
92
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A88D30 - VI/23
OwnersManuals2.com
Turning on the drive-ready state
Using the smartphone tray
1. Place smartphone in the center of the
smartphone tray.
Ensure that the display is facing up.
2. Press the Start/Stop button to turn on the
drive-ready state.
In the interior
With Comfort Access, it is sufficient, depending
on the country, for the smartphone with Blue-
tooth activated to be located inside the vehi-
cle. Press the Start/Stop button to turn on the
drive-ready state.
Sale of the smartphone
Delete all digital keys on the smartphone prior
to selling the smartphone. This ensures that
the smartphone can no longer be used for the
vehicle.
Changing smartphones
To use a new smartphone as a master Digital
Key, activate the new smartphone according to
the instructions for the master Digital Key. The
previous master key is deleted when the new
smartphone is activated.
Sale of the vehicle
Prior to selling a vehicle, reset the Digital
Key function or remove the vehicle from the
ConnectedDrive account of the current vehicle
owner.
When the vehicle is removed from the Con-
nectedDrive account, all digital keys for the ve-
hicle will be deleted. The Key Card digital key is
not deleted.
System limits
The interior motion sensor and tilt alarm sen-
sor of the alarm system cannot be switched off
with a digital key.
Additional information:
Alarm system, refer to page 97.
Malfunction
Digital key recognition by the vehicle may mal-
function under the following circumstances:
▷ The smartphone is shielded from the sen-
sors in the vehicle by a smartphone cover
that is not suitable.
▷ Objects such as a chip card or the Key Card
are located between the smartphone and
the smartphone cover.
▷ Fault of the connection from transmission
towers or other equipment with high trans-
mitting power.
▷ Shielding of the smartphone due to build-
ings or metal objects.
Buttons for the central
locking system
General information
The vehicle is automatically locked when driv-
ing off.
In the event of a severe accident, the vehicle
is automatically unlocked. The hazard warning
system and interior lights are illuminated.
Seite 93
Opening and closing
CONTROLS
93
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A88D30 - VI/23
OwnersManuals2.com
Overview
The central locking buttons are located on the
front door.
Locking the vehicle
Press the button in the driver's door
or front passengers door with the front
doors closed.
The fuel filler flap remains unlocked.
The vehicle is not secured against theft when
locking.
Unlocking the vehicle
Press the button.
Opening the door
Press the button.
The door is unlocked and slightly open.
Push the door outward.
Opening and closing automatic
doors
The automatic doors can be opened and
closed automatically or manually.
Additional information:
Automatic doors, refer to page 82.
Malfunction
General information
In case of a power failure, the doors can be
unlocked manually.
Unlocking the door manually
Pull the lever in the door to unlock it.
Soft-close automatic
function
Principle
The soft-close automatic function reduces ef-
fort and noise when closing vehicle doors.
The door can be pushed into the door lock
without effort and the door will close automati-
cally.
Safety information
Warning
Body parts can be jammed while operating
the doors. There is a risk of injury. Make sure
that the area of movement of the doors is
clear while opening and closing.
Closing
To close the doors, push lightly.
Seite 94
CONTROLS
Opening and closing
94
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A88D30 - VI/23
OwnersManuals2.com
The closing process is automatic.
Valet parking mode
Principle
In the valet parking mode, the control display is
disabled.
E.g., this mode can be used when the vehicle
is handed over for valet parking.
General information
Depending on the national-market version, the
valet parking mode may not be available.
Valet Parking mode has the following restric-
tions:
▷ Vehicle settings cannot be changed via
iDrive.
▷ Settings stored to a BMW ID or guest pro-
file cannot be changed.
▷ Personal data cannot be displayed.
▷ The volume of the audio system is limited.
▷ The integrated Universal Remote Control is
deactivated.
▷ Dynamic Stability Control cannot be turned
off.
▷ The availability of certain settings of the
driving modes is limited.
Additional information:
BMW ID/driver profiles, refer to page 69.
Functional requirement
The driver has registered in the vehicle with a
BMW ID.
Activating the valet parking mode
1.
Apps menu
2. "Vehicle"
3. "System settings"
4. "Valet parking mode"
5. "Lock tailgate"
The cargo area is locked and disconnected
from the central locking system.
6. If necessary, "PIN"
If the active BMW ID does not have an as-
signed PIN, this PIN must be set now. The
PIN is needed to deactivate the valet park-
ing mode.
7. If necessary, enter the PIN.
8. "Activate valet parking mode"
Deactivating valet parking mode
1.
Select the desired BMW ID on the lock
screen.
2.
▷ Enter the assigned PIN for the BMW ID.
If you have forgotten the PIN: enter the
access data for the BMW ID.
▷ If the selected BMW ID does not have
an assigned PIN: enter the access data
for the BMW ID.
Settings
General information
Depending on the equipment and national-
market version, various settings for opening
and closing are possible.
Unlocking and locking
Doors
1.
Apps menu
2. "Vehicle"
3. "Doors and windows"
4. "Lock/unlock"
5. "Unlock"
6. Select the desired setting:
▷ "Driver's door only"
Seite 95
Opening and closing
CONTROLS
95
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A88D30 - VI/23
OwnersManuals2.com
Only the driver's door and the fuel filler
flap are unlocked. Pressing again un-
locks the entire vehicle.
▷ "All doors"
The entire vehicle is unlocked.
Touchless unlocking/locking
1. Apps menu
2. "Vehicle"
3. "Doors and windows"
4. "Comfort access"
5. Select the desired setting.
Automatic unlocking
1.
Apps menu
2. "Vehicle"
3. "Doors and windows"
4. "Lock/unlock"
5. Select the desired setting:
▷ "Unlock doors at end of trip"
▷ "Unlock doors when in P"
After drive-ready state is switched off, the
locked vehicle is unlocked automatically by
pressing the start/stop button or engaging se-
lector lever position P.
Automatic locking
1.
Apps menu
2. "Vehicle"
3. "Doors and windows"
4. "Lock/unlock"
5. "Lock after a short time"
The vehicle locks automatically after a short
period of time if no door is opened after un-
locking.
Confirmation signals from the vehicle
1.
Apps menu
2. "Vehicle"
3. "Doors and windows"
4. "Lock/unlock"
5. Select the desired setting:
▷ "Flash when unlocking"
Unlocking is confirmed by two flashes.
▷ "Flash when locking"
Locking is confirmed by one flash.
▷ With alarm system:
"Sound on lock/unlock"
Unlocking is confirmed with two sound
signals, locking is confirmed with one
sound signal.
Folding mirrors in automatically
1.
Apps menu
2. "Vehicle"
3. "Doors and windows"
4. "Lock/unlock"
5. "Fold mirrors on lock/unlock"
Automatic doors
Operation using the brake pedal
The driver’s door can be configured to close by
pressing the brake pedal.
1.
Apps menu
2. "Vehicle"
3. "Doors and windows"
4. "Automatic doors"
5. "Settings"
6. "Close door with brake"
7. Select the desired setting.
Opening and closing the driver's door
contactlessly
1.
Apps menu
2. "Vehicle"
3. "Doors and windows"
Seite 96
CONTROLS
Opening and closing
96
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A88D30 - VI/23
OwnersManuals2.com
4. "Automatic doors"
5. "Settings"
6. Opening and closing automatically
7. Select the desired setting.
Cargo area
Cargo area and doors
1. Apps menu
2. "Vehicle"
3. "Doors and windows"
4. "Tailgate"
5. Select the desired setting:
▷ "Tailgate"
Depending on the equipment, the cargo
area will be unlocked or opened.
▷ "Tailgate and door(s)"
Depending on the equipment, the trunk
will be unlocked or opened and the
doors are unlocked.
▷ "Tailgate will only open if vehicle is
already unlocked"
The vehicle must be unlocked before
the cargo area can be operated with the
vehicle key.
▷ "Lock tailgate button"
Operating the cargo area with the vehi-
cle key is disabled.
Opening/closing the cargo area
contactlessly
1.
Apps menu
2. "Vehicle"
3. "Doors and windows"
4. "Tailgate"
5. Select the desired setting.
Closing the sun protection
automatically
It is possible to configure whether the roller
sunblind closes automatically when the vehicle
is locked.
1. Apps menu
2. "Vehicle"
3. "Doors and windows"
4. "Close roof blind automatically"
5. Select the desired setting.
Alarm system
Principle
The alarm system issues a visual and acoustic
signal when someone attempts to open the
locked vehicle incorrectly.
General information
When the vehicle is locked, the vehicle alarm
system reacts to the following changes:
▷
Opening a door, the hood, or the cargo
area.
▷ Movements in the interior.
▷ Changes in the vehicle inclination such as
during attempts at stealing a wheel or
when towing the vehicle.
▷ Disconnected battery voltage.
▷ Improper use of the socket for OBD on-
board diagnostics.
▷ Locking the vehicle while a device is con-
nected to the diagnostic socket.
The alarm system signals these changes visu-
ally and acoustically:
▷
Acoustic alarm:
Depending on local regulations, the acous-
tic alarm may be suppressed.
▷ Optical alarm:
Seite 97
Opening and closing
CONTROLS
97
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A88D30 - VI/23
OwnersManuals2.com
By flashing of the hazard warning system
and headlights, where required.
Do not modify the system to ensure function of
the alarm system.
Turning the alarm system on/off
The alarm system is turned on as soon as the
vehicle is locked from the outside.
The alarm system is not switched on if the
vehicle is locked from a greater distance with
the My BMW App or manually from the inside.
The alarm system is switched off as soon as
the vehicle is unlocked.
Opening the doors with the alarm
system switched on
The alarm system is triggered when a door
is opened if the door was unlocked using the
integrated key in the door lock.
Opening the cargo area with the
alarm system switched on
The cargo area can be opened even when the
alarm system is switched on.
After closing the cargo area, the cargo area will
be locked and monitored again. The hazard
warning system flashes once during closing.
Panic mode
You can trigger the alarm system if you find
yourself in a dangerous situation.
▷
Press the button on the vehicle key
and hold for at least 3 seconds.
▷ Briefly press the button on the vehi-
cle key three times in succession.
To switch off the alarm: press any button.
Indicator light on the interior mirror
▷ The indicator light flashes briefly every
2 seconds:
The alarm system is switched on.
▷ The indicator light flashes for approx.
10 seconds, then flashes briefly every
2 seconds:
Interior motion sensor and tilt alarm sensor
are not active, as doors, hood, or tailgate
are not correctly closed. Correctly closed
access points are secured.
When the remaining open access points
are closed, the interior motion sensor and
tilt alarm sensor will be turned on.
▷ The indicator light flashes even though all
access points have been closed:
Alarm system error.
▷ The indicator light goes out after unlocking:
The vehicle has not been tampered with.
▷ The indicator light flashes after unlocking
until drive-ready state is switched on, but
no longer than approx. 5 minutes:
The alarm has been triggered.
Tilt alarm sensor
The inclination of the vehicle is monitored.
The alarm system responds in situations such
as attempts to steal a wheel or when the vehi-
cle is towed.
Interior motion sensor
The vehicle interior is monitored.
Seite 98
CONTROLS
Opening and closing
98
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A88D30 - VI/23
OwnersManuals2.com
The alarm system responds when movement
is detected in the vehicle interior.
The windows must be closed for the system to
function properly.
When the BMW Theater Screen is folded out,
movement in the rear is only detected to a lim-
ited extent.
Avoiding unintentional alarms
General information
The tilt alarm sensor and interior motion sen-
sor can trigger an alarm, although no unau-
thorized action occurred.
Possible situations for an unwanted alarm:
▷ In car washes.
▷ In duplex garages.
▷ During transport on trains carrying vehicles,
at sea or on a trailer.
▷ With animals in the vehicle.
▷ When the vehicle is locked after start of re-
fueling.
The tilt alarm sensor and the interior motion
sensor can be switched off in such situations.
Switching off the tilt alarm sensor and
interior motion sensor
▷
Press the button on the vehicle key
within 30 seconds as soon as the
vehicle is locked.
The indicator light illuminates for approx.
2 seconds and then continues to flash.
▷ After turning off the standby state, an
option to turn off the interior motion sensor
and the tilt alarm sensor will be displayed
on the control display.
The tilt alarm sensor and interior motion sen-
sor are switched off until the vehicle is locked
again.
Ending the alarm
Unlock the vehicle.
If the vehicle is unlocked with the integrated
key, the drive-ready state must subsequently
be turned on via the emergency detection of
the vehicle key.
Window
General information
When a window is frequently opened to the
same position, this task can be performed by
the BMW Intelligent Personal Assistant. This is
useful if you frequently use the same parking
garage, for example.
Additional information:
BMW Intelligent Personal Assistant, refer to
page 53.
Safety information
Warning
When operating the windows, body parts and
objects can be jammed. There is a risk of in-
jury or risk of damage to property. Make sure
that the travel path of the windows is clear
while opening and closing.
With the vehicle key
Opening windows
Press and hold the button on the vehi-
cle key after unlocking.
The windows open for as long as the button
on the vehicle key is pressed.
Closing the windows
With Comfort Access: press and hold
the button on the vehicle key after lock-
ing.
Seite 99
Opening and closing
CONTROLS
99
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A88D30 - VI/23
OwnersManuals2.com
The windows close for as long as the button
on the vehicle key is pressed.
Depending on the vehicle equipment, exterior
mirrors are folded in unless they were folded
in while locking. The exterior mirrors are not
folded in when the hazard warning flashers are
switched on.
On the external door handle
Principle
The windows can be closed using the external
door handle without operating the vehicle key.
The vehicle key is automatically detected near
the vehicle.
General information
The function is available with Comfort Access.
Depending on the national-market version, the
windows can also be closed at the external
door handle with compatible smartphones with
digital key.
Additional information:
BMW Digital Key, refer to page 90.
Functional prerequisites
▷
Carry the vehicle key with you, for instance
in your pants pocket.
▷ Bluetooth must be activated on the smart-
phone to close the window(s) using the dig-
ital key.
Closing the windows
Touch the grooved surface on the external
door handle of a closed front door with your
finger and hold it there without grasping the
recessed grip.
In addition to locking, the windows also closed.
Depending on the vehicle equipment, exterior
mirrors are folded in unless they were folded
in while locking. The exterior mirrors are not
folded in when the hazard warning flashers are
switched on.
In the interior
Overview
Power windows
Functional requirements
▷
Standby state is switched on.
▷ Drive-ready state is switched on.
The vehicle key or a digital key must be inside
of the vehicle.
Seite 100
CONTROLS
Opening and closing
100
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A88D30 - VI/23
OwnersManuals2.com
Opening windows
▷ Press the switch to the resistance
point.
The window opens while the switch
is being held.
▷ Press the switch beyond the resist-
ance point.
The window opens automatically.
Pressing the switch again stops the motion.
Closing the windows
▷ Pull the switch to the resistance
point.
The window closes while the switch
is being held.
▷ Pull the switch beyond the resist-
ance point.
The window closes automatically.
Pulling again stops the motion.
Jam protection system
Principle
The jam protection prevents objects or body
parts becoming jammed between the door
frame and window while a window is being
closed.
General information
If resistance or blockage is detected while a
window is being closed, the closing will be in-
terrupted.
Safety information
Warning
Accessories on the windows such as anten-
nas can impact jam protection. There is a
risk of injury. Do not install accessories in the
area of movement of the windows.
Closing without the jam protection
system
In case of danger from the outside or if icing
might prevent normal closing, proceed as fol-
lows:
1. Pull the switch past the resistance
point and hold it there.
The window closes with limited jam protec-
tion. If the closing force exceeds a specific
threshold, closing is interrupted.
2. Pull the switch past the resistance
point again within approx. 4 seconds and
hold it there.
The window closes without jam protection.
Window roller sunblinds
General information
The safety switch in the driver's door can be
used to prevent, for instance, children from op-
erating the roller sunblinds at the rear using
BMW Touch Command.
Safety information
NOTICE
When operating the roller sunblind, objects
stored on the rear shelf may damage the
roller sunblind. There is a risk of damage to
property. Make sure that the area of move-
ment of the roller sunblind is clear during the
operation.
Seite 101
Opening and closing
CONTROLS
101
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A88D30 - VI/23
OwnersManuals2.com
Overview of rear doors
BMW Touch Command for operating the roller
sunblinds.
Functional requirement
The affected window must be closed.
Operation
On the control display
1.
Apps menu
2. "Vehicle"
3. "Doors and windows"
4. "Sun blinds"
5. Select the desired function.
On the rear doors
Apply the setting using BMW Touch Com-
mand.
1.
Tap on the icon.
The main menu is displayed.
2. "Sun protection"
3. Tap the desired sun protection on the BMW
Touch Command.
To open or close, tap the desired side sun pro-
tection.
If you tap the sun protection again while it is
moving, the sun protection moves in the oppo-
site direction.
To open or close, tap the rear window sun pro-
tection.
If you tap the sun protection again while it is
moving, the sun protection moves in the oppo-
site direction.
Icon
Function
Open all roller sunblinds.
Close all roller sunblinds.
System limits
If you are no longer able to move the roller
sunblinds after having activated them consec-
utively a number of times, the overheating pro-
tection mechanism is active. The system is dis-
abled for a limited time to prevent overheating.
Let the system cool down.
Seite 102
CONTROLS
Opening and closing
102
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A88D30 - VI/23
OwnersManuals2.com
The side roller sunblinds cannot be moved at
low interior temperatures.
Safety switch
Principle
With the safety switch, it is possible to disable
particular functions in the rear. The locking of
functions is useful, for instance, when children
or animals are carried in the rear.
General information
The following functions can be disabled by
pressing the safety switch:
▷ Open and close the rear windows using the
switches in the rear or with the vehicle key.
▷ Open and close the roller sunblinds.
▷ Opening of rear doors by passengers in the
rear.
The rear doors can only be opened from
the outside.
▷ Unfold the BMW Theater Screen.
Overview
Safety switch
Turning the safety functions on/off
Press the button.
The LED in the button illuminates when the
safety function is switched on.
Seite 103
Opening and closing
CONTROLS
103
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A88D30 - VI/23
OwnersManuals2.com
Seats, mirrors and steering wheel
Vehicle features and options
This chapter describes model-specific equip-
ment, systems, and functions that are currently
available, or may become available in the fu-
ture, even if they are not present in the vehicle.
Additional information:
Vehicle equipment, refer to page 8.
Sitting safely
An ideal seat position that meets the needs of
the occupants can make a vital contribution to
relaxed, fatigue-free driving.
In the event of an accident, the correct seat
position plays an important role. Follow the in-
formation in the following chapters.
Additional information:
▷ Seats, refer to page 104.
▷ Seat belts, refer to page 110.
▷ Head restraints, refer to page 112.
▷ Airbags, refer to page 174.
Seats, front
Safety information
Warning
Seat setting while driving can lead to unex-
pected movements of the seat. Vehicle con-
trol could be lost. There is a risk of accident.
Only adjust the seat on the driver's side when
the vehicle is stationary.
Warning
With a backrest inclined too far to the rear,
the protective effect of the seat belt can no
longer be ensured. There is a risk of sliding
under the seat belt in an accident. There is a
risk of injury or danger to life. Adjust the seat
prior to starting the trip. Adjust the backrest
so that it is in the most upright position as
possible and do not adjust again while driv-
ing.
Warning
There is a danger of jamming when moving
the seats. There is a risk of injury or risk
of damage to property. Make sure that the
travel path of the seat is clear prior to any
adjustment.
Adjusting seats
General information
The current seat position can be stored using
the memory function.
Overview
The switches for the seat settings are located
at the front doors.
Seite 104
CONTROLS
Seats, mirrors and steering wheel
104
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A88D30 - VI/23
OwnersManuals2.com
Seat settings menu
The seat adjustment menu button is located
on the front door.
Press the button to go directly to the
seat settings menu on the control dis-
play.
Setting the longitudinal direction
Press switch forward or backward.
Adjusting the height
Press switch up or down.
Adjusting seat tilt
Tilt switch up or down.
Adjusting backrest tilt
Tilt switch forward or backward.
Adjusting the seat position
automatically
General information
The seat setting for the driver's seat is stored
in the active BMW ID or in the active driver
profile. If the BMW ID or the driver profile is
reactivated at a later time, the saved position
will be called up automatically.
Activate/deactivate the function
1.
Apps menu
2. "Vehicle"
3. "Seat comfort"
4. Select driver’s seat.
5. "Use automatically"
6. Select the desired setting.
Seite 105
Seats, mirrors and steering wheel
CONTROLS
105
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A88D30 - VI/23
OwnersManuals2.com
Thigh support
Multifunctional seat
1. Apps menu
2. "Vehicle"
3. "Seat comfort"
4. Select desired seat.
5. Select the desired function.
6. Select the desired setting.
Comfort adjustment
Principle
The thigh rest adjusts automatically when the
longitudinal direction is adjusted.
Activate/deactivate the function
1.
Apps menu
2. "Vehicle"
3. "Seat comfort"
4. Select desired seat.
5. "Comf. adjustm."
Lumbar support
Principle
The curvature of the seat backrest can be ad-
justed in a way that it supports the lumbar
region of the spine. The lower back and the
spine are supported for upright sitting position.
Adjusting the lumbar support
1.
Apps menu
2. "Vehicle"
3. "Seat comfort"
4. Select desired seat.
5. Select the desired function.
6. Select the desired setting:
▷ Press arrow left/right:
The curvature is increased/decreased.
▷ Press arrow up/down:
The curvature is shifted up/down.
Functional limitations
The lumbar support cannot be adjusted at very
low temperatures.
Backrest width
Principle
Adjusting the backrest width may improve side
support when cornering.
General information
The backrest width is changed by adjusting
the side sections of the backrest.
When exiting the vehicle, the backrest width
opens completely. The last set position is au-
tomatically applied before you start driving.
Adjusting the backrest width
1.
Apps menu
2. "Vehicle"
3. "Seat comfort"
4. Select desired seat.
5. Select the desired function.
6. Select the desired setting.
Upper backrest
Principle
The upper backrest supports the back in the
shoulder region. A correct setting leads to a
relaxed seat position and reduces strain on the
shoulder muscles.
General information
When exiting the vehicle, the upper backrest
moves all the way back. The last set position is
automatically applied before you start driving.
Seite 106
CONTROLS
Seats, mirrors and steering wheel
106
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A88D30 - VI/23
OwnersManuals2.com
Adjusting the upper backrest
1. Apps menu
2. "Vehicle"
3. "Seat comfort"
4. Select desired seat.
5. Select the desired function.
6. Select the desired setting.
Seat massage
Principle
The seat massage keeps your muscles relaxed
and improves blood circulation in the lumbar
region, which can help avoid fatigue.
Turning the seat massage on/off
1.
Apps menu
2. "Vehicle"
3. "Seat comfort"
4. Select desired seat.
5. "Massage"
6. "Seat massage"
7. Select the desired setting.
The seat massage is stopped when the lumbar
support is operated.
Functional limitations
The massage function is not available at very
low temperatures.
Calibrating the front seats
General information
As soon as the electric seat setting no longer
functions precisely, a Check Control message
is displayed on the control display.
To restore the accuracy of the electric seat set-
ting, the front seats must be calibrated.
Safety information
Warning
There is a danger of jamming when moving
the seats. There is a risk of injury or risk
of damage to property. Make sure that the
travel path of the seat is clear prior to any
adjustment.
Calibrating the front seats
1. Press the longitudinal direction switch for-
ward until the seat stops.
2. Press the switch forward and hold it until
the seat stops moving forward.
3. Readjust the seat to the desired position.
As soon as the message on the control dis-
play disappears, the calibration is complete.
If the message remains active, repeat the cali-
bration.
If the message is still shown after repeated
calibration, have the vehicle checked by an
authorized service center or another qualified
service center or repair shop.
If the vehicle is equipped with Executive
Lounge Seating, have the front passenger seat
calibrated by an authorized service center or
another qualified service center or repair shop.
Rear seats
General information
Adjust the seat settings using BMW Touch
Command.
Depending on vehicle equipment, the following
seat settings are available:
▷
Longitudinal direction.
▷ Seat tilt.
▷ Backrest tilt.
▷ Upper backrest.
Seite 107
Seats, mirrors and steering wheel
CONTROLS
107
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A88D30 - VI/23
OwnersManuals2.com
▷ Lumbar support.
▷ Executive Lounge Seating.
▷ Seat massage.
Safety information
Warning
There is a danger of jamming when moving
the seats. There is a risk of injury or risk
of damage to property. Make sure that the
travel path of the seat is clear prior to any
adjustment.
Warning
There is a danger of jamming when folding
down the center armrest in the rear. There
is a risk of injury. Make sure that the area
of movement of the center armrest is clear
during folding down.
Overview
BMW Touch Command is located in the door
handle of the rear doors.
Adjusting the seats
1.
"Seats"
2. "Adjustment"
3. Select desired seat.
4. Select the desired function.
5. Select the desired setting.
Upper backrest
The upper backrest supports the back in the
shoulder region. A correct setting leads to a
relaxed seat position and reduces strain on the
shoulder muscles.
Lumbar support
General information
The curvature of the seat backrest can be ad-
justed in a way that it supports the lumbar re-
gion of the spine. The lower back and spine
are supported to promote an upright sitting po-
sition.
Functional limitations
The lumbar support cannot be adjusted at very
low temperatures.
Executive Lounge Seating
Principle
The Executive Lounge Seating function ena-
bles rear passengers on the front passenger’s
side to travel more comfortably, e.g., by adjust-
ing different seat functions.
Safety information
Warning
If the front passenger seat is set too far for-
ward, the view from the front passenger win-
dow may be restricted, e.g., on the exterior
mirror. There is a risk of accident. Adjust
the front passenger seat such that the view
from the front passenger window is not ob-
structed.
Seite 108
CONTROLS
Seats, mirrors and steering wheel
108
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A88D30 - VI/23
OwnersManuals2.com
Retrieving the seat position
1. "Seats"
2. "Adjustment"
3. Tap on the icon.
Adjusting the seat position
1. "Seats"
2. "Adjustment"
3. Select desired seat.
4. Select the desired function.
5. Select the desired setting.
Adjusting the front passenger seat
from the rear
The front passenger seat can be operated
from the rear, for instance to increase the leg-
room in the rear.
The front passenger seat can only be adjusted
if no one is sitting on it.
1.
"Seats"
2. "Adjustment"
3. Select desired seat.
4. Select the desired function.
5. Select the desired setting.
Leg rest
If there is sufficient distance between the front
passenger seat and rear seat, the leg rest in
the rear can be folded out electrically using
BMW Touch Command.
The leg rest folds down with excessive load,
for instance when a heavy object is placed on
it. To return to the initial position, grasp the leg
rest with both hands and lift until it clicks into
place.
Footrest
If there is sufficient distance between the front
passenger seat and rear seat, the footrest in
the rear can be folded out using BMW Touch
Command.
Base position
Principle
The passenger side seats can be moved to a
basic position to make it easier to get in and
out of the vehicle.
Moving to the base position
1. "Seats"
2. "Adjustment"
3. Tap on the icon.
Seat massage
Principle
The seat massage keeps your muscles relaxed
and improves blood circulation in the lumbar
region, which can help avoid fatigue.
Turning the seat massage on/off
1.
"Seats"
2. "Massage"
3. "On"
4. Select the desired setting.
Functional limitations
The massage function is not available at very
low temperatures.
Locking the rear seats
Principle
The rear seat adjustment functions can be
locked via the control display. Locking func-
tions is useful, for instance, when children or
animals are carried in the rear.
Seite 109
Seats, mirrors and steering wheel
CONTROLS
109
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A88D30 - VI/23
OwnersManuals2.com
Activating/deactivating the setting
1. Apps menu
2. "Vehicle"
3. "Seat comfort"
4. "Lock rear seats"
5. Select the desired setting.
Comfort exit
Principle
The seat position can be adjusted automati-
cally to make it easier to get in and out of the
vehicle.
General information
Front seats:
▷ The backrest width completely opens tem-
porarily.
▷ The seat moves back.
Rear seats:
▷
The seat moves to the base position.
▷ The leg rest and foot rest move down.
Safety information
Warning
Because the leg rest folds in automatically
when the door is opened, there is a risk that
your leg may be trapped. There is a risk of
injury or risk of damage to property. Before
opening the door, make sure that the leg
rest’s travel path is clear.
Activating/deactivating the setting
Front seats:
1.
Apps menu
2. "Vehicle"
3. "Seat comfort"
4. "Comfort exit"
5. Select the desired setting.
Rear seats:
Depending on vehicle equipment, settings are
applied automatically.
Seat belts
General information
The vehicle is fitted with five seat belts to en-
sure occupant safety. However, they can only
offer protection when adjusted correctly.
Always make sure that seat belts are being
worn by the occupants before driving off. The
airbags supplement the seat belts as an ad-
ditional safety device. The airbags do not re-
place seat belts.
All seat belt anchorage points are designed to
achieve the best possible protective effect for
the seat belts when used properly and with the
correct seat settings.
The two outer seat belt buckles of the rear
seats are intended for the persons sitting on
the left and right.
The center seat belt buckle of the rear seats is
intended for the person sitting in the middle.
Additional information:
Notes on sitting safely, refer to page 104.
Safety information
Warning
Use of a seat belt to buckle more than one
person will potentially defeat the ability of
the seat belt to serve its protective function.
There is a risk of injury or danger to life.
Do not strap in more than one person per
single seat belt. Infants and children are not
allowed on an occupant's lap, but must be
Seite 110
CONTROLS
Seats, mirrors and steering wheel
110
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A88D30 - VI/23
OwnersManuals2.com
transported and secured in designated child
restraint systems.
Warning
The protective effect of safety gear, including
seat belts, can be limited or lost when seat
belts are fastened incorrectly. An incorrectly
fastened seat belt can cause additional inju-
ries, for instance in the event of an accident,
braking or evasive maneuvers. There is a risk
of injury or danger to life. Make sure that all
occupants are wearing seat belts correctly.
Warning
The protective effect of safety gear, including
seat belts, may not be fully operational or fail
in the following situations:
▷ The seat belts or seat belt buckles are
damaged, soiled, or changed in any
other way.
▷ Seat belt tensioners or roll-up mecha-
nism were modified.
Seat belts can be imperceptibly damaged in
the event of an accident. There is a risk of
injury or danger to life. Keep clean and do
not modify seat belts, seat belt buckles, seat
belt tensioners, roll-up mechanisms, and belt
anchors. After an accident, have the seat
belts checked by an authorized service center
or another qualified service center or repair
shop.
Correct use of seat belts
▷
Wear the seat belt tight to your body over
your lap and shoulders, without twisting it.
▷ Wear the seat belt deep on your hips over
your lap. The seat belt must not press on
your stomach.
▷ Do not rub the seat belt against sharp
edges, or guide it or jam it in across hard
or fragile objects.
▷ Avoid thick clothing.
▷ Re-tighten the seat belt frequently upward
around your upper body area.
Buckling the seat belt
1. Guide the seat belt slowly over shoulder
and hip to put it on.
2. Insert the buckle tongue into the seat belt
buckle. The seat belt buckle must engage
audibly.
To ease accessibility to the seat belt buckle, an
adjustable slider is available on the belt to help
position the buckle when not in use.
Unbuckling the seat belt
1.
Hold down the seat belt firmly.
2. Press the red button in the seat belt buckle.
3. Guide the seat belt back into its roll-up
mechanism.
Seat belt reminder
General information
Make sure that the seat belts are positioned
correctly.
The seat belt reminder becomes active in the
following situations:
Seite 111
Seats, mirrors and steering wheel
CONTROLS
111
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A88D30 - VI/23
OwnersManuals2.com
▷ When the seat belt on the driver's side or
on the passenger's side is not fastened.
▷ When the seat belt is unfastened while driv-
ing.
▷ When objects are lying on a seat.
Display in the instrument cluster
The indicator light in the instrument cluster illu-
minates after turning on the drive-ready state
when the seat belt reminder is active.
A Check Control message is displayed where
applicable. Check whether the seat belt has
been fastened correctly.
Icon Meaning
Seat belt on the driver's seat is
not buckled.
Seat belt on the passenger
seat or another seat in the ve-
hicle is not buckled.
Seat belt is buckled on the cor-
responding seat.
Seat belt is not buckled on the
corresponding seat.
Rear Occupant Alert
Principle
At the end of a trip, the system informs the
driver of the possible presence of occupants on
the rear seats.
General information
If a door with access to the rear row seating
is operated within 30 minutes before starting
off, a message appears on the control display
when the trip is completed and a signal tone
sounds.
If the trip is continued within 30 minutes, the
message is displayed again after the trip has
been completed.
Activate/deactivate the function
1. Apps menu
2. "System settings"
3. "Rear Occupant Alert"
4. Select the desired setting.
Front head restraints
Safety information
Warning
Removal or incorrect adjustment of head re-
straints can cause injuries in the head and
neck area. There is a risk of injury.
▷ Before driving, install the removed head
restraints on the occupied seats.
▷ Adjust the head restraint so its center
supports the back of the head at as
close to eye level as possible.
▷ Adjust the distance so that the head re-
straint is as close as possible to the back
of the head. Adjust the distance via the
backrest tilt as needed.
Warning
Body parts can be jammed when moving the
head restraint. There is a risk of injury. Make
sure that the area of movement is clear when
moving the head restraint.
Warning
Objects on the head restraint reduce the pro-
tective effect in the head and neck area.
There is a risk of injury.
Seite 112
CONTROLS
Seats, mirrors and steering wheel
112
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A88D30 - VI/23
OwnersManuals2.com
▷ Do not use seat or head restraint covers.
▷ Do not hang objects, for instance clothes
hangers, directly on the head restraint.
▷ Only use accessories that have been de-
termined to be safe for attachment to a
head restraint.
▷ Do not use any accessories, for instance
pillows, while driving.
Active head restraint
In the event of a rear-end collision with a
certain severity, the active head restraint auto-
matically reduces the distance from the head.
Have the active head restraint checked and if
necessary replaced in the case of damage or if
it was exposed to an accident.
Adjusting the height
Press switch up or down.
Adjusting the distance: Manual
head restraints
Press the button and push the head restraint
forward or backward.
After setting the distance, make sure that the
head restraint engages correctly.
Setting the distance: Multi-function
seat
The distance to the back of the head is ad-
justed via the backrest inclination.
Adjust the distance so that the head restraint
is as close as possible to the back of the head.
Removing the head restraints
The head restraints cannot be removed.
Rear head restraints
Safety information
Warning
Removal or incorrect adjustment of head re-
straints can cause injuries in the head and
neck area. There is a risk of injury.
▷
Before driving, install the removed head
restraints on the occupied seats.
▷ Adjust the head restraint so its center
supports the back of the head at as
close to eye level as possible.
▷ Adjust the distance so that the head re-
straint is as close as possible to the back
of the head. Adjust the distance via the
backrest tilt as needed.
Warning
Body parts can be jammed when moving the
head restraint. There is a risk of injury. Make
sure that the area of movement is clear when
moving the head restraint.
Seite 113
Seats, mirrors and steering wheel
CONTROLS
113
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A88D30 - VI/23
OwnersManuals2.com
Warning
Objects on the head restraint reduce the pro-
tective effect in the head and neck area.
There is a risk of injury.
▷ Do not use seat or head restraint covers.
▷ Do not hang objects, for instance clothes
hangers, directly on the head restraint.
▷ Only use accessories that have been de-
termined to be safe for attachment to a
head restraint.
▷ Do not use any accessories, for instance
pillows, while driving.
Folding down the middle head
restraint
General information
To improve the view to the rear, the center
head restraint can be folded down. Only fold
down the head restraint if no one will be sitting
in the center seat.
Folding down the head restraint
Press button, arrow 1, and fold the head re-
straint back.
To return the head restraint to its initial posi-
tion, fold the head restraint forward as far as
it will go. Make sure that the head restraint
engages correctly.
Adjusting the height: manual head
restraints
▷ To lower: press the button, arrow 1, and
push the head restraint down.
▷ To raise: push the head restraint up.
After setting the height, make sure that the
head restraint engages correctly.
Adjusting the height: Electric head
restraints
General information
The height adjustment of the head restraint is
deactivated when the safety switch for the rear
windows has been pressed.
Additional information:
Safety switch, refer to page 103.
Adjusting the height
1.
"Seats"
2. Select desired seat.
3. Select the desired function.
4. Select the desired setting.
Removing the head restraint
The head restraints cannot be removed.
Pillow for head restraints in the rear
General information
Cushions can be attached to the outer head
restraints for increased comfort while driving.
Seite 114
CONTROLS
Seats, mirrors and steering wheel
114
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A88D30 - VI/23
OwnersManuals2.com
Safety information
Warning
The protective effect of the head restraints
may be limited or counteracted if the cushion
is incorrectly fitted. There is a risk of injury.
Make sure that the top edge of the cushion is
below the mark.
Attaching cushions
1. Attach the cushion with the clip to the tab
on the back of the head restraint.
2. Bring the head restraint to a sufficiently
high position.
3. Close the push-buttons.
Adjusting the height
Grasp the cushion with both hands and slide it
up or down.
Adjust the height so that the top edge of the
cushion is below the mark, arrow 1.
Exterior mirrors
General information
The front passenger's side exterior mirror is
more curved than the driver's side mirror.
The exterior mirror adjustment is stored in the
active BMW ID or in the active driver profile. If
the BMW ID or the driver profile is reactivated
at a later time, the stored position is called up
automatically.
The current exterior mirror adjustment can be
stored using the memory function.
Safety information
Warning
Objects reflected in the mirror are closer than
they appear. The distance to the road users
behind could be incorrectly estimated, for in-
stance while changing lanes. There is a risk
of accident. Estimate the distance to the traf-
fic behind by looking over your shoulder.
Seite 115
Seats, mirrors and steering wheel
CONTROLS
115
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A88D30 - VI/23
OwnersManuals2.com
Overview
Icon Meaning
Fold the exterior mirror in and out.
Adjust the exterior mirrors.
Select left exterior mirror, Automatic
Curb Monitor.
Select right exterior mirror.
Adjusting the exterior mirrors
Press the button.
The selected exterior mirror moves
along with the button movement.
Selecting the exterior mirror
▷
Press the button to select the left
exterior mirror. The LED illuminates.
▷ Press the button to select the right
exterior mirror. The LED illuminates.
Malfunction
In case of an electrical malfunction, adjust the
exterior mirror by pressing on the edges of the
mirror glass.
Folding in/folding out the exterior
mirrors
NOTICE
Depending on the vehicle width, the vehicle
can be damaged in car washes. There is a
risk of damage to property. Before washing,
fold in the mirrors by hand or with the button.
Press the button.
Folding is possible up to a speed of approx.
15 mph/20 km/h.
Folding the exterior mirrors in and out is help-
ful in the following situations:
▷ In car washes.
▷ On narrow roads.
Exterior mirrors that were folded in are folded
out automatically at a speed of approx.
25 mph/40 km/h.
Automatic heating
Both exterior mirrors are automatically heated
as needed and when the drive-ready state is
switched on.
Automatic dimming
The exterior mirror on the driver's side is au-
tomatically dimmed. Photocells in the interior
mirror are used to control this.
Automatic Curb Monitor
Principle
If reverse gear is engaged, the mirror glass on
the passenger's side is tilted downward. This
improves your view of the curb and other low-
lying obstacles when parking, for instance.
Seite 116
CONTROLS
Seats, mirrors and steering wheel
116
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A88D30 - VI/23
OwnersManuals2.com
Activating the Automatic Curb Monitor
1. Press the button. The LED illumi-
nates.
2. Engage selector lever position R.
Deactivating the Automatic Curb
Monitor
Press the button. The LED illuminates
and the LED of the driver’s side outside
mirror goes out.
Interior mirror, automatic
dimming feature
General information
The interior mirror is dimmed automatically.
Photocells are used for control:
▷ In the mirror glass.
▷ On the rear of the mirror.
Overview
Functional requirements
▷
Keep the photocells clean.
▷ Do not cover the area between the interior
mirror and the windshield.
Steering wheel
Safety information
Warning
Steering wheel adjustments while driving
can lead to unexpected steering wheel move-
ments. Vehicle control could be lost. There is
a risk of accident. Adjust the steering wheel
while the vehicle is stationary only.
Electric steering wheel adjustment
General information
The steering wheel adjustment is stored in the
active BMW ID or in the active driver profile. If
the BMW ID or the driver profile is reactivated
at a later time, the stored position is called up
automatically.
The current steering wheel position can be
stored using the memory function.
To make it easier to enter and get out of the
vehicle, the steering wheel moves temporarily
into the upper position.
Adjusting the steering wheel position
Press the switch to adjust the steering wheel
forward/back position and height to the seat
position.
Seite 117
Seats, mirrors and steering wheel
CONTROLS
117
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A88D30 - VI/23
OwnersManuals2.com
Memory function
Principle
The following settings can be stored and, if
necessary, retrieved using the memory func-
tion:
▷ Seat position.
▷ Exterior mirror adjustment.
▷ Steering wheel position.
▷ Lumbar support position.
▷ Height of the Head-up display.
Safety information
Warning
Using the memory function while driving can
lead to unexpected seat or steering wheel
movements. Vehicle control could be lost.
There is a risk of accident. Only retrieve the
memory function when the vehicle is station-
ary.
Warning
There is a danger of jamming when moving
the seats. There is a risk of injury or risk
of damage to property. Make sure that the
travel path of the seat is clear prior to any
adjustment.
Memory function, front
Overview
The memory buttons are located on the front
doors.
Icon Meaning
SET button
Memory button 1
Memory button 2
Storing settings
Using the button:
1.
Set the desired position.
2. Press the button. The LED illumi-
nates.
3. Press the desired memory button as long
as the LED is illuminated. A signal sounds.
Via iDrive:
1.
Apps menu
2. "Vehicle"
3. "Seat comfort"
4. Select desired seat.
5. "Seat position"
6. Save the desired seat position.
Seite 118
CONTROLS
Seats, mirrors and steering wheel
118
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A88D30 - VI/23
OwnersManuals2.com
Calling up settings
Using the button:
Press the desired memory button 1 or 2.
The stored position is called up.
The procedure stops when a seat setting
switch or one of the memory buttons is
pressed again.
The adjustment of the seat position on the
driver's side is interrupted after a short time
while driving.
Via iDrive:
1.
Apps menu
2. "Vehicle"
3. "Seat comfort"
4. Select desired seat.
5. "Seat position"
6. Select the desired seat position.
Memory function, rear
Overview
The memory function is operated via BMW
Touch Command.
Icon
Meaning
SET button
Memory button 1
Memory button 2
Storing settings
1.
Set the desired position.
2. "SET"
3. Press the desired memory button 1 or 2.
Calling up settings
Press the desired memory button 1 or 2.
The stored position is called up.
The procedure stops when a seat setting
switch or one of the memory buttons is
pressed again.
Seat climate control
Various climate control functions are available
for the seats.
Additional information:
Climate control, refer to page 274.
Seite 119
Seats, mirrors and steering wheel
CONTROLS
119
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A88D30 - VI/23
OwnersManuals2.com
Transporting children safely
Vehicle features and options
This chapter describes model-specific equip-
ment, systems, and functions that are currently
available, or may become available in the fu-
ture, even if they are not present in the vehicle.
Additional information:
Vehicle equipment, refer to page 8.
The right place for children
Safety information
Warning
Unattended children or animals in the vehicle
can cause the vehicle to move and endanger
themselves and traffic, for example, due to
the following actions:
▷ Pressing the Start/Stop button.
▷ Releasing the parking brake.
▷ Opening and closing the doors or win-
dows.
▷ Engaging selector lever position N.
▷ Using vehicle equipment.
There is a risk of accidents or injuries. Do not
leave children or animals unattended in the
vehicle. Take the vehicle key with you when
exiting and lock the vehicle.
Warning
A hot vehicle may result in death to persons,
especially children, or animals. There is a
risk of injury or danger to life. Do not leave
people, especially children, or animals unat-
tended in the vehicle.
Warning
Exposure to intense sunlight can cause child
restraint systems and their components to
become very hot. Persons may sustain burn
injuries when touching the hot components.
There is a risk of injury. Do not expose
the child restraint system to direct sunlight
or cover where necessary. If necessary, let
the child restraint system cool down before
transporting a child. Do not leave children un-
attended in the vehicle.
Children in the rear seat
General information
Accident research shows that the safest place
for children is in the rear seat.
Children younger than 13 years of age or
shorter than 5 ft/150 cm should be transported
in the rear seat in suitable child restraint sys-
tems designed for the age, weight and size
of the child. Children 13 years of age or older
must wear a seat belt as soon as a suitable
child restraint system can no longer be used
due to their age, weight, or size.
Safety information
Warning
The seat belt cannot be fastened correctly
on children shorter than 5 ft/150 cm without
suitable additional child restraint systems.
The protective effect of safety gear, including
seat belts, can be limited or lost when seat
belts are fastened incorrectly. An incorrectly
fastened seat belt can cause additional inju-
ries, for instance in the event of an accident,
braking or evasive maneuvers. There is a risk
of injury or danger to life. Secure children
Seite 120
CONTROLS
Transporting children safely
120
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A88D30 - VI/23
OwnersManuals2.com
shorter than 5 ft/150 cm using suitable child
restraint systems.
Children on the front passenger
seat
General information
Before using a child restraint system on the
front passenger seat, ensure that the front,
knee, and side airbags on the passenger's side
are deactivated.
Additional information:
For automatic deactivation of front passenger
airbags, refer to page 176.
Safety information
Warning
Active front passenger airbags can injure a
child in a child restraint system when the air-
bags are deployed. There is a risk of injury.
Make sure that the front passenger airbags
are deactivated and that the PASSENGER
AIRBAG OFF indicator light illuminates.
Installing child restraint
systems
General information
Pay attention to the specifications and the op-
erating and safety information of the child re-
straint system manufacturer when selecting,
installing, and using child restraint systems.
Safety information
Warning
The protective effect of child restraint sys-
tems and their fastening systems which have
been damaged or exposed to an accident
can be limited or lost. A child cannot be prop-
erly restrained in the event of an accident,
braking or evasive maneuvers. There is a risk
of injury or danger to life.
Do not use child restraint systems which
have been damaged or exposed to an acci-
dent.
If attachment systems have been damaged
or strained by an accident, have them
checked and replaced by an authorized serv-
ice center or another qualified service center
or repair shop.
Warning
The stability of the child restraint system is
limited or compromised with incorrect seat
setting or improper installation of the child
seat. There is a risk of injury or danger to life.
Make sure that the child restraint system fits
securely against the backrest. If possible, ad-
just the backrest tilt for all affected backrests
and correctly adjust the seats. Make sure that
seats and backrests are securely engaged or
locked. If possible and necessary, adjust the
height of the head restraints or remove them.
On the front passenger seat
Deactivating the airbags
Warning
Active front passenger airbags can injure a
child in a child restraint system when the air-
bags are deployed. There is a risk of injury.
Make sure that the front passenger airbags
Seite 121
Transporting children safely
CONTROLS
121
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A88D30 - VI/23
OwnersManuals2.com
are deactivated and that the PASSENGER
AIRBAG OFF indicator light illuminates.
Before installing a child restraint system in the
front passenger seat, make sure that the front,
knee and side airbags on the passenger's side
are deactivated.
Additional information:
For automatic deactivation of front passenger
airbags, refer to page 176.
Seat position and height
After mounting a child restraint system, move
the front passenger seat as far back as it will
go and, if possible, to the lowest position. This
seat position and height ensure the best pos-
sible position for the belt and offers optimal
protection in the event of an accident.
After mounting a universal child restraint sys-
tem, adjust the tilt of the seat backrest so that
the belt is not constrained.
If the upper attachment point of the seat belt
is located in front of the belt guide of the child
restraint seat, move the front passenger seat
carefully forward until the best possible belt
guide position is reached.
Backrest width
Adjustable backrest width: Before installing a
child restraint system on the front passenger
seat, open the backrest width completely. Do
not change the backrest width again and do
not call up a memory position.
Child seat security
The seat belts in the rear and the front pas-
senger seat belt can be permanently locked to
fasten child restraint systems.
Locking the seat belt
1.
Pull out the belt strap completely.
2. Secure the child restraint system with the
seat belt.
3. Allow the belt strap to be pulled in and pull
it tight against the child restraint system.
The seat belt is disabled.
Unlocking the seat belt
1.
Unbuckle the seat belt buckle.
2. Remove the child restraint system.
3. Allow the belt strap to be pulled in com-
pletely.
LATCH child restraint fixing
system
General information
LATCH: Lower Anchors and Tether for Chil-
dren.
Pay attention to the specifications, operating
tips and safety instructions from the child re-
straint system manufacturer when selecting,
installing, and using LATCH child restraint fix-
ing systems.
Seite 122
CONTROLS
Transporting children safely
122
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A88D30 - VI/23
OwnersManuals2.com
Mounts for lower anchors
General information
The lower anchors may be used to attach the
CRS to the vehicle seat up to a combined child
and CRS weight of 65 lbs/30 kg when the child
is restrained by the internal harnesses.
Safety information
Warning
If the lower anchors on child restraint system
are not engaged correctly, the child restraint
system will not be able to provide suitable
protection. There is a risk of injury or danger
to life. Make sure that the lower mountings
are correctly engaged and that the child re-
straint system fits securely against the back-
rest.
Warning
The mounts for the lower mountings and at-
tachment points of the child restraint system
are intended for attaching child restraint sys-
tems only. If other objects are attached, the
mounts or attachment points can be dam-
aged. There is a risk of injury or risk of dam-
age to property. Only attach child restraint
systems at the corresponding mounts for the
lower mountings or attachment points.
Position
Icon Meaning
The corresponding icon shows
the mounts for the lower
LATCH anchors.
Seats equipped with lower
mountings are marked with a
pair (2) of LATCH icons.
For vehicles equipped with a
middle seat:
It is not recommended to use
the inner lower mountings of
standard outer LATCH posi-
tions to fasten a child restraint
system on the middle seat.
Use the vehicle seat belt in-
stead for the middle seat.
Before attaching child restraint
systems
Pull the seat belt away from the area of the
child seat mountings.
Installing child restraint systems
1.
Mount child restraint system, see manufac-
turer's information.
2. Make sure that the child restraint system
mount is correctly engaged in the lower an-
chor on both sides.
With comfort rear seats: installation
of child restraint systems
To mount the child restraint system in the rear,
set the standard position. The function is oper-
ated via BMW Touch Command.
1.
"Seats"
2. "Adjustment"
3. "Reset"
When the desired position is reached, a
message is displayed:
Seite 123
Transporting children safely
CONTROLS
123
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A88D30 - VI/23
OwnersManuals2.com
"Default reached"
To facilitate installation, you may need to
change additional settings:
1. Tilt the backrest slightly backward.
2. Mount child restraint system, see manufac-
turer's information.
3. Make sure that the child restraint system
mount is correctly engaged in the lower an-
chor on both sides.
4. After installation, move the backrest back
up slightly so that the child restraint system
rests lightly against the backrest.
Child restraint systems with
tether strap
General information
When attaching child restraint systems to the
upper attachment points, observe the specifi-
cations and the operating and safety informa-
tion of the child restraint system manufacturer.
Safety information
Warning
If the upper retaining strap is incorrectly used
for the child restraint system, the protective
effect is reduced. There is a risk of injury. En-
sure that the upper retaining strap is guided
to the upper attachment point without twist-
ing and not over sharp edges.
Warning
If the rear seat backrest is not locked, the
protective effect of the child restraint system
is limited or nonexistant. In certain situations,
for instance braking maneuvers or in case of
an accident, the rear seat backrest can fold
forward. There is a risk of injury or danger to
life. Make sure that the rear seat backrests
are locked.
Warning
The mounts for the lower mountings and at-
tachment points of the child restraint system
are intended for attaching child restraint sys-
tems only. If other objects are attached, the
mounts or attachment points can be dam-
aged. There is a risk of injury or risk of dam-
age to property. Only attach child restraint
systems at the corresponding mounts for the
lower mountings or attachment points.
Attachment points for upper
retaining strap
Icon Meaning
The respective icon shows the
attachment point for the upper
retaining strap. Seats with an
upper top tether are marked
with this icon. It is located on
the rear seat backrest, the rear
shelf or the rear seat.
Routing the retaining strap
1
Driving direction
2 Head restraint
3 Hook for upper retaining strap
4 Attachment point
Seite 124
CONTROLS
Transporting children safely
124
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A88D30 - VI/23
OwnersManuals2.com
5 Rear shelf
6 Seat backrest
7 Upper retaining strap
Attaching the upper retaining strap
to the attachment point
1. Open the attachment point cover.
2. Raise the head restraint.
3. Guide the upper retaining strap between
or along both sides of the supports of the
head restraint to the attachment point.
Center seat: guide the upper retaining strap
over or along both sides of the head re-
straint to the attachment point.
4. Attach the hook of the retaining strap to the
attachment point.
5. Tighten the retaining strap.
Locking the doors and
windows in the rear
General information
In certain situations it may be advisable to se-
cure the rear doors and windows, for instance
when transporting children.
Button in vehicle
Press the button. The LED is illumi-
nated when the safety function is
turned on.
The rear windows and doors are locked and
cannot be operated in the rear.
The door can now be opened from the outside
only.
Seite 125
Transporting children safely
CONTROLS
125
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A88D30 - VI/23
OwnersManuals2.com
Driving
Vehicle features and options
This chapter describes model-specific equip-
ment, systems, and functions that are currently
available, or may become available in the fu-
ture, even if they are not present in the vehicle.
Additional information:
Vehicle equipment, refer to page 8.
Start/Stop button
Principle
Pressing the Start/Stop button switches drive-
ready state on or off.
General information
Drive-ready state is switched on when you de-
press the brake pedal while pressing the Start/
Stop button.
Pressing the Start/Stop button again switches
the drive-ready state back off and standby
state is switched back on.
Additional information:
▷
Drive-ready state, refer to page 42.
▷ Standby state, refer to page 41.
Driving off
1.
Turn on drive-ready state.
2. Apply gear position.
3. Driving off.
When stopping
Selector lever positions D, S, or R
On inclines, the system prevents rolling back
against the set driving direction and provides
drive-off support.
Driving off
Press the accelerator pedal to drive off.
The parking brake is released automatically.
Depending on the vehicle load or driving situa-
tion, the vehicle may roll back slightly.
Acoustic pedestrian protection
Depending on vehicle equipment and national-
market version, Acoustic Pedestrian Protection
generates a continuous driving noise in vehi-
cles with electric or electrically assisted drives.
▷ With a stationary vehicle and drive-ready
state turned on, as soon as the selector
lever position P is exited.
▷ With electric driving up to approx.
20 mph/30 km/h.
A speaker system broadcasts the noise to the
environment. As a result, other road users,
for instance pedestrians or cyclists, can better
perceive the vehicle.
Auto Start/Stop function
Principle
The Auto Start/Stop function helps save fuel.
The system switches off the engine during a
stop, for instance in traffic jam or at traffic
lights. Drive-ready state remains switched on.
The engine starts automatically for driving off.
General information
After each engine start using the Start/Stop
button, the Auto Start/Stop function is ready.
The function is activated at low speeds.
Seite 126
CONTROLS
Driving
126
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A88D30 - VI/23
OwnersManuals2.com
Engine stop
Functional requirements
The engine is switched off automatically when
stopping under the following conditions:
▷ The selector lever is in selector lever posi-
tion D.
▷ The brake pedal remains depressed while
the vehicle is at a standstill or the vehicle is
held by Automatic Hold.
▷ The driver's seat belt is buckled or the driv-
er's door is closed.
Manual engine stop
If the engine was not switched off automati-
cally when the vehicle stopped, the engine can
be switched off manually:
▷ Depress the brake pedal forcefully again
from the current pedal position.
▷ Engage selector lever position P.
When all functional preconditions are fulfilled,
the engine switches off.
Air conditioning system when the
engine is switched off
The air flow from the air conditioning system is
reduced when the engine is switched off.
Display in the instrument cluster
The display in the instrument
cluster indicates that the Auto
Start/Stop function is ready for
an automatic engine start.
Functional limitations
The engine is not switched off automatically in
the following situations:
▷
In case of a steep downhill grade.
▷ The brake pedal was not depressed hard
enough.
▷ When the ambient temperature is high and
automatic climate control is switched on.
▷ The vehicle interior has not yet been
heated or cooled as desired.
▷ When window condensation is possible and
automatic climate control is switched on.
▷ Engine or other parts are not at operating
temperature.
▷ Engine cooling is required.
▷ Without Mild Hybrid technology: The
wheels are at a sharp angle or the steering
wheel is being turned.
▷ Vehicle battery is heavily discharged.
▷ At higher elevations.
▷ Hood is unlocked.
▷ The Automatic Parking Assistant is acti-
vated.
▷ For stop-and-go traffic.
▷ Selector lever position is in S, L, or R.
▷ After driving in reverse.
Starting the engine
Functional requirements
The engine starts automatically under the fol-
lowing preconditions:
▷
By releasing the brake pedal.
▷ When Automatic Hold is activated: step on
the accelerator pedal.
Driving off
Accelerating as usual after starting the engine.
Safety mode
After the engine switches off automatically, it
will not start again automatically if any one of
the following conditions are met:
▷
The driver's seat belt is unbuckled and the
driver's door is open.
▷ Hood was unlocked.
Seite 127
Driving
CONTROLS
127
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A88D30 - VI/23
OwnersManuals2.com
Some indicator lights illuminate for a varied
length of time.
The engine can only be started via the Start/
Stop button.
System limits
Even if driving off was not intended, the deac-
tivated engine starts up automatically in the
following situations:
▷ With excessive warming of the interior
when cooling is turned on.
▷ With excessive cooling of the interior when
heating is turned on.
▷ When window condensation is possible and
automatic climate control is switched on.
▷ When changing the selector lever position
from D or P to R.
▷ In case of seriously discharged vehicle bat-
tery.
▷ When starting an oil level measurement.
Deactivating the system manually
Principle
The engine is not automatically switched off.
The engine is started during an automatic en-
gine stop.
Via selector lever position or drive
mode
The Auto Start/Stop function is deactivated by
the following:
▷
With selector lever position S.
▷ In driving mode: "SPORT".
Switching off the vehicle during an
automatic engine stop
If the engine stops automatically, the vehicle
can be parked safely, for example to leave it.
1.
Press the Start/Stop button.
▷ Drive-ready state is switched off.
▷ Standby state is switched on.
▷ Selector lever position P is engaged au-
tomatically.
2. Set the parking brake.
Automatic deactivation
In certain situations, the Auto Start/Stop func-
tion is deactivated automatically for safety rea-
sons, for instance if no driver is detected.
Malfunction
The Auto Start/Stop function no longer
switches off the engine automatically. A Check
Control message is displayed. You may con-
tinue driving. Have the vehicle checked by an
authorized service center or another qualified
service center or repair shop.
Steptronic transmission
Principle
The Steptronic transmission is the vehicle's
automatic transmission. With shift paddles, it
offers the option of manual shifting if needed.
Safety information
Warning
An unsecured vehicle can begin to move and
possibly roll away. There is a risk of accident.
Before leaving your vehicle, secure it against
rolling away, e.g., by applying the parking
brake.
Selector lever positions
Gear position D
Selector lever position for normal driving. All
gears for forward travel are activated automat-
ically.
Seite 128
CONTROLS
Driving
128
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A88D30 - VI/23
OwnersManuals2.com
R reverse
Engage selector lever position R only when the
vehicle is stationary.
N Neutral
The vehicle may be pushed or roll without
power, for instance in car washes, in selector
lever position N.
Parking position P
General information
Selector lever position, for instance for parking
the vehicle. The transmission blocks the drive
in selector lever position P.
P is engaged automatically
Selector lever position P is engaged automati-
cally in situations such as the following:
▷ After drive-ready state is switched off, if se-
lector lever position R, D, or S is engaged.
▷ After standby is switched off, if selector
lever position N is engaged.
▷ The driver's seat belt is unbuckled and the
driver's door is opened while the vehicle is
stationary and selector lever position D, S,
or R is engaged.
Before exiting the vehicle, make sure that se-
lector lever position P is engaged and the
parking brake is engaged. Otherwise, the vehi-
cle may begin to move.
Additional information:
Parking brake, refer to page 137.
Engaging selector lever positions
General information
To prevent the vehicle from creeping after
you select a gear position or reverse, main-
tain pressure on the brake pedal until you are
ready to drive off.
Functional requirements
Only when the drive-ready state is switched on
and the brake pedal is depressed is it possible
to change from selector lever position P to an-
other selector lever position.
The selection lever position P cannot be
changed until all technical prerequisites are
met.
Engaging selector lever position D, N,
R
1. Fasten driver's seat belt.
2. Tilt or pull the selector lever into the desired
direction, past a resistance point, if needed.
The selector lever automatically returns to
the center position when released.
Engaging selector lever position P
Press the button.
The parking brake is engaged and the
transmission lock is set.
Seite 129
Driving
CONTROLS
129
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A88D30 - VI/23
OwnersManuals2.com
Rolling or pushing the vehicle
General information
In some situations, the vehicle is supposed to
roll without its own power for a short distance,
for instance in a car wash or to be pushed.
Engaging selector lever position N
NOTICE
Selector lever position P is automatically en-
gaged when standby state is switched off.
The wheels are blocked. There is a risk
of damage to property. Do not switch off
standby if the vehicle is meant to coast, e.g.,
in a car wash.
1.
Switch on drive-ready state while pressing
on the brake pedal.
2. Depress the brake pedal.
3. Engage selector lever position N.
4. Switch off drive-ready state.
In this way, standby state remains switched
on, and a Check Control message is dis-
played.
The vehicle can roll.
Selector lever position P is engaged automati-
cally after approximately 35 minutes.
If the system is not operational, you may not
be able to change the selector lever position.
Electronically unlock the transmission lock, if
needed.
Additional information:
Electronic unlocking of the transmission lock,
refer to page 131.
Kickdown
Kickdown is used to achieve maximum driving
performance.
Step on the accelerator pedal beyond the re-
sistance point at the full throttle position.
S Sport mode
Principle
The shifting points and shifting times in the
Sport program are designed for sportier han-
dling. The transmission, for instance shifts up
later and the shifting times are shorter.
Activating the Sport program
Pull the selector lever from selector lever posi-
tion D to D/S.
The engaged gear is displayed in the instru-
ment cluster, for instance S1.
The sport program of the transmission is acti-
vated.
Ending the Sport program
Pull the selector lever to D/S.
D is displayed in the instrument cluster.
Displays in the instrument cluster
The selector lever position is
displayed, for example P.
Seite 130
CONTROLS
Driving
130
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A88D30 - VI/23
OwnersManuals2.com
Electronic unlocking of the
transmission lock
General information
Unlock the transmission lock electroni-
cally, e.g., to maneuver the vehicle out of a
hazardous area in the event of a malfunction.
Before unlocking the transmission lock, secure
the vehicle against rolling away, for instance
with a wheel chock.
Engaging selector lever position N
1.
Quickly press the Start/Stop button three
times without stepping on the brake.
2. Depress the brake pedal.
3. Press the selector lever to position N.
An appropriate Check Control message is
displayed.
Position N is indicated on the selector lever.
4. Maneuver the vehicle from the hazardous
area and secure it against rolling away.
Shift paddles
Principle
The shift paddles on the steering wheel are
used to change gears manually.
General information
Shifting
The vehicle only shifts at suitable RPM and
road speeds.
Even in manual mode, the transmission shifts
automatically in certain situations, e.g., when
speed limits are reached.
Temporary manual mode
In selector lever position D, pulling a shift pad-
dle switches into manual mode temporarily.
The engaged gear is also displayed in the in-
strument cluster, for instance D1.
After conservative driving in manual mode
without acceleration or shifting via the shift
paddles for a certain amount of time, the
transmission switches back to automatic
mode.
It is possible to switch into automatic mode:
▷ Pull and hold the right shift paddle until D is
displayed in the instrument cluster.
▷ In addition to the pulled right shift paddle,
pull the left shift paddle.
Continuous manual mode
In Sport program S, pulling a shift paddle
switches to manual mode M permanently.
The engaged gear is displayed in the instru-
ment cluster, for instance M1.
It is possible to switch into automatic mode:
▷ Pull and hold the right shift paddle until S is
displayed on the instrument cluster.
▷ In addition to the pulled right shift paddle,
pull the left shift paddle.
▷ Pull the selector lever to D/S.
When M2 is set manually while the vehicle is
stationary, the transmission will no longer shift
back to M1. This shift behavior is maintained
until M1 is engaged manually or manual mode
M is exited.
Shifting
▷
Upshifting: pull the right shift paddle.
▷ Downshifting: pull left shift paddle.
Seite 131
Driving
CONTROLS
131
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A88D30 - VI/23
OwnersManuals2.com
The selected gear is briefly displayed in the in-
strument cluster, followed by the current gear.
Advanced mode
General information
Depending on vehicle equipment, the Step-
tronic transmission offers an advanced mode
with adapted shift characteristics.
▷ Automatic downshift to lowest possible
gear.
If the left shift paddle is pulled and held, the
Steptronic transmission automatically shifts
down to the lowest possible gear.
▷ Avoid automatic upshifting in manual
mode.
In manual mode, the Steptronic transmis-
sion does not shift up automatically when
speed limits are reached.
▷ There is no downshifting for kickdown.
Enabling advanced mode
The advanced mode is enabled in manual
mode when Dynamic Stability Control is disa-
bled.
Depending on vehicle equipment, the ad-
vanced mode can also be enabled in manual
mode as follows, for example:
▷
"SPORT PLUS": Setting under Drive in
Sport Mode in My Modes.
▷ Increased driving dynamics enabled.
Launch Control
Principle
Launch Control enables optimum acceleration
on roads with good traction under dry sur-
rounding conditions.
General information
Using Launch Control causes premature com-
ponent wear since this function represents a
very heavy load for the vehicle.
Do not turn the steering wheel when driving off
with Launch Control.
Do not use Launch Control when breaking in
the vehicle.
Additional information:
Break-in, refer to page 308.
Functional requirement
Launch Control can be used when the engine
is at operating temperature. The engine is at
operating temperature after an uninterrupted
trip of at least 6 miles/10 km.
Driving off with Launch Control
1.
Turn on drive-ready state.
2. Press the button.
3. "Switch mode"
4. Select drive mode: "SPORT".
5. "Settings"
6. "Driving dynamics"
7. "SPORT PLUS"
8. With the left foot, press down forcefully on
the brake.
9. Press the accelerator pedal all the way
down and hold.
A destination flag is displayed in the instru-
ment cluster.
10. The starting engine speed adjusts. Within
3 seconds, release the brake.
The vehicle accelerates.
Launch Control is active as long as the
Launch Control information is displayed
and the accelerator pedal is not released.
Seite 132
CONTROLS
Driving
132
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A88D30 - VI/23
OwnersManuals2.com
Repeated use during a trip
After Launch Control has been used, the trans-
mission must cool down for a short time before
Launch Control can be used again. Launch
Control adjusts to the surrounding conditions
when used again.
After using Launch Control
To support driving stability, reactivate Dynamic
Stability Control as soon as possible.
System limits
An experienced driver may be able to achieve
better acceleration values in DSC OFF without
Launch Control mode.
Sport Boost function
Principle
The SPORT BOOST function can be used for
upcoming acceleration, for example.
The system prepares the vehicle for the up-
coming acceleration process. The response
characteristics of the accelerator pedal be-
come more sporty.
General information
The Sport Boost function is operated with the
shift paddles on the steering wheel.
Overview
The shift paddles for the Sport Boost function
are located on the steering wheel.
Display in the instrument cluster
▷ Arrow 1: The function is active.
▷ Arrow 2: Countdown, the function is active.
▷ Arrow 3: The function is used for maximum
acceleration.
Using the function
1.
SPORT BOOST: Pull and hold the left shift
paddle until this display appears, arrow 1.
▷ The function is active.
▷ A countdown is displayed on the instru-
ment cluster, arrow 2.
2. Before the countdown changes to 0, press
the accelerator pedal.
▷ The vehicle accelerates.
▷ BOOST: This display is shown on the
instrument cluster, arrow 3.
The countdown can be restarted, for example
if the function cannot be used immediately.
Seite 133
Driving
CONTROLS
133
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A88D30 - VI/23
OwnersManuals2.com
To restart the countdown, pull and hold the left
shift paddle again until the countdown is reset.
Stopping the function
The function is automatically interrupted if the
countdown has reached 0 or if the function
was used in the acceleration process.
Deactivating the function
Pull and hold the right shift paddle until this
display goes out.
My Modes
Principle
My Modes influence vehicle handling charac-
teristics and the staging of the overall experi-
ence in the interior.
The vehicle can be adapted depending on the
situation using the various My Modes.
General information
Depending on the equipment, the following
systems are affected, for instance:
▷
Drivetrain.
▷ Steering.
▷ Chassis.
▷ Cruise control.
▷ Display in the instrument cluster.
▷ Comfort features in the vehicle interior.
▷ Drive sound.
Overview
Button in the vehicle
My Modes
Displays in the instrument cluster
If applicable, the driving mode
selected is displayed on the in-
strument cluster.
My Modes in detail
General information
Various My Modes are available depending on
vehicle equipment.
My Modes that influence the handling charac-
teristics are also referred to as driving mode.
Personal Mode
Driving mode for comfort oriented settings.
Sport Mode
Driving mode for increased agility of the vehi-
cle.
Individual settings can be entered such as for
driving dynamics, chassis and drivetrain.
"SPORT PLUS": with this setting under driving
dynamics, the Dynamic Stability Control and
thereby the driving stability will be limited.
Seite 134
CONTROLS
Driving
134
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A88D30 - VI/23
OwnersManuals2.com
▷ Dynamic Stability Control, refer to
page 212.
▷ Setting for increased driving dynamics, re-
fer to page 213.
Efficient Mode
Driving mode for a consumption optimized set-
ting with anticipatory display.
Additional information:
Efficient mode, refer to page 314.
Theater Mode
Mode for a luxurious entertainment experience
for rear-seat occupants.
Handling characteristics are set in a comfort-
oriented manner.
More My Modes
Depending on the vehicle equipment, more My
Modes are available that change the ambiance
in the vehicle interior:
▷ Expressive Mode.
▷ Digital Art Mode.
▷ Relax Mode
▷ Silent Mode
Selecting My Modes
1.
Press the button.
2. "Switch mode"
3. Select the desired mode.
Configuring My Modes
Some modes can be configured individually.
1.
Press the button.
2. Select mode.
3. "Settings"
4. Select the desired settings.
Changing the start mode
Some modes can be set as the start mode.
The start mode set is enabled when drive-
ready state is switched on.
1. Press the button.
2. Select mode.
3. "Settings"
4. "Start mode"
My Modes Design
Specific depictions of a mode can be shown on
the control display under My Modes Design.
1.
Press the button.
2. "My Modes design"
Operation in rear
General information
Some modes can be selected in the rear using
BMW Touch Command.
For safety reasons, it is not always possible to
change My Modes, e.g., when drive-off assis-
tance is enabled or if vehicle handling is influ-
enced as a result.
Overview
BMW Touch Command is located in the door
handle of the rear doors.
Seite 135
Driving
CONTROLS
135
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A88D30 - VI/23
OwnersManuals2.com
Selecting My Modes
1. Tap on the icon.
2. "My Modes"
3. Select the desired mode.
Additional information:
BMW Touch Command, refer to page 58
My Programs
Principle
Various vehicle functions in the vehicle interior
are adapted to each other in a program.
When you select a program, the interior light-
ing, climate control, and music selection will be
adjusted, among other things.
Safety information
Warning
People or animals in the vehicle can lock the
doors from the inside and lock themselves in.
In this case, the vehicle cannot be opened
from the outside. There is a risk of injury.
Take the vehicle key with you so that the ve-
hicle can be opened from the outside.
Warning
For some national-market versions, unlock-
ing from the inside is only possible with par-
ticular knowledge.
If persons or animals spend a lengthy time
in the vehicle and are thereby exposed to ex-
treme temperatures, there is a risk of injury
or danger to life. Do not lock the vehicle from
the outside when there are people or animals
in it. Do not leave babies, toddlers or animals
alone in the vehicle.
Functional requirements
Various requirements must be met for the pro-
grams:
"Vitalize":
▷ Selector lever position D is engaged.
▷ The driver's door is closed.
▷ Automatic climate control is turned on.
▷ My Mode Theater Mode must be deacti-
vated.
"Power Nap":
▷ Standby state is switched on.
▷ The parking brake is set.
▷ All doors, flaps, the hood and the tailgate
are closed.
▷ Automatic climate control is turned on.
▷ The state of battery charge is sufficient.
▷ No objects or persons on the rear seat.
My Programs in detail
My Pro-
grams
Description
"Vitalize" This program lasts three mi-
nutes and revitalizes occupants
using music and certain comfort
settings.
"Power
Nap"
This program creates an at-
mosphere that encourages
sleep, allowing you to use long
stops to relax.
"HAPPY
KIDS"
This program creates an at-
mosphere that encourages
sleep for children in the rear.
Activating/deactivating My
Programs
1.
Apps menu
2. "All apps"
Seite 136
CONTROLS
Driving
136
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A88D30 - VI/23
OwnersManuals2.com
3.
▷ "Vitalize"
▷ "Power Nap"
▷ "HAPPY KIDS"
4. Select the desired setting.
Parking brake
Principle
The parking brake is used to prevent the vehi-
cle from rolling away when it is parked.
Safety information
Warning
An unsecured vehicle can begin to move and
possibly roll away. There is a risk of accident.
Before leaving the vehicle, secure the vehicle
against rolling away.
In order to ensure that the vehicle is secured
against rolling away, follow the following:
▷ Set the parking brake.
▷ On uphill grades or on downhill slopes,
turn the front wheels in the direction of
the curb.
▷ On uphill grades or on downhill slopes,
also secure the vehicle, for instance with
a wheel chock.
Warning
Unattended children or animals in the vehicle
can cause the vehicle to move and endanger
themselves and traffic, for example, due to
the following actions:
▷
Pressing the Start/Stop button.
▷ Releasing the parking brake.
▷ Opening and closing the doors or win-
dows.
▷ Engaging selector lever position N.
▷ Using vehicle equipment.
There is a risk of accidents or injuries. Do not
leave children or animals unattended in the
vehicle. Take the vehicle key with you when
exiting and lock the vehicle.
Overview
Button in the vehicle
Parking brake
Setting the parking brake
With a stationary vehicle
Press the button.
The LED illuminates.
The indicator light in the instrument
cluster illuminates red.
The parking brake is engaged and
transmission lock is engaged.
While driving
Use while driving serves as an emergency
braking function.
Press and hold this button. The vehicle
brakes hard as long as the button is
pressed.
The indicator light in the instrument
cluster illuminates red, a signal sounds,
and the brake lights illuminate.
Seite 137
Driving
CONTROLS
137
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A88D30 - VI/23
OwnersManuals2.com
A Check Control message is displayed.
The parking brake is engaged and the trans-
mission lock is set when the vehicle is station-
ary.
Engaging the parking brake
automatically
In some situations, the parking brake is en-
gaged automatically, e.g., through Automatic
Hold.
Additionally, the system can be set to auto-
matically engaging the parking brake when the
drive-ready state is turned off.
1.
Apps menu
2. "Vehicle"
3. "Driving settings"
4. "Drivetrain and chassis"
5. "Parking brake"
6. Select the desired setting.
In selector lever position N, the parking brake
will not be engaged automatically.
Releasing the parking brake
Releasing the parking brake manually
1.
Turn on drive-ready state.
2. Press the button while pressing on
the brake pedal.
The LED and the indicator light go out.
The parking brake is released.
The transmission lock remains engaged
until a gear position is selected.
Releasing the parking brake
automatically
The parking brake is released automatically
when you drive off.
The LED and the indicator light go out.
Using the parking brake via iDrive
The parking brake can also be engaged or dis-
engaged via iDrive. Additionally, further infor-
mation is displayed.
1. Apps menu
2. "Vehicle"
3. "Driving settings"
4. "Drivetrain and chassis"
5. "Parking brake"
6. Select the desired setting.
Malfunction
If the parking brake fails or malfunctions, se-
cure the vehicle so that it does not roll away
before you exit.
A Check Control message is displayed.
Secure the vehicle against rolling away, for in-
stance with a wheel chock, after getting out of
the vehicle.
After a power interruption
To reestablish parking brake operability after
a power interruption, an initialization may be
required.
1.
Turn on standby state.
2. Press the button.
3. Press the button again after 2 sec-
onds.
The Check Control messages for the park-
ing brake go out.
Possible function-related noises are nor-
mal.
The indicator light indicates that the
parking brake is ready for operation
again.
Seite 138
CONTROLS
Driving
138
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A88D30 - VI/23
OwnersManuals2.com
Automatic Hold
Principle
Automatic Hold assists the driver by automati-
cally setting and releasing the brake such as
when moving in stop-and-go traffic.
When a gear position is engaged, the vehicle
is automatically held in place when it is station-
ary.
On uphill grades the system prevents the vehi-
cle from rolling back when driving off.
General information
The parking brake is automatically engaged
under the following conditions:
▷ Drive-ready state is switched off.
▷ The driver’s door is open for more than one
second and no pedal is pressed during this
time.
▷ The moving vehicle is brought to a stand-
still using the parking brake.
In selector lever position N, Automatic Hold is
temporarily deactivated.
Safety information
Warning
An unsecured vehicle can begin to move and
possibly roll away. There is a risk of accident.
Before leaving the vehicle, secure the vehicle
against rolling away.
In order to ensure that the vehicle is secured
against rolling away, follow the following:
▷
Set the parking brake.
▷ On uphill grades or on downhill slopes,
turn the front wheels in the direction of
the curb.
▷ On uphill grades or on downhill slopes,
also secure the vehicle, for instance with
a wheel chock.
Warning
Unattended children or animals in the vehicle
can cause the vehicle to move and endanger
themselves and traffic, for example, due to
the following actions:
▷ Pressing the Start/Stop button.
▷ Releasing the parking brake.
▷ Opening and closing the doors or win-
dows.
▷ Engaging selector lever position N.
▷ Using vehicle equipment.
There is a risk of accidents or injuries. Do not
leave children or animals unattended in the
vehicle. Take the vehicle key with you when
exiting and lock the vehicle.
Overview
Button in the vehicle
Automatic Hold
Activating Automatic Hold
1.
Turn on drive-ready state.
2. Press the button.
The LED illuminates.
The indicator light illuminates green.
Automatic Hold is activated.
Seite 139
Driving
CONTROLS
139
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A88D30 - VI/23
OwnersManuals2.com
After every vehicle restart, the last selected
setting is active.
Automatic Hold holding the vehicle
Automatic Hold is activated and the driver’s
door is closed.
After stopping, the vehicle is automat-
ically secured against rolling away as
soon as the indicator light illuminates
green.
Driving off
Press the accelerator pedal to drive off.
The brake is released automatically and the
indicator light of the parking brake is no longer
illuminated.
Automatic parking brake application
The parking brake is automatically set if drive-
ready state is switched off while the vehicle is
being held by Automatic Hold or if the vehicle
is exited.
The indicator light changes from green
to red.
The parking brake is not set automatically if
the drive-ready state was switched off while
the vehicle was coasting. Automatic Hold is
temporarily deactivated in this case.
Deactivate Automatic Hold
Press the button.
The LED goes out.
The indicator light goes out.
Automatic Hold is switched off.
If the vehicle is being held by Automatic Hold,
also press on the brake pedal when switching
off.
Seite 140
CONTROLS
Driving
140
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A88D30 - VI/23
OwnersManuals2.com
Displays
Vehicle features and options
This chapter describes model-specific equip-
ment, systems, and functions that are currently
available, or may become available in the fu-
ture, even if they are not present in the vehicle.
Additional information:
Vehicle equipment, refer to page 8.
Instrument cluster
Principle
The instrument cluster comprises various digi-
tal displays, e.g., a speedometer, time, range,
temperature as well as indicator and warning
lights.
General information
The layout of the instrument cluster adapts to
the respective driving mode. The positions of
some displays may vary, e.g., the selector lever
display.
Some of the displays in the instrument cluster
may differ from the illustrations in the Owner's
Manual.
Safety information
Warning
If the displays on the instrument cluster fail,
do not use the vehicle. There may be a risk of
accidents or risk of damage to property. Im-
mediately park the vehicle in a safe manner.
Turning drive-ready state off and on again
may correct the malfunction, allowing you to
continue driving. If the malfunction cannot be
corrected, have the vehicle checked by an au-
thorized service center or another qualified
service center or repair shop.
Overview
Instrument cluster
Display ranges on the instrument
cluster
1 Speedometer
2 Driver assistance systems 216
Parking assistance systems 243
3 Driver Attention Camera 210
4 Check Control 144
Selector lever display 128
Gear shift indicator 152
Selection lists 151
Efficiency trainer 315
5 Power gauge 153
Tachometer 153
Seite 141
Displays
CONTROLS
141
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A88D30 - VI/23
OwnersManuals2.com
6 Engine temperature 154
7 Outside temperature 154
8 Central display range 155
Shift lights 155
9 My Modes drive mode 134
10 Speed Limit Info 216
Speed Limit Assistant 237
11 Time 158
12 Fuel gauge 159
Range 159
Additional information:
Indicator/warning lights, refer to page 145.
Operating elements on the steering
wheel
Operating
element
Function
Display the menu bar on the in-
strument cluster.
Turn knurled wheel: scroll selec-
tion up or down.
Tilt knurled wheel in corre-
sponding direction: Move selec-
tion to left or right.
Press knurled wheel: confirm
selection.
Configuring the layout
In Personal Mode drive mode, the layout in
the instrument cluster can be individually con-
figured and displayed.
1.
Press the button on the steering
wheel.
A menu bar is displayed in the instrument
cluster.
2. "LAYOUT"
Select the menu by tilting the thumbwheel
on the steering wheel where applicable.
3. Select the desired setting using the thumb-
wheel on the steering wheel.
Settings
Specific displays can be configured individu-
ally, e.g., a second actual speed.
1. Apps menu
2. "Vehicle"
3. "Displays"
4. "Instrument cluster"
5. Select the desired setting.
Live Vehicle
Principle
Live Vehicle is a virtual representation of your
own vehicle with different information, e.g., ve-
hicle status or energy flow indicators.
General information
Appropriate information is shown on the con-
trol display depending on the driving situation.
Fault statuses are not taken into account.
Adaptive content
The following content is displayed in alternat-
ing order and, if necessary, depending on the
selected drive mode:
▷
Vehicle status, refer to page 160.
▷ Current driving condition, refer to page 160.
▷ Sport displays, refer to page 161.
▷ Efficiency trainer, refer to page 315.
▷ Trip data, refer to page 156.
Static information
The following information may be shown per-
manently on the control display regardless of
the driving situation and driving mode set.
Seite 142
CONTROLS
Displays
142
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A88D30 - VI/23
OwnersManuals2.com
▷ Vehicle status.
▷ Trip data.
Adjusting the display
In the Live Vehicle menu, you can choose be-
tween an adaptive display and static content.
1. Apps menu
2. "Vehicle"
3. "Live Vehicle"
4. "Content"
5. Select the desired setting.
BMW Head-up display
Principle
The Head-up display projects important infor-
mation, e.g., speed, onto the windshield in the
driver's field of view. Information can be re-
corded without you having to look away from
the road.
The steering wheel buttons can be used to
configure various views for the Head-up dis-
play. Additional settings can be changed on
the control display, e.g., brightness or height.
General information
Follow instructions for cleaning the Head-up
display in the Vehicle Care chapter.
Additional information:
Caring for special components, refer to
page 375.
Overview
Head-up display views are projected onto the
windshield using protective glass. The protec-
tive glass is located between the steering
wheel and windshield.
Displayable information
The following information is displayed on the
Head-up display:
▷ Vehicle speed.
▷ Navigation instructions.
▷ Check Control messages.
▷ Sport displays.
▷ Shift lights.
▷ Efficiency trainer.
▷ Lists and messages.
▷ Driver assistance systems.
Some of this information is only displayed
briefly as needed.
Configuring a view
The views for the Head-up display can be set
independently of the display on the instrument
cluster, e.g., a reduced view.
1.
Press the button on the steering
wheel.
A menu bar is displayed in the instrument
cluster.
2. "HEAD-UP"
Seite 143
Displays
CONTROLS
143
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A88D30 - VI/23
OwnersManuals2.com
Select the menu by tilting the thumbwheel
on the steering wheel where applicable.
3. Select the desired setting using the thumb-
wheel on the steering wheel.
Turning the Head-up display on/off
1. Apps menu
2. "Vehicle"
3. "Displays"
4. "Head-up display"
5. "Head-up display"
Settings
Individual settings can be entered for the
Head-up display such as for the height, bright-
ness or illustration. In addition, individual dis-
plays in the Head-up display can be set up
separately such as for Driver Assistance.
1.
Apps menu
2. "Vehicle"
3. "Displays"
4. "Head-up display"
5. Select the desired setting.
Visibility of the display
The visibility of the displays in the Head-up
display is influenced by the following factors:
▷
Seat position.
▷ Objects on the Head-up display's protective
glass.
▷ Dust or dirt on the Head-up display's pro-
tective glass.
▷ Windshield dirty on inside or outside.
▷ Sunglasses with certain polarization filters.
▷ Wet road.
▷ Unfavorable light conditions.
If the image is distorted, have the basic set-
tings checked by an authorized service center
or another qualified service center or repair
shop.
Special windshield
The windshield is part of the system.
The shape and coating of the special wind-
shield enable the system to function.
If damaged, have the special windshield re-
placed by an authorized service center or an-
other qualified service center or repair shop.
Check Control
Principle
The Check Control system monitors functions
in the vehicle and notifies you of faults in the
monitored systems.
A Check Control message is displayed as a
combination of indicator/warning lights and
text messages on the instrument cluster and,
if applicable, on the Head-up display. In addi-
tion, an acoustic signal may sound and a text
message may appear on the control display.
Some Check Control messages are hidden au-
tomatically after approx. 20 seconds, but they
will be stored. Stored Check Control messages
can be displayed on the control display. Urgent
Check Control messages are permanently dis-
played but can be hidden temporarily.
Hiding Check Control messages
Permanently displayed Check Control mes-
sages can be hidden temporarily. These mes-
sages are automatically displayed again after
approx. 8 seconds.
An arrow icon next to the Check Control
message indicates whether the Check Control
message can be hidden.
To hide Check Control messages, tilt
the knurled wheel on the steering
wheel to the left.
Seite 144
CONTROLS
Displays
144
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A88D30 - VI/23
OwnersManuals2.com
Displaying stored Check Control
messages
Additional information such as the cause of a
fault or the required action can be called up via
Check Control.
Depending on the Check Control message, fur-
ther help can be selected.
1. Apps menu
2. "Vehicle"
3. "Vehicle status"
4. "Check Control"
5. Select the desired text message.
Display
A Check Control message is displayed in the
instrument cluster as a text message with an
icon.
For urgent messages, an added text is auto-
matically displayed on the control display.
If several faults occur at once, the messages
are displayed consecutively.
Certain messages displayed while driving are
displayed again after drive-ready state is
switched off.
Icons in the instrument cluster indicate
an active or saved Check Control mes-
sage.
Indicator lights and warning
lights
Principle
The indicator lights and the warning lights
on the instrument cluster show the status of
some functions in the vehicle. The indicator
and warning lights indicate faults in monitored
systems.
General information
Indicator lights and warning lights can illumi-
nate in a variety of combinations and colors.
Several of the lights are checked for proper
functioning and illuminate temporarily when
drive-ready state is turned on.
Red lights
Seat belt reminder
Seat belt on the driver's seat is not
buckled.
Additional information:
Seat belt reminder, refer to page 111.
Airbag system
Warning light illuminates briefly: Indi-
cates that the entire airbag system and
seat belt tensioners are operational
when drive-ready state is switched on.
Warning light does not illuminate or illuminates
continuously: the airbag system or the seat
belt tensioners may be not be operational.
Have the vehicle checked immediately by an
authorized service center or another qualified
service center or repair shop.
Additional information:
Airbags, refer to page 174.
Seite 145
Displays
CONTROLS
145
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A88D30 - VI/23
OwnersManuals2.com
Parking brake
The parking brake is set.
Additional information:
Parking brake, refer to page 137.
Brake system
The brake pads are worn or there is
another issue with the brake system.
The braking assistance may not func-
tion. A higher pedal force may be re-
quired for braking.
Have the vehicle checked immediately by an
authorized service center or another qualified
service center or repair shop.
Emergency Stop Assistant
The Emergency Stop Assistant is trig-
gered.
Additional information:
Emergency Stop Assistant, refer to page 202.
Risk of collision
Warning light illuminates or flashes in
conjunction with an acoustic signal if
there is risk of imminent collision.
Additional information:
Forward Collision Mitigation, refer to page 179.
Pedestrian Warning
Warning light illuminates: risk of colli-
sion with a person, e.g., a pedestrian
or a cyclist. Increased awareness is re-
quired.
Warning light flashes and a signal sounds: risk
of imminent collision with a person, e.g., a pe-
destrian or a cyclist. Immediately initiate brak-
ing or an evasive maneuver.
Additional information:
Warning function for pedestrians, refer to
page 185.
Forward Collision Warning
Warning light illuminates: risk of colli-
sion, e.g., with a vehicle, is detected.
Increased awareness is required.
Warning light flashes and a signal sounds: risk
of imminent collision with a vehicle detected.
Immediately initiate braking or an evasive ma-
neuver.
Additional information:
Warning function in a rear-end collision situa-
tion, refer to page 182.
Intersection Collision Warning: vehicle
detected from the right
Warning light illuminates: risk of colli-
sion with vehicle crossing from the right
detected. Increased awareness is re-
quired.
Warning light flashes and a signal sounds: risk
of imminent collision with a crossing vehicle
detected. Immediately initiate braking or an
evasive maneuver.
Additional information:
Warning function at intersections, refer to
page 186.
Intersection Collision Warning: vehicle
detected from the left
Warning light illuminates: risk of colli-
sion with vehicle crossing from the left
detected. Increased awareness is re-
quired.
Warning light flashes and a signal sounds: risk
of imminent collision with a crossing vehicle
detected. Immediately initiate braking or an
evasive maneuver.
Additional information:
Seite 146
CONTROLS
Displays
146
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A88D30 - VI/23
OwnersManuals2.com
Warning function at intersections, refer to
page 186.
Distance Control
Warning light flashes and acoustic sig-
nal sounds: Brake and evade as neces-
sary.
Additional information:
Distance control, refer to page 223.
Assisted Driving Mode
Warning light flashes and acoustic sig-
nal sounds:
The system is switched off or will be
interrupted very soon.
Warning light illuminates and acoustic signal
sounds:
The driver's line of sight is not directed at the
surrounding traffic. Yellow: System interruption
is imminent. The system reduces the speed to
a standstill if applicable. It is possible that the
system will not execute any supporting steer-
ing movements.
Additional information:
Assisted Driving Mode, refer to page 229.
Assisted Driving Mode: Hands are not
on steering wheel
Warning light illuminates and acoustic
signal sounds:
The hands are not on the steering
wheel or, depending on the vehicle equipment
and national-market version, the driver's line of
sight is not directed at the surrounding traffic.
Yellow: System interruption is imminent.
The system reduces the speed to a standstill if
applicable.
It is possible that the system will not execute
any supporting steering movements.
Immediately grasp the steering wheel with
your hands and pay attention to the surround-
ing traffic.
Additional information:
Assisted Driving Mode, refer to page 229.
Yellow lights
Antilock Braking System
The system may not be operational.
The Antilock Braking System is not
available.
The ability to steer may be restricted
during full braking.
Have the vehicle checked immediately by an
authorized service center or another qualified
service center or repair shop.
Additional information:
Antilock Braking System, refer to page 212.
Assisted Driving Mode
Warning light illuminates and acoustic
signal sounds: A system interruption is
imminent.
Warning light flashes: A lane boundary has
been crossed.
Additional information:
Assisted Driving Mode, refer to page 229.
Assisted Driving Mode: Hands are not
on steering wheel
Hands are not grasping the steering
wheel. The system is still active.
Grab the steering wheel with your
hands.
Additional information:
Assisted Driving Mode, refer to page 229.
Seite 147
Displays
CONTROLS
147
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A88D30 - VI/23
OwnersManuals2.com
Dynamic Stability Control
Warning light flashes: Dynamic Stabil-
ity Control is regulating the driving and
brake power. The vehicle is stabilized.
Reduce the vehicle speed and adjust your driv-
ing style to the road conditions.
Warning light illuminates: Dynamic Stability
Control has malfunctioned or is initializing.
Driving stabilization is restricted or has failed.
If the warning light illuminates continuously,
have the vehicle checked immediately by an
authorized service center or another qualified
service center or repair shop.
Additional information:
Dynamic Stability Control, refer to page 212.
The Dynamic Stability Control
deactivated or increased driving
dynamics activated
Dynamic Stability Control is deactivated
or enhanced driving dynamics is acti-
vated.
Additional information:
▷
Dynamic Stability Control, refer to
page 212.
▷ Setting for increased driving dynamics, re-
fer to page 213.
Flat tire monitor
Warning light illuminates: Flat tire or
tire pressure loss has been detected.
Reduce your speed and stop cau-
tiously. Avoid sudden braking and steering
maneuvers.
Additional information:
Flat tire monitor, refer to page 341.
Tire pressure monitor
Warning light illuminates: Flat tire or
tire pressure loss has been detected.
Follow the information in the Check
Control message.
Warning light flashes then illuminates continu-
ously: Flat tires or tire pressure losses cannot
be detected.
▷ Fault caused by systems or devices with
the same radio frequency: after leaving the
area of the interference, the system auto-
matically becomes active again.
▷ In the case of tires with special appro-
val: the tire pressure monitor was unable
to complete the reset. Reset the system
again.
▷ Wheel without wheel electronics installed:
Have it checked by an authorized service
center or another qualified service center or
repair shop as needed.
▷ Malfunction: have the vehicle checked by
an authorized service center or another
qualified service center or repair shop.
Additional information:
Tire pressure monitor, refer to page 334.
Steering system
The steering system may not be op-
erational.
Have the vehicle checked by an author-
ized service center or another qualified service
center or repair shop.
Additional information:
Integral Active Steering, refer to page 215.
Emissions
▷
The warning light illuminates:
Worsening emissions, e.g., due to
an incorrectly fitted fuel cap. Have
Seite 148
CONTROLS
Displays
148
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A88D30 - VI/23
OwnersManuals2.com
the vehicle checked as soon as pos-
sible.
▷ The warning light flashes under certain cir-
cumstances:
This indicates that there is excessive misfir-
ing in the engine.
Reduce the vehicle speed and have the ve-
hicle checked immediately; otherwise, se-
rious engine misfiring within a brief pe-
riod can seriously damage emission control
components, in particular the catalytic con-
verter.
Have the vehicle checked by an authorized
service center or another qualified service cen-
ter or repair shop.
Additional information:
Socket for OBD on-board diagnostics, refer to
page 359.
Acoustic pedestrian protection
Acoustic pedestrian protection has
malfunctioned. Increased caution when
maneuvering.
If malfunctioning repeatedly, have the vehicle
checked by an authorized service center or an-
other qualified service center or repair shop.
Additional information:
Acoustic pedestrian protection, refer to
page 126.
Green lights
Turn signal
Turn signal is on.
Unusually rapid flashing of the indicator
light indicates that a turn signal bulb
has failed.
Additional information:
Turn signal, refer to page 162.
Parking lights
Parking lights are switched on.
Additional information:
Parking lights, low beams, refer to
page 165.
Low beams
Low beams are switched on.
Additional information:
Parking lights, low beams, refer to
page 165.
Automatic High Beam Assistant
Low beams are switched on and the
Automatic High Beam Assistant is acti-
vated.
High beams are switched on and off automati-
cally depending on the traffic situation.
Additional information:
Automatic High Beam Assistant, refer to
page 163.
Lane departure warning
Depending on vehicle equipment and
national-market version:
Indicator light flashes: the system is
performing a steering intervention.
Additional information:
Lane departure warning, refer to page 190.
Automatic Hold: vehicle is held
automatically
Automatic Hold is ready to use. The
vehicle is automatically held in place
when it is stationary.
Additional information:
Automatic Hold, refer to page 139.
Seite 149
Displays
CONTROLS
149
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A88D30 - VI/23
OwnersManuals2.com
Automatic Hold: vehicle secured
against rolling away
The vehicle is automatically secured
against rolling away after stopping.
Additional information:
Automatic Hold, refer to page 139.
Cruise Control
The system is active.
Additional information:
Cruise control, refer to page 221.
Distance Control
Indicator light illuminates: Vehicle has
been detected ahead of you. The vehi-
cle icon goes out if no vehicle has been
detected ahead of you.
Indicator lamp is flashing: vehicle ahead is
driving off.
Additional information:
Distance control, refer to page 223.
Speed Limit Assist
The detected speed limit can be ap-
plied with the SET button. As soon as
the speed limit has been applied, a
green checkmark is displayed.
Additional information:
Speed Limit Assistant, refer to page 237.
Assisted Driving Mode
The system supports the driver in
keeping the vehicle within the lane.
Additional information:
Assisted Driving Mode, refer to page 229.
Lane Change Assistant: lane change in
progress
Arrow icon for lane change green: the
system carries out a lane change.
Additional information:
Lane Change Assistant, refer to page 233.
Lane Change Assistant: lane change
not possible
Gray line for lane boundary on the ap-
propriate side: system detected a lane
change request. Lane change not cur-
rently possible.
Additional information:
Lane Change Assistant, refer to page 233.
Assisted Driving Mode Plus
The system is active.
Additional information:
Assisted Driving Mode Plus, refer to
page 234.
Blue lights
High beams
High beams have been switched on.
Additional information:
High beams, refer to page 162.
Automatic High Beam Assistant
High beams are switched on via the
Automatic High Beam Assistant.
Additional information:
Automatic High Beam Assistant, refer to
page 163.
Seite 150
CONTROLS
Displays
150
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A88D30 - VI/23
OwnersManuals2.com
Gray lights
Seat belt reminder
Seat belt on the passenger seat or an-
other seat in the vehicle is not buckled.
Additional information:
Seat belts, refer to page 110.
Distance Control
Indicator light flashes: Conditions are
not adequate for the system to work.
The system was deactivated but ap-
plies the brakes until you actively resume con-
trol by pressing on the brake pedal or accelera-
tor pedal.
Additional information:
Distance control, refer to page 223.
Assisted Driving Mode
The system is on standby and does not
manipulate steering movements.
System activates automatically as soon
as all function conditions are fulfilled.
Additional information:
Assisted Driving Mode, refer to page 229.
Assisted Driving Mode Plus
The system is interrupted and will acti-
vate automatically as soon as all func-
tional requirements are met.
Additional information:
Assisted Driving Mode Plus, refer to page 234.
White lights
Cruise Control with Distance Control
No Distance Control displayed since
the accelerator pedal is being pressed.
Additional information:
Distance control, refer to page
223.
Assisted Driving Mode Plus
The system can be activated.
Additional information:
Assisted Driving Mode Plus, refer to
page 234.
Selection lists
Principle
Lists can be displayed and, if necessary, used
for certain functions in the instrument cluster or
the Head-up display.
▷ Entertainment source.
▷ Current audio source.
▷ List of most recent telephone calls.
If necessary, the corresponding menu will open
on the control display.
Displaying and using the list
The selection lists can be displayed and op-
erated using the operating elements on the
steering wheel.
Seite 151
Displays
CONTROLS
151
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A88D30 - VI/23
OwnersManuals2.com
Control
elements
Function
Change the entertainment
source.
Pressing the button again will
close the currently displayed list.
Show list of most recent tele-
phone calls.
Turn the knurled wheel: display
the list for currently selected en-
tertainment source or scroll up
or down in the list.
Tilt knurled wheel in corre-
sponding direction: Move selec-
tion to left or right.
Press knurled wheel: confirm se-
lection.
Display
Selection lists, e.g., entertainment sources, are
displayed on the instrument cluster.
Example: selecting a radio station
1.
Press the entertainment sources
button.
2. To switch to the radio stations list,
tilt the knurled wheel to the right.
3. Turn the knurled wheel to select a radio
station.
4. Press the knurled wheel to confirm the se-
lected radio station.
Example: changing the entertainment
source
1. Press the entertainment sources
button.
2. To select an entertainment source,
turn the knurled wheel.
3. Press the knurled wheel to confirm the se-
lected entertainment source.
Gear shift indicator
Principle
The shift point indicator recommends the gear
that best suits the current driving situation. Us-
ing the optimal gear supports an efficient driv-
ing style.
General information
The gear shift indicator is active in manual
mode M depending on vehicle equipment and
national-market version.
Displays
Information on upshifting, downshifting, or en-
gaged gear is displayed on the instrument
cluster.
On vehicles without a gear shift indicator, the
engaged gear is displayed.
Seite 152
CONTROLS
Displays
152
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A88D30 - VI/23
OwnersManuals2.com
Example Description
In continuous manual mode M:
Optimal gear is engaged.
With shift paddles: temporary
manual mode.
With shift paddles: Sport program.
Shift information.
Additional information:
Shift paddles, refer to page 131.
Power gauge
Principle
The power gauge indicates the currently
drawn drive power as a percentage.
Enabling/disabling the power gauge
The power display or tachometer is shown de-
pending on the driving mode selected or the
individual configuration of the layout.
Display
Needle in range of arrow 1: display for energy
recovery such as while decelerating CHARGE.
Needle in range of arrow 2: the drive power in
percent, POWER.
Reduced drive power
The available power may be reduced due to
certain factors. The power gauge is automati-
cally adjusted accordingly.
In addition, the icons on the power gauge and
tachometer indicate reduced drive power.
Icon Description
Blue icon: cold drivetrain.
White icon: increased drive sys-
tem temperature, for instance
due to sustained or high
power demand when driving
on mountain roads.
Depending on vehicle equip-
ment and national-market ver-
sion:
Drive power limitation defined
via the BMW Digital Key.
System-related functional limi-
tation.
A Check Control message is
displayed in addition where ap-
plicable.
Tachometer
General information
Always avoid RPM in the red warning field. In
this range, the fuel supply is reduced to protect
the engine.
Activating/deactivating the
tachometer
The tachometer is displayed depending on the
selected drive mode or the individually config-
ured layout.
Seite 153
Displays
CONTROLS
153
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A88D30 - VI/23
OwnersManuals2.com
The tachometer display changes depending
on the selected driving mode.
Reduced engine speed range
The available engine speed range may be re-
duced due certain factors such as a cold drive
system. The tachometer display is automati-
cally adjusted depending on the available en-
gine speed range.
Standby state and drive-
ready state
OFF is displayed in the instru-
ment cluster. Drive-ready state
is turned off and standby state
turned on.
READY is displayed in the
instrument cluster. The Auto
Start/Stop function is ready for
automatic engine start.
Additional information:
▷
Operating condition of the vehicle, refer to
page 40.
▷ Auto Start/Stop function, refer to page 126.
Engine temperature
▷
Cold engine: the needle
is in the blue temperature
range, close to the stop of
the temperature display, and
the word WARM-UP is dis-
played.
Drive at moderate RPM and
vehicle speeds.
▷ Normal operating temperature: the needle
is in the middle or in the left half of the
temperature display.
▷ Hot engine: the needle is in the red temper-
ature range. In addition, a Check Control
message is displayed.
Additional information:
Coolant level, refer to page 355.
Display
▷ Cold engine: the needle
is in the blue temperature
range, close to the stop of
the temperature display, and
the word WARM-UP is dis-
played.
Drive at moderate RPM and
vehicle speeds.
▷ Normal operating temperature: the needle
is in the middle or in the left half of the
temperature display.
▷ Hot engine: the needle is in the red temper-
ature range. In addition, a Check Control
message is displayed.
Additional information:
Coolant level, refer to page 355.
Indicator light in the instrument
cluster
A red indicator light is displayed.
Outside temperature
General information
If the indicator drops to +37℉/+3℃ or lower, a
signal sounds.
Seite 154
CONTROLS
Displays
154
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A88D30 - VI/23
OwnersManuals2.com
A Check Control message is displayed.
There is an increased risk of ice on roads.
Safety information
Warning
Even at temperatures above +37 ℉/+3 ℃
there is a risk of icy roads, for instance on
bridges or shady sections of the road. There
is a risk of accident. Modify your driving style
to the weather conditions at low tempera-
tures.
Shift lights
Principle
Shift lights indicate the suitable upshift point at
which optimal acceleration can be achieved.
General information
The shift lights are active in manual mode M
and can be displayed on the instrument cluster
or on the Head-up display in combination with
the tachometer.
Functional requirements
▷
Manual mode M must be activated.
▷ Advanced mode must be activated.
Additional information:
Advanced mode, refer to page 132.
Display
Successive fields illuminating yellow indicate
an upcoming shift point.
▷ Shift when all fields illuminate red at the
latest.
▷ When the maximum RPM is reached, the
entire display flashes red and the fuel sup-
ply is interrupted in order to protect the en-
gine.
Central display range
Displayable content
The following settings can be selected:
▷
Reduced display.
▷ Trip data, refer to page 156.
▷ Assisted View, refer to page 158.
▷ Navigation system route preview.
▷ Navigation system map view.
▷ G-Meter, refer to page 158.
▷ Entertainment.
▷ Augmented View.
Depending on vehicle equipment, Aug-
mented View on the instrument cluster en-
ables the visualization of driver assistance
systems on the actual vehicle's surround-
ings.
Grey lines indicate the recommended min-
imum distance to the preceding vehicle
Seite 155
Displays
CONTROLS
155
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A88D30 - VI/23
OwnersManuals2.com
when speed control systems are deacti-
vated.
▷ Android Auto©.
Depending on vehicle equipment and na-
tional-market version, select functions of
a compatible smartphone can also be dis-
played, e.g., map views.
Some contents for the central display range
can also be configured as a view in the Head-
up display.
Additional information:
Head-up display, refer to page 143.
Owner's Manual for Navigation, Entertain-
ment, and Communication, refer to page 6.
Configuring the central display
range
The content of the central display range on the
instrument cluster can be configured individu-
ally, for instance the trip data display.
1.
Press the button on the steering
wheel.
A menu bar is displayed in the instrument
cluster.
2. "CONTENT"
Select the menu by tilting the thumbwheel
on the steering wheel where applicable.
3. Select the desired setting using the thumb-
wheel on the steering wheel.
Trip data
Principle
The trip data display provides various informa-
tion about the trip, e.g., average consumption
or trip distance.
General information
The trip data can be displayed on the control
display and in the instrument cluster.
Depending on the setting in the Live Vehicle
menu, the trip data is shown on the control
display.
The values can be displayed and reset de-
pending on different intervals.
Display on the control display
General information
The following trip data is shown on the control
display:
▷ Configured interval for displaying trip data.
▷ Average fuel consumption depending
on the configured interval.
▷ Travel time depending on the config-
ured interval.
▷ Distance traveled depending on the
configured interval.
▷ Distance traveled in Coasting mode.
Displaying trip data continuously
1.
Apps menu
2. "Vehicle"
3. "Live Vehicle"
4. "Content"
5. "Trip data"
Display in the instrument cluster
Information on consumption and distance cov-
ered can be displayed in the instrument clus-
ter.
Seite 156
CONTROLS
Displays
156
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A88D30 - VI/23
OwnersManuals2.com
▷ Current consumption, arrow 1.
▷ Average consumption, arrow 2.
▷ Distance traveled depending on the config-
ured interval, arrow 3.
The icon is displayed when the vehicle
is in Coasting mode.
▷ Total mileage, arrow 4.
Current consumption
The current fuel consumption display allows
you to check the current fuel consumption, e.g.,
to drive economically and in an environmen-
tally-friendly manner.
Mild hybrid technology: Depending on vehi-
cle equipment, the fuel supply is interrupted
and the engine continues to run when driving
slowly or even when the vehicle is stationary.
In this case, the internal combustion engine is
operated electrically.
Average consumption
The average fuel consumption is displayed de-
pending on how the intervals for displaying trip
data are configured.
Adjusting the display of the trip data
The intervals for the display of the trip data
in the instrument cluster and on the control
display are adjustable.
1.
Apps menu
2. "Vehicle"
3. "System settings"
4. "Time period for trip data"
5. "Values"
6. Select the desired setting:
▷ "Since start of trip ( )": the values are au-
tomatically reset approx. four hours af-
ter the vehicle has come to a standstill.
▷ "Since last refuel ( )": the values are au-
tomatically reset after refueling with a
larger quantity of fuel.
▷ "Since factory": the values since the
time of the factory delivery are dis-
played.
▷ "Since Individual ( )": the values since
the last manual reset are displayed. The
values can be reset at any time.
Resetting average values manually
The following interval can be reset manually at
any time:
"Since Individual ( )"
Using the thumbwheel on the steering wheel:
1.
Display trip data in the instrument cluster.
2. Press and hold the knurled wheel
on the steering wheel until the values are
reset.
Via iDrive:
1.
Apps menu
2. "Vehicle"
3. "System settings"
4. "Time period for trip data"
5. "Reset Individual"
The average values and counters are reset.
Once the average values and counters have
been reset, the following interval is automati-
cally activated:
"Since Individual ( )"
Seite 157
Displays
CONTROLS
157
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A88D30 - VI/23
OwnersManuals2.com
Assisted View
Principle
With Assisted View, information on driver as-
sistance systems can be displayed on the in-
strument cluster with a vehicle animation.
Information on parking and maneuvering is
displayed in the Assisted View whenever the
parking assistance system is active.
Safety information
Warning
The system cannot serve as a substitute for
the driver’s personal judgment in assessing
the traffic situation. Based on the limits of
the system, it cannot independently react
to all traffic situations. There is a risk of
accident. Adjust driving style to traffic condi-
tions. Watch the surrounding traffic situation
closely, be ready to take over steering and
braking at any time, and actively intervene
where appropriate.
General
You can configure how Assisted View is dis-
played on the central display range.
Additional information:
Central display area, refer to page 155
Display
An example of active Driver Assistance: Indica-
tor and warning lights for Distance Control and
Assisted Driving Mode are displayed. At the
same time, the Distance Control is animated in
Assisted View.
System limits
The system's detection capability is limited.
Only objects that are detected by the system
are taken into account.
Additional information:
▷ Cameras, refer to page 35.
▷ Radar sensors, refer to page 36.
G-Meter
General information
The G-Meter indicates the forces that are ap-
plied in longitudinal and transverse direction
on the vehicle occupants while driving.
The display can be configured on the central
display range of the instrument cluster.
The values are automatically reset whenever
you start a new drive.
Additional information:
Central display area, refer to page 155
Manually reseting G-Meter values
1.
Display the G-Meter on the instrument
cluster.
2. Press and hold the thumbwheel on
the steering wheel until the values are re-
set.
Date and time
Various settings can be applied for the date
and time display such as the date format.
Seite 158
CONTROLS
Displays
158
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A88D30 - VI/23
OwnersManuals2.com
Depending on vehicle equipment and national-
market version, the time zone can be set and
automatic time setting can be activated. With
automatic time setting, the time, date and, if
necessary, the time zone are updated auto-
matically.
1. Apps menu
2. "Vehicle"
3. "System settings"
4. "Date and time"
5. Select the desired settings.
Fuel gauge
Principle
The current fill level of the fuel tank is dis-
played.
General information
Vehicle inclination may cause the display to
vary.
Additional information:
Refueling, refer to page 318.
Display
An arrow beside the fuel pump
icon shows which side of the ve-
hicle the fuel filler flap is on.
The current range is displayed
as numerical value.
Indicator light in the instrument
cluster
The yellow indicator light illuminates,
once the fuel reserve is reached.
Range
Principle
The range indicates the distance that can still
be covered with the current tank of fuel.
General information
The estimated range with remaining fuel is
permanently displayed on the instrument clus-
ter.
With a low remaining range, a Check Control
message is briefly displayed. A low remaining
range means that engine functions cannot al-
ways be ensured for sporty driving, e.g., when
cornering at speed.
The Check Control message appears
continuously below a range of approx.
30 miles/50 km.
Safety information
NOTICE
With a range below 30 miles/50 km, the
engine may no longer have sufficient fuel.
Engine functions are not ensured anymore.
There is a risk of damage to property. Refuel
promptly.
Display
The current range is displayed
as a numerical value next to the
fuel gauge.
Setting the units of
measurement
Depending on the national-market version, you
can set the units of measurement for some
Seite 159
Displays
CONTROLS
159
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A88D30 - VI/23
OwnersManuals2.com
values, for instance consumption, distances,
and temperature.
1. Apps menu
2. "Vehicle"
3. "System settings"
4. "Units"
5. Select the desired setting.
Vehicle status
General information
The status can be displayed and actions per-
formed for several systems such as for Check
Control.
Displaying vehicle status
1.
Apps menu
2. "Vehicle"
3. "Vehicle status"
Overview
Icon
Description
"FLAT TIRE MONITOR": Sta-
tus of the flat tire monitor, refer
to page 341.
"Tire Pressure Monitor": status
of the Tire Pressure Monitor,
refer to page 334.
"Engine oil level": electronic
oil measurement, refer to
page 353.
"Check Control": displaying
stored Check Control mes-
sages, refer to page 144.
"Required services": display of
the service notification, refer to
page 161.
Current driving condition
General information
The current driving condition is displayed dy-
namically while driving in the Live Vehicle
menu on the control display.
The following states can be displayed:
▷ Driving.
▷ Coasting mode: "EFFICIENT COASTING"
▷ "CHARGING BATTERY"
With mild hybrid technology:
▷ Adaptive recuperation.
Depending on the situation, additional in-
formation on adaptive recuperation is dis-
played.
▷ Efficient rolling with engine switched off.
Additional information:
▷ Adaptive recuperation, refer to page 313.
▷ Coasting, refer to page 314.
Functional requirements
▷
Personal or Efficient driving mode is se-
lected.
▷ The following setting is selected for Live
Vehicle:"Adaptive content"
Display
An example:
The adaptive recuperation is active, arrow 1.
Seite 160
CONTROLS
Displays
160
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A88D30 - VI/23
OwnersManuals2.com
The vehicle battery is charged when the vehi-
cle decelerates, arrow 2.
Sport displays
Principle
The Sport displays especially support a sporty
driving style.
Functional requirements
▷ SPORT driving mode is selected.
▷ The following setting is selected for Live
Vehicle:"Adaptive content"
Display
The sport displays are displayed in the Live
Vehicle menu on the control display.
The following information is displayed:
▷ Torque.
▷ Power.
▷ Boost pressure.
▷ Engine oil temperature.
Service notification
Principle
Service notifications indicate necessary main-
tenance measures.
General information
After turning on, the next service appointment
or the distance remaining until the next servic-
ing is displayed briefly on the instrument clus-
ter.
A Service Advisor can read out the mainte-
nance work from the vehicle key.
Display
More information on the maintenance meas-
ures required may be displayed on the control
display.
1. Apps menu
2. "Vehicle"
3. "Vehicle status"
4. "Required services"
Maintenance measures as well as legally
mandated inspections are displayed.
5. Select the desired entry.
Entering appointment dates
Dates for mandatory vehicle inspections can
be entered.
Make sure that the vehicle's date and time are
set correctly.
1.
Apps menu
2. "Vehicle"
3. "Vehicle status"
4. "Required services"
5. "Vehicle inspection"
6. "Date:"
7. Select the desired setting.
Seite 161
Displays
CONTROLS
161
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A88D30 - VI/23
OwnersManuals2.com
Light and view
Vehicle features and options
This chapter describes model-specific equip-
ment, systems, and functions that are currently
available, or may become available in the fu-
ture, even if they are not present in the vehicle.
Additional information:
Vehicle equipment, refer to page 8.
Turn signal
Turn signal in exterior mirror
When driving and during operation of the turn
signals or hazard warning system, do not fold
in the exterior mirrors so that the turn signal
lamps on the exterior mirror are easy to see.
Flashing
Press the lever past the resistance point.
One-touch signaling
Lightly tap the lever up or down.
The one-touch signaling duration can be ad-
justed.
1.
Apps menu
2. "Vehicle"
3. "Exterior lighting"
4. If necessary, "Additional settings"
5. "One-touch turn signal"
6. Select the desired setting.
Brief flashing
Press the lever to the resistance point and hold
it there for as long as you want the turn signal
to flash.
High beams,
headlight flasher
Press the lever forward or pull it backward.
▷ High beams on, arrow 1.
The high beams illuminate when the low
beams are switched on.
▷ High beams off/headlight flasher, arrow 2.
The indicator light in the instrument
cluster illuminates when the high
beams are turned on.
Seite 162
CONTROLS
Light and view
162
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A88D30 - VI/23
OwnersManuals2.com
Automatic High Beam
Assistant
Principle
The Automatic High Beam Assistant detects
other road users early on and automatically
switches the high beams on or off depending
on the traffic situation.
General information
The Automatic High Beam Assistant ensures
that the high beams are switched on, when-
ever the traffic situation allows. In the low
speed range, the high beams are not switched
on by the system.
The system responds to light from oncoming
traffic and traffic driving ahead of you, and to
ambient lighting, for instance in towns and cit-
ies.
The high beams can be switched on and off
manually at any time.
Functional requirements
▷
Automatic headlight control is activated.
▷ Low beams are switched on.
Activating Automatic High Beam
Assistant
1.
Apps menu
2. "Vehicle"
3. "Exterior lighting"
4. "Additional settings"
5. "Automatic High Beams"
The indicator light in the instrument
cluster is illuminated when the low
beams are switched on.
The headlights are automatically changed be-
tween low beams and high beams.
The blue indicator light in the instru-
ment cluster illuminates when the sys-
tem switches on the high beams.
Interruption of the journey with activated Au-
tomatic High Beam Assistant: the Automatic
High Beam Assistant remains activated when
continuing the journey.
The Automatic High Beam Assistant is de-
activated when manually switching the high
beams on and off.
To reactivate the Automatic High Beam Assis-
tant, press the turn signal lever up, arrow 1.
Deactivating Automatic High Beam
Assistant
Press the turn signal lever forward, arrow 1, or
pull the turn signal lever backward when the
high beams are switched on, arrow 2.
When the Automatic High Beam Assistant is
deactivated via iDrive, the operation with the
turn signal lever is not possible.
Seite 163
Light and view
CONTROLS
163
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A88D30 - VI/23
OwnersManuals2.com
Sensitivity of the Automatic High
Beam Assistant
General information
The sensitivity of the Automatic High Beam
Assistant can be adjusted.
Safety information
Warning
If adjustments have been made or the sen-
sitivity has been modified, oncoming traffic
may be momentarily blinded. There is a risk
of accident. If adjustments have been made
and the sensitivity has been modified, make
sure that oncoming traffic is not momentarily
blinded. Switch off the high beams manually
if required.
Functional requirements
▷ Setting at standstill only.
▷ Drive-ready state is switched on.
▷ Light is turned off.
Increasing sensitivity
Push the turn signal lever to the front for ap-
proximately 10 seconds.
A Check Control message is displayed. The
system responds more sensitively.
Resetting the sensitivity
Push the turn signal lever to the front again
for approx. 10 seconds or switch off the drive-
ready state.
The sensitivity of the Automatic High Beam
Assistant is reset to the factory settings.
System limits
The Automatic High Beam Assistant cannot
replace the driver's personal judgment of when
to use the high beams. When appropriate, dim
the high beams manually.
The system may not be fully operational in
the following situations, and driver intervention
may be necessary:
▷ In very unfavorable weather conditions
such as fog or heavy precipitation.
▷ When detecting poorly-lit road users such
as pedestrians, cyclists, horseback riders
and wagons; when driving close to train or
ship traffic; or at animal crossings.
▷ In tight curves, on hilltops or in depressions,
in crossing traffic or half-obscured oncom-
ing traffic on highways.
▷ In poorly-lit towns and cities or in the pres-
ence of highly reflective signs.
▷ When the windshield in front of the interior
mirror is fogged up, dirty or covered with
stickers, etc.
Exterior lighting
Overview
Buttons in the vehicle
Seite 164
CONTROLS
Light and view
164
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A88D30 - VI/23
OwnersManuals2.com
Icon Function
Exterior lighting menu.
Automatic headlight control.
Low beams.
Exterior lighting off.
Exterior lighting off.
Functions via iDrive
Icon Function
Automatic headlight control.
Low beams.
Parking lights.
Exterior lighting off.
Left roadside parking light.
Right roadside parking light.
Buttons on the vehicle key
Icon
Function
Interior lighting.
Parts of the exterior lighting.
Pathway lighting.
Automatic headlight control
Principle
The low beams are switched on and off au-
tomatically depending on the ambient bright-
ness, for example in tunnels, in twilight or if
there is precipitation.
General information
A blue sky with the sun low on the horizon can
cause the lights to be turned on.
If the low beams are switched on manually, the
automatic headlight control is deactivated.
Activate automatic headlight control
Press the button on the light switch.
The icon in the button illuminates green.
The indicator light in the instrument
cluster is illuminated when the low
beams are switched on.
System limits
The automatic headlight control cannot re-
place your personal judgment of lighting condi-
tions.
For example, the sensors are unable to detect
fog or hazy weather. In these situations, turn
the lights on manually.
Parking lights, low-beams
and roadside parking lights
General information
If the driver's door is opened when the drive-
ready state is switched off, the exterior lighting
is automatically switched off after a period of
time.
Seite 165
Light and view
CONTROLS
165
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A88D30 - VI/23
OwnersManuals2.com
Parking lights
General information
The parking lights can only be switched on in
the low speed range.
Turning on parking lights
1. Apps menu
2. "Vehicle"
3. "Exterior lighting"
4. "Parking light"
The indicator light in the instrument
cluster illuminates.
The vehicle is illuminated on all sides.
Do not use the parking lights for extended pe-
riods; otherwise, they might drain the vehicle
battery and it would then be impossible to
switch on drive-ready state.
Turning off parking lights
The following options are available to turn off
the parking lights:
▷
Press the button on the light switch.
▷ Press and hold the button on the
light switch.
▷ Turn off light via iDrive.
▷ Turn on drive-ready state.
After the drive-ready state is switched on,
the automatic headlight control will be acti-
vated.
Low beams
Turning on low beams
Press the button on the light switch.
The low beams illuminate when drive-ready
state is switched on.
The indicator light in the instrument
cluster illuminates.
Press the button again to switch on the low
beams when the standby state is switched on.
Turning off low beams
Depending on the national-market version, the
low beams can be turned off in the low speed
range:
▷ Press the button on the light switch.
▷ Press and hold the button on the
light switch.
▷ Turn off light via iDrive.
Roadside parking lights
When the vehicle is parked, a one-sided road-
side parking light can be switched on.
1.
Apps menu
2. "Vehicle"
3. "Exterior lighting"
4. "Left roadside park. light" or "Right
roadside park. light"
Welcome lights
Principle
The welcome light turns on automatically for
a limited period of time when approaching or
unlocking the vehicle.
General information
Depending on the equipment, the exterior
lighting of the vehicle can be set individually.
Seite 166
CONTROLS
Light and view
166
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A88D30 - VI/23
OwnersManuals2.com
Activating/deactivating welcome
light
1. Apps menu
2. "Vehicle"
3. "Exterior lighting"
4. If necessary, "Additional settings"
5. Depending on the equipment, select the
following setting:
▷ "Welcome and goodbye"
When unlocking the vehicle, individual
lighting functions are turned on.
▷ "BMW Iconic Glow"
The radiator grille lighting can only be
adjusted when the vehicle is stationary
and the drive-ready state is switched
off.
Turning on the welcome light
▷ Automatically on approach.
▷ During unlocking.
▷ Press the button on the vehicle key
with the vehicle locked.
Depending on the settings, the interior
lighting and parts of the exterior lighting will
be turned on.
The function is not available for the first
10 seconds after locking.
LED light carpet
The light source is located in the position indi-
cated.
Keep the light source clean and unobstructed.
Pathway lighting
Principle
For the pathway lighting, the exterior lighting
turns on for a certain period of time after leav-
ing the vehicle in order to illuminate the area
surrounding the vehicle.
Switching pathway lighting on
▷ After switching off the drive-ready state,
briefly push the turn signal lever forward.
▷ Press and hold the button on the
vehicle key for approx. 1 second.
Setting the duration
1.
Apps menu
2. "Vehicle"
3. "Exterior lighting"
4. If necessary, "Additional settings"
5. "Pathway lighting"
6. Select the desired setting.
Daytime driving lights
General information
The daytime driving lights illuminate when
drive-ready state is switched on.
Activating/deactivating daytime
driving lights
In some countries, daytime driving lights are
mandatory, so it may not be possible to deacti-
vate the daytime driving lights in front.
1.
Apps menu
2. "Vehicle"
Seite 167
Light and view
CONTROLS
167
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A88D30 - VI/23
OwnersManuals2.com
3. "Exterior lighting"
4. If necessary, "Additional settings"
5. Depending on vehicle equipment or na-
tional-market version:
▷ "Daytime driving lights"
▷ "Rear daytime driving lights"
▷ "BMW Iconic Glow"
Adaptive lighting functions
Principle
Adaptive lighting functions enable dynamic il-
lumination of the road.
General information
The adaptive lighting functions may consist of
one system or multiple systems, depending on
the equipment version:
▷ Cornering light.
Activating the adaptive lighting
functions
Press the button on the light switch.
The LED in the button illuminates.
The adaptive lighting functions are active
when the drive-ready state is switched on.
Cornering light
Principle
In tight curves, for instance on mountainous
roads or when turning, an additional cornering
light is switched on that illuminates the inside
of the curve when the vehicle is moving below
a certain speed.
General information
The cornering light is automatically switched
on depending on the steering-wheel angle or,
where applicable, the use of turn signals.
When driving in reverse, the cornering lights
may be automatically switched on regardless
of the steering-wheel angle.
Adaptive headlight range
control
The adaptive headlight range control feature
balances out acceleration and braking proc-
esses as well as the vehicle load conditions in
order to avoid blinding oncoming traffic.
Instrument lighting
Functional requirement
The brightness can only be adjusted in dark-
ness and with turned on parking lights or low
beams.
Setting the brightness
1.
Apps menu
2. "Vehicle"
3. "Interior lighting"
4. "Cockpit brightness at night"
5. Select the desired setting.
Interior lighting
General information
Depending on the equipment version, interior
lights, footwell lights, entry lights, ambient
lighting, and speaker lighting are automatically
controlled.
Seite 168
CONTROLS
Light and view
168
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A88D30 - VI/23
OwnersManuals2.com
Overview
Interior lighting menu
Reading lights
Interior lights
Turning interior lights on/off
Using the button:
Press the button.
To switch off permanently: press the button
and hold for approx. 3 seconds.
Via iDrive:
1.
Apps menu
2. "Vehicle"
3. "Interior lighting"
4. "Reading light"
5. Tap on the icon.
Turning reading lights on/off
Using the button:
Press the button.
Depending on the vehicle equipment, the read-
ing lights are located next to the interior lights
in the front and rear.
Via iDrive:
1. Apps menu
2. "Vehicle"
3. "Interior lighting"
4. "Reading light"
5. Tap the desired seat.
The brightness of the reading lights can be
adjusted when they are turned on.
Changing settings
Depending on vehicle equipment, individual
settings can be applied to specific seats via
iDrive or BMW Touch Command.
Via iDrive:
1.
Apps menu
2. "Vehicle"
3. "Interior lighting"
4. "Reading light"
5. Tap the desired seat.
6. Select the desired settings.
Via BMW Touch Command:
1.
"Light"
2. "Reading lights" or "Ambience"
3. Select the desired settings.
Ambient light
General information
Depending on the equipment version, lighting
can be adjusted for some lights in the car's
interior.
Activating/deactivating ambient
light
1.
Apps menu
2. "Vehicle"
3. "Interior lighting"
Seite 169
Light and view
CONTROLS
169
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A88D30 - VI/23
OwnersManuals2.com
4. If necessary, "Ambience"
5. "Ambient lighting"
Turning ambient light on/off
The ambient light is switched on when the ve-
hicle is unlocked, and switched off when the
vehicle is locked.
If the ambient light was deactivated via iDrive,
it will not be turned on when the vehicle is
unlocked.
Selecting the color
The color of the ambient light can only be se-
lected in Personal Mode.
1.
Apps menu
2. "Vehicle"
3. "Interior lighting"
4. If necessary, "Ambience"
5. "Color"
6. Select the desired setting.
Setting the brightness
1.
Apps menu
2. "Vehicle"
3. "Interior lighting"
4. If necessary, "Ambience"
5. "Background light" or "Accent lighting"
6. Select the desired setting.
Dynamic light
Certain situations, for example incoming calls
or obstacles detected when opening doors, are
indicated by light effects. If the ambient light is
disabled, the light effects are still displayed.
1.
Apps menu
2. "Vehicle"
3. "Interior lighting"
4. If necessary, "Ambience"
5. "Lighting events"
6. Select the desired setting.
Reduced for night drive
Some lights of the interior lighting are reduced
when the vehicle is driven in the dark.
1. Apps menu
2. "Vehicle"
3. "Interior lighting"
4. If necessary, "Ambience"
5. "Reduced for night driving"
Speaker lighting
Principle
Some speakers in the vehicle are illuminated.
General information
When the speakers are muted, the speaker
lighting is turned off. When the ambient light-
ing effects are enabled, the speakers illuminate
white.
Turning speaker lighting on/off
The speaker lighting is switched on when the
vehicle is unlocked, and switched off when the
vehicle is locked.
Window wiper system
Safety information
Warning
If the wipers start moving in the folded away
state, body parts can be jammed or damage
may occur to parts of the vehicle. There is a
risk of injury or risk of damage to property.
Make sure that the vehicle is switched off
when the wipers are in the folded-away state
Seite 170
CONTROLS
Light and view
170
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A88D30 - VI/23
OwnersManuals2.com
and the wipers are folded in when switching
on.
NOTICE
The wiper blades can wear out or become
damaged prematurely when wiping on a dry
window for a longer period of time. The wiper
motor can overheat. There is a risk of dam-
age to property. Do not use the wipers when
the window is dry.
NOTICE
If the wipers are frozen to the windshield,
the wiper blades can be torn off and the
wiper motor can overheat when switching on.
There is a risk of damage to property. Defrost
the windshield prior to switching the wipers
on.
Turning on window wiper system
Press the lever up until the desired position is
reached.
▷
Resting position of the wipers, position 0.
▷ Rain sensor, position 1.
▷ Normal wiper speed, position 2.
▷ Fast wiper speed, position 3.
When the journey is interrupted with the win-
dow wiper system turned on: when the journey
continues, the wipers resume at their previous
speed.
The wiper speed can be reduced gradually to
protect the wiper motor from overheating.
Turning off the window wiper
system and flick wipe
Press the lever down or forward.
▷ Turning off: press the lever down, arrow 1,
until it reaches the 0 position.
▷ Flick wipe: press the lever down from the
0 position, arrow 1, and press the lever in
position 0 or position 1 forward, arrow 2.
The lever automatically returns to its 0 po-
sition when released.
Rain sensor
Principle
The rain sensor automatically controls the
wiper operation depending on the intensity of
the rainfall.
General information
The sensor is located on the windshield, di-
rectly in front of the interior mirror.
Safety information
NOTICE
If the rain sensor is activated, the wipers
can accidentally start moving in car washes.
There is a risk of damage to property. Deacti-
vate the rain sensor in car washes.
Seite 171
Light and view
CONTROLS
171
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A88D30 - VI/23
OwnersManuals2.com
Activating rain sensor
Press lever up once from the 0 position, ar-
row 1.
Wiping operation is started.
The LED in the wiper lever is illuminated.
In frosty conditions, wiping operation may not
start.
Deactivating rain sensor
Press lever back into the 0 position.
Adjusting the rain sensor sensitivity
Turn the thumbwheel to adjust the sensitivity
of the rain sensor.
▷
Upward: high rain sensor sensitivity.
▷ Downward: low rain sensor sensitivity.
Windshield washer system
Safety information
Warning
The washer fluid can freeze onto the window
at low temperatures and obstruct the view.
There is a risk of accident. Only use the
washer systems if the washer fluid cannot
freeze. Use washer fluid with antifreeze, if
needed.
NOTICE
When the washer fluid reservoir is empty,
the washer pump cannot work as intended.
There is a risk of damage to property. Do
not use the washer system when the washer
fluid reservoir is empty.
Cleaning the windshield
Pull the lever.
The washer fluid is sprayed onto the wind-
shield directly in front of the wiper blade when
the wiper moves upward.
Fold-out position of the wipers
Principle
In the fold-out position, the wipers can be
folded out from the windshield, which is impor-
tant, for instance, when changing the wiper
Seite 172
CONTROLS
Light and view
172
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A88D30 - VI/23
OwnersManuals2.com
blades or for folding away under frosty condi-
tions.
Safety information
Warning
If the wipers start moving in the folded away
state, body parts can be jammed or damage
may occur to parts of the vehicle. There is a
risk of injury or risk of damage to property.
Make sure that the vehicle is switched off
when the wipers are in the folded-away state
and the wipers are folded in when switching
on.
NOTICE
If the wipers are frozen to the windshield,
the wiper blades can be torn off and the
wiper motor can overheat when switching on.
There is a risk of damage to property. Defrost
the windshield prior to switching the wipers
on.
Folding out the wipers
1. Turn on standby state.
2. Press and hold the wiper lever down until
the wipers stop in a nearly vertical position.
3. Fold the wipers all the way out from the
windshield.
Folding in the wipers
1.
Fold the wipers back in onto the windshield.
2. Switch on standby state and press and
hold the wiper lever down again.
Wipers return to their resting position and
are ready again for operation.
Seite 173
Light and view
CONTROLS
173
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A88D30 - VI/23
OwnersManuals2.com
Safety
Vehicle features and options
This chapter describes model-specific equip-
ment, systems, and functions that are currently
available, or may become available in the fu-
ture, even if they are not present in the vehicle.
Additional information:
Vehicle equipment, refer to page 8.
Airbags
1 Front airbag, driver
2 Front airbag, front passenger
3 Head airbag
4 Side airbag
5 Knee airbag
Front airbags
The front airbag helps protect the driver and
front passenger in the event of a frontal impact
in which the seat belts alone would not provide
adequate protection.
Side airbag
In the event of a side collision, the side airbag
protects the side of the body in the chest and
lap area.
Head airbag
In the event of a side collision, the head airbag
protects the head.
Seite 174
CONTROLS
Safety
174
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A88D30 - VI/23
OwnersManuals2.com
Ejection Mitigation
The head airbag system is designed as an
ejection mitigation countermeasure to reduce
the likelihood of ejections of vehicle occupants
through side windows during rollovers or side
collision events.
Knee airbag
Depending on the national-market version:
The knee airbag protects the legs in the event
of a frontal impact.
Protective effect
General information
Airbags are not deployed in every impact sit-
uation, e.g., in less severe accidents.
Information on optimum protective
effect of the airbags
Warning
If the seat position is incorrect, the seat
belts are fastened incorrectly or the deploy-
ment area of the airbags is impaired, the
airbag system cannot provide protection as
intended and may cause additional injuries
due to deployment. There is a risk of injury
or danger to life. Follow the information on
achieving the optimum protective effect of the
airbag system.
▷
Keep a distance from the airbags.
▷ Fasten the seat belts correctly.
▷ Always grasp the steering wheel on the
steering wheel rim. Hold your hands at the
3 o'clock and 9 o'clock positions to keep the
risk of injury to your hands or arms as low
as possible when the airbag is deployed.
▷ Adjust seat and steering wheel so that
hands can be crossed over the steering
wheel. Select the settings so that the
shoulder rests against the backrest when
crossing the hands and the upper body
is as far back as possible while still main-
taining a comfortable grip on the steering
wheel.
▷ Make sure that the front passenger is sit-
ting correctly, i.e., with their feet and legs in
the footwell, not resting on the dashboard.
▷ Make sure that occupants keep their heads
away from the side airbag.
▷ There should be no additional persons, an-
imals or objects between an airbag and a
person.
▷ Dashboard and windshield on the pas-
senger's side must stay clear - do not at-
tach adhesive film or coverings and do not
attach brackets or cables, for instance for
navigation devices or mobile phones.
▷ Do not bond the airbag cover panels with
adhesive, do not cover them or modify
them in any way.
▷ Do not use the cover of the front airbag on
the passenger's side as a storage area.
▷ Keep storage compartments near the air-
bags closed, e.g., glove compartment or
center armrest.
▷ Do not place slip covers, seat cushions,
or other objects on the front seats unless
they are specifically designed for seats with
integrated airbags.
▷ Do not hang pieces of clothing such as
jackets over the backrests.
▷ Do not modify individual components or
wiring. This also applies to steering wheel
covers, the dashboard, and the seats.
▷ Do not disassemble the airbag system.
Even when you follow all instructions very
closely, injury from contact with the airbags
cannot be fully ruled out in certain situations.
The ignition and inflation noise may lead
to short-term and, in most cases, temporary
hearing impairment in sensitive occupants.
Vehicle modifications for a person with disabil-
ities may affect the air bag system; contact
Seite 175
Safety
CONTROLS
175
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A88D30 - VI/23
OwnersManuals2.com
BMW Customer Relations for further informa-
tion.
Warnings and information on the airbags are
also found on the sun visors.
Operational readiness of the airbag
system
Safety information
Warning
Individual components can be hot after de-
ployment of the airbag system. There is a risk
of injury. Do not touch individual components.
Warning
Improperly executed work can lead to failure,
malfunction or unintentional deployment of
the airbag system. In the case of a malfunc-
tion, the airbag system might not deploy as
intended despite the accident severity. There
is a risk of injury or danger to life. Have the
airbag system checked, repaired, disassem-
bled, and scrapped by an authorized service
center or another qualified service center or
repair shop.
Display in the instrument cluster
When drive-ready state is turned on,
the warning light in the instrument
cluster illuminates briefly, thereby indi-
cating the operational readiness of the entire
airbag system and the seat belt tensioners.
Malfunction
▷
Warning light does not illuminate
when drive-ready state is turned on.
▷ The warning light illuminates con-
tinuously.
The airbag system or the seat belt tension-
ers may be not operational. Have the vehicle
checked immediately by an authorized service
center or another qualified service center or
repair shop.
Setting the front seat positions
The power that deploys the driver's/front pas-
senger airbags depends on the position of the
driver's/front passenger seat.
To maintain the accuracy of this function, cali-
brate the electrical front seats as soon as a re-
spective message appears on the control dis-
play.
Additional information:
Seats, refer to page 104.
Automatic deactivation of
the front passenger airbags
Principle
The automatic front passenger airbag deacti-
vation can detect if the front passenger seat is
occupied.
The front passenger airbags are thus activated
or deactivated.
Safety information
Warning
To ensure the front passenger airbag func-
tion, the system must be able to detect
whether a person is sitting in the front pas-
senger seat. The entire seat surface must
be used for this purpose. There is a risk of
injury or danger to life. Make sure that the
front passenger keeps his or her feet in the
footwell.
Seite 176
CONTROLS
Safety
176
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A88D30 - VI/23
OwnersManuals2.com
Functional requirements
To enable accurate recognition of the occupied
seat surface:
▷ Do not attach covers, cushions, ball mats
or other items to the front passenger seat
unless they are specifically determined to
be safe for use on the front passenger seat.
▷ Do not place objects under the seat that
can press against the seat from below.
▷ Sit upright in the seat with your back
against the backrest.
▷ Sit down with your feet touching the floor.
Installing child restraint systems
To enable accurate recognition of the occupied
seat surface of the front passenger seat:
▷ Pay attention to the specifications and the
operating and safety information of the
child restraint system manufacturer when
using child restraint systems.
▷ Make sure that the seat surface of the child
restraint system rests as flat as possible on
the seat surface.
▷ Move the head restraint up or remove it to
ensure that the child restraint system rests
as flat as possible against the rear seat
backrest.
▷ Observe the maximum size of the child re-
straint system, for example to avoid possi-
ble touching the roof.
Before transporting a child on the front pas-
senger seat, refer to the safety information and
instructions for children on the front passenger
seat, see Children.
More information: installation of child restraint
systems, refer to page 121.
Indicator light for the front
passenger airbags
The indicator light for the front-seat passenger
airbag in the headliner indicates the operating
state of the front-seat passenger airbag.
The light indicates whether the airbags are ei-
ther activated or deactivated.
After drive-ready state is switched on, the light
shortly illuminates and then indicates whether
the airbags are either activated or deactivated.
Display Function
The indicator light is contin-
uously illuminated when the
seat is not occupied or when a
child is detected on the seat in
a provided child restraint sys-
tem as intended. The airbags
on the passenger's side are
not activated.
The indicator light does not il-
luminate when, for instance, a
correctly seated person of suf-
ficient size is detected on the
seat. The airbags on the pas-
senger's side are activated.
When the front passenger seat is occupied,
check the indicator light before and while driv-
ing.
Fault of the automatic deactivation
system
When transporting older children and adults,
the front passenger airbags may be deacti-
vated in certain seat positions. In this case, the
indicator light for the front passenger airbags
illuminates.
In this case, change the seat position so that
the front passenger airbags are activated and
the indicator light goes out.
If it is not possible to activate the airbags, have
the person sit in the rear seat.
Occupancy detection
The occupancy detection meets the statutory
requirements of the Federal Motor Vehicle
Safety Standard FMVSS 208 and deactivates
Seite 177
Safety
CONTROLS
177
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A88D30 - VI/23
OwnersManuals2.com
the passenger airbags under certain condi-
tions.
Collision warning systems
General information
Depending on the equipment, the vehicle has
different systems that can help prevent the risk
of imminent collision.
▷ Forward Collision Mitigation with brake in-
tervention, refer to page 179.
▷ Exit warning, refer to page 188.
▷ Lane departure warning, refer to page 190.
▷ Active Blind Spot Detection, refer to
page 193.
▷ Side collision mitigation, refer to page 195.
▷ Rear-end collision preparation, refer to
page 197.
▷ Traffic light and sign warning, refer to
page 198.
▷ Wrong way warning, refer to page 200.
▷ No Turn on Red function, refer to page 201.
▷ Emergency Stop Assistant, refer to
page 202.
Safety information
Warning
The system cannot serve as a substitute for
the driver’s personal judgment in assessing
the traffic situation. Based on the limits of
the system, it cannot independently react
to all traffic situations. There is a risk of
accident. Adjust driving style to traffic condi-
tions. Watch the surrounding traffic situation
closely, be ready to take over steering and
braking at any time, and actively intervene
where appropriate.
Warning
Indicators and warnings cannot serve as a
substitute for the driver’s personal judgment.
Due to its limits, the system may not issue
warnings or responses, or these may be is-
sued late or in a manner that is not consis-
tent with their normal use. There is a risk of
accident. Adjust driving style to traffic condi-
tions. Watch surrounding traffic closely and
actively intervene where appropriate.
Sensors
Depending on vehicle equipment, the Intelli-
gent Safety systems are controlled by the fol-
lowing sensors:
▷ Camera behind the windshield.
▷ Front radar sensor.
▷ Radar sensors, side, front.
▷ Radar sensors, side, rear.
Additional information:
Sensors of the vehicle, refer to page 35.
Turning on/turning off collision
warning systems
Depending on national-market version, some
of the systems are automatically activated
whenever you start driving.
The following functions are adjustable.
1.
Apps menu
2. "Vehicle"
3. "Driving settings"
4. "Driver Assistance"
5. "Safety and warnings"
6. Select the desired settings.
Seite 178
CONTROLS
Safety
178
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A88D30 - VI/23
OwnersManuals2.com
Resetting the settings
The settings of the collision warning systems
can be reset to the default settings at vehicle
delivery.
1. Apps menu
2. "Vehicle"
3. "Driving settings"
4. "Driver Assistance"
5. "Safety and warnings"
6. "Reset to recommended settings"
System limits
Safety information
Warning
Due to its limits, the system may not react, or
it may react too late or in a manner that is not
consistent with normal use. There may be a
risk of accidents or risk of damage to prop-
erty. Actively intervene as warranted. Refer
to the information in this Owner’s Manual re-
garding the scope of the system’s operation
and limitations.
Detection capability
The system's detection capability is limited.
The system only takes into account objects
that are located in the detection range of the
installed sensors and are detected by the sys-
tem.
Depending on the vehicle equipment, the area
is monitored by cameras or radar sensors.
Thus, a system response might not come or
might come late.
System limits of the sensors
Additional information:
Sensors of the vehicle, refer to page 35.
Forward Collision Mitigation
with brake intervention
Principle
The Forward Collision Mitigation can help
prevent accidents. If an accident cannot be
avoided, the system can help reduce the se-
verity of the accident.
The system can issue a warning of a possible
risk of collision and activate the brakes inde-
pendently, if needed.
General information
Depending on the equipment version, the For-
ward Collision Mitigation system includes the
following functions:
▷ Warning function in rear-end collision situa-
tions, refer to page 182.
▷ Warning function for oncoming traffic, refer
to page 183.
▷ Warning function for turning with oncoming
traffic, refer to page 184.
▷ Warning function for pedestrians, refer to
page 185.
▷ Warning function at intersections, refer to
page 186.
▷ Evasion Assistant, refer to page 187.
Safety information
Warning
The system cannot serve as a substitute for
the driver’s personal judgment in assessing
the traffic situation. Based on the limits of
the system, it cannot independently react
to all traffic situations. There is a risk of
accident. Adjust driving style to traffic condi-
tions. Watch the surrounding traffic situation
closely, be ready to take over steering and
braking at any time, and actively intervene
where appropriate.
Seite 179
Safety
CONTROLS
179
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A88D30 - VI/23
OwnersManuals2.com
Warning
Indicators and warnings cannot serve as a
substitute for the driver’s personal judgment.
Due to its limits, the system may not issue
warnings or responses, or these may be is-
sued late or in a manner that is not consis-
tent with their normal use. There is a risk of
accident. Adjust driving style to traffic condi-
tions. Watch surrounding traffic closely and
actively intervene where appropriate.
Warning
Individual functions may not work correctly
when towing with Forward Collision Mitiga-
tion enabled or Cruise Control switched on.
There is a risk of accident. Switch off Forward
Collision Mitigation and Cruise Control before
towing.
Sensors
Depending on the equipment, the system is
controlled by the following sensors:
▷
Camera behind the windshield.
▷ Front radar sensor.
▷ Radar sensors, side, front.
Additional information:
Sensors of the vehicle, refer to page 35.
Speed range
The system issues a warning of a possi-
ble risk of collision at speeds above approx.
3 mph/5 km/h.
If the vehicle speed exceeds approx.
155 mph/250 km/h, the system is deactivated
temporarily.
Some functions are deactivated earlier.
The system is enabled as soon as the speed
drops below these values again.
Turning the Forward Collision
Mitigation on/off
Turning on the system automatically
Depending on the national-market version, the
system is automatically active after every de-
parture.
Turning on system manually
The system is activated by setting the warning
time.
Additional information:
Setting the warning time, refer to page 180.
Turning system off manually
Depending on national-market version, the ad-
justment can only be made when the vehicle is
at a standstill or in a very low speed range.
If necessary, the switch-off must be confirmed
successively on the control display.
1.
Apps menu
2. "Vehicle"
3. "Driving settings"
4. "Driver Assistance"
5. "Safety and warnings"
6. "Forward Collision Mitigation"
7. "Off"
Setting the warning time
1.
Apps menu
2. "Vehicle"
3. "Driving settings"
4. "Driver Assistance"
5. "Safety and warnings"
6. "Forward Collision Mitigation"
7. Select the desired setting.
The more sensitive the warning time is set to
be, the more warnings will be displayed. The
system can therefore also issue more early or
unfounded warnings and reactions.
Seite 180
CONTROLS
Safety
180
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A88D30 - VI/23
OwnersManuals2.com
The system checks for visual impairments. De-
pending on the vehicle equipment, the Driver
Attention Camera in the instrument cluster
captures the driver’s field of vision. Visibility
and field of vision also affect the timing of the
warnings.
Display in the instrument cluster
The following indicator/warning lights are
shown on the instrument cluster and, depend-
ing on vehicle equipment, on the Head-up dis-
play:
Icon Meaning
Risk of collision with a person, e.g., a
pedestrian.
Risk of collision, for instance with an
oncoming or a vehicle driving ahead.
Risk of collision, e.g., with a vehicle
crossing from the right.
Risk of collision, e.g., with a vehicle
crossing from the left.
General risk of collision.
The corresponding indicator lights and warn-
ing lights may display differently if the system
detects multiple objects.
Warning function
The Forward Collision Mitigation warns on dif-
ferent warning levels, depending on the re-
spective hazardous situation.
In the event of a prewarning, a warning light
illuminates red. In the event of an acute warn-
ing, a warning light flashes red and a warning
tone sounds.
In the event of a system warning, the driver
must intervene immediately and in accordance
with the situation.
▷
Red warning light illuminates:
A hazardous situation has been detected.
Increased awareness is required.
▷ Red warning light flashes:
There is a risk of collision. Intervene imme-
diately.
▷ A warning signal sounds:
There is a risk of collision. Intervene imme-
diately.
▷ Automatic brake intervention:
Depending on the equipment and situation
in case of risk of imminent collision, the
system can also intervene with an auto-
matic brake intervention and automatically
decelerate the vehicle, if necessary, to a
complete stop.
When the brake pedal is depressed quickly and
hard, the maximum brake power of the vehicle
is used.
Automatic brake intervention
In case of a risk of collision, the system can
assist with an automatic brake intervention, if
necessary.
When the vehicle is traveling at a low speed,
the vehicle may come to a complete stop.
During automatic brake intervention, Dynamic
Stability Control activates automatically.
A brake intervention can be canceled by de-
pressing the accelerator pedal with sufficient
force, releasing the brake pedal, or by actively
steering.
Depending on the equipment and situation,
the brake intervention can occur up to approx.
155 mph/250 km/h.
At speeds above approx. 130 mph/210 km/h,
only a brief brake intervention will occur.
Seite 181
Safety
CONTROLS
181
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A88D30 - VI/23
OwnersManuals2.com
System limits
Safety information
Warning
Due to its limits, the system may not react, or
it may react too late or in a manner that is not
consistent with normal use. There may be a
risk of accidents or risk of damage to prop-
erty. Actively intervene as warranted. Refer
to the information in this Owner’s Manual re-
garding the scope of the system’s operation
and limitations.
Detection capability
The system's detection capability is limited.
The system only takes into account objects
that are located in the detection range of the
installed sensors and are detected by the sys-
tem.
Depending on the vehicle equipment, the area
is monitored by cameras or radar sensors.
Thus, a system response might not come or
might come late.
System limits of the sensors
Additional information:
Sensors of the vehicle, refer to page 35.
Functional limitations
The system may be limited in the following
situations:
▷
In tight curves.
▷ With limitation of the driving stability control
systems.
▷ Up to 10 seconds after drive-ready state is
switched on via the Start/Stop button.
Warning function in forward
collision situations
Principle
The warning function in forward collision situa-
tions warns of a possible risk of collision and
may brake independently.
In the event of an accident, the system helps
by reducing impact speed.
General information
Sensors detect the traffic situation in their de-
tection range.
The system issues a warning of a possible risk
of collision with vehicles at speeds above ap-
prox. 3 mph/5 km/h. The timing of warnings
may vary with the current driving situation.
The system considers the driver’s vehicle han-
dling when responding. If an active driving
style is detected, warnings and brake interven-
tions occur less frequently.
Safety information
Follow the safety information in Chapter “For-
ward Collision Mitigation”.
Display in the instrument cluster
If there is a risk of collision with a detected
vehicle, a warning light is displayed.
Seite 182
CONTROLS
Safety
182
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A88D30 - VI/23
OwnersManuals2.com
Icon Meaning
Forward Collision Warning with a de-
tected vehicle.
General risk of collision.
Warning function
The warning prompts the driver to intervene.
Additional information:
Forward Collision Mitigation, refer to page 179.
System limits
General information
Follow the system limits in the "Forward Colli-
sion Mitigation" chapter.
Detection range
The following situations may not be detected,
or only detected with a delay, for instance:
▷
Vehicle driving slowly in front and being ap-
proached at high speed.
▷ Vehicles that suddenly swerve in front of
you, or strongly decelerating vehicles.
▷ Vehicles with unusual rear designs.
Warning function for
oncoming traffic
Principle
The warning function for oncoming traffic can
warn of a possible risk of collision with oncom-
ing vehicles and may brake independently.
In the event of an accident, the system helps
by reducing impact speed.
General information
Sensors detect the traffic situation in their de-
tection range.
The system issues a warning of a possible risk
of collision with vehicles at speeds above ap-
prox. 3 mph/5 km/h. The timing of warnings
may vary with the current driving situation.
Safety information
Follow the safety information in Chapter “For-
ward Collision Mitigation”.
Display in the instrument cluster
If there is a risk of collision with a detected
vehicle, a warning light is displayed.
Icon
Meaning
Oncoming traffic warning when a ve-
hicle is detected.
General risk of collision.
Warning function
The warning prompts the driver to intervene.
In case of a possible risk of collision, a brake
intervention is triggered.
Additional information:
Forward Collision Mitigation, refer to page 179.
Seite 183
Safety
CONTROLS
183
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A88D30 - VI/23
OwnersManuals2.com
System limits
General information
Follow the system limits in the "Forward Colli-
sion Mitigation" chapter.
Detection range
The following situations may not be detected,
for instance:
▷ Oncoming vehicles at a very high speed.
▷ Vehicles with an unusual front view.
Warning function for turning
with oncoming traffic
Principle
There is a risk of an accident with oncom-
ing vehicles when turning across the oncom-
ing lane. The system can issue a warning of
a possible risk of collision and activate the
brakes independently, if needed.
In the event of an accident, the system helps
by reducing impact speed.
General information
Sensors detect the traffic situation in their de-
tection range.
The system issues a warning of a possible risk
of collision with oncoming vehicles at speeds
from approx. 3 mph/5 km/h. The timing of
warnings may vary with the current driving sit-
uation.
Safety information
Follow the safety information in Chapter “For-
ward Collision Mitigation”.
Display in the instrument cluster
If there is a risk of collision with a detected
vehicle, a warning light is displayed.
Icon Meaning
Oncoming traffic warning when a ve-
hicle is detected.
General risk of collision.
Warning function
The warning prompts the driver to intervene.
Additional information:
Forward Collision Mitigation, refer to page 179.
System limits
General information
Follow the system limits in the "Forward Colli-
sion Mitigation" chapter.
Detection range
The following situations may not be detected,
for instance:
▷
Oncoming vehicles at a very high speed.
▷ Vehicles that are hidden by other vehicles.
▷ Vehicles with an unusual front view.
Upper speed limit
The system is active when the own speed is
below approx. 15 mph/25 km/h.
Seite 184
CONTROLS
Safety
184
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A88D30 - VI/23
OwnersManuals2.com
Warning function for
pedestrians
Principle
At speeds that are common in towns and cit-
ies, the warning function warns the driver of a
possible risk of collision with pedestrians and
cyclists. The system may brake automatically.
In the event of an accident, the system helps
by reducing impact speed.
General information
Sensors detect the traffic situation in their de-
tection range when on a straight line.
Sensors detect the traffic situation in their de-
tection range when turning.
The system issues a warning of a possible
risk of collision with pedestrians or cyclists at
speeds above approx. 3 mph/5 km/h.
Safety information
Follow the safety information in Chapter “For-
ward Collision Mitigation”.
Display in the instrument cluster
If there is a risk of collision with a detected pe-
destrian or cyclist, a warning light is displayed.
Icon Meaning
Risk of collision with a person, e.g., a
pedestrian.
General risk of collision.
Warning function
The warning prompts the driver to intervene.
Additional information:
Forward Collision Mitigation, refer to page 179.
System limits
General information
Follow the system limits in the "Forward Colli-
sion Mitigation" chapter.
Detection range
The detection range consists of the following
parts:
▷
Area in front of the vehicle, arrow 1.
▷ With side radar sensors in front: side areas,
arrows 2.
The following situations may not be detected,
for instance:
Seite 185
Safety
CONTROLS
185
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A88D30 - VI/23
OwnersManuals2.com
▷ Partially covered pedestrians or bikes.
▷ Pedestrians that are not detected as such
because of their contour or posture.
▷ Pedestrians with insufficient height.
Upper speed limit
Depending on the vehicle equipment, the
system responds to pedestrians and cyclists
when your vehicle speed is less than approx.
50 mph/80 km/h.
Warning function at
intersections
Principle
At speeds that are common in towns and cit-
ies, the Intersection Collision Warning function
can warn the driver of a possible risk of colli-
sion with crossing traffic at intersections and
junctions. The system may brake automati-
cally.
In the event of an accident, the system helps
by reducing impact speed.
General information
Sensors detect the traffic situation in their de-
tection range.
Vehicles crossing your driving direction can be
detected by the system as soon as these vehi-
cles enter into detection range of the sensors.
At intersections and junctions, a warning is is-
sued when a risk of collision with crossing traf-
fic is detected.
The system issues a warning of a possible risk
of collision with vehicles at speeds above ap-
prox. 3 mph/5 km/h.
The timing of warnings may vary with the cur-
rent driving situation.
Safety information
Follow the safety information in Chapter “For-
ward Collision Mitigation”.
Display in the instrument cluster
If there is a risk of collision with a detected
vehicle, a warning light is displayed.
Icon Meaning
Risk of collision with vehicle crossing
from the right.
Risk of collision with vehicle crossing
from the left.
General risk of collision.
Warning function
The warning prompts the driver to intervene.
Additional information:
Forward Collision Mitigation, refer to page 179.
System limits
General information
Follow the system limits in the "Forward Colli-
sion Mitigation" chapter.
Detection range
The following situations may not be detected,
for instance:
Seite 186
CONTROLS
Safety
186
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A88D30 - VI/23
OwnersManuals2.com
▷ Crossing vehicles when they are hidden,
e.g. by buildings.
▷ Vehicles with an unusual side view.
▷ Vehicles in highly dynamic driving situa-
tions.
Upper speed limit
The system responds to crossing vehicles
when the vehicle speed is below approx.
50 mph/80 km/h.
Evasion Assistant
Principle
The Evasion Assistant can support the driver
in making evasive maneuvers in certain situa-
tions such as when obstacles or persons sud-
denly appear.
General information
The system issues a warning and intervenes
to support the driver if a lateral evasive ma-
neuver is possible.
Sensors monitor and detect the clearance in
front of the vehicle. Depending on the vehicle
equipment, the areas next to the vehicle are
also monitored.
If the system identifies space alongside the ve-
hicle, it supports an evasive maneuver made
by the driver by safely performing automatic
steering movements.
Safety information
Follow the safety information in Chapter “For-
ward Collision Mitigation”.
Functional requirements
▷ Forward Collision Mitigation is active.
▷ Sensors detect sufficient clearance around
vehicle.
Display in the instrument cluster
If there is a risk of collision with a detected
vehicle or detected person, e.g., a pedestrian,
a warning light is displayed.
Icon Meaning
Warning when a vehicle is detected.
Risk of collision with a pedestrian.
Risk of collision with unknown obsta-
cle.
Warning function with evasion
support
If the vehicle approaches another object at a
high differential speed, a warning is displayed
if there is an immediate risk of collision.
Intervene in case of a warning.
The system is designed to provide assistance
during evasive maneuvers when there is a risk
of collision.
A message in the instrument cluster and, de-
pending on the equipment, in the Head-up dis-
play signals the evasion support.
System limits
General information
Follow the system limits in the "Forward Colli-
sion Mitigation" chapter.
Seite 187
Safety
CONTROLS
187
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A88D30 - VI/23
OwnersManuals2.com
Detection range
The following situations may not be detected,
for instance:
▷ Vehicle driving slowly in front and being ap-
proached at high speed.
▷ Vehicles that suddenly swerve in front of
you, or strongly decelerating vehicles.
▷ Vehicles with unusual rear designs.
▷ Two-wheeled vehicles ahead of you.
▷ Partially covered pedestrians or bikes.
▷ Pedestrians that are not detected as such
because of their contour or posture.
▷ Pedestrians with insufficient height.
Exit warning
Principle
The exit warning helps to avoid accidents.
The system can warn the occupants when
they are opening the doors and a risk of colli-
sion with approaching objects is detected.
General information
Two radar sensors in the rear bumper monitor
the area behind the vehicle.
Depending on the vehicle equipment, the area
around the vehicle in front of the vehicle is
monitored as well. Two additional radar sen-
sors are located in the front bumpers.
The system monitors the vehicle's surround-
ings for a limited time after you get in or park.
A possible risk of collision is indicated by vari-
ous warning functions.
Safety information
Follow the safety information in the "Forward
Collision Mitigation" chapter.
Sensors
The system is controlled by the following sen-
sors:
▷ Radar sensors, side, rear.
▷ Depending on the equipment: radar sen-
sors, side, front.
Turning the exit warning on/off
Turning on the system automatically
The exit warning activates automatically after
departure if the function was switched on at
the completion of the last trip.
Turning system off manually
1.
Apps menu
2. "Vehicle"
3. "Driving settings"
4. "Driver Assistance"
5. "Safety and warnings"
6. "Exit warning"
7. "Off"
Adjusting the exit warning
1.
Apps menu
2. "Vehicle"
3. "Driving settings"
4. "Driver Assistance"
5. "Safety and warnings"
6. "Exit warning"
7. Select the desired setting.
Seite 188
CONTROLS
Safety
188
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A88D30 - VI/23
OwnersManuals2.com
Turning the warning signal on/off
1. Apps menu
2. "Vehicle"
3. "Driving settings"
4. "Driver Assistance"
5. "Safety and warnings"
6. "Exit warning"
7. "Warning tone"
Displays
Warning light in exterior mirror
The warning light in the exterior mirror warns
of a possible collision with a detected vehicle.
Ambient light
Depending on the equipment, warnings are
also indicated by the ambient light in the inte-
rior.
Warning function
Prewarning
In the event of an advance warning, the warn-
ing light in the exterior mirror illuminates. De-
pending on the equipment, the ambient light
also flashes.
An object was detected in the opening area.
Increased awareness is required.
Acute warning
In the event of an acute warning, the warn-
ing light in the exterior mirror flashes, as does
the ambient light, depending on vehicle equip-
ment. In addition, a signal tone sounds.
There is a risk of collision when opening the
doors.
Door functions
In vehicles with electrical door locks, unlocking
is delayed.
On vehicles with automatic doors, opening of
the doors is canceled.
System limits
General information
Follow the system limits in the "Collision warn-
ing systems" chapter.
Detection range
The following situations may not be detected,
for instance:
▷
Fully or partially hidden objects.
▷ Stationary or very slow objects.
▷ Pedestrians.
Functional limitations
The system may be limited in the following
situations:
▷
The speed of an approaching vehicle is too
fast or too slow.
▷ In curves.
▷ In case of fully or partially hidden objects.
Seite 189
Safety
CONTROLS
189
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A88D30 - VI/23
OwnersManuals2.com
Lane Departure Warning
with active return
Principle
The lane departure warning alerts when the
vehicle is about to run off the road or exit the
lane.
An automatic steering intervention helps to
keep the vehicle in its lane.
General information
Sensors detect the traffic situation in their de-
tection range.
The system issues a warning starting at a min-
imum speed. The minimum speed is country-
specific and displayed on the control display.
Warnings are displayed in the instrument clus-
ter. In addition, the steering wheel vibrates.
The system does not provide a warning if the
turn signal is set in the respective direction be-
fore exiting the lane.
Safety information
Warning
The system cannot serve as a substitute
for the driver’s personal judgment in assess-
ing road and traffic situations. There is a
risk of accident. Adjust driving style to traffic
conditions. Watch surrounding traffic closely
and actively intervene where appropriate. Do
not jerk the steering wheel in response to a
warning.
Warning
Indicators and warnings cannot serve as a
substitute for the driver’s personal judgment.
Due to its limits, the system may not issue
warnings or responses, or these may be is-
sued late or in a manner that is not consis-
tent with their normal use. There is a risk of
accident. Adjust driving style to traffic condi-
tions. Watch surrounding traffic closely and
actively intervene where appropriate.
Functional requirement
The camera must detect the lane boundaries
for the lane departure warning to be active.
The areas of the sensors must be clean and
clear.
Sensors
Depending on the equipment, the system is
controlled by the following sensors:
▷
Camera behind the windshield.
▷ Front radar sensor.
▷ Radar sensor, side, front.
▷ Radar sensor, side, rear.
Turning the Lane Departure
Warning on/off
Turning on the system automatically
Depending on the national-market version, the
system is automatically active after every de-
parture.
Turning on system manually
The system is activated by setting the warning
time.
Additional information:
Seite 190
CONTROLS
Safety
190
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A88D30 - VI/23
OwnersManuals2.com
Setting the warning time, refer to page 191.
Turning system off manually
Depending on vehicle equipment and national-
market version, you must successively confirm
the switch-off on the control display.
1. Apps menu
2. "Vehicle"
3. "Driving settings"
4. "Driver Assistance"
5. "Safety and warnings"
6. "Lane Departure Warning"
7. "Off"
Setting Lane Departure Warning
Setting the warning time
1.
Apps menu
2. "Vehicle"
3. "Driving settings"
4. "Driver Assistance"
5. "Safety and warnings"
6. "Lane Departure Warning"
7. Select the desired setting.
▷ "Expanded"
If the system detects that your vehicle
is about to leave your lane or cross a
lane marking, a warning is issued. The
system performs a steering intervention.
▷ "In dangerous situations"
With interrupted lane markings: If the
system detects that your vehicle is
about to inadvertently cross a lane
marking, or if the sensors detect an on-
coming vehicle, a warning is issued and
a steering intervention is performed.
Depending on national-market version,
with continuous lane markings: If the
system detects that your vehicle is
about to inadvertently leave your lane
or cross a lane marking, a warning is is-
sued and a steering intervention is per-
formed.
Setting the intensity of the steering
wheel vibration
1. Apps menu
2. "Vehicle"
3. "Driving settings"
4. "Driver Assistance"
5. "Feedback via steering wheel"
6. "Vibration intensity"
7. Select the desired setting.
The setting is applied to all collision warning
systems.
Depending on the national-market
version: turning steering intervention
on/off
1.
Apps menu
2. "Vehicle"
3. "Driving settings"
4. "Driver Assistance"
5. "Safety and warnings"
6. "Lane Departure Warning"
7. "Steering intervention"
Depending on the national-market version, the
steering intervention is automatically active af-
ter every driving off.
Display in the instrument cluster
Different system statuses are displayed on
the instrument cluster, depending on vehicle
equipment and national-market version.
Icon
Meaning
Indicator light flashes green: System
is performing a steering intervention.
Seite 191
Safety
CONTROLS
191
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A88D30 - VI/23
OwnersManuals2.com
Depending on vehicle equipment and national-
market version, information for the system is
displayed in the Assisted View of the instru-
ment cluster.
Additional information:
Assisted View, refer to page 158.
Warning function
If you leave the lane
If you leave the lane and if a lane boundary
has been detected, the steering wheel vibrates
in accordance with the steering wheel vibration
setting.
In addition, the indicator light flashes
green.
When the turn signal is switched on in the cor-
responding direction before changing the lane,
a warning is not issued.
Steering intervention
Depending on the equipment and the national-
market version: if a lane marking is crossed in
the speed range up to 130 mph/210 km/h, the
system intervenes with a brief active steering
intervention in addition to vibrating. The sys-
tem supports the driver in keeping the vehicle
within the lane. The steering intervention can
be noticed on the steering wheel and can be
manually overridden at any time.
When steering intervention is active,
the indicator light flashes green.
For instance, the steering intervention will be
suppressed in the following situations:
▷
With hard accelerating or braking.
▷ When flashing.
▷ With hazard warning system switched on.
▷ In driving situation with high driving dynam-
ics.
▷ While Dynamic Stability Control regulates
driving stability.
▷ While Dynamic Stability Control is limited.
▷ Immediately following a steering interven-
tion by the vehicle systems.
Warning signal
Depending on the national-market version: in
the event of multiple active steering interven-
tions by the system within 3 minutes with-
out the driver's intervention at the steering
wheel during the steering intervention itself, an
acoustic warning will sound. A short warning
signal will sound at the second steering inter-
vention. Beginning with the third steering inter-
vention, a continuous warning will sound.
In addition, a Check Control message is dis-
played.
The warning signal and Check Control mes-
sage advise to pay closer attention to the lane.
The extended warning tone stops when the
steering wheel is moved manually.
End of warning
For instance, the warning or an active steering
intervention will be canceled in the following
situations:
▷
Automatically after a few seconds.
▷ When returning to your own lane.
▷ With hard accelerating or braking.
▷ With hazard warning system switched on.
▷ When flashing.
▷ While Dynamic Stability Control regulates
driving stability.
▷ Immediately following a steering interven-
tion by the vehicle systems.
▷ With manual steering intervention.
▷ When another driver assistance system is
activated, if applicable.
▷ No lane boundaries detected.
▷ When the system limits are reached.
Seite 192
CONTROLS
Safety
192
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A88D30 - VI/23
OwnersManuals2.com
System limits
General information
Follow the system limits in the "Collision warn-
ing systems" chapter.
Functional limitations
The system may be limited in the following
situations:
▷ In the event of missing, worn, poorly visible,
merging, diverging, or multiple lane boun-
daries such as in construction areas.
▷ With lane boundaries that are covered in
snow, ice, dirt or water.
▷ In tight corners or on narrow roads.
▷ With lane boundaries that are covered by
objects.
▷ When driving very close to the vehicle in
front of you.
▷ Up to 10 seconds after drive-ready state is
switched on via the Start/Stop button.
▷ While Dynamic Stability Control regulates
driving stability.
▷ While Dynamic Stability Control is limited.
A Check Control message may be displayed
when the system is limited. A yellow warning
light also illuminates, depending on national-
market version.
Active Blind Spot Detection
with active return
Principle
Active Blind Spot Detection detects vehicles
in the blind spot or vehicles approaching from
behind in the adjacent lane.
The warning light in the exterior mirror gives
warnings at different levels.
An automatic steering intervention helps to
keep the vehicle in its lane.
General information
Radar sensors monitor the area behind and
next to the vehicle when traveling faster than a
minimum speed.
The minimum speed is country-specific and
displayed in the Active Blind Spot Detection
menu.
The system indicates whether there are vehi-
cles in your blind spot, arrow 1, or approaching
from behind in an adjacent lane, arrow 2. The
warning light in the exterior mirror illuminates
dimly.
The system will warn in the previously named
situations prior to a lane change. The warn-
ing light in the exterior mirror flashes and the
steering wheel vibrates.
When turning at a speed of up to approx.
12 mph/20 km/h, the steering wheel will not
vibrate.
Safety information
Follow the safety information in the "Forward
Collision Mitigation" chapter.
Sensors
The system is controlled by the following sen-
sors:
▷
Camera behind the windshield.
▷ Radar sensors, side, rear.
▷ Depending on the equipment: radar sen-
sors, side, front.
Seite 193
Safety
CONTROLS
193
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A88D30 - VI/23
OwnersManuals2.com
Functional requirement
The areas of the sensors must be clean and
clear.
Turning Active Blind Spot Detection
on/off
1. Apps menu
2. "Vehicle"
3. "Driving settings"
4. "Driver Assistance"
5. "Safety and warnings"
6. "Active Blind Spot Detection"
7. Select the desired setting.
Depending on vehicle equipment and national-
market version, the system activates automati-
cally whenever you start driving.
Adjusting the Active Blind Spot
Detection
Setting the warning time
1.
Apps menu
2. "Vehicle"
3. "Driving settings"
4. "Driver Assistance"
5. "Safety and warnings"
6. "Active Blind Spot Detection"
7. Select the desired setting.
Setting the intensity of the steering
wheel vibration
1.
Apps menu
2. "Vehicle"
3. "Driving settings"
4. "Driver Assistance"
5. "Feedback via steering wheel"
6. "Vibration intensity"
7. Select the desired setting.
The setting is applied to all collision warning
systems.
Depending on the national-market
version: turning steering intervention
on/off
1. Apps menu
2. "Vehicle"
3. "Driving settings"
4. "Driver Assistance"
5. "Safety and warnings"
6. "Active Blind Spot Detection"
7. "Steering intervention"
Warning function
Warning light in exterior mirror
The warning light in the exterior mirror warns
of a possible collision with a detected vehicle.
Prewarning
The dimmed warning light in the exterior mirror
indicates when vehicles are in your blind spot
or approaching from the rear.
Acute warning
When an acute warning occurs, the steering
wheel vibrates briefly. The warning light in the
exterior mirror flashes brightly.
An acute warning is issued if the following con-
ditions are met:
Seite 194
CONTROLS
Safety
194
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A88D30 - VI/23
OwnersManuals2.com
▷ Another vehicle is located in the critical
area.
▷ Your own vehicle is approaching the other
lane.
▷ Depending on the system setting when the
turn signal is turned on.
The warning stops when the other vehicle has
left the critical area.
Steering intervention
Depending on the national-market version:
when there is no response to the vibration
of the steering wheel at speeds of up to
130 mph/210 km/h and the lane marking
is crossed, the system engages the active
steering intervention. The steering intervention
helps return the vehicle into the lane. The
steering intervention can be noticed on the
steering wheel and can be manually overrid-
den at any time.
The steering intervention is carried out from
a minimum speed. The minimum speed is dis-
played on the control display.
Warning light flashing
When the vehicle is unlocked, the warning light
in the exterior mirror flashes for self-testing
purposes.
System limits
General information
Follow the system limits in the "Collision warn-
ing systems" chapter.
Upper speed limit
If the vehicle speed exceeds approx.
155 mph/250 km/h, the system is deactivated
temporarily.
If the vehicle speed falls below approx.
155 mph/250 km/h, the system is reactivated.
Displaying warnings
Depending on the selected warning settings,
e.g., warning time, more or fewer warnings can
be displayed. However, there may also be an
excess of unwarranted warnings of critical sit-
uations.
Functional limitations
The system may be limited in the following
situations:
▷ When a vehicle is approaching at a speed
much faster than your own.
▷ In tight corners or on narrow roads.
▷ The bumper is dirty, iced up or covered,
for instance by stickers.
Depending on the national-market version, the
steering intervention e.g. in the following situa-
tions:
▷ In the event of missing, worn, poorly visible,
merging, diverging, or multiple lane boun-
daries such as in construction areas.
▷ With lane boundaries that are covered in
snow, ice, dirt or water.
▷ With lane boundaries that are not white.
▷ With lane boundaries that are covered by
objects.
▷ When driving very close to the vehicle in
front of you.
▷ If the camera is impaired.
▷ Up to 10 seconds after drive-ready state is
switched on via the Start/Stop button.
A Check Control message may be displayed
when the system is limited. A yellow warning
light also illuminates, depending on national-
market version.
Side collision mitigation
Principle
The side-collision warning helps to avoid an
impending side collision.
Seite 195
Safety
CONTROLS
195
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A88D30 - VI/23
OwnersManuals2.com
General information
Radar sensors monitor the space next to the
vehicle when traveling faster than a minimum
speed and up to approx. 130 mph/210 km/h.
The minimum speed is country-specific and
displayed on the control display.
If, for example, another vehicle is detected next
to your vehicle and there is a risk of collision
with this vehicle, the system helps avoid a col-
lision. For this purpose, the system issues a
warning with a flashing LED in the exterior mir-
ror, a Check Control message and a vibrating
steering wheel. If necessary, an active steering
intervention is performed by the system.
Safety information
Follow the safety information in the "Forward
Collision Mitigation" chapter.
Functional requirement
The camera behind the windshield determines
the lane boundary positions.
The camera must detect the lane markings for
the side collision mitigation with steering inter-
vention to be active.
Sensors
The system is controlled by the following sen-
sors:
▷
Camera behind the windshield.
▷ Radar sensors, side, front.
▷ Radar sensors, side, rear.
Turning the side collision warning
on/off
1. Apps menu
2. "Vehicle"
3. "Driving settings"
4. "Driver Assistance"
5. "Safety and warnings"
6. "Side collision warning"
7. Select the desired setting.
Setting the intensity of the steering
wheel vibration
1.
Apps menu
2. "Vehicle"
3. "Driving settings"
4. "Driver Assistance"
5. "Feedback via steering wheel"
6. "Vibration intensity"
7. Select the desired setting.
The setting is applied to all collision warning
systems.
Displays in the instrument cluster
Depending on vehicle equipment and national-
market version, information for the system is
displayed in the Assisted View of the instru-
ment cluster.
Additional information:
Assisted View, refer to page 158.
Seite 196
CONTROLS
Safety
196
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A88D30 - VI/23
OwnersManuals2.com
Warning function
Warning light in exterior mirror
The warning light in the exterior mirror warns
of a possible collision with a detected vehicle.
Acute warning
If there is a risk of collision, the warning light
in the exterior mirror flashes and the steering
wheel starts vibrating.
A Check Control message is displayed at the
same time.
Steering intervention
Depending on the national-market version,
if necessary, the system engages the active
steering intervention to prevent a collision and
maintain the vehicle within its own lane. The
steering intervention can be noticed on the
steering wheel and can be manually overrid-
den at any time.
System limits
General information
Follow the system limits in the "Collision warn-
ing systems" chapter.
Functional limitations
The system may be limited in the following
situations:
▷
In tight corners or on narrow roads.
▷ In the event of missing, worn, poorly visible,
merging, diverging, or multiple lane boun-
daries such as in construction areas.
▷ With lane boundaries that are covered in
snow, ice, dirt or water.
▷ With lane boundaries that are not white.
▷ With lane boundaries that are covered by
objects.
▷ When driving very close to the vehicle in
front of you.
▷ Up to 10 seconds after drive-ready state is
switched on via the Start/Stop button.
A Check Control message may be displayed
when the system is limited.
Rear-end collision
preparation
Principle
Depending on the equipment and national-
market version, the rear-end collision prepara-
tion can react to vehicles approaching from be-
hind.
General information
Radar sensors monitor the area behind the ve-
hicle.
When a vehicle approaches from the rear at a
certain speed, the system can react as follows:
Seite 197
Safety
CONTROLS
197
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A88D30 - VI/23
OwnersManuals2.com
▷ Where applicable, the hazard warning
flashers will be switched on.
▷ Where applicable, the PreCrash functions
are triggered.
Safety information
Follow the safety information in the "Forward
Collision Mitigation" chapter.
Sensors
The system is controlled by the radar sensors
on the sides and rear.
Turning rear-end collision
preparation on/off
The system is automatically active when the
vehicle is turned on.
The system is deactivated when reversing.
System limits
General information
Follow the system limits in the "Collision warn-
ing systems" chapter.
Functional limitations
This function may be restricted if the speed
of the approaching vehicle is much higher or
similar to your own speed.
Traffic light and sign
warning
Principle
The traffic light and sign warning provides sup-
port in situations in which the right-of-way
needs to be yielded based on road signs or
traffic lights.
General information
The system evaluates traffic signs and traffic
lights using a camera behind the windshield.
The navigation system directs information on
the road layout to the system.
A warning is given if the right of way is about
to be violated, e.g., in the following traffic situa-
tions:
▷ At an intersection.
▷ At a road entrance.
▷ On a highway entrance ramp.
▷ At a roundabout.
▷ With a red traffic light.
The system issues a warning as from a vari-
able minimum speed and at speeds up to ap-
prox. 60 mph/100 km/h.
The following traffic signs are taken into ac-
count for the traffic light and sign warning:
Sign Meaning
Give way signs:
A pre-warning is issued for these
road signs.
Stop signs:
A pre-warning is issued for these
road signs.
When traffic lights are red, a pre-
warning and an acute warning will be
issued.
Safety information
Follow the safety information in the "Forward
Collision Mitigation" chapter.
Functional requirement
The right-of-way situation ahead of the vehicle
must be clearly controlled by traffic signs or
light signal systems.
Seite 198
CONTROLS
Safety
198
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A88D30 - VI/23
OwnersManuals2.com
Sensors
The system is controlled by a camera behind
the windshield.
Turning the traffic light and sign
warning on/off
1. Apps menu
2. "Vehicle"
3. "Driving settings"
4. "Driver Assistance"
5. "Safety and warnings"
6. "Traffic Light and Sign Warning"
7. Select the desired setting.
Setting the warning time
1.
Apps menu
2. "Vehicle"
3. "Driving settings"
4. "Driver Assistance"
5. "Safety and warnings"
6. "Traffic Light and Sign Warning"
7. Select the desired setting.
The selected setting is saved and adopted for
the next journey.
Warning function
General information
The system issues a two-phase warning:
▷
Prewarning: visual warning by an icon in
the instrument cluster.
▷ Acute warning: visual warning by an icon
in the instrument cluster and an additional
acoustic signal.
The timing of the warning varies with the ac-
tual driving situation and the warning time set-
ting.
Prewarning
If there is a risk that a right of way is about to
be violated, one of the following icons appears
in the instrument cluster:
Icon Meaning
Give way.
Stop.
Red traffic light.
When a prewarning is issued, intervene as
appropriate for the situation; for example, by
braking.
Acute warning
If there is an acute risk that the right of way
is about to be violated, an acoustic signal will
sound and one of the following icons will ap-
pear in the instrument cluster:
Icon
Meaning
Red traffic light.
When an acute warning is issued, intervene as
appropriate for the situation; for example, by
braking.
Display in the Head-up display
Depending on the vehicle equipment, the
warning is displayed simultaneously in the
Head-up display and in the instrument cluster.
System limits
General information
Follow the system limits in the "Collision warn-
ing systems" chapter.
Seite 199
Safety
CONTROLS
199
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A88D30 - VI/23
OwnersManuals2.com
No warning
The system does not issue a warning in the
following situations, for example:
▷ In right-of-way situations without right-of-
way signs, stop signs, or red light signal
systems.
▷ With intersections with relevant traffic lights
that are illuminated yellow or green.
Functional limitations
The system may be limited in the following
situations:
▷ If road signs or light signal systems are un-
clear.
▷ If traffic signs or light signal systems are
fully or partially concealed or soiled.
▷ If traffic signs or light signal systems are
difficult to read or rotated.
▷ If traffic signs or light signal systems are
too small or too large.
▷ If the traffic signs do not correspond to the
standard.
▷ When traffic signs are detected that apply
to a junction or parallel street.
▷ In the presence of country-specific road
signs or road layouts.
▷ With intersections with flashing light signal
systems.
▷ Up to 10 seconds after drive-ready state is
switched on via the Start/Stop button.
▷ In the case of navigation data that is inva-
lid, outdated or not available.
▷ In some regions, the system may not be
available or only partially available.
Wrong way warning
Principle
The wrong way warning warns the driver of
an upcoming wrong entry onto roads, for in-
stance onto freeways, roundabouts and one-
way streets.
General information
Depending on the equipment version, the sys-
tem uses navigation data and traffic signs to
check the traffic situation.
For example, the system takes the following
traffic signs into account:
▷ No entrance.
▷ Roundabout.
▷ Directional arrows: mandatory bypass.
Safety information
Follow the safety information in the "Forward
Collision Mitigation" chapter.
Functional requirement
The road layout ahead must be controlled
clearly with traffic signs.
Sensors
The system is controlled by a camera behind
the windshield.
Turning wrong way warning on/off
Depending on national-market version, the
wrong way warning is automatically activated
whenever you start driving.
Warning function
A warning is displayed and a signal
tone sounds, for example when the ve-
hicle is traveling in the wrong direction
on a highway, roundabout or one-way street.
Warnings are displayed in the instrument clus-
ter and, depending on the equipment, in the
Head-up display.
Seite 200
CONTROLS
Safety
200
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A88D30 - VI/23
OwnersManuals2.com
System limits
General information
Follow the system limits in the "Collision warn-
ing systems" chapter.
No warning
For example, the system does not issue a
warnings for road layouts without traffic signs.
Functional limitations
The function may be limited in the following
situations, for instance, and will either output
an incorrect wrong way warning or no warning
at all:
▷ When the signage is not clear.
▷ If the traffic signs are fully or partially con-
cealed or soiled.
▷ If the traffic signs are poorly legible or ro-
tated.
▷ If the traffic signs are too small or too large.
▷ If the traffic signs do not correspond to the
standard.
▷ When traffic signs are detected that apply
to a junction or parallel street.
▷ In the presence of country-specific road
signs or road layouts.
▷ Up to 10 seconds after drive-ready state is
switched on via the Start/Stop button.
▷ In the case of navigation data that is inva-
lid, outdated or not available.
▷ It may not be possible to use the system in
all regions.
No Turn on Red function
Principle
This function provides assistance to the driver
at traffic lights where turning on red is prohib-
ited.
To do so, this function analyzes traffic lights
and traffic signs using the camera behind the
windshield. In addition, the navigation system
data is used.
Safety information
Follow the safety information in the "Forward
Collision Mitigation" chapter.
Functional requirements
▷ The system detects the right-of-way situa-
tion ahead by analyzing traffic lights and
traffic signs.
▷ Vehicle is less than approx. 164 ft/50 m
from the traffic lights.
Sensors
The system is controlled by a camera behind
the windshield.
Display in the instrument cluster
If the driver approaches a red traffic
light with a traffic sign that prohibits
a turn on red, an indicator light is dis-
played on the instrument cluster.
The indicator light goes out automatically after
you drive off at a speed greater than approx. 9
mph/15 km/h.
System limits
General information
Follow the system limits in the "Collision warn-
ing systems" chapter.
Functional limitations
The system may be limited in the following
situations:
▷
If road signs or light signal systems are un-
clear.
▷ If traffic signs or light signal systems are
fully or partially concealed or soiled.
Seite 201
Safety
CONTROLS
201
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A88D30 - VI/23
OwnersManuals2.com
▷ If traffic signs or light signal systems are
difficult to read or rotated.
▷ If traffic signs or light signal systems are
too small or too large.
▷ If the traffic signs do not correspond to the
standard.
▷ With intersections with flashing light signal
systems.
▷ In the case of navigation data that is inva-
lid, outdated or not available.
▷ In some regions, this function may not be
completely available or not available at all.
Emergency Stop Assistant
Principle
If the driver can no longer drive the vehicle
safely, the Emergency Stop Assistant helps to
bring the vehicle to a safe standstill.
General information
The Emergency Stop Assistant is triggered au-
tomatically.
When the system is triggered, the vehicle is
brought to a standstill in its own lane by use of
lane guidance.
Safety information
Warning
The system cannot serve as a substitute for
the driver’s personal judgment in assessing
one's physical state. An increasing lack of
alertness or fatigue may not be detected or
not be detected in time. There is a risk of
accident. Make sure that the driver is rested
and alert. Adjust driving style to traffic condi-
tions.
Functional requirements
▷ The Emergency Stop Assistant is activated
via iDrive.
▷ The system is activated from a speed of
approx. 43 mph/70 km/h.
▷ The Driver Attention Camera detects driver
activity.
Triggering the Emergency Stop
Assistant
If the system detects that the driver is no
longer driving the vehicle safely or ignores
warnings, the Emergency Stop Assistant is
triggered automatically. The triggered system
is displayed in the instrument cluster.
The Emergency Stop Assistant can also be
triggered via voice input.
Additional information:
BMW Intelligent Personal Assistant, refer to
page 53.
An immediate emergency call can be triggered
on the control display.
The following is performed automatically when
the Emergency Stop Assistant is triggered:
▷
A display is shown on the instrument clus-
ter.
▷ The system takes over vehicle handling un-
til the vehicle comes to a standstill.
▷ The hazard warning system is switched on.
▷ An emergency call is triggered when sta-
tionary, depending on vehicle equipment.
Activating/deactivating Emergency
Stop Assistant
1.
Apps menu
2. "Vehicle"
3. "Driving settings"
4. "Driver Assistance"
5. "Safety and warnings"
Seite 202
CONTROLS
Safety
202
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A88D30 - VI/23
OwnersManuals2.com
6. "Emergency stop"
7. Select the desired setting.
Canceling Emergency Stop
Assistant
The driver can cancel the Emergency Stop As-
sistant by actively taking control of the vehicle
throughout the entire process.
For instance, the system will be canceled in the
following situations:
▷ With strong countersteering.
▷ When flashing.
▷ If the accelerator pedal is pressed hard.
▷ When switching off the hazard warning sys-
tem.
▷ If the system is interrupted on the control
display.
▷ When changing the selector lever position if
the vehicle was already stationary.
At standstill
As soon as the vehicle is stationary, the sys-
tem will carry out the following settings:
▷
The vehicle is secured against rolling away.
▷ The interior lights are switched on.
▷ The central locking system is unlocked.
Displays in the instrument cluster
Icon
Status
Emergency Stop Assistant is trig-
gered.
System limits
The system cannot replace the roadworthy
driving performance of a driver.
The Emergency Stop Assistant may be re-
stricted in the following situations:
▷
When the Driver Attention Camera is cov-
ered by the steering wheel.
▷ With sunglasses with high protection from
infrared light.
Cross traffic warning with
brake function
Principle
At blind driveway exits or when driving out of
perpendicular parking spaces, road users ap-
proaching from the side are detected sooner
by the cross traffic warning than is possible
from the driver's seat.
General information
The area behind the vehicle is monitored by
sensors.
Depending on the vehicle equipment, the area
around the vehicle in front of the vehicle is
monitored as well.
The system indicates approaching road users.
If there is a collision risk when reversing, the
system will provide assistance by performing
an automatic brake intervention.
Follow the information in the "Parking assis-
tance systems" chapter.
Seite 203
Safety
CONTROLS
203
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A88D30 - VI/23
OwnersManuals2.com
Safety information
Warning
The system cannot serve as a substitute for
the driver’s personal judgment in assessing
the traffic situation. Based on the limits of
the system, it cannot independently react
to all traffic situations. There is a risk of
accident. Adjust driving style to traffic condi-
tions. Watch the surrounding traffic situation
closely, be ready to take over steering and
braking at any time, and actively intervene
where appropriate.
Sensors
The system is controlled by the following sen-
sors:
▷ Radar sensors, side, rear.
▷ Depending on the equipment: radar sen-
sors, side, front.
Activating/deactivating Cross Traffic
Warning
The system must be activated on the control
display for the Cross Traffic Warning and brake
intervention to switch on automatically.
1.
Apps menu
2. "Vehicle"
3. "Driving settings"
4. "Driver Assistance"
5. "Parking"
6. Depending on the equipment, select the
following setting:
▷ "Rear warning"
▷ "Front and rear warning"
▷ "Brake intervention at rear"
Turning on the cross traffic warning
automatically
The system must be activated on the control
display. The system turns on automatically as
soon as Park Distance Control or a camera
view activates and you engage a gear position.
If reverse gear is engaged, the rear system is
switched on.
Depending on the equipment, the front system
is turned on when a gear position is engaged.
Depending on the national-market version, the
system is automatically active when the vehi-
cle is started.
Turning off the cross traffic warning
automatically
The system is automatically turned off in the
following situations:
▷ When the speed exceeds walking speed.
▷ When a certain distance covered is ex-
ceeded.
Warning function
General information
The control display shows the corresponding
view, an acoustic signal may sound as neces-
sary, and the warning light in the exterior mir-
ror flashes.
In case of a brake intervention, a message is
displayed on the control display and close after
a brief period of time.
Seite 204
CONTROLS
Safety
204
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A88D30 - VI/23
OwnersManuals2.com
Visual warning
Warning light in exterior mirror
The warning light in the exterior mirror flashes
if the rear sensors detect other vehicles when
the vehicle is reversing.
Display in the Park Distance Control view
In the Park Distance Control view, the respec-
tive boundary area flashes red if vehicles are
detected by the sensors.
Display in camera image
Depending on the direction of travel, the view
to the front or back is displayed in the camera
image.
The respective boundary area, arrow 1, in the
camera image flashes red if vehicles are de-
tected by the sensors.
Yellow lines, arrow 2, mark the bumper of your
own vehicle.
Acoustic warning
In addition to the visual warning, a signal tone
sounds if your own vehicle moves into the re-
spective direction.
Depending on the national-market version, the
signal tone will already sound when the gear
position is engaged.
System limits
System limits of the sensors
Additional information:
Sensors of the vehicle, refer to page 35.
Functional limitations
The function can be limited, for instance in the
following situations:
▷
In tight curves.
▷ Crossing objects are moving at a very slow
or a very fast speed.
▷ Other objects that hide cross traffic are in
the capture range of the sensors.
BMW Drive Recorder
Principle
The BMW Drive Recorder stores brief video
recordings of the vehicle surroundings, e.g., to
document surrounding traffic.
General information
Video recordings can be saved in different
ways:
▷
Automatic storage of the recording.
Seite 205
Safety
CONTROLS
205
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A88D30 - VI/23
OwnersManuals2.com
The function makes it possible to document
the accident or theft of the vehicle with the
corresponding recording type set.
▷ Manual storage of the recording.
This function is used to document traffic sit-
uations with the configured recording type.
The assistance systems' cameras are used to
record, e.g., Panorama View.
Additionally, the following parameters are
stored for the trip:
▷ Date.
▷ Time.
▷ Vehicle speed.
▷ Global Positioning System coordinates.
Data protection
The permissibility of recording and using video
recordings is contingent upon the statutory
regulations of the country in which the system
is to be used. The user is responsible for the
use of the system and compliance with respec-
tive applicable regulations.
The manufacturer of the vehicle recommends
confirming there are no statutory or regulatory
constraints on use of the system in your state
or country prior to the initial use. In addition,
the laws with respect to use of the system
should be verified in regular intervals, espe-
cially when borders are frequently crossed.
Other drivers of the vehicle must be informed
about the system. In addition, information
about the system is required when handing off
the vehicle.
Functional requirements
▷
Standby state or drive-ready state is
switched on.
▷ BMW Drive Recorder is activated.
▷ Privacy Policy was accepted.
▷ Recording type was selected.
▷ Recording time was selected.
Theft notification:
▷ The theft notification was activated in the
Data Protection menu or in the Drive Re-
corder menu.
▷ Data transfer is activated.
▷ My BMW App is installed on the mobile de-
vice.
▷ My BMW App is linked with the Connected-
Drive account.
▷ Privacy Policy was accepted.
Activating/deactivating the BMW
Drive Recorder
The BMW Drive Recorder must be activated
before the first use of the recording function.
1.
Apps menu
2. "All apps"
3. "Drive Recorder"
4. Accept Privacy Policy.
5. "Settings"
6. "Allow recording"
7. Select the desired setting.
Recording functions
Automatic recording
The recording is automatically stored when the
vehicle sensors detect an accident or theft.
▷
In case of accident:
The system saves recordings up to 30 sec-
onds before and after storage is triggered.
▷ In case of theft:
Depending on the selected recording dura-
tion, the system saves the recording after it
has been triggered.
When the alarm system is triggered, a mes-
sage is sent to the My BMW App.
After saving the recording, the reduced
quality video can be downloaded to a mo-
bile device.
Seite 206
CONTROLS
Safety
206
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A88D30 - VI/23
OwnersManuals2.com
If the vehicle accelerates rapidly, an automatic
recording may be taken.
Manual recording
Using the button
Press and hold this button.
Via iDrive
Start the recording:
1.
Apps menu
2. "All apps"
3. "Drive Recorder"
4. "Recording"
5. "Start recording"
Stop the recording: "Stop recording".
The system saves recordings up to 30 sec-
onds before and after storage is triggered.
Recording playback and
administration
Stored video recordings can be played back,
exported and deleted.
For your own safety, the video recording is
only displayed on the control display up to ap-
prox. 2 mph/3 km/h. In some national-market
versions, the video recording is only displayed
if the parking brake is engaged or if the selec-
tor lever is in the P position.
1. Apps menu
2. "All apps"
3. "Drive Recorder"
4. "Recordings"
5. Select desired recording.
6. If necessary, select camera.
Settings
Recording type
1.
Apps menu
2. "All apps"
3. "Drive Recorder"
4. "Settings"
5. Select the desired setting.
Recording time
1.
Apps menu
2. "All apps"
3. "Drive Recorder"
4. "Settings"
5. Select the desired setting.
Recording on a mobile device
Principle
Depending on the equipment version, video
recordings can be stored directly on a mobile
device such as a smartphone or USB storage.
General information
The length of the video that can be stored de-
pends on the available memory capacity on
the mobile device.
Functional requirements
▷
Privacy Policy was accepted.
▷ BMW Drive Recorder is activated.
Seite 207
Safety
CONTROLS
207
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A88D30 - VI/23
OwnersManuals2.com
To transfer recordings to a mobile device:
▷ Depending on vehicle equipment, a mobile
device is connected to the vehicle via Wi-Fi
and Bluetooth audio, or a USB storage de-
vice is connected.
▷ My BMW App is installed on the mobile de-
vice.
▷ My BMW App is linked with the Connected-
Drive account.
Recording
The recording can be started and stopped
manually.
Start the recording:
1.
Apps menu
2. "All apps"
3. "Drive Recorder"
4. "Recording"
5. "Start recording"
Stop the recording: "Stop recording".
Cameras
Different cameras can be selected.
1.
Apps menu
2. "All apps"
3. "Drive Recorder"
4. "Settings"
5. "Cam. selection"
6. Select desired camera.
System limits
In the event of serious accidents, it may not
be possible to store recordings if the damage
on the vehicle is too great or the power supply
was interrupted.
If you overwrite a USB drive multiple times, it
may not be possible to export recordings cor-
rectly.
The preferred file system for USB storage is
NTFS. Other file systems may have limitations.
In case of theft, the recording is only stored au-
tomatically when the anti-theft warning system
has been triggered.
If the internet connection is weak or cannot be
established, theft alerts and video downloads
may be restricted or not available.
The quality of the Wi-Fi connection affects
whether recordings can be saved on your
smartphone. This function may be restricted or
not available if the connection is weak.
Active Protection
Principle
Active Protection prepares occupants and the
vehicle for a possible accident in critical driving
or collision situations.
General information
Depending on vehicle equipment and national-
market version, Active Protection consists of
various PreCrash functions.
The system is used to detect certain critical
driving situations that might lead to an acci-
dent. This includes the following critical driving
situations:
▷
Emergency braking.
▷ Severe understeering.
▷ Severe oversteering.
Certain functions of several systems can,
within the system limits, lead to Active Protec-
tion triggering:
▷
Forward Collision Mitigation: automatic
brake intervention.
▷ Forward Collision Mitigation: brake booster.
▷ Rear-end collision preparation: detection of
impending rear-end collisions.
Seite 208
CONTROLS
Safety
208
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A88D30 - VI/23
OwnersManuals2.com
Safety information
Warning
The system cannot serve as a substitute for
the driver’s personal judgment. Due to the
system limits, critical situations might not be
detected reliably or in time. There is a risk
of accident. Adjust driving style to traffic con-
ditions. Watch surrounding traffic closely and
actively intervene where appropriate.
Function
Depending on the equipment and require-
ments, the following individual functions are
active in accident-critical driving situations:
▷ Automatic closing of the windows.
The windows remain open with a small
gap.
▷ Automatic closing of glass sunroof.
▷ Automatic positioning of the backrest for
the front passenger seat.
▷ Rear comfort seats: automatic positioning
of the rear seat backrests.
Systems can be returned to the desired set-
tings following a critical driving situation with-
out accident.
PostCrash – iBrake
Principle
In certain accident situations, the PostCrash –
iBrake can automatically bring the vehicle to a
standstill without intervention by the driver.
General information
The PostCrash – iBrake can reduce the risk of
a further collision and its consequences.
At standstill
After coming to a halt, the brake is released
automatically.
Harder vehicle deceleration
In certain situations, it may be necessary to
bring the vehicle to a halt more quickly than
automatic braking with PostCrash iBrake al-
lows.
To do this, quickly apply extra force to the
brake. For a brief period, the brake pressure
will be higher than the brake pressure that is
achieved by the automatic brake function. Au-
tomatic braking is interrupted.
Abort automatic braking
It may be necessary to interrupt automatic
braking in certain situations, for instance when
making an evasive maneuver.
Abort automatic braking:
▷ By depressing the brake pedal.
▷ By pressing the accelerator pedal.
Fatigue alert
Principle
The Fatigue Alert break recommendation fea-
ture can detect when the driver is fatigued or
less alert during long, monotonous trips, for in-
stance on highways. The system recommends
a break.
Safety information
Warning
The system cannot serve as a substitute for
the driver’s personal judgment in assessing
one's physical state. An increasing lack of
alertness or fatigue may not be detected or
not be detected in time. There is a risk of
accident. Make sure that the driver is rested
Seite 209
Safety
CONTROLS
209
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A88D30 - VI/23
OwnersManuals2.com
and alert. Adjust driving style to traffic condi-
tions.
Break recommendation
Function
After starting the trip, the system is trained to
the driver, so that decreasing alertness or fati-
gue can be detected.
This procedure takes, for example, the follow-
ing criteria into account:
▷ Personal driving style, for instance steering
behavior.
▷ Driving conditions, for instance time, length
of trip.
▷ Depending on the equipment: attention
of the driver through the Driver Attention
Camera.
The system is active starting at ap-
prox. 43 mph/70 km/h and can also display a
break recommendation.
Setting break recommendation
The break recommendation can be switched
on, off and adjusted via iDrive.
1.
Apps menu
2. "Vehicle"
3. "Driving settings"
4. "Driver Assistance"
5. "Safety and warnings"
6. "Fatigue Alert"
7. Select the desired setting.
Display
If the driver becomes less alert or fatigued,
a message is displayed in the control display
with the recommendation to take a break.
During the display, various settings can be se-
lected.
The system is reset approx. 45 minutes after
parking the vehicle. A break recommendation
can only be displayed again after this time has
elapsed.
System limits
The Fatigue Alert system may be limited. If
the system is limited, either no warning may
be issued or an unwarranted warning may be
issued.
The break recommendation function may be
limited in the following situations:
▷ If the time is set incorrectly.
▷ At a predominantly driven speed below ap-
prox. 43 mph/70 km/h.
▷ With a sporty driving style such as during
rapid acceleration or when cornering fast.
▷ In active driving situations such as when
changing lanes frequently.
▷ When the road condition is poor.
▷ In the event of strong side winds.
Driver Attention Camera
Principle
A camera in the instrument cluster monitors
the driver’s activity and, depending on the
equipment, the driver’s viewing direction.
General information
The assistance systems help drivers by ana-
lyzing whether they are paying attention, e.g.,
by evaluating their head position and eyes.
For full operability, make sure that the field of
view of the Driver Attention Camera is not ob-
structed.
Seite 210
CONTROLS
Safety
210
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A88D30 - VI/23
OwnersManuals2.com
Overview
Depending on the equipment, the instrument
cluster has up to three infrared light sources.
Depending on the light conditions, these light
sources can be visible when the vehicle is in
standby mode.
System limits
The Driver Attention Camera may not be fully
operational in the following situations:
▷ When the Driver Attention Camera is cov-
ered by the steering wheel.
▷ With sunglasses with high protection from
infrared light.
Seite 211
Safety
CONTROLS
211
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A88D30 - VI/23
OwnersManuals2.com
Driving stability control systems
Vehicle features and options
This chapter describes model-specific equip-
ment, systems, and functions that are currently
available, or may become available in the fu-
ture, even if they are not present in the vehicle.
Additional information:
Vehicle equipment, refer to page 8.
Antilock Braking System
Principle
The Antilock Braking System prevents locking
of the wheels while braking.
You remain able to steer your vehicle even dur-
ing full braking, which increases active driving
safety.
General information
The Antilock Braking System is ready after
each time drive-ready state is turned on.
Malfunction
The warning light on the instrument
cluster illuminates.
A Check Control message is displayed.
▷
The Antilock Braking System is not availa-
ble.
▷ Steerability is limited during full braking.
Have the vehicle checked immediately by an
authorized service center or another qualified
service center or repair shop.
Brake assistant
The brake assistant automatically applies
maximum braking assistance when the brake
pedal is depressed quickly. This reduces the
braking distance to a minimum for full braking.
To make full use of braking assistance, do not
reduce the pressure on the brake pedal during
full braking.
Dynamic Stability Control
Principle
Dynamic Stability Control helps keep the vehi-
cle on a steady course in critical driving situa-
tions. The drive power is reduced depending
on the situation, and wheels can be braked
individually.
General information
The system detects the following unstable
driving conditions, for instance:
▷
Skidding, which can lead to oversteering.
▷ Loss of adhesion of the front wheels, which
can lead to understeering.
Safety information
Warning
The system cannot serve as a substitute for
the driver’s personal judgment in assessing
the traffic situation. Based on the limits of
the system, it cannot independently react
to all traffic situations. There is a risk of
accident. Adjust driving style to traffic condi-
tions. Watch the surrounding traffic situation
closely, be ready to take over steering and
Seite 212
CONTROLS
Driving stability control systems
212
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A88D30 - VI/23
OwnersManuals2.com
braking at any time, and actively intervene
where appropriate.
Overview
Button in the vehicle
My Modes
Activating/deactivating Dynamic
Stability Control
If Dynamic Stability Control is deactivated, driv-
ing stability is restricted when accelerating and
cornering.
To support driving stability, reactivate Dynamic
Stability Control as soon as possible.
1.
Press the button.
2. "Switch mode"
3. "SPORT"
4. "Settings"
5. "Driving dynamics"
6. "DSC OFF"
Dynamic Stability Control is automatically acti-
vated when changing to another drive mode.
"SPORT": when you switch to this drive mode,
the last setting is automatically reactivated.
Displays in the instrument cluster
View when Dynamic Stability
Control is deactivated.
Indicator light illuminates: Dynamic
Stability Control is deactivated.
Warning light flashes: Dynamic Stabil-
ity Control is regulating the driving and
brake power. The vehicle is stabilized.
Reduce speed and modify your driving style to
the driving circumstances.
Warning light illuminates: Dynamic Sta-
bility Control has failed or is initializing.
Driving stabilization is restricted or has
failed.
If the warning light illuminates continuously,
have the vehicle checked immediately by an
authorized service center or another qualified
service center or repair shop.
Setting for increased driving
dynamics
Principle
For a more dynamic driving experience, you
can configure the vehicle for increased driving
dynamics via My Modes.
General information
The Dynamic Stability Control and thereby the
driving stability are limited during acceleration
and when cornering.
Seite 213
Driving stability control systems
CONTROLS
213
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A88D30 - VI/23
OwnersManuals2.com
Overview
Button in the vehicle
My Modes
Activating/deactivating increased
driving dynamics
1.
Press the button.
2. "Switch mode"
3. "SPORT"
4. "Settings"
5. "Driving dynamics"
6. "SPORT PLUS"
Dynamic Stability Control is activated when
changing to another drive mode.
"SPORT": the last setting applied to Dynamic
Stability Control remains saved in the mode.
Display in the instrument cluster
Indicator light illuminates: Increased
driving dynamics activated.
Automatic program change
The increased driving dynamics will be deacti-
vated automatically, for instance in the follow-
ing situations:
▷
When the Distance Control is activated.
▷ In case of a brake intervention by For-
ward Collision Mitigation. Deactivate For-
ward Collision Mitigation as necessary.
▷ If the suspension control system fails.
▷ The vehicle has a flat tire.
Additional information:
Forward Collision Mitigation with brake inter-
vention, refer to page 179.
Drive-off support
Principle
The moving-off support offers the best possi-
ble traction when moving off in certain situa-
tions on difficult ground such as on snow or
sand.
General information
The function provides maximum drive power
with adapted driving stability in the low speed
range.
Activating/deactivating the drive-off
support
1.
Apps menu
2. "Vehicle"
3. "Driving settings"
4. "Drivetrain and chassis"
5. "Drive-off support"
6. "Activate once" or "Deactivate"
The drive-off support remains active until it is
deactivated or the driving mode is changed.
BMW xDrive
Principle
BMW xDrive is the all-wheel-drive system of
the vehicle. Concerted action by the BMW
Seite 214
CONTROLS
Driving stability control systems
214
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A88D30 - VI/23
OwnersManuals2.com
xDrive and other suspension control systems
such as Dynamic Stability Control further opti-
mizes traction and driving dynamics.
General information
BMW xDrive variably distributes the drive
forces to the front and rear axles as required
by the driving situation and road conditions.
Integral Active Steering
Principle
The Integral Active Steering increases the ma-
neuverability of the vehicle and makes a more
direct steering response possible. Driving sta-
bility is also increased at high speeds.
General information
Integral Active Steering combines the variable
steering gear ratio of the front axle with active
rear-wheel steering.
The rear axle steering acts to increase maneu-
verability at low speeds by turning the rear
wheels slightly in the opposite direction to the
front wheels.
At higher speeds, the rear wheels are turned
in the same direction as the front wheels. For
instance, this results in a harmonious lane
change.
In critical driving situations, integral active
steering can stabilize the vehicle by automat-
ically steering the rear wheels, for example e.g.
when oversteering.
Setting
The system offers several different settings.
With the driving modes of the My Modes, the
system can be set to comfortable or dynamic.
Additional information:
My Modes, refer to page 134.
Using snow chains
In order to guarantee free movement of the
wheels when operating with snow chains, rear
axle steering must be turned off when snow
chains are mounted.
Additional information:
Rear axle steering during operation with snow
chains, refer to page 334.
Malfunction
The warning light on the instrument
cluster illuminates.
A Check Control message is displayed.
The steering system may not be operational.
Integral Active Steering assistance may no lon-
ger be provided.
▷ Larger steering movements are required at
low speeds.
▷ The response of the vehicle is more sensi-
tive in higher speed ranges.
▷ Proceed cautiously and practice anticipa-
tory driving.
Have the vehicle checked by an authorized
service center or another qualified service cen-
ter or repair shop.
Seite 215
Driving stability control systems
CONTROLS
215
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A88D30 - VI/23
OwnersManuals2.com
Driver assistance systems
Vehicle features and options
This chapter describes model-specific equip-
ment, systems, and functions that are currently
available, or may become available in the fu-
ture, even if they are not present in the vehicle.
Additional information:
Vehicle equipment, refer to page 8.
Speed warning
Principle
The speed warning can be used to set a speed
limit. A warning will be issued when this speed
limit is exceeded.
General information
Another warning occurs when the set speed
limit is exceeded again after it has dropped by
3 mph/5 km/h.
Activating/deactivating the speed
warning
1.
Apps menu
2. "Vehicle"
3. "Driving settings"
4. "Driver Assistance"
5. "Safety and warnings"
6. "Speed warning"
Adjusting the speed
1.
Apps menu
2. "Vehicle"
3. "Driving settings"
4. "Driver Assistance"
5. "Safety and warnings"
6. "Speed warning"
7. "Warning above:"
8. Select the desired setting.
Applying current speed as the
speed warning
1. Apps menu
2. "Vehicle"
3. "Driving settings"
4. "Driver Assistance"
5. "Safety and warnings"
6. "Speed warning"
7. "Adopt current speed"
Speed Limit Info
Speed Limit Info
Principle
Speed Limit Info shows the currently valid
speed limit in the instrument cluster and, if
necessary, the Head-up display.
General information
The camera in the area of the interior mirror
detects traffic signs at the edge of the road as
well as overhead sign posts.
Traffic signs with extra icons are considered
and compared with the vehicle's onboard data.
The traffic sign will then be either displayed
or ignored depending on the situation in the
instrument cluster and the Head-up display.
The system may also show speed limits that
apply to routes that are not signposted if the
navigation system has current map data.
Seite 216
CONTROLS
Driver assistance systems
216
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A88D30 - VI/23
OwnersManuals2.com
For Speed Limit Info to function correctly, cur-
rent map data for the country in which the ve-
hicle is operated must be downloaded.
For information on the current map version
and map updates, see Map update in the Nav-
igation system chapter.
Without a navigation system, the system is
subject to limitations imposed by technology.
Traffic signs with speed limitations are de-
tected and displayed only. Speed limits due to
entering towns/cities, highway signs, etc., are
not displayed. Speed limits with extra traffic
signs are always displayed.
Additional information:
▷ Owner's Manual for Navigation, Entertain-
ment, and Communication, refer to page 6.
Safety information
Warning
The system cannot serve as a substitute for
the driver’s personal judgment in assessing
the traffic situation. Based on the limits of
the system, it cannot independently react
to all traffic situations. There is a risk of
accident. Adjust driving style to traffic condi-
tions. Watch the surrounding traffic situation
closely, be ready to take over steering and
braking at any time, and actively intervene
where appropriate.
Sensors
The system is controlled by a camera behind
the windshield.
Displaying Speed Limit Info
General information
The Speed Limit Info can be shown or hidden
via iDrive in the instrument cluster. Depending
on the national-market version, Speed Limit
Info is continuously displayed in the instrument
cluster.
Displaying Speed Limit Info
1. Apps menu
2. "Vehicle"
3. "Driving settings"
4. "Driver Assistance"
5. "Driving"
6. "Speed Limit Assistant"
7. "Speed limits"
8. "Show current limit"
Display
Speed Limit Info
Icon Description
Current speed limit.
Depending on the national-
market version, it is possible
to switch between the units of
measurement.
No data on current speed limit
available.
Speed Limit Info not available.
Warning signals
General information
The display flashes if the detected speed limit
is exceeded or the speed limit changes. De-
pending on national-market version, an acous-
tic signal also sounds.
Seite 217
Driver assistance systems
CONTROLS
217
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A88D30 - VI/23
OwnersManuals2.com
Signal for exceeding speed limit
The warning for exceeding the maximum per-
missible speed can be activated or deactivated
via iDrive:
1. Apps menu
2. "Vehicle"
3. "Driving settings"
4. "Driver Assistance"
5. "Driving"
6. "Speed Limit Assistant"
7. "Warning when speeding"
Signal for speed limit change
The warning for speed limit changes can be
activated or deactivated via iDrive:
1.
Apps menu
2. "Vehicle"
3. "Driving settings"
4. "Driver Assistance"
5. "Driving"
6. "Speed Limit Assistant"
7. "Sound when speed limit changes."
Settings
1.
Apps menu
2. "Vehicle"
3. "Driving settings"
4. "Driver Assistance"
5. "Driving"
6. "Speed Limit Assistant"
7. Select the desired setting.
System limits
System limits of the sensors
Additional information:
▷ Camera, refer to page 35.
Functional limitations
The system function may be limited and may
provide incorrect information in the following
situations:
▷ Traffic signs are fully or partially concealed
by objects, stickers, or paint.
▷ Traffic signs do not comply with the stand-
ard.
▷ In areas that are not included in the naviga-
tion system map data.
▷ If navigation system map data is invalid,
outdated, or unavailable.
▷ When roads deviate from the navigation
such as due to changes in road layout.
▷ When driving very close to the vehicle in
front of you.
▷ When passing buses or trucks with traffic
signs applied to them.
▷ In case of electronic traffic signs.
▷ When traffic signs that are valid for a paral-
lel road are detected.
▷ In the presence of country-specific road
signs or road layouts.
Speed control systems
Principle
The speed control systems provide support
when driving.
General information
Depending on the equipment, the speed con-
trol systems include the following individual
systems.
Seite 218
CONTROLS
Driver assistance systems
218
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A88D30 - VI/23
OwnersManuals2.com
▷ Cruise control, refer to page 221.
▷ Distance control, refer to page 223.
▷ Assisted Driving Mode, refer to page 229.
▷ Assisted Driving Mode Plus, refer to
page 234.
Depending on the equipment and national-
market version, the individual systems are en-
hanced with additional functions.
Some functions can be operated via voice con-
trol.
Additional information:
BMW Intelligent Personal Assistant, refer to
page 53.
Safety information
Warning
The system cannot serve as a substitute for
the driver’s personal judgment in assessing
the traffic situation. Based on the limits of
the system, it cannot independently react
to all traffic situations. There is a risk of
accident. Adjust driving style to traffic condi-
tions. Watch the surrounding traffic situation
closely, be ready to take over steering and
braking at any time, and actively intervene
where appropriate.
Warning
Individual functions may not work correctly
when towing with Forward Collision Mitiga-
tion enabled or Cruise Control switched on.
There is a risk of accident. Switch off Forward
Collision Mitigation and Cruise Control before
towing.
Overview
Buttons on the steering wheel
Button Function
Turn last active speed control sys-
tem on/off.
Interrupt and continue speed control
systems.
Select the desired speed control
system.
Store current speed.
Speed Limit Assistant: accept sug-
gested speed manually.
Set speed.
Turning on/selecting speed control
systems
1.
Turn on: press the button.
2. Select: when the system active,
press the button repeatedly until the de-
sired speed control system is displayed in
the toolbar in the instrument cluster.
Icon Speed control system
Cruise control.
Distance control.
Assisted Driving Mode: Dynamic
Cruise Control, Steering Assistance
with Lane Keeping.
The activated system is shown in green.
Seite 219
Driver assistance systems
CONTROLS
219
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A88D30 - VI/23
OwnersManuals2.com
The system is shown in white when the sys-
tem can be activated.
The system is grayed out if the system has
failed or if the functional requirements are not
met.
Interrupting speed control systems
automatically
Depending on the system, speed control
systems are interrupted automatically, for in-
stance in the following situations:
▷ When moving from selector lever position D
to P, N, or R.
▷ While Dynamic Stability Control regulates
driving stability.
▷ While Dynamic Stability Control is disabled.
▷ "SPORT PLUS": the settings for increased
driving dynamics are activated.
▷ When braking manually.
Interrupting speed control systems
manually
▷
Press the button.
▷ Press button to select another
speed control system.
Continuing speed control systems
Press the button.
Turning off speed control systems
automatically
The speed control systems turn off automati-
cally when the drive-ready state is turned off.
Turning off speed control systems
manually
Press and hold this button.
The speed control systems are turned
off and the displays extinguish.
Adjusting speed values
Repeatedly press the rocker button on
the steering wheel up or down until the
desired value is set.
▷ Each time the rocker button is pressed
to the resistance point, the set speed in-
creases or decreases by 1 mph/1 km/h.
▷ Each time the rocker button is pressed past
the resistance point, the set speed changes
by a maximum of 5 mph/10 km/h.
Display in the instrument cluster
Display in the speedometer
A mark is displayed on the
speedometer for the set speed.
▷
Green marking: system is ac-
tive.
▷ Gray marking: system is in-
terrupted.
▷ No marking: system is switched off.
Notifications
In addition to the respective check lamps, noti-
fications are displayed for some functions.
The scope of notifications can be set.
1.
Apps menu
2. "Vehicle"
3. "Driving settings"
4. "Driver Assistance"
5. "Driving"
Seite 220
CONTROLS
Driver assistance systems
220
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A88D30 - VI/23
OwnersManuals2.com
6. "Notifications"
7. Select the desired setting.
Cruise Control
Principle
With the Cruise Control, a set speed can be ad-
justed using the buttons on the steering wheel.
The system maintains the set speed. The sys-
tem accelerates and brakes automatically as
needed.
General information
The system can be activated starting at
20 mph/30 km/h.
Depending on the vehicle setting, the Cruise
Control settings can change under certain
conditions. For instance, the acceleration can
change depending on the driving mode.
Safety information
Warning
The system cannot serve as a substitute for
the driver’s personal judgment in assessing
the traffic situation. Based on the limits of
the system, it cannot independently react
to all traffic situations. There is a risk of
accident. Adjust driving style to traffic condi-
tions. Watch the surrounding traffic situation
closely, be ready to take over steering and
braking at any time, and actively intervene
where appropriate.
Warning
The use of the system can lead to an in-
creased risk of accidents in the following sit-
uations, for instance:
▷
On winding roads.
▷ With high traffic volume.
▷ On slippery roads, in fog, snow, or wet
conditions, or on a loose road surface.
There may be a risk of accidents or risk of
damage to property. Only use the system if
driving at constant speed is possible.
Warning
The set speed can be incorrectly adjusted
or called up by mistake. There is a risk of
accident. Adjust the set speed to the traffic
conditions. Watch surrounding traffic closely
and actively intervene where appropriate.
Overview
Buttons on the steering wheel
Button Function
Turn last active speed control sys-
tem on/off.
Interrupt and continue speed control
systems.
Select the desired speed control
system.
Store current speed.
Speed Limit Assistant: accept sug-
gested speed manually.
Set speed.
Turning on the Cruise Control
In vehicles with distance control: change the
mode of the Cruise Control to Cruise Control
without distance control.
Additional information:
Distance control, refer to page 223.
Seite 221
Driver assistance systems
CONTROLS
221
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A88D30 - VI/23
OwnersManuals2.com
In vehicles without distance control: turn on the
Cruise Control with the buttons on the steering
wheel.
1. If necessary, press the button.
2. If necessary, press the button re-
peatedly until the Cruise Control is selected.
Cruise control is active. The current speed is
maintained and stored as desired speed.
The indicator lights in the instrument cluster
illuminate and the mark on the speedometer is
set to the current speed.
The driving mode changes or Dynamic Sta-
bility Control activates when cruise control is
switched on.
Turning the speed control system
off/interrupting
The speed control system can be turned off or
canceled automatically or manually.
Additional information:
Speed control systems, refer to page 218.
Adjusting the speed
Store/maintain speed
Press the rocker button up or down
once while the system is stopped.
When the system is switched on, the current
speed is maintained and stored as the set
speed.
The stored speed is displayed on the speed-
ometer.
When the Speed Limit Assistant is not active,
the current speed can also be stored by press-
ing a button:
Press the button.
Changing the speed
Repeatedly press the rocker button up
or down until the desired speed is set.
If active, the displayed speed is stored
and the vehicle reaches the stored speed
when the road is clear.
The maximum speed that can be set depends
on the vehicle.
Press rocker button to resistance point and
hold: The vehicle accelerates or decelerates
without the accelerator pedal being pressed.
After the rocker button is released, the vehicle
maintains the final speed achieved. Pressing
the switch beyond the resistance point causes
the vehicle to accelerate more rapidly.
Continuing cruise control
With saved speed
Warning
The set speed can be incorrectly adjusted
or called up by mistake. There is a risk of
accident. Adjust the set speed to the traffic
conditions. Watch surrounding traffic closely
and actively intervene where appropriate.
An interrupted cruise control can be continued
by calling up the stored speed. The difference
between the current speed and the stored
speed should be as little as possible.
Press the button with the system inter-
rupted.
Cruise control is continued with the stored val-
ues.
In the following cases, the stored speed value
is deleted and cannot be called up again:
▷
When the system is switched off.
▷ When drive-ready state is switched off.
Seite 222
CONTROLS
Driver assistance systems
222
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A88D30 - VI/23
OwnersManuals2.com
At the current speed
Press the rocker button up or down to
continue cruise control at the current
speed.
Speed Limit Assistant: at the
suggested speed
When a speed is suggested, press the
button to accept the Cruise Control at
the suggested speed.
Displays in the instrument cluster
Display in the speedometer
▷ Green marking: system is ac-
tive, the marking indicates
the desired speed.
▷ Gray marking: system is in-
terrupted, the marking indi-
cates the stored speed.
▷ No marking: system is switched off.
Indicator light
Indicator light green: system is active.
Displays in the Head-up display
Depending on the equipment, some system
information can also be displayed in the Head-
up display.
System limits
The set speed is also maintained downhill. The
speed may not be maintained on uphill grades
if the drive power is insufficient.
Depending on the driving mode, the vehicle
may exceed or drop below the set desired
speed in some situations; for instance, on
downhill or uphill grades.
Distance control
Principle
With the distance control, a distance to a vehi-
cle driving ahead can be adjusted in addition to
the Cruise Control.
General information
The system maintains the set speed on clear
roads. The vehicle accelerates or brakes auto-
matically.
If a vehicle is driving ahead of you, the system
adjusts the speed of the vehicle so that the set
distance to the vehicle ahead is maintained.
The speed is adjusted as far as the given sit-
uation allows.
The distance can be adjusted at several levels.
For safety reasons, it depends on the respec-
tive speed.
If the vehicle ahead of you brakes to a stand-
still and then drives off again within a brief pe-
riod, the system is able to detect this within the
given system limits.
Otherwise, drive off independently such as by
stepping on the accelerator pedal or by press-
ing the button for the speed setting on the
steering wheel.
Safety information
Warning
The system cannot serve as a substitute for
the driver’s personal judgment in assessing
the traffic situation. Based on the limits of
the system, it cannot independently react
to all traffic situations. There is a risk of
accident. Adjust driving style to traffic condi-
tions. Watch the surrounding traffic situation
closely, be ready to take over steering and
braking at any time, and actively intervene
where appropriate.
Seite 223
Driver assistance systems
CONTROLS
223
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A88D30 - VI/23
OwnersManuals2.com
Warning
An unsecured vehicle can begin to move and
possibly roll away. There is a risk of accident.
Before leaving the vehicle, secure the vehicle
against rolling away.
In order to ensure that the vehicle is secured
against rolling away, follow the following:
▷ Set the parking brake.
▷ On uphill grades or on downhill slopes,
turn the front wheels in the direction of
the curb.
▷ On uphill grades or on downhill slopes,
also secure the vehicle, for instance with
a wheel chock.
Warning
The set speed can be incorrectly adjusted
or called up by mistake. There is a risk of
accident. Adjust the set speed to the traffic
conditions. Watch surrounding traffic closely
and actively intervene where appropriate.
Warning
Risk of accident is greater when there is a
high speed differential to other vehicles, for
instance in the following situations:
▷
When approaching a slowly moving ve-
hicle at speed.
▷ Vehicle suddenly swerving into own
lane.
▷ When approaching stationary vehicles at
speed.
There is a risk of injury or danger to life.
Watch surrounding traffic closely and actively
intervene where appropriate.
Overview
Buttons on the steering wheel
Button Function
Turn last active speed control sys-
tem on/off.
Interrupt and continue speed control
systems.
Select the desired speed control
system.
Store current speed.
Speed Limit Assistant: accept sug-
gested speed manually.
Set speed.
Sensors
The system is controlled by the following sen-
sors:
▷
Camera behind the windshield.
▷ Front radar sensor.
Additional information:
Sensors of the vehicle, refer to page 35.
Application range
The system is best used on well-maintained
roads.
The maximum speed that can be set is limited
and depends, for example, on the vehicle and
the vehicle equipment.
The system can also be activated when sta-
tionary.
Seite 224
CONTROLS
Driver assistance systems
224
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A88D30 - VI/23
OwnersManuals2.com
Turning on Cruise Control with
distance control
1. If necessary, press the button.
2. If necessary, press the button re-
peatedly until distance control is selected.
Cruise control with distance control is active.
The current speed is maintained and stored as
desired speed.
The selected distance to a vehicle driving
ahead is maintained.
The indicator lights in the instrument cluster
illuminate and the mark on the speedometer is
set to the current speed.
The driving mode changes or Dynamic Stabil-
ity Control activates when Distance Control is
switched on.
Adjusting the speed
The speed can be set using the rocker button
on the steering wheel.
Additional information:
Cruise control, refer to page 221.
Interrupting Cruise control with
distance control automatically
The system is stopped automatically in the fol-
lowing situations, for example:
▷
When braking manually.
▷ Selector lever position D is disengaged.
▷ While Dynamic Stability Control is disabled.
▷ "SPORT PLUS": the settings for increased
driving dynamics are activated.
▷ While Dynamic Stability Control regulates
driving stability.
▷ Driver's seat belt and driver's door are
opened.
▷ The system has not detected objects for
an extended period, for instance on a
road with very little traffic without curb or
shoulder markings.
▷ The detection range of the radar is im-
paired, for instance by contamination or
heavy precipitation.
▷ After a longer stationary period when the
vehicle has been braked to a stop by the
system.
Turning the speed control system
off/interrupting
The speed control system can be turned off or
canceled automatically or manually.
Additional information:
Speed control systems, refer to page 218.
Continuing cruise control while
driving
Warning
The set speed can be incorrectly adjusted
or called up by mistake. There is a risk of
accident. Adjust the set speed to the traffic
conditions. Watch surrounding traffic closely
and actively intervene where appropriate.
An interrupted cruise control can be continued
by calling up the stored speed. The difference
between the current speed and the stored
speed should be as little as possible.
Additional information:
Cruise control, refer to page 221.
Continuing cruise control while
vehicle is stationary
In certain situations, this system requires the
driver to confirm their intention to drive off.
The displays show the following:
Seite 225
Driver assistance systems
CONTROLS
225
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A88D30 - VI/23
OwnersManuals2.com
The mark on the speedometer
illuminates gray.
The indicator light illuminates green.
Cruise control can be continued as follows:
▷ Pressing the accelerator pedal.
▷ Press the rocker button on the left
side of the steering wheel.
▷ Press the button on the left side of
the steering wheel.
Distance
Safety information
Warning
The system cannot serve as a substitute for
the driver’s personal judgment. Due to the
system limits, deceleration can be late. There
may be a risk of accidents or risk of dam-
age to property. Be aware of the surround-
ing traffic situation at all times. Adjust the
distance to the traffic and weather conditions
and maintain the prescribed safety distance,
possibly by braking.
Adjusting the distance
1.
Apps menu
2. "Vehicle"
3. "Driving settings"
4. "Driver Assistance"
5. "Driving"
6. "Distance control"
7. "Distance"
8. Select the desired setting.
Automatic adaptation of the distance
Depending on the equipment and national-
market version: the system can be set so that
the distance to the vehicle in front is automati-
cally adjusted within the set distance. The sys-
tem takes into account the traffic situation and
ambient conditions, e.g. poor visibility.
1. Apps menu
2. "Vehicle"
3. "Driving settings"
4. "Driver Assistance"
5. "Driving"
6. "Distance control"
7. "Situational distance control"
Changing between Cruise Control
with/without Distance Control
Safety information
Warning
The system does not react to traffic driv-
ing ahead of you, but instead maintains the
stored speed. There may be a risk of acci-
dents or risk of damage to property. Adjust
the set speed to the traffic conditions and
brake as needed.
Changing over the Cruise Control mode
Turning Cruise Control without distance control
on or off:
1.
Apps menu
2. "Vehicle"
3. "Driving settings"
4. "Driver Assistance"
5. "Driving"
Seite 226
CONTROLS
Driver assistance systems
226
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A88D30 - VI/23
OwnersManuals2.com
6. "Distance control"
7. "Switch to Cruise Control"
The setting is reset when the vehicle is parked.
Displays in the instrument cluster
General information
Depending on the equipment version, the dis-
plays in the instrument cluster may vary.
Display in the speedometer
▷ Green marking: system is ac-
tive, the marking indicates
the desired speed.
▷ Gray marking: system is in-
terrupted, the marking indi-
cates the stored speed.
▷ No marking: system is switched off.
Indicator lights and warning lights
Icon Description
White indicator light:
No Distance Control because acceler-
ator pedal is being pressed.
Indicator light illuminates green:
Vehicle has been detected ahead of
you.
The vehicle icon goes out if no vehicle
has been detected ahead of you.
Indicator light flashes green:
Preceding vehicle has driven off.
Icon Description
Indicator light flashes gray:
Conditions are not adequate for the
system to work.
The system was deactivated but ap-
plies the brakes until you actively
resume control by pressing on the
brake pedal or accelerator pedal.
Warning light flashes red and acous-
tic signal sounds:
Brake and make an evasive maneu-
ver, if necessary.
Assisted View
Depending on the equipment and national-
market version, information for the system is
displayed in the Assisted View in the central
display area of the instrument cluster.
Additional information:
Assisted View, refer to page 158.
Displays in the Head-up display
Set speed
Depending on the equipment, some system
information can also be displayed in the Head-
up display.
Distance information
The icon is displayed when the dis-
tance from the vehicle traveling ahead
is too short.
The distance information is active in the fol-
lowing situations:
▷
Cruise Control with Distance Control
switched off.
▷ Display in the Head-up display selected.
Head-up display, refer to page 143.
Seite 227
Driver assistance systems
CONTROLS
227
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A88D30 - VI/23
OwnersManuals2.com
▷ Distance too short.
▷ Speed greater than approx.
40 mph/70 km/h.
System limits
System limits of the sensors
Additional information:
▷ Cameras, refer to page 35.
▷ Radar sensors, refer to page 36.
Detection range
Sensors detect the traffic situation in their de-
tection range.
The detection capability of the system and the
automatic braking performance are limited.
For instance, two-wheeled vehicles may not be
detected.
Deceleration
The system does not decelerate in the follow-
ing situations:
▷
For pedestrians or similarly slow-moving
road users.
▷ For cross traffic.
▷ For oncoming traffic.
Merging vehicles
If a vehicle driving ahead of you suddenly
merges into your lane, the system may not be
able to automatically restore the selected dis-
tance. It may not be possible to restore the se-
lected distance in certain situations, including if
you are driving significantly faster than vehicles
driving ahead of you, for instance when rapidly
approaching a truck. When a vehicle driving
ahead of you is reliably detected, the system
requests that the driver intervene by braking
and making an evasive maneuver, if needed.
Cornering
When the set speed is too high for a curve,
the speed is reduced slightly. Because curves
may not be anticipated in advance, drive into a
curve at an appropriate speed.
The system has a limited detection range. Sit-
uations can arise in tight curves where a vehi-
cle driving ahead will not be detected or will be
detected very late.
Seite 228
CONTROLS
Driver assistance systems
228
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A88D30 - VI/23
OwnersManuals2.com
When you approach a curve the system may
briefly report vehicles in the next lane due
to the bend of the curve. If the system decel-
erates you may compensate for it by briefly
accelerating. After releasing the accelerator
pedal the system is reactivated and controls
speed independently.
Driving off
In some situations, the vehicle cannot drive off
automatically; for example:
▷ On steep uphill grades.
▷ In front of bumps in the road.
In these cases, step on the accelerator pedal.
Weather
The following restrictions can occur under un-
favorable weather or light conditions:
▷
Poorer vehicle detection.
▷ Short-term interruptions for vehicles that
are already recognized.
Drive attentively, and react to the current sur-
rounding traffic situation. If necessary, inter-
vene actively, for instance by braking, steering
or making an evasive maneuver.
Drive power
The set speed is also maintained downhill. The
speed may not be maintained on uphill grades
if the drive power is insufficient.
Depending on the driving mode, the vehicle
may exceed or drop below the set desired
speed in some situations; for instance, on
downhill or uphill grades.
Assisted Driving Mode
Principle
Assisted Driving Mode enhances Distance
Control with Steering Assistance and Lane
Guidance. The system assists the driver in
keeping the vehicle within the lane. For
this purpose, the system executes supporting
steering movements, for instance when cor-
nering.
General information
Depending on the speed, the system orients
itself according to the lane boundaries or vehi-
cles in front.
Sensors in the steering wheel detect whether
the steering wheel is being touched.
Depending on the vehicle equipment and
national-market version, the Driver Attention
Camera in the instrument cluster monitors the
driver's attention.
Safety information
Warning
The system cannot serve as a substitute for
the driver’s personal judgment in assessing
the traffic situation. Based on the limits of
the system, it cannot independently react
to all traffic situations. There is a risk of
accident. Adjust driving style to traffic condi-
tions. Watch the surrounding traffic situation
closely, be ready to take over steering and
braking at any time, and actively intervene
where appropriate.
The Cruise Control and Distance Control alerts
also apply.
Additional information:
▷
Cruise control, refer to page 221.
▷ Distance control, refer to page 223.
Seite 229
Driver assistance systems
CONTROLS
229
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A88D30 - VI/23
OwnersManuals2.com
Overview
Buttons on the steering wheel
Button Function
Turn last active speed control sys-
tem on/off.
Interrupt and continue speed control
systems.
Select the desired speed control
system.
Store current speed.
Speed Limit Assistant: accept sug-
gested speed manually.
Set speed.
Sensors
The system is controlled by the following sen-
sors:
▷
Camera behind the windshield.
▷ Front radar sensor.
▷ Depending on the equipment:
Radar sensors, side, front.
▷ Depending on the equipment:
Radar sensors, side, rear.
▷ Sensors in steering wheel.
▷ Depending on the vehicle equipment and
national-market version: Driver Attention
Camera
Additional information:
▷
Sensors of the vehicle, refer to page 35.
▷ Driver Attention Camera, refer to page 210.
Functional requirements
▷
Depending on the equipment: speed below
130 mph/210 km/h or 110 mph/180 km/h.
▷ Sufficient lane width.
▷ Hands on the steering wheel rim.
▷ Sufficiently wide curve radius.
▷ Drive in the center of the lane.
▷ The sensor system calibration process is
complete.
▷ Distance control is active.
▷ Seat belt on the driver's side fastened.
▷ Forward Collision Mitigation is active.
▷ Depending on the equipment:
Side-collision warning is active.
Switching on Assisted Driving Mode
1.
If necessary, press the button.
2. If necessary, press the button re-
peatedly until Assisted Driving Mode is se-
lected.
Indicator light illuminates gray:
The system is on standby and does not
manipulate steering movements.
System activates automatically as soon as all
function conditions are fulfilled.
The indicator light illuminates green.
The system is active and helps to keep
the vehicle in the lane.
When the system is switched on, the Forward
Collision Mitigation and, depending on the
equipment, the side-collision warning are ac-
tive.
Stopping Assisted Driving Mode
automatically
The system interrupts the supporting steering
movements automatically, for example in the
following situations:
Seite 230
CONTROLS
Driver assistance systems
230
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A88D30 - VI/23
OwnersManuals2.com
▷ Depending on the equipment: at a
speed above 130 mph/210 km/h or
110 mph/180 km/h.
▷ After releasing the steering wheel.
▷ With strong steering intervention.
▷ When leaving own lane.
▷ When the turn signal is switched on or, de-
pending on the vehicle equipment, when
the driver turns the steering wheel while the
turn signal is switched on.
▷ When the lane is too narrow.
▷ If a lane boundary is not detected and there
is no vehicle driving in front.
▷ The Cruise Control with distance control is
interrupted.
▷ The seat belt on the driver's side is unfas-
tened.
Indicator light illuminates gray:
The system is on standby and does not
manipulate steering movements.
System activates automatically as soon as all
function conditions are fulfilled.
Displays in the instrument cluster
Icon
Description
Indicator light illuminates gray:
The system is ready.
Indicator light illuminates green:
The system is activated.
The system supports the driver in
keeping the vehicle within the lane.
Warning light flashes yellow and
steering wheel vibrates:
A lane boundary has been crossed.
Icon Description
Warning light illuminates and acous-
tic signal sounds:
Yellow: System interruption is immi-
nent.
Warning light flashes red and acous-
tic signal sounds:
The system is switched off or will be
interrupted very soon.
Warning light illuminates yellow:
Hands are not grasping the steering
wheel. The system is still active.
Grab the steering wheel with your
hands.
Warning light illuminates red, acous-
tic signal sounds:
The hands are not on the steering
wheel or, depending on the vehicle
equipment and national-market ver-
sion, the driver's line of sight is not di-
rected at the surrounding traffic. Yel-
low: System interruption is imminent.
The system reduces the speed to a
standstill if applicable.
It is possible that the system will
not execute any supporting steering
movements.
Immediately grasp the steering wheel
with your hands and pay attention to
the surrounding traffic.
Depending on the vehicle equipment and na-
tional-market version, a Check Control mes-
sage is displayed if the Driver Attention Cam-
era detects that the driver is inattentive.
Depending on the equipment and national-
market version, information for the system is
displayed in the Assisted View in the central
display area of the instrument cluster.
Additional information:
Assisted View, refer to page 158.
Seite 231
Driver assistance systems
CONTROLS
231
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A88D30 - VI/23
OwnersManuals2.com
Displays on the steering wheel
Similar to the instrument cluster views, the two
LEDs above the keypads illuminate.
The steering wheel displays can be turned on/
off.
1.
Apps menu
2. "Vehicle"
3. "Driving settings"
4. "Driver Assistance"
5. "Feedback via steering wheel"
6. "Light elements"
7. Select the desired setting.
Displays in the Head-up display
Depending on the equipment, the system in-
formation can also be displayed in the Head-
up display.
Setting the intensity of the steering
wheel vibration
1.
Apps menu
2. "Vehicle"
3. "Driving settings"
4. "Driver Assistance"
5. "Feedback via steering wheel"
6. "Vibration intensity"
7. Select the desired setting.
This setting is applied to all collision warning
systems.
System limits
General information
The system cannot be activated or meaning-
fully used in certain situations.
Safety information
Warning
Due to its limits, the system may not react, or
it may react too late or in a manner that is not
consistent with normal use. There may be a
risk of accidents or risk of damage to prop-
erty. Actively intervene as warranted. Refer
to the information in this Owner’s Manual re-
garding the scope of the system’s operation
and limitations.
The Cruise Control and Distance Control alerts
also apply.
Additional information:
▷ Cruise control, refer to page 221.
▷ Distance control, refer to page 223.
System limits of the sensors
Additional information:
▷
Cameras, refer to page 35.
▷ Radar sensors, refer to page 36.
▷ Driver Attention Camera, refer to page 210.
Hands on the steering wheel
The sensors cannot detect hand-steering
wheel contact in the following situations:
▷
Driving with gloves.
▷ Protective covers on the steering wheel.
Weather
The following restrictions can occur under un-
favorable weather or light conditions:
Seite 232
CONTROLS
Driver assistance systems
232
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A88D30 - VI/23
OwnersManuals2.com
▷ Poorer recognition of vehicles and lane
boundaries.
▷ Short-term interruptions in case of already
detected vehicles and lane boundaries.
Drive attentively, and react to the current sur-
rounding traffic situation. If necessary, inter-
vene actively, for instance by braking, steering
or making an evasive maneuver.
Lane Change Assistant
Principle
The Lane Change Assistant also assists when
changing lanes on multi-lane roads.
General information
The system uses the Assisted Driving Mode
sensors.
Safety information
Warning
The system cannot serve as a substitute for
the driver’s personal judgment in assessing
the traffic situation. Based on the limits of
the system, it cannot independently react
to all traffic situations. There is a risk of
accident. Adjust driving style to traffic condi-
tions. Watch the surrounding traffic situation
closely, be ready to take over steering and
braking at any time, and actively intervene
where appropriate.
Federal, state, or local laws may differ, and
the use of this function may be prohibited or
limited. Before use, check federal, state, and
local laws.
The Assisted Driving Mode alerts also apply.
Additional information:
Assisted Driving Mode, refer to page 229.
Functional requirements
▷ The functional requirements for Assisted
Driving Mode have been met.
Assisted Driving Mode, refer to page 229.
▷ Driving on a road without pedestrians or cy-
clists and with physical barriers to oncom-
ing traffic such as crash barriers.
▷ A vehicle has been detected at a sufficient
distance behind your own vehicle since be-
ginning the drive.
▷ Crossable lane boundaries are detected.
▷ Maximum speed approx.
110 mph/180 km/h.
▷ The minimum speed is country-specific.
Turning on/turning off Lane Change
Assistant
1.
Apps menu
2. "Vehicle"
3. "Driving settings"
4. "Driver Assistance"
5. "Driving"
6. "Assisted Driving"
7. "Automatic Lane Change"
The settings for the Automatic Lane Change
Assistant can be configured, depending on ve-
hicle equipment and national-market version.
Changing lanes
1.
Ensure that the traffic situation permits
changing lanes.
2. Start the lane change.
▷ To initiate the lane change, press the
indicator stalk in the desired direction to
the resistance point.
▷ Depending on the vehicle equipment,
the indicator/high-beam stalk can also
be pressed beyond the resistance point.
▷ Depending on the vehicle equipment,
the lane change can already be started
Seite 233
Driver assistance systems
CONTROLS
233
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A88D30 - VI/23
OwnersManuals2.com
by the driver checking their field of vi-
sion to ensure that the traffic situation
permits a lane change. For this case,
Lane Change Assistant must clearly
recognize the driving situation and the
Driver Attention Camera must clearly
recognize the driver's line of sight. To
do so, it may be necessary to turn on
the Lane Change Assistant when route
guidance is on, or to configure this func-
tion on the control display.
After a short time, Lane Change Assistant ini-
tiates a lane change.
After the lane change, the system helps keep
the vehicle in the new lane.
Canceling a lane change
The lane change can be canceled by steering
movement into the opposite direction or by op-
erating the turn signal in the opposite direction.
Displays in the instrument cluster
Icon Description
Steering wheel icon and lane change
arrow icon are green:
The system carries out a lane
change.
Steering wheel icon is green and line
for lane marking on respective side is
gray:
The system detected the lane change
request. Lane change not currently
possible.
Depending on the equipment and national-
market version, information for the system is
displayed in the Assisted View in the central
display area of the instrument cluster.
Additional information:
Assisted View, refer to page 158.
System limits
The limits of the Assisted Driving Mode system
apply.
The limits of the Driver Attention Camera sys-
tem also apply to automatic lane changes.
Additional information:
▷ Assisted Driving Mode, refer to page 229.
▷ Driver Attention Camera, refer to page 210.
Assisted Driving Mode Plus
Principle
Assisted Driving Mode Plus provides assis-
tance when driving on highways.
The system increases driving comfort in suita-
ble driving situations.
Sensors in the steering wheel detect whether
the steering wheel is being touched.
Different versions of this function are available
depending on vehicle equipment and national-
market version.
▷
Version for speeds up to approx.
40 mph/60 km/h, e.g., traffic jam.
▷ Version for speeds up to approx.
85 mph/135 km/h.
General information
For versions up to 85 mph/135 km/h, the fol-
lowing applies:
Assisted Driving Mode Plus will be active at the
time of vehicle delivery and will only be avail-
able for a limited period. Information about
the duration of availability for Assisted Driving
Mode Plus will be available prior to and at
the time of vehicle sale. Assisted Driving Mode
Plus may be terminated earlier due to techni-
cal or legal requirements. Further information
about the availability of Assisted Driving Mode
Plus can be requested from an authorized
service center.
Seite 234
CONTROLS
Driver assistance systems
234
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A88D30 - VI/23
OwnersManuals2.com
Safety information
Warning
The system cannot serve as a substitute for
the driver’s personal judgment in assessing
the traffic situation. Based on the limits of
the system, it cannot independently react
to all traffic situations. There is a risk of
accident. Adjust driving style to traffic condi-
tions. Watch the surrounding traffic situation
closely, be ready to take over steering and
braking at any time, and actively intervene
where appropriate.
Warning
The system is only intended for use on roads
with structural separations such as highways.
Because of the system limits, the system can
also remain active on roads without structural
separations and may not react as expected.
There is a risk of accident. Deactivate the
system if it is enabled on roads without struc-
tural separations.
Federal, state, or local laws may differ, and
the use of this function may be prohibited or
limited. Before use, check federal, state, and
local laws.
The Assisted Driving Mode alerts also apply.
Additional information:
Assisted Driving Mode, refer to page 229.
Overview
Sensors
The system is controlled by the following sen-
sors:
▷
Camera behind the windshield.
▷ Front radar sensor.
▷ Side radar sensors, front.
▷ Side radar sensors, rear.
▷ The sensors in the steering wheel.
▷ Driver Attention Camera.
The version up to 85 mph/135 km/h addition-
ally uses the following sensors:
▷ Front camera.
▷ Exterior mirror cameras.
▷ Rearview camera.
Additional information:
Sensors of the vehicle, refer to page 35.
Functional requirements
The following functional requirements apply to
Assisted Driving Mode Plus:
▷ Assisted Driving Mode Plus must be avail-
able in the country in which the vehicle is
driven.
▷ The functional requirements for Assisted
Driving Mode have been met.
Assisted Driving Mode is active and the
LED displays on the steering wheel are
switched on.
Assisted Driving Mode, refer to page 229.
▷ Driving on a highway-like road without pe-
destrians or cyclists and with physical barri-
ers to oncoming traffic, e.g., guard rails.
▷ Lane boundaries are detected.
▷ Sufficient lane width.
▷ Sufficiently wide curve radius.
▷ The navigation system must clearly identify
the road and vehicle position.
▷ This function must be available on the road
on which the vehicle is driving.
▷ Antennas located in the roof must not be
covered, e.g., by roof loads or snow.
▷ The Driver Attention Camera in the instru-
ment cluster detects that the driver is pay-
ing attention to the surrounding traffic.
For the version up to 40 mph/60 km/h, the fol-
lowing additional functional requirements ap-
ply:
Seite 235
Driver assistance systems
CONTROLS
235
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A88D30 - VI/23
OwnersManuals2.com
▷ A vehicle has been detected ahead of you.
▷ Speed below approx. 40 mph/60 km/h.
For the version up to 85 mph/135 km/h, the
following additional functional requirements
apply:
▷ Assisted Driving Mode Plus is enabled in
the vehicle.
▷ The navigation data must be up to date.
▷ Vehicle speed is less than approx.
85 mph/135 km/h.
▷ The systems in the vehicle, e.g., the At-
tention Assistant and the Driver Attention
Camera recognize that the driver is rested.
Switching Assisted Driving Mode
Plus on/off
1.
Apps menu
2. "Vehicle"
3. "Driving settings"
4. "Driver Assistance"
5. "Driving"
6. "Assisted Driving"
7. "Assisted Driving Plus"
Assisted Driving Mode Plus is automatically
offered when Assisted Driving Mode is active
and all functional requirements for Assisted
Driving Mode Plus have been met.
Two green LED lights are illuminated on the
steering wheel.
The indicator light in the instrument cluster is
shown in green.
The system begins to assist the driver with
vehicle control.
When the system is switched on, the following
functions are enabled:
▷
Forward Collision Mitigation.
▷ Side collision mitigation.
▷ For the version up to 85 mph/135 km/h:
Some speed control systems, e.g., adjust-
ing speed to course of road.
Displays in the instrument cluster
Icon Description
Indicator light green: system is active.
Indicator light gray: the system has
been interrupted and will activate au-
tomatically as soon as all functional
requirements are met.
White indicator light: the system can
be activated.
Depending on the equipment and national-
market version, information for the system is
displayed in the Assisted View in the central
display area of the instrument cluster.
Additional information:
Assisted View, refer to page 158.
Displays on the steering wheel
The two LEDs above the keypads illuminate
depending on the situation.
▷
Green: the system is active.
▷ Yellow: system will be interrupted.
Grab the steering wheel with your hands.
▷ Red: system will be deactivated.
Grab the steering wheel immediately with
your hands.
Additional information:
Assisted Driving Mode, refer to page 229.
Seite 236
CONTROLS
Driver assistance systems
236
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A88D30 - VI/23
OwnersManuals2.com
Displays in the Head-up display
Depending on the equipment, the system in-
formation can also be displayed in the Head-
up display.
Navigation system displays
For the version up to 85 mph/135 km/h, roads
on which Assisted Driving Mode Plus supports
vehicle control can be displayed on the naviga-
tion system.
1. Navigation menu
2. "Suggestions"
3. Select the desired setting.
System limits
The system limits of the following systems ap-
ply:
▷ Assisted Driving Mode
▷ Driver Attention Camera
▷ For the version up to 85 mph/135 km/h:
Fatigue Alert
▷ Sensors of the vehicle
Additional information:
▷
Assisted Driving Mode, refer to page 229.
▷ Driver Attention Camera, refer to page 210.
▷ Fatigue alert, refer to page 209.
▷ Sensors of the vehicle, refer to page 35.
Speed Limit Assistant
Principle
Speed Limit Assistant supports driving at the
speed limit. A suggested speed can be ap-
plied.
General information
When the systems in the vehicle, e.g., Speed
Limit Info, detect a change of the speed limit,
this new speed value can be applied for the
following systems:
▷ Cruise control.
▷ Distance control.
▷ Assisted Driving Mode.
▷ Assisted Driving Mode Plus.
The speed value is suggested as the new de-
sired speed to be applied. To apply the speed
value, the corresponding system must be acti-
vated.
Safety information
Warning
The system cannot serve as a substitute for
the driver’s personal judgment in assessing
the traffic situation. Based on the limits of
the system, it cannot independently react
to all traffic situations. There is a risk of
accident. Adjust driving style to traffic condi-
tions. Watch the surrounding traffic situation
closely, be ready to take over steering and
braking at any time, and actively intervene
where appropriate.
Warning
The set speed can be incorrectly adjusted
or called up by mistake. There is a risk of
accident. Adjust the set speed to the traffic
conditions. Watch surrounding traffic closely
and actively intervene where appropriate.
Seite 237
Driver assistance systems
CONTROLS
237
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A88D30 - VI/23
OwnersManuals2.com
Overview
Buttons on the steering wheel
Button Function
Accept suggested speed manually.
Set speed, refer to Cruise Control.
Turning Speed Limit Assistant
on/off
1.
Apps menu
2. "Vehicle"
3. "Driving settings"
4. "Driver Assistance"
5. "Driving"
6. "Speed Limit Assistant"
7. "Speed limits"
8. Select the desired setting:
▷ "Adjust manually": detected speed limits
can be applied manually.
▷ "Show current limit": current speed lim-
its are displayed without being applied
in the instrument cluster.
▷ "Off": depending on the national-market
version, Speed Limit Info and Speed
Limit Assistant will be turned off.
If necessary, other anticipatory comfort
functions will be turned off.
Additional information:
Speed Limit Info, refer to page 216.
Displays in the instrument cluster
A message is displayed in the instrument clus-
ter when the system and a speed control sys-
tem are activated.
Icon
Function
Detected change of a speed limit with
immediate effect.
Depending on the national-market
version, it is possible to switch be-
tween the units of measurement.
Indicator light illuminates green: the
detected speed limit can be applied
with the SET button.
After it has been applied, a green
checkmark is displayed.
Manual adoption
A detected speed limit can be applied man-
ually to the active speed control system.
When the SET icon is displayed, press
the button.
Speed adjustment
Principle
It can be adjusted whether the speed limit is
applied exactly or with a tolerance.
General information
A speed adaptation for all speed limits and an
additional speed adaptation for speed limits up
to 40 mph/60 km/h can be set up.
The additional speed adaptation for speed lim-
its up to 40 mph/60 km/h can be activated or
deactivated.
Setting the speed adjustment
1.
Apps menu
2. "Vehicle"
3. "Driving settings"
4. "Driver Assistance"
5. "Driving"
Seite 238
CONTROLS
Driver assistance systems
238
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A88D30 - VI/23
OwnersManuals2.com
6. "Speed Limit Assistant"
7. Select the desired setting:
▷ "Adjust speed limits": set the tolerance
for speed adjustments, which applies to
all speed limits.
▷ "2nd adjustm. up to": activate or deacti-
vate additional speed adaptation.
▷ "Adjust speed limits": with activated
additional speed adjustment, set the
tolerance for speed limits up to
40 mph/60 km/h.
System limits
Speed Limit Assistant is based on the Speed
Limit Info system.
Consider the system limits of Speed Limit Info.
Additional information:
▷ System limits of Speed Limit Info, refer to
page 218.
▷ System limits of the sensors, refer to
page 35.
Adapting the speed to the
route
Principle
The system can be configured so that with
active distance control, the vehicle adapts the
speed automatically to the route.
For instance, the speed will be reduced in the
following situations as necessary:
▷
Before making turns.
▷ Before a roundabout.
▷ Before a curve.
▷ In front of an exit ramp on highways or
highway-like roads.
Safety information
Warning
The system cannot serve as a substitute for
the driver’s personal judgment in assessing
the traffic situation. Based on the limits of
the system, it cannot independently react
to all traffic situations. There is a risk of
accident. Adjust driving style to traffic condi-
tions. Watch the surrounding traffic situation
closely, be ready to take over steering and
braking at any time, and actively intervene
where appropriate.
The Cruise Control, Distance Control, Assisted
Driving Mode, and Speed Limit Assist alerts
also apply.
Additional information:
▷ Cruise control, refer to page 221.
▷ Distance control, refer to page 223.
▷ Assisted Driving Mode, refer to page 229.
▷ Speed Limit Assistant, refer to page 237.
Functional requirements
▷
Cruise Control and distance control are acti-
vated.
▷ Driving on a highway or highway-like road.
▷ With navigation system: guidance is acti-
vated.
The use of navigation software via Apple
CarPlay or Android Auto may lead to func-
tional limitations, for instance deviations
with navigation instructions.
▷ The function must be available in the coun-
try in which the vehicle is driven.
Adapting speed automatically to
route
1.
Apps menu
2. "Vehicle"
3. "Driving settings"
Seite 239
Driver assistance systems
CONTROLS
239
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A88D30 - VI/23
OwnersManuals2.com
4. "Driver Assistance"
5. "Driving"
6. "Route and intersection assistant"
7. "Automatically adjust speed to route"
Adjusting the cornering speed
The cornering speed can be adjusted depend-
ing on national-market version.
1. Apps menu
2. "Vehicle"
3. "Driving settings"
4. "Driver Assistance"
5. "Driving"
6. "Route and intersection assistant"
7. "Cornering speed"
8. Select the desired setting.
Displays in the instrument cluster
Depending on the equipment and national-
market version, information for the system is
displayed in the Assisted View in the central
display area of the instrument cluster.
Additional information:
Assisted View, refer to page 158.
System limits
Depending on the national-market version or
country in which the vehicle is currently being
driven, the function may not be available.
The system does not react or reacts to a lim-
ited extent to the route ahead in the following
situations:
▷
If the vehicle location cannot be clearly de-
termined by the navigation system.
▷ On wintry roads.
Additionally, the limits for Cruise Control, Dis-
tance Control, Assisted Driving, and Speed
Limit Assist systems apply.
Additional information:
▷
Cruise control, refer to page 221.
▷ Distance control, refer to page 223.
▷ Assisted Driving Mode, refer to page 229.
▷ Speed Limit Assistant, refer to page 237.
Lane change with active
guidance
Principle
Lane change with active guidance assists the
driver when lane changes are necessary to
reach a destination. A notice is also displayed
on the instrument cluster. In addition, a slight
jerk can be felt on the steering wheel.
General information
The system uses the Assisted Driving Mode
sensors.
Safety information
Warning
The system cannot serve as a substitute for
the driver’s personal judgment in assessing
the traffic situation. Based on the limits of
the system, it cannot independently react
to all traffic situations. There is a risk of
accident. Adjust driving style to traffic condi-
tions. Watch the surrounding traffic situation
closely, be ready to take over steering and
braking at any time, and actively intervene
where appropriate.
The Cruise Control, Distance Control, and As-
sisted Driving alerts also apply.
Additional information:
▷
Cruise control, refer to page 221.
▷ Distance control, refer to page 223.
▷ Assisted Driving Mode, refer to page 229.
Seite 240
CONTROLS
Driver assistance systems
240
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A88D30 - VI/23
OwnersManuals2.com
Functional requirements
▷ Cruise Control and Distance Control are ac-
tivated.
▷ Driving on a highway or highway-like road.
▷ A situation-dependent minimum speed has
been reached.
▷ The system detects a sufficiently large gap
in traffic in the adjacent lane.
▷ A crossable lane boundary on the side of
the desired lane change is detected.
▷ Destination guidance is active on the navi-
gation system.
The function is not available when using
navigation software via Apple CarPlay or
Android Auto.
▷ The function must be available in the coun-
try in which the vehicle is driven.
▷ The Driver Attention Camera in the instru-
ment cluster detects that the driver is pay-
ing attention to the surrounding traffic.
Switching lane change on/off with
active destination guidance
1.
Apps menu
2. "Vehicle"
3. "Driving settings"
4. "Driver Assistance"
5. "Driving"
6. "Route and intersection assistant"
7. "Lane Guiding with Navigation"
Switching the steering wheel jerk
on/off
You can switch the steering wheel jerk assis-
tance on/off.
1.
Apps menu
2. "Vehicle"
3. "Driving settings"
4. "Driver Assistance"
5. "Driving"
6. "Route and intersection assistant"
7. "Steering wheel impulse"
Changing lanes
If lane changes are necessary to reach a nav-
igation destination, a corresponding notice is
displayed on the instrument cluster. In addi-
tion, a slight jerk can be felt on the steering
wheel.
To change lanes, follow the instructions on the
instrument cluster.
1.
The system detects a suitable gap
in the flow of traffic in the adjacent lane. A
green checkmark is displayed on the lane
change icon on the instrument cluster. The
system prepares for the lane change.
2. When a suitable gap is detected, the speed
is adapted so that the vehicle remains level
with the opening.
3. A Check Control message indicates a lane
change suggestion.
4. When the traffic situation permits a lane
change, the driver can steer the vehicle into
the next lane.
For vehicles equipped with Lane Change
Assistant: the Lane Change Assistant can
be started, e.g., by operating the turn signal
after the Check Control message appears.
5. If necessary, the system automatically
starts additional lane changes.
Seite 241
Driver assistance systems
CONTROLS
241
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A88D30 - VI/23
OwnersManuals2.com
Display in the instrument cluster
Icon Function
Indicates a necessary lane change.
The icon varies depending on the
traffic situation.
A green checkmark on the icon indi-
cates that the function is active.
A red cross on the icon indicates that
the system cannot assist with the
lane change.
Depending on vehicle equipment and national-
market version, the traffic situation is displayed
in Assisted View on the instrument cluster.
Additional information:
Assisted View, refer to page 158.
System limits
The limits of the Cruise Control, Distance Con-
trol, and Assisted Driving Mode systems and
Driver Attention Camera apply.
Additional information:
▷
Cruise control, refer to page 221.
▷ Distance control, refer to page 223.
▷ Assisted Driving Mode, refer to page 229.
▷ Driver Attention Camera, refer to page 210.
Seite 242
CONTROLS
Driver assistance systems
242
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A88D30 - VI/23
OwnersManuals2.com
Parking
Vehicle features and options
This chapter describes model-specific equip-
ment, systems, and functions that are currently
available, or may become available in the fu-
ture, even if they are not present in the vehicle.
Additional information:
Vehicle equipment, refer to page 8.
Parking assistance systems
General information
The parking assistance systems include differ-
ent individual systems. The individual systems
help the driver when parking, maneuvering, or
reversing by providing various assistance func-
tions, sensors, and camera views.
Additional information:
▷ Rearview camera, refer to page 248.
▷ Semi-automatic camera perspective, refer
to page 249.
▷ Automatic camera perspective, refer to
page 249.
▷ Side view, refer to page 250.
▷ 3D view, refer to page 250.
▷ Car wash view, refer to page 251.
▷ Panorama View, refer to page 251.
▷ Automatic activation of panorama view, re-
fer to page 252.
▷ Door opening angle, refer to page 253.
▷ Remote 3D View, refer to page 253.
▷ Park Distance Control, refer to page 254.
▷ Active Park Distance Control, refer to
page 257.
▷ Drive-off monitoring, refer to page 258.
▷ Automatic Parking Assistant, refer to
page 259.
▷ Maneuver Assistant, refer to page 264.
▷ Remote Control Parking, refer to page 267.
▷ Back-up Assistant, refer to page 268.
Safety information
Warning
The system cannot serve as a substitute for
the driver’s personal judgment in assessing
the traffic situation. Based on the limits of
the system, it cannot independently react
to all traffic situations. There is a risk of
accident. Adjust driving style to traffic condi-
tions. Watch the surrounding traffic situation
closely, be ready to take over steering and
braking at any time, and actively intervene
where appropriate.
Overview
Button in the vehicle
Park assistance button
Sensors
The parking assistance systems are controlled
by the following sensors:
Seite 243
Parking
CONTROLS
243
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A88D30 - VI/23
OwnersManuals2.com
▷ Ultrasonic sensors in the front/rear bump-
ers.
▷ Ultrasonic sensors, side.
▷ Radar sensors, side, front.
▷ Radar sensors, side, rear.
▷ Front camera.
▷ Top view cameras.
▷ Rearview camera.
Additional information:
Sensors of the vehicle, refer to page 35.
Operating concept
The camera-based individual systems are op-
erated with the function bars on the control
display. The camera views can be viewed by
selecting the appropriate icon.
In the Parking menu, some parking assistance
systems can be configured individually.
Some parking assistance systems can be
started by voice control, e.g., driving in/out of
a parking space with the Automatic Parking
Assistant.
Additional information:
BMW Intelligent Personal Assistant, refer to
page 53.
Calling up Park menu
1.
Apps menu
2. "Vehicle"
3. "Driving settings"
4. "Driver Assistance"
5. "Parking"
6. Select the desired settings.
Display
Principle
With the Park Distance Control display and
various camera views, the parking assistance
systems help you park, maneuver, and reverse
your vehicle.
General information
Depending on the equipment, one or more
cameras capture the area from different se-
lectable perspectives.
Depending on the view, the vehicle's surround-
ings or a part of it is depicted.
Depending on the national-market version, ei-
ther the automatic or the semi-automatic cam-
era perspective is displayed.
Turning display on/off
General information
The parking assistance systems view switches
off automatically when driving forwards or if a
certain distance or speed is exceeded.
With reverse
When drive-ready state is switched on, the dis-
play is automatically switched on if selector
lever position R is engaged.
Via Parking Assistant button
Press the button.
Via iDrive
1.
Apps menu
2. "Vehicle"
3. "Parking"
Display in the instrument cluster
The instrument cluster shows displays of some
parking assistance systems such as Park Dis-
tance Control or Automatic Parking Assistant.
Seite 244
CONTROLS
Parking
244
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A88D30 - VI/23
OwnersManuals2.com
1 Status of parking assistance systems
2 Assisted View
3 Selection menu
Display on the control display
General information
Depending on vehicle equipment and on the
activated parking assistance system, the con-
trol display will vary.
Assistance view
1 Toolbar, left
2 Camera image
3 Vehicle top view
4 Toolbar, right
Parking view
1 Toolbar, left
2 Camera image
3 Selection window
4 Automatic camera perspective
5 Semi-automatic camera perspective
6 Side view
7 Toolbar, right
Toolbar, left
Different views and settings can be selected
via the left toolbar depending on the equip-
ment:
▷
"Parking view"
Depending on vehicle equipment, camera
views or the Park Distance Control view are
displayed.
▷ "Assist view"
A stylized top view of the vehicle is dis-
played.
▷ "Panorama view"
The cross traffic view is displayed.
▷ "More"
▷ "3D view"
A three-dimensional view is displayed.
▷ "Car wash view"
The display of your own lane can be
turned on for easier driving into the car
wash.
▷ "Camera cleaning"
Seite 245
Parking
CONTROLS
245
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A88D30 - VI/23
OwnersManuals2.com
Cleaning of the front camera and rear-
view camera can be switched on as
needed.
▷ "Settings"
Settings can be entered in the Park
menu.
Toolbar, right
The Parking Assistant functions are displayed
in the right toolbar.
▷ Status of the parking assistance systems.
▷ Available parking methods of the Automatic
Parking Assistant.
▷ Functions of the Back-up Assistant.
▷ Functions of the Maneuver Assistant.
▷ Additional information in case of malfunc-
tions.
Status of parking assistance
systems
The status of the following parking assistance
systems is displayed:
▷
Automatic Parking Assistant.
▷ Maneuver Assistant.
▷ Back-up Assistant.
The icons are shown on the control display in
the right toolbar and in the status area in the
instrument cluster. In addition to the icon, a
message is shown on the control display.
Icon
Meaning
No search for parking assistance
system offers.
No other parking assistance sys-
tems available.
Parking assistance systems have
failed.
Search for parking assistance sys-
tem offers is active.
Icon Meaning
White: an available maneuver is se-
lected but is not being performed.
Functional requirements have not
been met or the functions transfer
has been completed.
Green: parking assistance system is
active. Functions are controlled de-
pending on the system activated.
Maneuver Assistant records the
maneuver to be stored.
Additional displays
General information
Additional displays can be shown in the cam-
era image of the display of the parking assis-
tance systems, e.g., parking aid lines, to make
parking and maneuvering easier.
Several additional displays can be active at the
same time.
Turning additional displays on/off
1.
Apps menu
2. "Vehicle"
3. "Driving settings"
4. "Driver Assistance"
5. "Parking"
6. Select the desired setting.
Seite 246
CONTROLS
Parking
246
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A88D30 - VI/23
OwnersManuals2.com
Parking aid lines
Pathway lines
Pathway lines help you to estimate the space
required when parking and maneuvering on
level roads.
Lane lines are displayed in front of or behind
the vehicle depending on the gear engaged.
The pathway lines are continuously adjusted
to the steering movements depending on the
steering-wheel angle.
Turning circle lines
Turning circle lines can only be superimposed
on the camera image together with pathway
lines.
The lines show the course of the smallest pos-
sible turning circle on a level road.
Only one turning circle line is displayed after
the steering wheel is turned past a certain an-
gle.
Using parking aid lines
1. Position the vehicle so that the red turning
circle line leads to within the limits of the
parking space.
2. Turn the steering wheel to the point where
the green pathway line covers the corre-
sponding turning circle line.
Obstacle marking
Obstacles are detected by the sensors.
The obstacles detected by the Park Distance
Control are shown by marks in the camera im-
age.
Colored gradients for the obstacle markings in
green, yellow and red indicate the distances.
Functional limitations
The system can be used only to a limited ex-
tent in the following situations:
▷
With a door open.
▷ With open cargo area.
▷ With exterior mirrors folded in.
Areas with gray hatching with an icon in the
camera image identify areas that are currently
not shown such as an open door.
Seite 247
Parking
CONTROLS
247
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A88D30 - VI/23
OwnersManuals2.com
System limits
Safety information
Warning
Due to its limits, the system may not react, or
it may react too late or in a manner that is not
consistent with normal use. There may be a
risk of accidents or risk of damage to prop-
erty. Actively intervene as warranted. Refer
to the information in this Owner’s Manual re-
garding the scope of the system’s operation
and limitations.
System limits of the sensors
Additional information:
Sensors of the vehicle, refer to page 35.
Field of view
Because of the camera angle, the areas under
the vehicle cannot be viewed by the cameras.
Detection of objects
Very low obstacles as well as high, protruding
objects such as ledges may not be detected by
the system.
The objects displayed on the control display
may be closer than they appear. Do not esti-
mate the distance to the objects on the control
display.
Protruding cargo or a rear carrier can limit the
detection range of the camera.
Malfunction
A camera failure is displayed on the control
display.
The detection range of the failed camera is
shown shaded on the control display.
Rearview camera
Principle
The rearview camera helps when reverse
parking and maneuvering. The area behind the
vehicle is shown on the control display.
Additional views can be shown on the display,
e.g., parking aid lines and obstacle markings.
General information
Follow the information in the "Parking assis-
tance systems" chapter.
Functional requirements
▷ The trunk is fully closed.
▷ The camera area is clean and clear.
Turning the rearview camera on/off
Turning the camera view on
automatically
When drive-ready state is switched on, the
rearview camera is automatically switched on
if selector lever position R is engaged.
Turning the camera view off
automatically
The rearview camera turns off automatically
when driving forward or when a certain dis-
tance or speed is exceeded.
Turning the camera view on/off
manually
1.
Press the button.
2. Engage selector lever position R.
Depending on vehicle equipment: The
icon in the selection window is selected au-
tomatically.
Seite 248
CONTROLS
Parking
248
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A88D30 - VI/23
OwnersManuals2.com
To exit rearview camera view, select an-
other camera view in the selection window
or press the button again.
Deactivated rearview camera
When the rearview camera is deactivated, for
instance when the trunk is open, the camera
image is displayed with gray shading.
Semi-automatic camera
perspective
Principle
Depending on the parking direction and en-
gaged selector lever position, a fixed camera
perspective is displayed with the areas in front
of or behind the vehicle.
General information
Follow the information in the "Parking assis-
tance systems" chapter.
Turning the semi-automatic camera
perspective on/off
1.
Press the button.
2. Select the icon in the selection window.
To exit the fixed camera view, select an-
other camera view in the selection window.
Automatic camera
perspective
Principle
The automatic camera perspective shows a
steering-dependent view in the respective driv-
ing direction.
This perspective adapts to the respective driv-
ing situation.
General information
As soon as obstacles are detected, the view
changes to a fixed display of the area in front
of or behind the bumper, or switches to side
Park Distance Control as necessary.
When reverse gear is engaged, the automatic
camera perspective is, if necessary, exited and
the system uses a semi-automatic camera
perspective to the rear. If necessary, select the
automatic camera perspective when reverse
gear is engaged. The automatic camera per-
spective will then be maintained for the current
parking operation.
Follow the information in the "Parking assis-
tance systems" chapter.
Turning the automatic camera
perspective on/off
Turning the camera view on/off
automatically
When the parking assistance systems' display
is turned on, automatic camera perspective is
selected automatically.
The icon in the selection window is selected
automatically.
To exit the steering-dependent camera view,
select another camera view in the selection
window.
Turning the camera view on/off
manually
1.
Press the button.
2. The icon in the selection window is se-
lected automatically.
To exit the steering-dependent camera
view, select another camera view in the se-
lection window or press the button again.
Seite 249
Parking
CONTROLS
249
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A88D30 - VI/23
OwnersManuals2.com
Side protection
Principle
The side Park Distance Control is automati-
cally displayed when the automatic camera
perspective is turned on. The function shows
obstacles located next to the vehicle.
General information
Follow the information in the "Parking assis-
tance systems" chapter.
Display
To protect the sides of the vehicle, obstacle
markings are displayed on the sides of the ve-
hicle.
▷
No markings: no obstacles detected.
▷ Color marks: warning against detected ob-
stacles.
System limits
The system only displays stationary obstacles
that were previously detected by sensors while
passing them.
The system does not detect whether an obsta-
cle moves later on. For this reason, at stand-
still, the marks are not shown anymore in the
display after a certain time. The area next to
the vehicle must be newly captured.
Side view
Principle
Side view shows the vehicle's side surround-
ings, making it easier to position the vehicle at
the curb or with other obstacles on the side.
The side view looks from rear to front and, in
case of danger, focuses automatically on pos-
sible obstacles.
General information
Follow the information in the "Parking assis-
tance systems" chapter.
Turning the side view on/off
The selection window lets you choose the side
view for the left or right side of the vehicle.
1.
Press the button.
2. Select the icon for the desired vehicle
side in the selection window.
To exit the side view, select another cam-
era view in the selection window.
3D view
Principle
With 3D view, a circle is displayed around the
vehicle top view in the selection window.
Specified perspectives can be selected on the
circle.
General information
The current perspective is marked with a cam-
era icon.
Follow the information in the "Parking assis-
tance systems" chapter.
Seite 250
CONTROLS
Parking
250
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A88D30 - VI/23
OwnersManuals2.com
Turning the 3D view on/off
1. Press the button.
2. "More"
3. "3D view"
To exit the 3D view, select another camera
view on the left toolbar.
Car wash view
Principle
The car wash view assists when entering a car
wash.
General information
Follow the information in the "Parking assis-
tance systems" chapter.
Turning the car wash view on/off
1.
Press the button.
2. "More"
3. "Car wash view"
To exit the car wash view, select a different
camera view in the left toolbar.
Display
Your own lane is displayed for easier driving
into a car wash.
This view can be used to position the vehicle
correctly within the washing system guide rails.
In a car wash, the vehicle must be able to roll
freely forward.
Additional information:
Rolling or pushing the vehicle, refer to
page 130.
Panorama View
Principle
The panoramic view gives you an earlier view
of crossing traffic at blind driveway exits and
intersections.
General information
Road users concealed by obstacles to the left
and right of the vehicle can only be detected
relatively late from the driver's seat. The front
camera and the rearview camera capture the
area around the side of the vehicle to improve
the view.
The camera image shows different levels of
distortion in some areas and is thus not suita-
ble for distance estimations.
Depending on vehicle equipment, the function
can be used when driving forward or in re-
verse.
Follow the information in the "Parking assis-
tance systems" chapter.
Sensors
The system is controlled by the following cam-
eras:
▷
Rearview camera.
▷ Depending on the equipment: front camera.
Seite 251
Parking
CONTROLS
251
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A88D30 - VI/23
OwnersManuals2.com
Turning the panoramic view on/off
1. Press the button.
2. "Panorama view"
To exit panorama view, select another
camera view on the left toolbar.
Display
Yellow lines on the screen display identify the
bumpers of your own vehicle.
Depending on the engaged selector lever posi-
tion, the camera view of the rearview camera
or front camera will be displayed.
Automatic activation of
panorama view
Principle
Positions at which panorama view should
switch on automatically can be saved as acti-
vation points.
General information
Up to ten activation points can be stored.
The activation points can be used when driv-
ing forward and, depending on national-mar-
ket version, when reversing.
Follow instructions in the Parking assistance
systems chapter.
Functional requirements
▷ A GPS signal must be received.
▷ Depending on national-market version: A
BMW ID or driver profile must be activated.
▷ The direction of travel, selector lever posi-
tion, and vehicle angle must correspond to
a stored activation point.
Storing activation points
1. Drive your vehicle to the location where you
want the system to turn on, then stop.
2. Press the button.
3. "Panorama view"
4. "Activation point"
The current position is displayed.
5. "Save activation point"
Activation points are saved with the following
information, for example:
▷ With the city/town.
▷ With the city/town and the street.
▷ With the GPS coordinates.
You can rename the location and street infor-
mation created automatically.
Using activation points
The use of activation points can be switched
on and off.
1.
Apps menu
2. "Vehicle"
3. "Driving settings"
4. "Driver Assistance"
5. "Parking"
6. "GPS-based"
Seite 252
CONTROLS
Parking
252
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A88D30 - VI/23
OwnersManuals2.com
Editing activation points
You can rename or delete specific activation
points or all of them.
1. Press the button.
2. "Panorama view"
3. "Manage points"
A list of all saved activation points is dis-
played.
4. Select the desired setting.
Door opening angle
Principle
Depending on vehicle equipment, the door
opening angle display is shown automatically
when stationary.
This display helps estimate how far the doors
can be opened when parking.
If obstacle marking is activated, the parking
view indicates fixed obstacles that obstruct the
opening angles of the doors.
General information
Follow the information in the "Parking assis-
tance systems" chapter.
Display
The maximum opening angle of the doors is
displayed in selector lever position P.
System limits
The system does not provide a warning of ap-
proaching road users.
The vehicle's surroundings are distorted in the
display for technical reasons.
Even if the door opening angle indicator on the
control display does not overlap with any other
objects, it is necessary to park carefully next to
other objects.
Because of the perspective, higher, protruding
objects may be closer than they appear on the
control display.
Remote 3D View
Principle
The My BMW App and camera views in park-
ing view such as automatic camera perspec-
tive enable you to display the vehicle’s sur-
roundings on a mobile device.
The function displays a snapshot of the situa-
tion.
General information
For reasons of data protection, the function
can only be used three times within two hours.
Follow the information in the "Parking assis-
tance systems" chapter.
Sensors
The system is controlled by the following cam-
eras:
▷
Front camera.
▷ Top view cameras.
▷ Rearview camera.
Functional requirements
▷
Data transfer must be activated.
Seite 253
Parking
CONTROLS
253
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A88D30 - VI/23
OwnersManuals2.com
Data protection, refer to page 68.
▷ The My BMW App must be installed on the
mobile end device.
▷ ConnectedDrive countries: a BMW ID with
an existing ConnectedDrive account must
be activated.
BMW ID/driver profiles, refer to page 69.
Activating/deactivating Remote 3D
View
The function can be activated or deactivated
individually or together with other functions.
1.
Apps menu
2. "Vehicle"
3. "System settings"
4. "Data privacy"
5. Select the desired setting.
After activation, Remote 3D View can be
accessed using the My BMW App.
Functional limitations
The system may not be fully operational or
may not be available in the following situa-
tions:
▷
With a door or the cargo area open. Dark
fields in the display indicate areas that are
not recorded by the system.
▷ With manually folded-in exterior mirrors.
▷ When other camera functions are being
performed in the vehicle.
▷ The vehicle moves faster than walking
speed.
▷ In case of missing or weak Internet connec-
tion.
Park Distance Control
Principle
Park Distance Control assists with parking.
Acoustic and visual warnings signal obstacles
in front of or behind the vehicle.
Obstacles that are detected by the side ultra-
sonic sensors can also be reported.
General information
The range of the system, depending on obsta-
cles and environmental conditions, is approx.
6 ft/2 m.
An acoustic warning sounds in case of an im-
pending collision at a distance to the object of
approx. 27 in/70 cm.
For objects behind the vehicle, the acoustic
warning is issued as early as a distance to the
object of approx. 5 ft/1.50 m.
Follow the information in the "Parking assis-
tance systems" chapter.
Safety information
Warning
The system cannot serve as a substitute for
the driver’s personal judgment in assessing
the traffic situation. Based on the limits of
the system, it cannot independently react
to all traffic situations. There is a risk of
accident. Adjust driving style to traffic condi-
tions. Watch the surrounding traffic situation
closely, be ready to take over steering and
braking at any time, and actively intervene
where appropriate.
Warning
Due to high speeds when the Park Distance
Control is activated, the warning can be de-
layed due to physical circumstances. There is
a risk of injury or risk of damage to property.
Seite 254
CONTROLS
Parking
254
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A88D30 - VI/23
OwnersManuals2.com
Avoid approaching an object too fast. Avoid
driving off quickly while Park Distance Control
is not yet active.
Sensors
The system is controlled by the following sen-
sors:
▷ Ultrasonic sensors in the front/rear bump-
ers.
▷ Ultrasonic sensors, side.
Turning Park Distance Control
on/off
Turning on the system automatically
The system switches on automatically in the
following situations:
▷ When drive-ready state is switched on
when selector lever position R is engaged.
▷ While approaching detected obstacles
if the speed is lower than approx.
2.5 mph/4 km/h. The activation distance
depends on the situation in question.
The automatic activation of detected obstacles
can be activated or deactivated.
1.
Apps menu
2. "Vehicle"
3. "Driving settings"
4. "Driver Assistance"
5. "Parking"
6. "Automatic PDC activation"
Turning off the system automatically
When driving forward, the system turns off au-
tomatically as needed when a certain distance
or speed is exceeded.
Turning the system on/off manually
Press the button.
▷
On: the LED illuminates.
▷ Off: the LED goes out.
If the system is manually switched on when
the reverse gear is engaged, the rearview
camera image is displayed.
Depending on the national-market version, the
system cannot be turned off manually when
the reverse gear is engaged.
Acoustic warning
General information
An intermittent tone indicates when the vehicle
is approaching an object. E.g., when an object
is detected at the rear left of the vehicle, a
sound is heard from the rear left speaker.
The shorter the distance to the object, the
shorter the intervals of the intermittent tones.
When the distance to a detected object is less
than approx. 8 in/20 cm, a continuous tone is
sounded.
When there are objects in front of and behind
the vehicle at the same time, at a distance
smaller than approx. 8 in/20 cm, an alternating
continuous tone will sound between the front
and rear speakers.
The intermittent tones and the continuous tone
are turned off when selector lever position P is
engaged.
Depending on national-market version, the in-
termittent tones are switched off after a short
time when the vehicle is stationary.
If an object approaches when the vehicle is
stationary, the acoustic signal is reactivated.
Adjusting the volume
The volume of the acoustic warning can be
adjusted.
1.
Apps menu
2. "Vehicle"
3. "Driving settings"
Seite 255
Parking
CONTROLS
255
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A88D30 - VI/23
OwnersManuals2.com
4. "Driver Assistance"
5. "Parking"
6. "PDC signal volume"
7. Set the desired value.
Turning off the acoustic warning
Depending on the national-market version, the
acoustic warning can be switched off after the
start of the parking manoeuver.
Press the icon in the status field at the top
of the control display.
No audible warning is emitted during active
parking.
When the Park Distance Control is switched
on again, the acoustic warning is automatically
switched on again.
Visual warning
General information
The approach to an object is displayed on the
control display and in the instrument cluster as
soon as the system is activated.
Objects that are farther away are already dis-
played before a signal sounds.
Depending on the view, pathway lines, turning
circle lines and obstacle markings are shown
for a better estimation of the space required.
Depending on the equipment, the detection
range of the sensors is represented by shaded
annular surfaces. Green, yellow, and red mark-
ings indicate when obstacles are detected in
the detection zone.
If vehicle is equipped with Cross Traffic Warn-
ing: A warning is also shown on the display for
vehicles approaching from the side at the rear
and front.
To protect the sides of the vehicle, obstacle
markings are displayed on the sides of the ve-
hicle.
Display
Depending on vehicle equipment, warnings
may be displayed in front of, next to, and be-
hind the vehicle.
View behind vehicle.
View next to vehicle.
▷
Shaded area: detection range of sensors.
▷ Gray shaded area: no obstacles were de-
tected in the detection range.
▷ Colored marks in shaded area: obstacles
were detected in the detection range.
▷ Shaded area interrupted: the area next to
the vehicle has not yet been detected.
System limits
General information
The function for protecting the vehicle sides
only shows stationary obstacles that were pre-
viously detected by the sensors when passing
by.
The system does not detect whether an obsta-
cle moves later on. When the vehicle is station-
Seite 256
CONTROLS
Parking
256
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A88D30 - VI/23
OwnersManuals2.com
ary, the gray shaded areas on the sides are
hidden after a certain time. The area on the
side of the vehicle must be newly captured.
Also follow the information on system limits in
the "Parking assistance systems" chapter.
Unwarranted warnings
Reaching the system limits can cause unwar-
ranted warnings.
To prevent unwarranted warnings, for instance
in car washes, turn off automatic Park Dis-
tance Control activation on obstacle detection.
Malfunction
An icon is displayed on the control dis-
play.
Depending on the vehicle equipment:
the detection range of the sensors is not dis-
played on the control display.
A Check Control message is displayed.
Park Distance Control malfunction. Have the
vehicle checked by an authorized service cen-
ter or another qualified service center or repair
shop.
Active Park Distance Control
Principle
The Park Distance Control brake function ini-
tiates emergency braking if there is an acute
risk of collision.
General information
Due to system limits, a collision cannot be pre-
vented under all circumstances.
The function is available below walking speed
when driving in reverse or rolling backward.
Pressing the accelerator pedal interrupts the
brake intervention. Emergency braking is not
performed.
After emergency braking to a stop, further
creeping toward an obstacle is possible. Pro-
ceed with caution. To move forward, lightly
press the accelerator pedal and release as
needed.
If the accelerator pedal is depressed longer,
the vehicle drives off. Manual braking is possi-
ble at any time.
Follow the information in the "Parking assis-
tance systems" chapter.
Safety information
Warning
The system cannot serve as a substitute for
the driver’s personal judgment in assessing
the traffic situation. Based on the limits of
the system, it cannot independently react
to all traffic situations. There is a risk of
accident. Adjust driving style to traffic condi-
tions. Watch the surrounding traffic situation
closely, be ready to take over steering and
braking at any time, and actively intervene
where appropriate.
Sensors
The system is controlled by the following sen-
sors:
▷
Ultrasonic sensors in the rear bumpers.
▷ Ultrasonic sensors, side.
Deactivating Active Park Distance
Control temporarily
After emergency braking, the function can be
temporarily deactivated on the control display.
1.
"Obstacle detected. Emergency braking."
2. "Deactivate temporarily"
During continued driving in this surrounding
situation, no further emergency braking will
occur.
Seite 257
Parking
CONTROLS
257
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A88D30 - VI/23
OwnersManuals2.com
The function is automatically reactivated when
Park Distance Control is switched on again.
Settings
It is possible to set which areas on the vehicle
will be protected by the system.
1. Apps menu
2. "Vehicle"
3. "Driving settings"
4. "Driver Assistance"
5. "Parking"
6. "Active PDC emergency braking"
7. Select the desired setting.
Display
As soon as the system engages, an
icon is displayed with a corresponding
message.
System limits
General information
Follow the system limits in the "Parking assis-
tance systems" chapter.
Drive-off monitoring
Principle
In case of a risk of collision, the start-up mon-
itoring reduces the drive power when driving
off.
General information
When obstacles are detected in close range in
front of the vehicle, the acceleration will be re-
duced. If necessary, this permits timely manual
braking.
When obstacles are detected behind the vehi-
cle, the system will brake.
Follow the information in the "Parking assis-
tance systems" chapter.
Safety information
Warning
The system cannot serve as a substitute for
the driver’s personal judgment in assessing
the traffic situation. Based on the limits of
the system, it cannot independently react
to all traffic situations. There is a risk of
accident. Adjust driving style to traffic condi-
tions. Watch the surrounding traffic situation
closely, be ready to take over steering and
braking at any time, and actively intervene
where appropriate.
Sensors
The system is controlled by the following sen-
sors:
▷ Ultrasonic sensors in the front/rear bump-
ers.
▷ Ultrasonic sensors, side.
Functional requirements
▷
Selector lever position D or R is engaged
when the vehicle is stationary.
▷ Obstacles in the immediate vicinity are de-
tected in front of or behind the vehicle.
▷ The accelerator pedal is heavily applied,
nearly to the end point.
▷ The accelerator pedal is immediately ap-
plied after engaging the selector lever posi-
tion and obstacle detection.
Turning drive-off monitoring on/off
1.
Apps menu
2. "Vehicle"
3. "Driving settings"
4. "Driver Assistance"
Seite 258
CONTROLS
Parking
258
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A88D30 - VI/23
OwnersManuals2.com
5. "Parking"
6. "Drive off monitoring"
7. "Drive off monitoring"
A Check Control message is displayed where
applicable.
Depending on the national-market version, the
system is automatically turned on again at the
next drive.
Canceling reduced drive power
The reduction of the drive power is canceled in
the following situations:
▷ The accelerator pedal is released.
▷ After the accelerator pedal has been de-
pressed completely twice.
▷ A specific distance has been traveled.
If the reduction in drive power is canceled by
covering a certain distance, the drive power is
released gradually.
Display
As soon as the system engages, an
icon is displayed with a corresponding
message.
System limits
General information
Follow the system limits in the "Parking assis-
tance systems" chapter.
Automatic Parking Assistant
Principle
Automatic Parking Assistant provides support
when parallel parking and parking transverse
to the road.
In addition, the system makes it easier to
park out of parallel and perpendicular parking
spaces.
The ultrasonic sensors measure both sides of
the vehicle when driving slowly forward. Suita-
ble parking spaces are calculated based on the
objects detected, e.g., parking vehicles. The
system status is displayed.
The system calculates the best possible park-
ing line for driving in or out of parking spaces,
and takes control of the vehicle while parking.
The operating principle and operation of the
system is divided into the following steps:
▷ Parking space search.
▷ Turning on.
▷ Parking.
▷ Driving out of parking spaces.
The parking manoeuver during parking is per-
formed automatically.
When driving out of parallel parking spaces,
the vehicle maneuvers automatically until it
reaches a position where it can be driven out
of the parking space without further steering
movements.
When driving out of perpendicular parking
spaces, the vehicle is maneuvered out of the
parking space to enable continued driving in
the desired direction.
The Automatic Parking Assistant Professional
increases the comfort and range of uses of
the Automatic Parking Assistant. In addition to
the parking methods of the Automatic Parking
Assistant, parking in parking spaces that are
marked with lines is possible.
With Park Assist Professional, you can use Re-
mote Control Parking on your smartphone to
park the vehicle.
Vehicle features and options
This system may not be available in the
owned vehicle, e.g. due to the selected op-
tional equipment, the national-market version
or the option for later enabling and software
updates. This also applies to individual func-
tions of the system.
Seite 259
Parking
CONTROLS
259
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A88D30 - VI/23
OwnersManuals2.com
For information on whether a function is cur-
rently available in the vehicle or when the func-
tion can be installed in the vehicle, contact an
authorized service center or another qualified
service center.
Additional information:
Vehicle equipment, refer to page 8.
General information
Follow the information in the "Parking assis-
tance systems" chapter.
Safety information
Warning
The system cannot serve as a substitute for
the driver’s personal judgment in assessing
the traffic situation. Based on the limits of
the system, it cannot independently react
to all traffic situations. There is a risk of
accident. Adjust driving style to traffic condi-
tions. Watch the surrounding traffic situation
closely, be ready to take over steering and
braking at any time, and actively intervene
where appropriate.
Warning
The system can steer the vehicle over or
onto curbs. There is a risk of injury or risk
of damage to property. Watch surrounding
traffic closely and actively intervene where
appropriate.
Parking methods
Park Assist supports the following functions:
Parallel parking: reverse parking parallel to the
road.
Perpendicular parking: reverse or forward
parking perpendicular to the road.
Driving out of parallel parking spaces.
Driving out of perpendicular parking spaces.
Seite 260
CONTROLS
Parking
260
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A88D30 - VI/23
OwnersManuals2.com
Park Assist Professional: Parking in parking
spaces with parking lines.
Sensors
The Automatic Parking Assistant is controlled
by the following sensors:
▷ Ultrasonic sensors in the front/rear bump-
ers.
▷ Ultrasonic sensors, side.
The Automatic Parking Assistant Professional
is additionally controlled by the following cam-
eras:
▷ Front camera.
▷ Exterior mirror camera.
▷ Rearview camera.
Functional requirements
Measurement of parking spaces
▷
Maximum speed while driving forward ap-
prox. 22 mph/35 km/h.
▷ Maximum distance to row of parked vehi-
cles: 5 ft/1.5 m.
Suitable parking space
Longitudinal parking:
▷
Minimum length of a detected object, e.g., a
parking vehicle: approx. 3 ft/1 m.
▷ Minimum length of gap between two ob-
jects: own vehicle length plus approx.
2.6 ft/0.8 m.
▷ Minimum depth: approx. 5 ft/1.5 m.
Perpendicular parking:
▷ Minimum length of a detected object, e.g., a
parking vehicle: approx. 3 ft/1 m.
▷ Minimum width of the gap: own vehicle
width plus approx. 2.3 ft/0.7 m.
▷ Minimum depth: own vehicle length.
The depth of perpendicular parking spaces
must be estimated by the driver. Due to
technical limitations, the system is only able
to approximate the depth of perpendicular
parking spaces.
Parking lines for Park Assist Professional:
The parking space must be clearly marked
with lines.
Parking operation
▷ Doors and cargo area are closed.
▷ Driver's seat belt is fastened.
Leaving parking spaces
▷ The vehicle was parked using the Auto-
matic Parking Assistant, and an object has
been detected in the area around the vehi-
cle.
▷ The vehicle was manually parked in re-
verse, and objects have been detected in
the immediate vicinity of the vehicle. The
distance to a detected curb is at least 6 in-
ches/15 cm.
▷ The parking space is at least 2.6 ft/0.8 m
longer than the vehicle.
Displays
General information
The current status of the parking assistance
systems is shown in the right-hand toolbar, in
the instrument cluster and, depending on the
equipment, in the Head-up display.
Different icons are shown on the control dis-
play for selecting the parking method.
Seite 261
Parking
CONTROLS
261
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A88D30 - VI/23
OwnersManuals2.com
The sequence of the displayed icons corre-
sponds to the prioritized parking option.
The direction of the arrow changes for the
icons for parking methods for driving out of a
parking space.
Icon Meaning
Reverse lengthwise parking, right.
Reverse lengthwise parking, left.
Reverse perpendicular parking.
Forward perpendicular parking.
Turning parking operation display
on/off
When the Automatic Parking Assistant is ac-
tive, the parking operation is displayed in the
camera image on the control display.
1.
Apps menu
2. "Vehicle"
3. "Driving settings"
4. "Driver Assistance"
5. "Parking"
6. "Show assistance info"
Turning the signal tone on/off
The signal tone for suitable parking spaces
can be turned on and off.
1.
Apps menu
2. "Vehicle"
3. "Driving settings"
4. "Driver Assistance"
5. "Parking"
6. "Sound when available"
Parking using the Automatic
Parking Assistant
1.
For the parking space search when driving
past parked vehicles at a speed of up to
approx. 22 mph/35 km/h and a distance of
max. 5 ft/1.5 m.
The parking space search is activated.
2. Press the button or engage reverse
gear.
The parking assistance systems view is
displayed.
The status of the parking space search and
possible parking spaces are displayed on
the control display and in the instrument
cluster.
3. On the control display: Select one of the
parking maneuvers offered. You can switch
to another parking maneuver as necessary.
In the instrument cluster: select suggested
parking method with the thumbwheel on
the steering wheel.
Green: the system takes control of the
parking operation.
4. Follow the instructions on the control dis-
play or in the instrument cluster.
The speed can be reduced with the brake.
Other interventions will cancel the system.
Depending on national-market version, an
intermittent or continuous tone sounds for
Park Distance Control.
At the end of the parking operation, selec-
tor lever position P is set.
The end of the parking operation is indi-
cated on the control display and in the in-
strument cluster.
5.
Adjust the parking position yourself, if
needed.
Driving out of a parking space using
the Automatic Parking Assistant
1.
Turn on drive-ready state.
2. With the vehicle at a standstill, press
button or engage reverse gear.
Seite 262
CONTROLS
Parking
262
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A88D30 - VI/23
OwnersManuals2.com
The parking assistance systems view is
displayed.
3. On the control display: select the desired
parking method.
In the instrument cluster: select suggested
parking method with the thumbwheel on
the steering wheel.
4. Follow the instructions on the control dis-
play or in the instrument cluster.
Green: the system takes control of ma-
neuvering.
The speed can be reduced with the brake.
Other interventions will cancel the system.
A message will be displayed at the end of
the maneuver.
5. Make sure that the traffic situation permits
driving out of parking space and driving off
as usual.
The Automatic Parking Assistant is turned
off automatically.
Canceling Automatic Parking
Assistant manually
The Automatic Parking Assistant can be can-
celed manually at any time, e.g.:
▷
Step lightly on the accelerator pedal twice
in succession.
▷ Step lightly on the accelerator pedal and
move the steering wheel slightly at the
same time.
▷ Depress the brake pedal and operate the
selector lever at the same time.
The Automatic Parking Assistant is canceled
without engaging selector lever position P.
Driving can continue immediately.
Canceling Automatic Parking
Assistant automatically
The system automatically cancels in situations
such as the following:
▷
When the driver grasps the steering wheel
or takes over steering.
▷ When operating the accelerator pedal or
the selector lever.
▷ When setting the parking brake.
▷ When unfastening the driver's seat belt.
▷ With open cargo area.
▷ With open hood.
▷ With the doors open.
▷ During activation or intervention by driver
assistance systems.
▷ When changing over to another function on
the control display.
▷ When the view on the control display is
overlaid with messages.
▷ On snow-covered or slippery road.
▷ On steep uphill or downhill grades.
▷ When there are obstacles that are hard to
overcome such as curbs.
▷ When there are obstacles that suddenly ap-
pear.
▷ With insufficient distances, which are indi-
cated by Park Distance Control.
▷ When a maximum number of parking at-
tempts or the time taken for parking is ex-
ceeded.
When the system is automatically aborted, se-
lector lever position P is engaged.
A Check Control message is displayed where
applicable.
Continuing the parking operation
If parking or leaving a parking space has been
interrupted, the operation can be continued, if
needed.
Turn the Automatic Parking Assistant on again
and follow the instructions on the control dis-
play or in the instrument cluster.
Seite 263
Parking
CONTROLS
263
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A88D30 - VI/23
OwnersManuals2.com
System limits
General information
Follow the system limits in the "Parking assis-
tance systems" chapter.
No parking assistance
The Automatic Parking Assistant does not of-
fer assistance in the following situations:
▷ In tight curves.
▷ For diagonal parking spaces.
▷ Automatic Parking Assistant: for parking
spaces that are only marked with lines on
the ground. The system orients itself ac-
cording to objects.
▷ For special parking spaces, e.g., metered
parking spaces with automatic locking
mechanisms, or mechanical parking sys-
tems.
Functional limitations
The system may be limited in the following
situations:
▷
On bumpy road surfaces such as gravel
roads.
▷ On slippery ground.
▷ On steep uphill or downhill grades.
▷ With accumulations of leaves/snow in the
parking space.
▷ In case of changes to an already-measured
parking space.
▷ With ditches or edges, for instance an edge
of a port.
▷ Parking spaces that are not suitable may
be detected or suitable parking spaces may
not be detected at all.
Malfunction
A Check Control message is displayed.
The Automatic Parking Assistant has malfunc-
tioned. Have the vehicle checked by an author-
ized service center or another qualified service
center or repair shop.
Maneuver Assistant
Principle
The Maneuver Assistant provides support for
recurring parking and maneuvering situations.
Parking and maneuvering operations can be
recorded and then carried out automatically by
the system.
Vehicle features and options
This system may not be available in the
owned vehicle, e.g. due to the selected op-
tional equipment, the national-market version
or the option for later enabling and software
updates. This also applies to individual func-
tions of the system.
For information on whether a function is cur-
rently available in the vehicle or when the func-
tion can be installed in the vehicle, contact an
authorized service center or another qualified
service center.
Additional information:
Vehicle equipment, refer to page 8.
General information
A recurring maneuver is driven manually and
thereby recorded.
When the vehicle reaches the activation area
for the distance covered by the stored maneu-
ver, the maneuver can be activated on the con-
trol display or in the instrument cluster.
After the activation, the system takes control
of the vehicle and carries out the maneuver
automatically.
Use Remote Control Parking on a smartphone
to perform the parking maneuver.
Follow the information in the "Parking assis-
tance systems" chapter.
Seite 264
CONTROLS
Parking
264
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A88D30 - VI/23
OwnersManuals2.com
Safety information
Warning
The system cannot serve as a substitute for
the driver’s personal judgment in assessing
the traffic situation. Based on the limits of
the system, it cannot independently react
to all traffic situations. There is a risk of
accident. Adjust driving style to traffic condi-
tions. Watch the surrounding traffic situation
closely, be ready to take over steering and
braking at any time, and actively intervene
where appropriate.
Warning
The system can steer the vehicle over or
onto curbs. There is a risk of injury or risk
of damage to property. Watch surrounding
traffic closely and actively intervene where
appropriate.
Detection range
The detection range for a maneuver is divided
into the following areas:
▷
Proximity range, arrow 1: the system will
begin with the localization in the back-
ground within a range of approx. 26 ft/8 m
around the distance covered of a stored
maneuver.
▷ Close range, arrow 2: in a range of ap-
prox. 6 ft/2 m around the distance covered,
a stored maneuver can be displayed on the
control display.
▷ Activation range, arrow 3: the stored
maneuver on the control display can be ac-
tivated within a range of approx. 3.5 ft/1 m.
After the activation, the system takes con-
trol of the vehicle and carries out the ma-
neuver automatically.
Sensors
The system is controlled by the following sen-
sors and cameras:
▷ Ultrasonic sensors in the front/rear bump-
ers.
▷ Ultrasonic sensors, side.
▷ Front camera.
▷ Top view cameras.
▷ Rearview camera.
Recording maneuver
General information
Up to ten maneuvers can be recorded at differ-
ent locations.
Up to four overlapping maneuvers can be re-
corded.
Identical maneuvers under different ambient
conditions can be recorded such as light condi-
tions.
For each maneuver, a maximum distance cov-
ered of 656 ft/200 m is possible.
In total, a distance covered of approx.
1,969 ft/600 m distributed to the ten possible
maneuvers can be recorded.
Maneuvers with a distance covered of less
than 20 ft/6 m cannot be recorded.
Seite 265
Parking
CONTROLS
265
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A88D30 - VI/23
OwnersManuals2.com
Recording maneuver
1. Drive the vehicle to the starting point from
which a maneuver must be recorded and
stop.
2. Press the button.
The parking assistance systems view is
displayed.
3. "Record new path"
4. Drive the vehicle to the desired end posi-
tion.
The maneuver is recorded.
When recording a route, do not drive faster
than 9 mph/15 km/h.
While recording, the distance covered will
be displayed.
When the maximum distance covered or
the maximum speed is reached, a message
will be displayed and a signal tone will
sound.
5. With a stationary vehicle: "Save recording"
6. "Name:"
If necessary, enter the desired name for the
recorded maneuver.
7. "Save recording"
Do not move the vehicle until the recording
has been stored.
Performing stored maneuver
1.
Drive the vehicle into the activation range
and stop. The control display and instru-
ment cluster indicate that a stored maneu-
ver can be activated.
2. : activate stored maneuver.
Green: after activation, the system takes
control of the vehicle and performs the ma-
neuver automatically. If applicable, follow
the instructions on the control display or in
the instrument cluster.
The speed can be reduced with the brake.
Other interventions will cancel the system.
At the end of the parking operation, selec-
tor lever position P is set.
Canceling the Maneuver Assistant
manually
The vehicle can be controlled manually during
an active maneuver by taking the following ac-
tions:
▷ Step lightly on the accelerator pedal twice
in succession.
▷ Step lightly on the accelerator pedal and
move the steering wheel slightly at the
same time.
▷ Depress the brake pedal and operate the
selector lever at the same time.
The Maneuver Assistant is canceled without
engaging selector lever position P. Driving can
continue immediately.
Canceling the Maneuver Assistant
automatically
The system automatically cancels in situations
such as the following:
▷
When the driver grasps the steering wheel
or takes over steering.
▷ When operating the accelerator pedal or
the selector lever.
▷ When the driver's seat belt is not fastened.
▷ With open cargo area.
▷ With open hood.
▷ With the doors open.
▷ During activation or intervention by driver
assistance systems.
▷ When the system limits of the ultrasonic
sensors and cameras are reached.
▷ When changing over to another function on
the control display.
▷ When the view on the control display is
overlaid with messages.
▷ In case of obstacles.
Seite 266
CONTROLS
Parking
266
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A88D30 - VI/23
OwnersManuals2.com
▷ On snow-covered or slippery road.
▷ When the lane is too narrow.
▷ On steep uphill or downhill grades.
In the event of an automatic cancellation of
the system, the vehicle is decelerated to a
complete stop and selector lever position P is
engaged.
An interrupted maneuver can be continued, if
needed. Turn the Maneuver Assistant on again
and follow the instructions on the control dis-
play or in the instrument cluster.
Editing stored maneuvers
Individual or all maneuvers can be deleted or
renamed.
1.
Apps menu
2. "Vehicle"
3. "Driving settings"
4. "Driver Assistance"
5. "Parking"
6. "Recorded paths"
7. Select the desired setting.
System limits
General information
Follow the system limits in the "Parking assis-
tance systems" chapter.
Functional limitations
System limits can cause functional limitations
such as in the following situations:
▷
With poor GPS reception.
▷ On steep uphill or downhill grades.
▷ In case of recorded maneuvers where the
system minimum distance to objects can-
not be maintained.
▷ Greatly deviating conditions when storing
and driving the distance covered, for in-
stance other tires or changed ambient con-
ditions like light conditions or weather.
▷ Delayed display of overlapping stored ma-
neuvers when driving into the activation
area.
▷ In multi-story parking garages, for record-
ings at different parking levels, or for re-
cordings that run over several parking lev-
els.
Remote Control Parking
Principle
With Remote Control Parking, the vehicle can
be driven remotely when parking and maneu-
vering using the Maneuver Assistant and Park
Assist Professional.
The maneuver is performed independently,
outside the vehicle, using a smartphone. This
makes it easy to get in and out of the vehicle.
When parking in a suitable spot, e.g., a garage,
you can correct the parking position with Re-
mote Control Parking by maneuvering slightly.
A maneuver that has already been started can
be continued at any time with Remote Control
Parking.
Vehicle features and options
This system may not be available in the
owned vehicle, e.g. due to the selected op-
tional equipment, the national-market version
or the option for later enabling and software
updates. This also applies to individual func-
tions of the system.
For information on whether a function is cur-
rently available in the vehicle or when the func-
tion can be installed in the vehicle, contact an
authorized service center or another qualified
service center.
Additional information:
Vehicle equipment, refer to page 8.
Seite 267
Parking
CONTROLS
267
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A88D30 - VI/23
OwnersManuals2.com
General information
Note the information in the Automatic Parking
Assistant and Maneuver Assistant chapter.
Protect the smartphone against unauthorized
use.
The low-beam headlights are switched on for
the duration of the maneuver.
A parking maneuver offered by Park Assist
Professional is only available for Remote Con-
trol Parking for a short time after exiting the
vehicle.
Functional requirements
▷ All occupants have left the vehicle.
▷ Doors and cargo area are closed.
▷ The smartphone is compatible with Re-
mote Control Parking.
▷ The My BMW App must be installed on a
compatible smartphone.
▷ The My BMW App must be linked to a Con-
nectedDrive account.
▷ Bluetooth must be enabled on the smart-
phone.
▷ The distance between vehicle and smart-
phone is no greater than approx. 19 ft/6 m.
▷ A valid digital key must be set up for the
vehicle.
Additional information:
BMW Digital Key, refer to page 90.
Parking with Remote Control
Parking
1.
Engage selector lever position P.
2. Leave the vehicle and close the doors and
trunk.
3. Open Remote Control Parking in the My
BMW app and maneuver forward or back-
ward, or select the desired parking method.
4. Follow the instructions on the smartphone.
Stop the vehicle manually if obstacles are
present.
Depending on the option selected in the My
BMW app, the vehicle is either parked at
the end of the parking maneuver or you can
take control of the vehicle again.
System limits
Due to ambient conditions, e.g., impaired Blue-
tooth connection transmission due to external
faults, Remote Control Parking may be inter-
rupted.
If the power supply of the vehicle battery is
not sufficiently ensured, e.g., due to excessive
discharge, Remote Control Parking may not
be available. Follow the instructions in the My
BMW App.
Back-up assistant
Principle
The Back-up Assistant helps when reversing,
e.g., when pulling out of tight or unclear park-
ing or road situations.
Vehicle features and options
This system may not be available in the
owned vehicle, e.g. due to the selected op-
tional equipment, the national-market version
or the option for later enabling and software
updates. This also applies to individual func-
tions of the system.
For information on whether a function is cur-
rently available in the vehicle or when the func-
tion can be installed in the vehicle, contact an
authorized service center or another qualified
service center.
Additional information:
Vehicle equipment, refer to page 8.
Seite 268
CONTROLS
Parking
268
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A88D30 - VI/23
OwnersManuals2.com
General information
The vehicle stores the driving movements of
the last distance covered. This stored distance
can be driven in reverse with automated steer-
ing.
The system takes over the steering. The driver
must control the speed using the accelerator
and brake pedals.
Back-up Assistant: a maximum of 164 ft/50 m
are stored.
Back-up Assistant Professional: a maximum of
656 ft/200 m are stored.
Follow the information in the "Parking assis-
tance systems" chapter.
Safety information
Warning
The system cannot serve as a substitute for
the driver’s personal judgment in assessing
the traffic situation. Based on the limits of
the system, it cannot independently react
to all traffic situations. There is a risk of
accident. Adjust driving style to traffic condi-
tions. Watch the surrounding traffic situation
closely, be ready to take over steering and
braking at any time, and actively intervene
where appropriate.
Warning
The system can steer the vehicle over or
onto curbs. There is a risk of injury or risk
of damage to property. Watch surrounding
traffic closely and actively intervene where
appropriate.
Functional requirements
▷ Drive forward without interruption to store
the distance covered.
▷ To store the distance covered, do not drive
faster than 22 mph/35 km/h.
▷ Back-up Assistant Professional: sufficiently
bright light conditions on the saved route.
▷ Back-up Assistant Professional: the cam-
eras on the vehicle must be clean and clear.
Driving in reverse with automated
steering
1.
Turn on drive-ready state.
2. With the vehicle at a standstill, press
button or engage reverse gear.
The parking assistance systems view is
displayed.
3. "Start back-up Assistant"
The length of the distance covered is dis-
played on the control display and in the in-
strument cluster.
If applicable, follow the instructions on the
control display or in the instrument cluster.
4. Take your hands off the steering wheel and
carefully drive in reverse with the accelera-
tor pedal and the brake.
Green: the system takes control of
steering.
When driving in reverse, observe the vehi-
cle's surroundings.
In case of obstacles, stop immediately and
take over control of the vehicle. Follow the
instructions for Park Distance Control.
5. Right before the end of the stored distance
covered, a signal tone will sound and a
message is displayed.
Stop no later than when normal road traffic
is reached and take control of the vehicle
such as by shifting to forward gear.
Seite 269
Parking
CONTROLS
269
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A88D30 - VI/23
OwnersManuals2.com
Canceling the Back-up Assistant
manually
The assisted reversing by the Back-up Assis-
tant can be canceled manually:
▷ "Cancel"
▷ Press the button.
Canceling the Back-up Assistant
automatically
The system automatically cancels in situations
such as the following:
▷ When the driver grasps the steering wheel
or takes over steering.
▷ When shifting from reverse to another se-
lector lever position.
▷ During activation or intervention by driver
assistance systems.
▷ After an extended period of time when the
vehicle is stationary.
▷ When exiting the stored lane when revers-
ing, for instance with maximum steering-
wheel angle.
▷ When the view on the control display is
overlaid with messages.
▷ In case of a slippery surface.
▷ When the vehicle is rolling such as on a
slope.
▷ In case of changed ambient conditions.
▷ If the vehicle speed exceeds approx.
6 mph/10 km/h.
▷ Reversing Assistant Professional: if sensor
functionality is limited beyond approx. 164
ft/50 m.
System limits
▷
The maximum speed when reversing is
limited to approx. 6 mph/10 km/h.
A warning is issued at a speed of approx.
4 mph/7 km/h.
If the maximum speed is exceeded, the
function is interrupted.
Different influences can lead to side deviations
when driving the stored distance covered in re-
verse. For example, this includes the following
factors:
▷ Steering movements when the vehicle is
stationary while storing the distance cov-
ered.
▷ The speed is not adapted to the distance
covered.
▷ Certain road characteristics such as gradi-
ents, inclines or slippery road surface.
▷ Greatly deviating conditions when storing
and driving the route, for instance other
tires or changed ambient conditions like
weather.
▷ Back-up Assistant Professional: for
changed light conditions.
Also follow the information on system limits in
the "Parking assistance systems" chapter.
Seite 270
CONTROLS
Parking
270
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A88D30 - VI/23
OwnersManuals2.com
Driving comfort
Vehicle features and options
This chapter describes model-specific equip-
ment, systems, and functions that are currently
available, or may become available in the fu-
ture, even if they are not present in the vehicle.
Additional information:
Vehicle equipment, refer to page 8.
Executive Drive Pro
Executive Drive Pro is an actively controlled
chassis. The system combines a high level of
driving comfort with dynamic handling charac-
teristics and minimizes roll tendency when cor-
nering.
Executive Drive Pro consists of Active Roll Sta-
bilization and Integral Active Steering.
Additional information:
Integral Active Steering, refer to page 215.
Active Roll Stabilization, refer to page 271.
Active roll stabilization
Active roll stabilization provides increased driv-
ing comfort, improves vehicle agility and vehi-
cle stability. Among other things, the system
enables a more dynamic response to steering
movements and reduces the body's tendency
to roll when cornering quickly or making quick
evasive maneuvers. This means that, e.g., the
lateral head movements of the occupants are
reduced.
In addition, unevenness on one side of the
road is largely compensated for and is barely
perceptible to the occupants.
Two-axle ride level control
Principle
The two-axle self-leveling suspension uses air
springs to ensure the best possible driving
comfort. Regardless of the load, the vehicle will
be maintained at the configured vehicle level.
General information
The shock absorbers can be set from comfort-
able to sporty via the My Modes drive modes.
Depending on the driving situation, the vehicle
level can be set to different levels:
▷ Normal level: for normal road condition.
▷ Increased level: in the event of poor road
conditions or unevenness.
Safety information
Warning
Adjusting the vehicle height may result in
trapped body parts or damaged vehicle parts.
There is a risk of injury or risk of damage to
property. When adjusting the vehicle height,
make sure that the areas of movement
around the vehicle and at the wheel housing
are free.
Seite 271
Driving comfort
CONTROLS
271
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A88D30 - VI/23
OwnersManuals2.com
Overview
Button in vehicle
Self-leveling suspension
Functional requirement
All doors are closed.
Opening a door while raising or lowering the
vehicle interrupts the process. The process
continues after closing the door.
Activating/deactivating self-leveling
suspension
The system can be deactivated, e.g., to
change a wheel or for towing.
Deactivate system:
Press and hold the button for approx.
7 seconds, until the LED flashes rap-
idly.
To activate system:
Press the button and hold for approx.
7 seconds, then release.
The self-leveling suspension is automatically
activated after driving off at speeds above ap-
prox. 6 mph/10 km/h.
Setting the vehicle level manually
Press the button.
Depending on vehicle speed, using this button
lifts the vehicle to the raised level.
LED display
▷ LED off: Normal vehicle level.
▷ LED flashes: Vehicle level is being ad-
justed.
▷ LED illuminates: Raised vehicle level.
▷ LED flashes rapidly: Vehicle level cannot be
adjusted.
Setting the vehicle level
automatically
The vehicle will lower automatically in the fol-
lowing situations:
▷ My Modes: "SPORT".
▷ At higher speeds.
When a set vehicle level is exited due to the
speed, the vehicle level will be adjusted ac-
cording to the selected driving mode.
Long stationary periods
During long stationary periods, the vehicle may
lower itself. This is not a malfunction.
When the drive-ready state is switched on with
the doors closed, the vehicle is raised to the
normal level automatically.
Depending on the condition of the vehicle, rais-
ing to normal level may take several minutes.
System limits
▷
It may not possible to change the vehicle
level during sporty driving.
▷ It may not be possible to change the vehicle
level with articulated axles.
▷ It may only be possible to raise the vehicle
level in the drive-ready state.
▷ If the vehicle battery charge is too low, the
vehicle level cannot be changed.
▷ If the vehicle level is frequently changed in
quick succession, the system switches off
Seite 272
CONTROLS
Driving comfort
272
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A88D30 - VI/23
OwnersManuals2.com
to prevent overheating and will be tempo-
rarily unavailable or operate at a delay. Let
the system cool down, if needed.
▷ If the payload is increased, the highest driv-
ing level may be disabled or automatically
exited in order to protect the system.
Malfunction
A Check Control message is displayed.
In case of a malfunction, the vehicle will have
changed handling characteristics or a noticea-
bly reduced driving comfort.
Have the vehicle checked by an authorized
service center or another qualified service cen-
ter or repair shop.
BMW IconicSounds
Depending on vehicle equipment and national-
market version, the vehicle drive sound can be
adjusted using BMW IconicSounds.
1.
Apps menu
2. "Vehicle"
3. "Driving settings"
4. "Drivetrain and chassis"
5. "IconicSounds"
6. Select the desired setting.
Seite 273
Driving comfort
CONTROLS
273
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A88D30 - VI/23
OwnersManuals2.com
Climate control
Vehicle features and options
This chapter describes model-specific equip-
ment, systems, and functions that are currently
available, or may become available in the fu-
ture, even if they are not present in the vehicle.
Additional information:
Vehicle equipment, refer to page 8.
Climate control
Overview
Functions in the Climate menu
Icon Function
Turn the climate control sys-
tem on/off.
Automatic program.
Temperature.
Air conditioning.
Maximum cooling.
Air recirculation mode.
Automatic recirculated-air con-
trol.
Icon Function
Fresh air.
Air flow.
Air distribution.
SYNC program.
Seat heating.
Panel heating.
Seat cooling.
Steering wheel heating
Buttons, automatic climate control
Icon
Function
Defrost function.
Rear window defroster.
Seite 274
CONTROLS
Climate control
274
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A88D30 - VI/23
OwnersManuals2.com
Rear automatic climate control
Icon Function
Turning the rear automatic cli-
mate control on/off.
Automatic program.
Temperature.
Air flow.
Air distribution.
Seat heating.
Panel heating.
Seat cooling.
Calling up climate control functions
The Climate menu can be accessed via iDrive:
Tap the icon for the Climate menu on
the menu bar.
Or:
1.
Apps menu
2. "Vehicle"
3. "Climate control"
Turning the air conditioning system
on/off
The climate control system can be turned on or
off via iDrive.
1. Tap the icon for the Climate menu
on the menu bar.
2. Tap the power button.
The entire climate control system is turned on
or off with the last settings applied.
When the air conditioning system is turned
on, individual climate control functions can be
turned off.
Settings
You can configure individual settings for cli-
mate control functions via iDrive, e.g.:
▷ Intensity of seat heating.
▷ Pre-ventilation.
1. Tap the icon for the Climate menu
on the menu bar.
2. "Individual settings" or "General settings"
3. Select the desired setting.
Turning rear automatic climate
control on/off
Functional requirements
▷
Automatic climate control is turned on.
▷ Defrost function is deactivated.
Via iDrive
1.
Tap the icon for the Climate menu
on the menu bar.
2. "Individual settings"
3. "Second row of seats"
Seite 275
Climate control
CONTROLS
275
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A88D30 - VI/23
OwnersManuals2.com
4. "Rear climate control"
5. Select the desired setting.
The rear automatic climate control can be ac-
tivated with standard setting for temperature
and AUTO program:
"Activate with default settings"
Via BMW Touch Command
1. Tap on the icon.
2. Tap the climate bar on the touchscreen.
3. Tap on the icon.
4. Select the desired setting.
Locking the rear automatic climate
control
1.
Tap the icon for the Climate menu
on the menu bar.
2. "Individual settings"
3. "Second row of seats"
4. "Lock rear climate control"
Automatic program
Principle
The automatic program ensures a comforta-
ble climate, which can be modified with the
desired temperature and individual settings.
The automatic program cools, ventilates or
heats the vehicle interior automatically.
General information
Depending on the equipment, the automatic
program provides the best possible settings
for climate control functions depending on
the outside temperature, interior temperature,
sunlight, seat occupancy and the desired tem-
perature setting:
▷
Air flow.
▷ Air distribution.
▷ Temperature.
▷ Seat and panel heating.
▷ Seat cooling.
▷ Steering wheel heating
The automatic program takes seat occupancy
into account, regulating the climate in an en-
ergy-efficient manner that is tailored to the oc-
cupants.
▷ If only the driver’s seat is occupied, the
temperature set on the driver’s side is auto-
matically applied to all other zones.
▷ If another seat is occupied, the temperature
last set there is restored.
At the same time, a condensation sensor con-
trols the automatic program in order to prevent
window condensation to the extent possible.
Overview
1 Settings
2 Air flow intensity
3 Climate control functions bar
4 Temperature
5 Seat heating
Steering wheel heating
Seat cooling
Seite 276
CONTROLS
Climate control
276
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A88D30 - VI/23
OwnersManuals2.com
Turning the automatic program
on/off
The AUTO program can be switched on or off
via iDrive.
1. Tap the icon for the Climate menu
on the menu bar.
2. Tap the AUTO program button.
Switching the rear climate control
automatic program on/off
Via iDrive
1.
Tap the icon for the Climate menu
on the menu bar.
2. "Individual settings"
3. "Second row of seats"
4. "Automatic climate"
5. Select the desired setting.
Via BMW Touch Command
1.
Tap on the icon.
2. Tap the climate bar on the touchscreen.
3. "AUTO"
4. Select the desired setting.
Setting the intensity
When the automatic program is activated,
the intensity of individual climate control func-
tions, e.g., seat heating, is adjusted individu-
ally.
1.
Tap the icon for the Climate menu
on the menu bar.
2. "Individual settings"
3. Select the desired setting, e.g.:
▷ "LOW"
▷ "MEDIUM"
▷ "HIGH"
Each level has a specific control range of the
intensity.
Based on the stored data models, the intensi-
ties are dynamically adjusted while driving. It is
not necessary to manually change the desired
intensity to lower or higher levels while driving.
The individually selected settings of the cli-
mate control functions are stored and auto-
matically set up again such as after the vehicle
is started again.
Display
The indicator on the menu bar provides infor-
mation about the temperature difference be-
tween the configured desired temperature and
current interior temperature.
▷ The red or blue bar next to the temperature
display indicates the progress of heating or
cooling.
▷ The desired interior temperature is reached
as soon as the bar is no longer displayed.
Active climate control functions, e.g., seat
heating, are indicated by the icons on the
menu bar.
Temperature
Principle
The automatic climate control cools or heats
to the configured temperature and then keeps
the temperature constant.
General information
Do not rapidly switch between different tem-
perature settings. Otherwise, the automatic cli-
mate control will not have sufficient time to ad-
just the set temperature.
Seite 277
Climate control
CONTROLS
277
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A88D30 - VI/23
OwnersManuals2.com
Setting the temperature
You can set the desired temperature for driver
and front passenger individually on the menu
bar.
▷ Raise the temperature.
▷ Lower temperature.
Setting the rear automatic climate
control temperature
Via iDrive
1.
Tap the icon for the Climate menu
on the menu bar.
2. "Individual settings"
3. "Second row of seats"
4. Set the desired temperature.
Via BMW Touch Command
The temperature can be set individually for
the driver's and front passenger side in the air
conditioning bar.
1.
Tap on the icon.
2. Set the desired temperature:
▷ Raise the temperature.
▷ Lower temperature.
Footwell temperature
General information
The air temperature in the footwell can be ad-
justed.
This does not change the set interior tempera-
ture for the driver and front passenger.
Adjusting the footwell temperature
1. Tap the icon for the Climate menu
on the menu bar.
2. "Individual settings"
3. "Driver" or "Front passenger"
4. "Temperature adjustment for footwell"
5. Increase or decrease temperature.
Air flow
General information
The air flow generated by the blower can be
adjusted as needed.
Adjusting the air flow
The air flow can be set via iDrive.
1.
Tap the icon for the Climate menu
on the menu bar.
The air flow may be reduced to preserve the
vehicle battery.
Adjusting the air volume of the rear
climate control
Via iDrive
1.
Tap the icon for the Climate menu
on the menu bar.
2. "Individual settings"
Seite 278
CONTROLS
Climate control
278
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A88D30 - VI/23
OwnersManuals2.com
3. "Second row of seats"
4. "Fan"
5. Select the desired setting.
Via BMW Touch Command
1. Tap on the icon.
2. Tap the climate bar on the touchscreen.
3. Tap on the icon.
4. Select desired setting, for example,
"MEDIUM".
▷ Increase air flow.
▷ Reduce air flow.
Air distribution settings
Principle
The air distribution can be adjusted as re-
quired in manual mode.
Adjusting the air distribution
The air distribution can be set via iDrive:
1.
Tap the icon for the Climate menu
on the menu bar.
2. Tap the air distribution icon on the
climate control functions bar.
3. Select the desired setting:
▷ Aim the air flow downward, arrow 1.
▷ Aim the air flow upward, arrow 2.
▷ Aim the air flow at the windshield , ar-
row 3.
The selected air distribution is displayed.
Adjusting the air distribution of the
rear climate control
The function is operated via BMW Touch Com-
mand.
1.
Tap on the icon.
2. Tap the climate bar on the touchscreen.
3. Tap on the icon.
4. Air distribution.
5. Select the desired setting.
Air conditioning
Principle
With the climate control function, the air inside
the vehicle is cooled and dehumidified, then
warmed again depending on the temperature
settings.
Functional requirement
Standby or drive-ready state is switched on.
Seite 279
Climate control
CONTROLS
279
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A88D30 - VI/23
OwnersManuals2.com
Switching the cooling function on/off
The air conditioning can be switched on or off
via iDrive:
1. Tap the icon for the Climate menu
on the menu bar.
2. Tap the air conditioning button.
In recirculated-air mode, air conditioning is au-
tomatically switched on to dry the air and avoid
window condensation.
Depending on the weather, the windshield and
the side windows may fog up briefly when
drive-ready state is switched on.
When using the cooling mode, condensation
that will exit below the vehicle.
Maximum cooling
Principle
Maximum cooling lets you cool the vehicle in-
terior quickly and effectively.
The lowest temperature and the maximum air
flow are set automatically.
The function is automatically activated in the
rear when the SYNC program is turned on.
Functional requirement
The function is available at an outside temper-
ature above approx. 32 ℉/0 ℃ and with the
drive-ready state switched on.
Turning maximum cooling on/off
Maximum cooling can be turned on or off via
iDrive:
1. Tap the icon for the Climate menu
on the menu bar.
2. Tap the maximum cooling button.
Air flows out of the air vents to the upper body
area. Open the vents.
Air recirculation mode
Principle
You may react to unpleasant odors or pollu-
tants in the immediate environment by tempo-
rarily suspending the supply of outside air. The
system then recirculates the interior air.
In automatic recirculated-air control mode, out-
side air is fed in or the interior air recirculated
depending on the outside air quality.
When the air recirculation is turned off, outside
air is directed into the interior.
General information
If there is window condensation, turn off the air
recirculation.
The interior filter cleans the incoming fresh
air or the circulated interior air in recirculation
mode.
Turning air recirculation on/off
Air recirculation mode can be switched on or
off via iDrive:
1.
Tap the icon for the Climate menu
on the menu bar.
2. The current operating mode is displayed on
the climate control functions bar. Tap the
Seite 280
CONTROLS
Climate control
280
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A88D30 - VI/23
OwnersManuals2.com
button until the desired operating mode is
set.
▷ Recirculating air.
▷ Fresh air.
▷ Automatic air recirculation.
In recirculated-air mode, air conditioning is au-
tomatically switched on to dry the air and avoid
window condensation.
Depending on vehicle equipment, air recircula-
tion will turn off automatically based on ambi-
ent conditions in order to prevent window con-
densation.
SYNC program
Principle
If SYNC program is activated, the settings on
the driver's side are transfered to the passeng-
er's side and to the rear.
If the SYNC program is deactivated, the follow-
ing settings are made automatically in the au-
tomatic program depending on the seat occu-
pancy:
▷
If the front passenger's seat is not occu-
pied, the settings on the driver's side are
applied.
▷ If the seats in the rear are unoccupied, the
default settings are applied.
General information
The following settings can be transferred:
▷
Temperature.
▷ Air flow.
▷ Air distribution.
▷ Automatic program.
Turning the SYNC program on/off
The SYNC program can be switched on or off
via iDrive:
1. Tap the icon for the Climate menu
on the menu bar.
2. Tap the SYNC program button.
If the settings on the front passenger side or in
the rear are changed, the program is automati-
cally switched off.
Defrost function
Principle
With the defrost function, ice and condensation
are quickly removed from the windshield and
the front side windows.
The air flow and air temperature are automati-
cally optimized for the removal of ice and con-
densation.
The air distribution is directed toward the
windshield and front side windows.
If there is window condensation, turn on the
automatic program to take advantage of the
condensation sensor.
When the defrost function is turned on, the rear
automatic climate control is deactivated to pro-
vide maximum performance.
Turning the defrost function on/off
Press the defrost button on the instru-
ment panel.
The LED of the button is illuminated
when the system is switched on.
When the defrost function is turned on, the rear
automatic climate control is deactivated to pro-
vide maximum performance.
Seite 281
Climate control
CONTROLS
281
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A88D30 - VI/23
OwnersManuals2.com
Make sure that air is able to flow to the wind-
shield and front side windows.
Rear window defroster
Principle
With the rear window defroster, ice and con-
densation are quickly removed from the rear
window.
Functional requirement
Standby or drive-ready state is switched on.
Turning the rear window defroster
on/off
Press the rear window heating button
on the instrument panel.
The LED is illuminated with rear win-
dow defroster switched on.
The rear window defroster switches off auto-
matically after a certain period of time.
Seat heating
Principle
The system heats seats and panels as
needed.
General information
Seat heating can also be used without panel
heating. Deactivate panel heating as neces-
sary.
Adjusting seat heating
Automatic program
When the automatic program is activated, the
intensity of seat heating can be adjusted: As
you drive, the heater output is automatically
adjusted according to your set intensity.
Adjusting seat heating manually
The heater output level can be adjusted man-
ually:
1. Tap the icon for seat climate control on the
menu bar, arrow 1.
2. Press the seat heating button re-
peatedly until the desired level is selected,
arrow 2.
If a consumption-optimized drive mode is se-
lected, the heater output is reduced.
Turning the rear automatic climate
control seat heating on/off
The function is operated via BMW Touch Com-
mand.
1.
"Seats"
2. "Seat climate control"
3. Select desired seat.
4. Tap on the icon.
5. Select the desired setting.
Seat cooling
Principle
The system cools the seat and backrest sur-
faces as necessary, ensuring a pleasant seat
temperature.
Seite 282
CONTROLS
Climate control
282
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A88D30 - VI/23
OwnersManuals2.com
Adjusting the seat cooling
Automatic program
When the AUTO program is on, the intensity of
seat cooling can be adjusted. As you drive, the
cooling power is automatically adjusted to the
set intensity.
Adjusting the seat cooling manually
The cooling level can be adjusted manually:
1. Tap the icon for seat climate control on the
menu bar, arrow 1.
2. Press the seat cooling button re-
peatedly until the desired level is selected,
arrow 2.
Turning the rear automatic climate
control seat cooling on/off
1.
"Seats"
2. "Seat climate control"
3. Select desired seat.
4. Tap on the icon.
5. Select the desired setting.
Steering wheel heating
Principle
The system heats the steering wheel as nec-
essary.
Adjusting steering wheel heating
Automatic program
When the automatic program is activated, the
intensity of steering wheel heating can be ad-
justed. As you drive, the heater output is auto-
matically adjusted according to your set inten-
sity.
Adjusting steering wheel heating
manually
The heater output level can be adjusted man-
ually:
1.
Tap the icon for seat climate control on the
menu bar, arrow 1.
2. Press the steering wheel heating
button repeatedly until the desired level is
selected, arrow 2.
If a consumption-optimized drive mode is se-
lected, the heater output is reduced.
Panel heating
Principle
The interior is quickly and energy efficiently
heated with radiant heat.
General information
The elements of the panel heating are
integrated in the doors, the glove compartment
Seite 283
Climate control
CONTROLS
283
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A88D30 - VI/23
OwnersManuals2.com
lid and in the lower area of the instrument
panel.
The heat is supplied without direct contact to
the heated surface.
The set desired temperature heats the surfa-
ces more or less.
Switching panel heating on/off
The panel heating can be switched on or off in
addition to the seat heating.
1. Tap the icon for the Climate menu
on the menu bar.
2. "Individual settings"
3. Select desired seat.
4. Select the desired setting.
Setting the panel heating
1.
Tap the icon for the Climate menu
on the menu bar.
2. Tap the seat climate control icon on the
menu bar.
3. Press the seat heating button repeatedly
until the desired level is selected.
Adjusting the rear climate control
panel heating
The function is operated via BMW Touch Com-
mand.
1.
"Seats"
2. "Seat climate control"
3. Select desired seat.
4. Select the desired function.
5. Select the desired setting.
Ventilation
Principle
The ventilation system offers individual ranges
of adjustment for direct or indirect ventilation
to optimize the air flows in the vehicle.
General information
Open the air vents and position them to ensure
effective climate control.
The air flow heats or cools noticeably, depend-
ing on the set desired temperature.
Front ventilation
▷ Change the air flow direction, arrow 1.
▷ Adjustment of the air volume at the vent,
arrow 2.
Ventilation in the rear
▷
Change the air flow direction, arrow 1.
▷ Thumbwheel for variable opening and clos-
ing of the air vents, arrow 2.
Seite 284
CONTROLS
Climate control
284
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A88D30 - VI/23
OwnersManuals2.com
Ventilation in the rear, on the side
▷ Lever for changing the airflow direction, ar-
row 1.
▷ Thumbwheel for variable opening and clos-
ing of the air vents, arrow 2.
Setting the ventilation
Depending on the desired ventilation, align the
air flow directly or indirectly toward the pas-
sengers.
Air quality
General information
The air quality in the interior is improved by the
following components:
▷
Emission tested passenger compartment.
▷ Interior filter.
▷ Air conditioning system to control the
temperature, air flow and recirculated-air
mode.
▷ Pre-ventilation.
Interior filter
The interior filter cleans the incoming fresh
air or the circulated interior air in recirculation
mode.
Depending on the equipment:
▷
Dust and pollen is filtered out from the in-
flowing air.
▷ Nano-particle emissions are reduced.
▷ Gaseous pollutants are filtered.
▷ Microbial particles, viruses and allergens
are filtered.
The manufacturer of the vehicle recommends
having the interior filter changed during vehicle
maintenance.
Pre-ventilation
Principle
The car's interior can be cooled or heated
before driving off with the pre-ventilation. De-
pending on set temperature and ambient tem-
perature, the car's interior is ventilated or pos-
sibly heated using the residual engine heat.
General information
The system can be switched on and off directly
or via a preset departure time.
The activation time is determined based on
the outside temperature. The system promptly
switches on before the selected departure
time.
The system switches off automatically after a
certain period of time. The system continues to
run for some time after being switched off.
Functional requirements
▷
The vehicle is in idle state or standby state.
▷ The vehicle battery is sufficiently charged.
If pre-ventilation is switched on, the vehicle
battery will be discharged. Thus, limit the
maximum activation time to save the vehi-
cle battery. The system will be available
again after the engine is started or after a
short trip.
▷ Time and date are set correctly.
▷ The ventilation air vents are open.
Seite 285
Climate control
CONTROLS
285
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A88D30 - VI/23
OwnersManuals2.com
Switching pre-ventilation on/off
1. Tap the icon for the Climate menu
on the menu bar.
2. "General settings"
3. "Pre-ventilation"
4. Select the desired setting.
Departure time
General information
Different departure times can be set to ensure
a comfortable interior temperature in the vehi-
cle at the time of departure.
▷ One-time departure time: the time can be
set.
The system is switched on once.
▷ Departure time with weekday: time and day
of the week can be set.
On the desired weekdays, the system will
be switched on before the set departure
time.
The departure time is preselected in two steps:
▷
Set departure times.
▷ Activate departure times.
A minimum of 10 minutes should pass be-
tween setting and activating the departure
time and the planned departure time to allow a
sufficient period of time for the climate control.
Setting the departure time
1.
Tap the icon for the Climate menu
on the menu bar.
2. "General settings"
3. "Pre-ventilation"
4. "Departure plan"
5. Select the desired departure time.
6. Set the desired departure time.
7. Select day of the week, if needed.
Activating the departure time
1. Tap the icon for the Climate menu
on the menu bar.
2. "General settings"
3. "Pre-ventilation"
4. "Departure plan"
5. Activate the desired departure time.
Display
Icon Description
Icon on the instrument
panel.
Icon illuminates: a depar-
ture time is activated.
Icon flashes: pre-ventila-
tion is switched on.
Activating with My BMW App
Depending on vehicle equipment, the My BMW
App with remote functionality can be used to
turn on pre-cooling at a preset departure time
or immediately.
Pre-conditioning through
Remote Engine Start
Principle
Pre-conditioning cools or heats the car's inte-
rior prior to start of the trip to a comfortable
temperature. The system automatically cools,
vents, and heats depending on the interior, ex-
ternal, and set temperature. Snow and ice may
be removed more easily.
The system starts the engine automatically
and allows it to run for a limited period of time.
Seite 286
CONTROLS
Climate control
286
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A88D30 - VI/23
OwnersManuals2.com
Safety information
DANGER
If the exhaust pipe is blocked or ventilation
is insufficient, harmful exhaust gases can pol-
lute the area in and around the vehicle or
penetrate the vehicle. The exhaust gases
contain pollutants which are colorless and
odorless. In enclosed areas or areas with in-
sufficient ventilation, exhaust gases can also
accumulate outside of the vehicle. There is a
danger to life. Keep the exhaust pipe free and
ensure sufficient ventilation. Do not switch on
stationary climate control in enclosed areas
or areas with insufficient ventilation, e.g. in
enclosed garages.
Warning
When stationary climate control is in opera-
tion, high temperatures can occur underneath
the body, for instance caused by the exhaust
system. If combustible materials such as
leaves or grass come in contact with hot
parts of the exhaust system, these materi-
als can ignite. There is a risk of fire. Make
sure that no combustible materials can come
in contact with hot vehicle parts during sta-
tionary climate control operation, e.g. leaves,
grass, gas, gasoline, oil or other combustible
objects.
Functional requirements
▷
The vehicle is in idle state or standby state.
▷ Battery is sufficiently charged.
▷ The fuel tank capacity is sufficient.
▷ Hood is closed.
▷ Make sure that the vehicle's date and time
are set correctly.
▷ Air vents are opened.
Enabling the automatic engine start
function
The automatic engine start must be enabled
before using the system. Otherwise, the en-
gine cannot switch on automatically to clima-
tize the car's interior.
1. Tap the icon for the Climate menu
on the menu bar.
2. "General settings"
3. "Pre-conditioning"
4. "Remote Engine Start"
5. "Start engine for climate cont."
6. Confirm the disclaimer.
Turning on/turning off the pre-
conditioning
General information
The system switches off automatically after
max. 15 minutes for safety reasons.
The system can be switched on a maximum of
two times in a row.
The system will be available again as soon
as the drive-ready state is activated and deac-
tivated again.
Switching on via iDrive
1.
Tap the icon for the Climate menu
on the menu bar.
2. "General settings"
3. "Pre-conditioning"
4. "Start now"
Switching on/off via vehicle key
The system can be switched on and off using
the vehicle key.
Seite 287
Climate control
CONTROLS
287
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A88D30 - VI/23
OwnersManuals2.com
Press the button on the vehicle key
three times within 1 second.
After operating the vehicle key, it will
take approximately 3 seconds until the engine
is switched on.
To switch off the system, press the button
again three times.
Switching off with the Start/Stop
button
The system can be switched off directly by
pressing the Start/Stop button without de-
pressing the brake pedal.
Climate control for departure time
General information
Scheduled departure times can be set up in
the system to ensure a comfortable interior
temperature in the vehicle at the time of depar-
ture.
▷ One-time departure time: the time of the
scheduled departure can be set.
The system is switched on once.
▷ Departure time with weekday: time and day
of the week of the scheduled departure can
be set.
The departure time is preselected in two steps:
▷
Set departure times.
▷ Activate departure times.
The system is activated automatically a few
minutes before the set departure time. The
system remains switched on for a short time
after the set departure time.
For safety reasons, the air conditioning can
only be activated once for the departure time.
The system will be available again as soon
as the drive-ready state is activated and deac-
tivated again.
Observe the information about the intended
use of the vehicle.
Additional information:
For Your Own Safety, refer to page 8.
Setting the departure time
1. Tap the icon for the Climate menu
on the menu bar.
2. "General settings"
3. "Pre-conditioning"
4. "Departure plan"
5. Set the departure time.
6. Select day of the week, if needed.
Activating the departure time
1.
Tap the icon for the Climate menu
on the menu bar.
2. "General settings"
3. "Pre-conditioning"
4. "Departure plan"
5. Activate the desired departure time.
Display
In the instrument cluster:
The engine runs for the purpose
of operating the pre-condition-
ing. The vehicle is not ready to
drive.
Icon
Description
Icon on the instrument
panel.
Icon illuminates: a depar-
ture time is activated.
Icon flashes: pre-condition-
ing is switched on.
Seite 288
CONTROLS
Climate control
288
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A88D30 - VI/23
OwnersManuals2.com
Interior equipment
Vehicle features and options
This chapter describes model-specific equip-
ment, systems, and functions that are currently
available, or may become available in the fu-
ture, even if they are not present in the vehicle.
Additional information:
Vehicle equipment, refer to page 8.
Integrated universal remote
control
Principle
The integrated universal remote control in the
interior mirror can operate remote-controlled
systems such as garage door openers, alarm
systems or locking systems.
General information
The integrated universal remote control re-
places up to three different hand-held trans-
mitters. To operate the remote control, the
buttons on the interior mirror must be pro-
grammed with the desired functions.
Before selling the vehicle, delete the stored
functions for the sake of security.
If possible, do not install the antenna of the
remote-controlled system near metal objects
to ensure the best possible operation.
Safety information
Warning
The operation of remote-controlled systems
with the integrated universal remote control
such as the garage door may result in injury,
for example, body parts becoming jammed in
a garage door. There is a risk of injury or risk
of damage to property. Make sure that the
travel path of the respective system is clear
during programming and operation. Also fol-
low the safety information for the hand-held
transmitter.
Compatibility
If this icon is printed on the packaging
or in the operating instructions of the
remote-controlled system, the system
is generally compatible with the integrated uni-
versal remote control.
Additional questions are answered by:
▷ An authorized service center or another
qualified service center or repair shop.
▷ www.homelink.com on the Internet.
HomeLink is a registered trademark of Gentex
Corporation.
For any additional questions, contact an au-
thorized service center or another qualified
service center or repair shop.
Control elements on the interior
mirror
▷
Buttons, arrow 1.
▷ LED, arrow 2.
▷ Hand-held transmitter of the remote-con-
trolled system, arrow 3.
Seite 290
CONTROLS
Interior equipment
290
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A88D30 - VI/23
OwnersManuals2.com
Programming the integrated
universal remote control
Functional requirement
The battery of the hand-held transmitter must
be fully charged at the time of programming
to ensure an optimal range of the integrated
universal remote control.
Programming individual buttons
1. Park the vehicle within range of the remote-
controlled system.
2. Turn on standby state.
3. Select desired button on the interior mirror:
▷ Program available button:
Press the button.
▷ Program already assigned button:
Press and hold the button for approx.
20 seconds.
The LED on the interior mirror will slowly
begin flashing orange.
4. Hold the hand-held transmitter for the
remote-controlled system approx. 1 to
12 in/2.5 to 30 cm away from the buttons
on the interior mirror.
The required distance depends on the
hand-held transmitter.
5. Press and hold the button on the hand-held
transmitter.
Canada: if programming with the hand-held
transmitter was interrupted, hold down the
interior mirror button and repeatedly press
and release the hand-held transmitter but-
ton for 2 seconds.
6. The LED can illuminate in different ways:
▷ The LED illuminates green: program-
ming completed.
Release button.
▷ The LED flashes green rapidly: the
hand-held transmitter was detected but
programming is not complete.
Press and hold the button on the interior
mirror for approx. 2 seconds. Perform
this procedure three times.
If the integrated universal remote con-
trol remains nonoperational, continue
with the special features for rolling code
radio systems.
▷ LED does not illuminate green after
60 seconds: programming not com-
pleted.
Repeat steps 3 to 5.
Special feature of the rolling code
wireless system
For systems with a rolling code radio system,
the integrated universal remote control and the
system also have to be synchronized.
Refer to information on synchronization in the
operating instructions of the remote-controlled
system.
1.
Program the desired button on the interior
mirror.
2. Locate and press the synchronizing button
on the remote-controlled system such as
on the garage door.
You have approx. 30 seconds for the next
step.
Synchronizing is easier with the aid of a
second person.
3. Press and hold the programmed button on
the interior mirror for approx. 3 seconds.
If necessary, repeat this step up to three
times in order to end synchronization. Once
synchronization is complete, the program-
med function will be carried out.
Operation
After programming, the remote-controlled sys-
tem can be operated with the button on the
interior mirror.
Seite 291
Interior equipment
CONTROLS
291
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A88D30 - VI/23
OwnersManuals2.com
Press and hold the desired button of the re-
mote-controlled system within range until the
function is triggered.
The LED on the interior mirror is continuously
illuminated green during the transmission of
the radio signal.
Deleting a button assignment
The button assignment cannot be deleted indi-
vidually.
Press and hold the two outer buttons on
the interior mirror simultaneously for approxi-
mately 10 seconds until the LED flashes green
rapidly.
All stored button assignments will be deleted.
Sun visor
Glare shield
Fold the sun visor down or up.
Glare shield from the side
Folding the sun visor out
1.
Fold the sun visor down.
2. Detach it from the holder and swing it to-
ward the side window.
3. Shift it back to the desired position.
Folding the sun visor in
Proceed in the reverse order to close the sun
visor.
Vanity mirror
A vanity mirror is located in the sun visor be-
hind a cover.
Sockets
Principle
The socket can be used for electronic devi-
ces when the standby or drive-ready state is
switched on.
General information
The total load of all sockets must not exceed
140 watts at 12 volts.
Do not damage the socket by using unsuitable
connectors.
Safety information
Warning
Devices and cables in the unfolding area of
the airbags such as portable navigation devi-
ces can hinder the unfolding of the airbag or
be thrown around in the car's interior while
unfolding. There is a risk of injury and risk of
damage to property. Make sure that devices
and cables are not in the airbag's area of
unfolding.
Warning
Battery chargers that charge the vehicle bat-
tery via sockets or cigarette lighters in the ve-
hicle may overload or damage the 12 V elec-
trical system. There is a risk of injury or risk
of damage to property. Only connect battery
chargers for the vehicle battery to the jump-
start terminals in the engine compartment.
Seite 292
CONTROLS
Interior equipment
292
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A88D30 - VI/23
OwnersManuals2.com
Warning
If metal objects fall into the socket, they can
cause a short circuit. There is a risk of injury
or risk of damage to property. Insert the ciga-
rette lighter or socket cover again after using
the socket.
Front center armrest
The center armrest contains a socket.
USB port
General information
Follow the information regarding the connec-
tion of mobile devices to the USB port in the
section on USB connections.
Additional information:
USB connection, see Owner's Manual for Nav-
igation, Entertainment, Communication;
In the front center armrest
Two USB ports are located in the center arm-
rest.
Properties:
▷ USB port Type C.
▷ For charging mobile devices and for data
transfer.
▷ Charge current: max. 3 A.
In the rear center armrest
Two USB ports are located in the center arm-
rest.
Properties:
▷
USB port Type C.
▷ For charging mobile devices.
▷ Charging current: max. 3 A / 45 W.
Seite 293
Interior equipment
CONTROLS
293
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A88D30 - VI/23
OwnersManuals2.com
BMW Travel & Comfort
System
General information
USB ports and mounts for attaching special
accessories, e.g., universal holders for tablets
or clothes hangers, are located on the back-
rests of the front seats.
Properties of the USB ports:
▷ USB port Type C.
▷ For charging mobile devices.
▷ Charge current: maximum 3 A / 45 W per
seat.
For more information, contact an authorized
service center or another qualified service cen-
ter or repair shop.
Overview
The mounts and USB ports are located behind
the marked covers.
Installing optional accessories
1. Slide the cover all the way up.
2. Mount the optional accessories, refer to As-
sembly Instructions.
Wireless charging tray
Principle
The wireless charging tray allows wireless
charging of mobile phones and other mobile
devices certified according to the Qi standard.
General information
Quick charging functions are supported de-
pending on the mobile device.
The integrated fan cools the device to be
charged.
When inserting the device to be charged, make
sure that there are no objects between the de-
vice to be charged and the wireless charging
tray.
The charging process is displayed as fol-
lows:
▷
Tray in center console: charging indicator
on control display.
The charge indicator is shown alternately in
the status field with additional status infor-
mation.
▷ Tray in rear center armrest: charging dis-
play on BMW Touch Command.
Seite 294
CONTROLS
Interior equipment
294
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A88D30 - VI/23
OwnersManuals2.com
Safety information
Warning
When charging a Qi-compatible device in the
wireless charging tray, any metal objects on
the tray together with the device can become
very hot. If storage media or electronic cards,
e.g., chip cards, cards with magnetic strips,
or cards that transmit signals, are placed on
the tray together with the device, they may
not function correctly. There is a risk of injury
and risk of damage to property. When charg-
ing mobile devices, make sure there are no
objects on the tray together with the device.
Warning
When charging mobile devices in the wireless
charging tray, an electromagnetic field is cre-
ated. This may cause damage to pacemak-
ers, implanted defibrillators, and similar devi-
ces. There is a risk of injury or danger to life.
When loading mobile devices with your upper
body area, maintain a distance of at least
2 inches/5 cm to the wireless charging tray.
Overview
Tray across in the center console:
1
Storage area
2 Fan
Storage tray in the rear center armrest:
1
Storage area
2 Fan
Functional requirements
▷ The device to be charged must be certified
according to the Qi standard.
▷ Standby state is switched on.
▷ Charging function is turned on.
▷ The mobile phone cannot exceed a max-
imum size of approx. 6.69 x 3.34 x
0.7 in/170 x 85 x 18 mm.
▷ Protective sleeves and covers must be suit-
able for wireless charging.
▷ Storage tray in the rear center armrest:
The rubber mat is located in the storage
compartment.
▷ The mobile phone to be charged is located
in the center of the tray. The mobile phone
display is pointing upwards.
▷ The tray in the rear center armrest: the cen-
ter armrest remains folded down.
Turning the charging function on/off
Control display
The charging function for the front and rear
trays can be switched on and off on the control
display.
1.
Apps menu
2. "Vehicle"
3. "System settings"
Seite 295
Interior equipment
CONTROLS
295
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A88D30 - VI/23
OwnersManuals2.com
4. "Wireless charging tray"
5. "Wireless charging"
BMW Touch Command
The charging function for the rear tray can
be switched on and off via BMW Touch Com-
mand.
1. "Telephone" or "Wireless char."
2. If necessary, "Wireless charging"
3. "Activate charging"
Inserting the mobile phone
Tray in the center console
Place the mobile phone centered in the tray
with the display facing up.
Tray in the rear center armrest
1.
Fold down the center armrest.
2. Place the mobile phone centered in the tray
with the display facing up.
Forgotten warning
General information
A warning can be given if when leaving the ve-
hicle, a Qi-certified mobile phone was forgot-
ten in the wireless charging tray in the center
console.
The forgotten warning is displayed in the in-
strument cluster.
Enable/Disable Forgotten Warning
1.
Apps menu
2. "Vehicle"
3. "System settings"
4. "Wireless charging tray"
5. "Mobile phone reminder"
System limits
The charge current may be reduced or charg-
ing may be temporarily interrupted in the wire-
less charging tray in the following situations:
▷ Due to excessive temperatures on the sur-
face of the tray and mobile phone.
▷ If there are objects between the mobile
phone and the wireless charging tray.
▷ If storage media or electronic cards,
e.g., chip cards, cards with magnetic
stripes, or cards for signal transmission,
are located between the mobile phone and
wireless charging tray.
▷ Due to protective sleeves and covers that
exceed a thickness of 0.07 in/2 mm
▷ Due to protective sleeves and covers made
of unsuitable material, e.g., with magnetic
parts.
▷ Due to add-on parts for mobile phone, e.g.,
holders.
▷ By settings on the mobile phone, for in-
stance for charging. Follow the relevant in-
structions on the control display and in the
instructions for the mobile phone, if applica-
ble.
Interior camera
Principle
The interior camera can be used to record the
vehicle interior.
General information
The interior camera can provide the following
functions:
▷
Interior camera.
You can record, save and display media.
▷ Remote Inside View.
The vehicle interior can be recorded with
the My BMW App.
▷ Anti-theft recorder.
Seite 296
CONTROLS
Interior equipment
296
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A88D30 - VI/23
OwnersManuals2.com
If the alarm system is triggered, the vehi-
cle interior is automatically recorded. The
recording can be shown using the My BMW
App.
Data protection
General information
The permissibility of recording and using re-
cordings is contingent upon the statutory regu-
lations of the country in which the system is to
be used. The user is responsible for the use
of the system and compliance with respective
applicable regulations.
The manufacturer of the vehicle recommends
confirming there are no statutory or regulatory
constraints on use of the system in your state
or country prior to the initial use. In addition,
the laws with respect to use of the system
should be verified in regular intervals, espe-
cially when borders are frequently crossed.
Other users and occupants of the vehicle must
be informed about the system. In addition, in-
formation about the system is required when
handing off the vehicle.
Data transfer and data storage
The data transfer and data storage of the me-
dia recordings depends on the recording func-
tion.
Interior camera:
▷
Data transfer to a mobile device, connec-
tion to the vehicle via WLAN.
▷ Data is stored in the vehicle and assigned
to the BMW ID or a driver profile.
Remote Inside View:
▷
Data transfer with My BMW App to a
mobile device, connection with Connected-
Drive account.
▷ Data is stored in the My BMW App and
after data has been sent on the mobile de-
vice.
Anti-theft recorder:
▷
Data transfer with My BMW App to a
mobile device, connection with Connected-
Drive account.
▷ Data is stored in the vehicle and after the
data transfer in the mobile device.
More information on the scope and content of
data processing is available on the Internet in
the ConnectedDrive privacy notices/service de-
scriptions.
Functional requirements
Interior camera:
▷ Privacy Policy accepted.
Data protection, refer to page 68.
▷ The camera is activated.
To transfer recordings to mobile devices:
▷ Data transfer is activated.
▷ Mobile device is connected to the vehicle
via WLAN.
Remote Inside View/Anti-theft recorder:
▷ Privacy Policy accepted.
▷ The My BMW App is installed on the mobile
device.
▷ My BMW App is linked with the Connected-
Drive account.
▷ Vehicle is parked and locked.
▷ Anti-theft recorder: equipped with alarm
system.
Ensure that the faces of occupants are visible
and are not partially or completely covered, for
instance by face masks.
Seite 297
Interior equipment
CONTROLS
297
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A88D30 - VI/23
OwnersManuals2.com
Overview
The interior camera is located on the head-
liner.
Additional information:
Around the headliner, refer to page 33.
Activating/deactivating interior
camera
Prior to the first use of the interior camera,
the recording function and, if necessary, data
transfer must be activated. To do this, confirm
the query on the control display.
Follow applicable legal regulations.
The recording function or data transfer can be
deactivated or activated.
1.
Apps menu
2. "All apps"
3. "Interior camera"
4. "Settings"
5. Select the desired setting.
Interior camera
Recording mode
Recording
mode
Function
"Single
photo"
Shortly after triggering, a
photo will be taken.
"Smile" When the system detects a
smile, a picture will be taken.
Recording
mode
Function
"Self-timer
(3 sec.)"
After the timer has expired, a
photo will be taken.
"Burst
mode"
Shortly after triggering, a ser-
ies of pictures will be taken.
Take picture
1. Apps menu
2. "All apps"
3. "Interior camera"
4. "Photo"
5. Select desired recording mode.
6. Triggering a photo.
Depending on the selected recording mode,
the photo is taken shortly after triggering,
when a smile is recognized, or if the timer has
elapsed.
For burst shots, the series of pictures will be
displayed as a preview.
Recording video
1.
"MENU"
2. "All apps"
3. "Interior camera"
4. "Video"
5. Start video recording.
You can only record video for a certain time.
Displaying and managing
recordings
Saved recordings can be displayed, transferred
and deleted in the vehicle.
In some national-market versions, the record-
ings are only shown on the control display
for up to approx. 2 mph/3 km/h for your own
safety.
1.
Apps menu
2. "All apps"
Seite 298
CONTROLS
Interior equipment
298
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A88D30 - VI/23
OwnersManuals2.com
3. "Interior camera"
4. "Gallery"
5. Select the desired recording.
6. Select the desired setting.
Scan the QR code shown in the display to
transfer recordings to a mobile device. The re-
cording is transferred when the pop-up on the
mobile device is opened. The mobile device
must be connected to the vehicle via WLAN.
Settings
1. Apps menu
2. "All apps"
3. "Interior camera"
4. "Settings"
5. Select the desired setting.
An individual gesture can be assigned for re-
cordings with the interior camera.
Remote Inside View
Recordings from the vehicle interior can be dis-
played on a mobile device with the My BMW
App to check the vehicle interior, e.g., for for-
gotten objects.
The function is not suitable for monitoring peo-
ple or animals left behind.
Anti-theft recorder
If the alarm system is triggered, the vehicle in-
terior is automatically recorded. The My BMW
App notifies you when recording. The record-
ing can be shown on a mobile device.
Up to three media recordings can be stored
in the vehicle and synchronized with the My
BMW App. The media recording stored in the
vehicle will be deleted when the vehicle is reset
to factory settings.
Occupying the seats
The interior camera is also used for the detec-
tion of occupied seats.
When all doors are closed, the interior camera
switches on automatically on a regular basis.
The system analyzes the vehicle interior to de-
tect occupied seats. No media recordings are
made in the process. Two infrared light sour-
ces next to the camera lens illuminate while
the interior camera is active. Depending on the
lighting conditions, the infrared light sources
may be visible.
Seite 299
Interior equipment
CONTROLS
299
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A88D30 - VI/23
OwnersManuals2.com
Storage compartments
Vehicle features and options
This chapter describes model-specific equip-
ment, systems, and functions that are currently
available, or may become available in the fu-
ture, even if they are not present in the vehicle.
Additional information:
Vehicle equipment, refer to page 8.
Safety information
Warning
Devices connected to the vehicle via a cable
such as mobile phones or loose objects can
be thrown through the vehicle interior while
driving such as in the event of an accident,
braking or evasive maneuver. There is a risk
of injury and risk of damage to property. Se-
cure loose objects or devices that are con-
nected to the vehicle via a cable.
Warning
Open flaps of the storage compartments,
e.g., glove compartment or center armrest,
protrude into the interior when folded open
and may be in the way of an airbag that
deploys. In addition, objects in the open stor-
age compartment can be thrown into the ve-
hicle interior during the trip, for instance, in
the event of an accident or when braking or
making an evasive maneuver. There is a risk
of injury. Always close storage compartments
immediately after use.
Warning
Anti-slip pads such as anti-slip mats can
damage the dashboard. Attached objects
could come loose. There is a risk of injury
or risk of damage to property. Do not use
anti-slip pads.
Glove compartment
Opening the glove compartment
Press the button.
The glove compartment opens auto-
matically.
Locking the glove compartment
Use the valet parking mode to lock the glove
compartment.
Additional information:
Valet parking mode, refer to page 95.
Malfunction
The glove compartment is unlocked electri-
cally. The glove compartment can be unlocked
manually in the event of a malfunction or dur-
ing a BMW Remote Software Upgrade, for
Seite 300
CONTROLS
Storage compartments
300
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A88D30 - VI/23
OwnersManuals2.com
instance to obtain an item that is urgently
needed.
1. Open the front passenger door.
2. Remove the instrument panel side cover
using a suitable blunt object.
3. Press the sound insulation downward or re-
move it.
4. Using a suitable object such as a screw-
driver, press the locking bolt inward.
5. Pull the object out of the opening again.
The glove compartment opens.
After manually unlocking the glove compart-
ment, have the locking system checked by an
authorized service center or another qualified
service center or repair shop.
Storage compartments in
the doors
General information
There are storage compartments in the doors.
Safety information
Warning
Breakable objects such as glass bottles or
glasses can break in the event of an acci-
dent, braking or an evasive maneuver. Bro-
ken glass can be scattered in the car's inte-
rior. There is a risk of injury or risk of damage
to property. Do not use any breakable objects
while driving. Only stow breakable objects in
closed storage compartments.
Front center armrest
General information
A storage compartment is located in the center
armrest between the seats.
Opening the center armrest
Press the button.
Closing the center armrest
Press both lids down until they engage.
Rear center armrest
General information
A storage compartment is located in the center
armrest between the seats.
Seite 301
Storage compartments
CONTROLS
301
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A88D30 - VI/23
OwnersManuals2.com
Folding down the center armrest
Fold the center armrest forward on the handle.
Opening the center armrest
Press the button, arrow 1, and fold the lid up,
arrow 2.
Closing the center armrest
Press the lid down until it engages.
Front cup holder
Safety information
Warning
Unsuitable containers in the cup holders may
damage the cup holders or be thrown about
the car’s interior in the event of an accident,
an evasive maneuver, or forceful braking.
Spilled liquids can distract from the surround-
ing traffic conditions, lead to an accident and
damage vehicle components. Hot drinks can
damage the cup holder or lead to scalding.
There is a risk of injury or risk of damage
to property. Do not force objects into the
cup holder. Use lightweight, shatterproof, and
sealable containers. Clean up spilled liquids
immediately. Do not transport hot beverages.
Opening the cup holder
Pull the cover backward until it engages.
Closing the cup holder
Tap the cover on the handle. The cover closes
automatically.
Rear cup holder
Safety information
Warning
Unsuitable containers in the cup holders may
damage the cup holders or be thrown about
the car’s interior in the event of an accident,
an evasive maneuver, or forceful braking.
Spilled liquids can distract from the surround-
ing traffic conditions, lead to an accident and
damage vehicle components. Hot drinks can
damage the cup holder or lead to scalding.
There is a risk of injury or risk of damage
to property. Do not force objects into the
cup holder. Use lightweight, shatterproof, and
sealable containers. Clean up spilled liquids
immediately. Do not transport hot beverages.
Seite 302
CONTROLS
Storage compartments
302
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A88D30 - VI/23
OwnersManuals2.com
NOTICE
With an open cup holder, the center armrest
cannot be folded back up. There is a risk of
damage to property. Press back the covers
before the center armrest is folded up.
Opening the cup holder
1. Fold down the center armrest.
2. Press the button. The cup holder extends
automatically.
Closing the cup holder
Push the cup holder back until it engages.
Coat hooks
General information
The coat hooks are located in the grab handles
and on the door pillar in the rear.
Safety information
Warning
Clothing articles on the coat hooks can ob-
struct the view while driving. There is a risk of
accident. When suspending clothing articles
from the coat hooks, ensure that they will not
obstruct the driver's view.
Warning
Improper use of the coat hooks can lead to a
risk of objects flying about during braking and
evasive maneuvers. There is a risk of injury
and risk of damage to property. Only hang
lightweight objects, for instance clothing arti-
cles, from the coat hooks.
Seite 303
Storage compartments
CONTROLS
303
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A88D30 - VI/23
OwnersManuals2.com
Cargo area
Vehicle features and options
This chapter describes model-specific equip-
ment, systems, and functions that are currently
available, or may become available in the fu-
ture, even if they are not present in the vehicle.
Additional information:
Vehicle equipment, refer to page 8.
Loading
Safety information
Warning
High gross vehicle weight can overheat the
tires, damage them internally and cause
a sudden tire pressure loss. Driving char-
acteristics may be negatively impacted, re-
ducing directional stability, lengthening the
braking distances and changing the steering
response. There is a risk of accident. Pay
attention to the permitted load-carrying ca-
pacity of the tires and never exceed the per-
mitted gross vehicle weight.
Warning
Devices connected to the vehicle via a cable
such as mobile phones or loose objects can
be thrown through the vehicle interior while
driving such as in the event of an accident,
braking or evasive maneuver. There is a risk
of injury and risk of damage to property. Se-
cure loose objects or devices that are con-
nected to the vehicle via a cable.
Warning
Improperly stowed objects can slip and be
thrown into the car's interior, for instance in
the event of an accident, braking or an eva-
sive maneuver. Vehicle occupants can be hit
and injured. There is a risk of injury and risk
of damage to property. Stow and secure ob-
jects and cargo properly.
NOTICE
Fluids in the cargo area can cause damage.
There is a risk of damage to property. Make
sure that no fluids leak in the cargo area.
Steps for determining correct load
limit
1.
Locate the statement “The combined
weight of occupants and cargo should
never exceed XXX kg or XXX lbs” on the
vehicle’s placard.
2. Determine the combined weight of the
driver and passengers that will be riding in
the vehicle.
3. Subtract the combined weight of the driver
and passengers from XXX kg or XXX lbs
4. The resulting figure equals the available
amount of cargo and luggage load ca-
pacity. For example, if the “XXX” amount
equals 1,400 lbs and there will be five
150 lbs passengers in the vehicle, the
amount of available cargo and luggage
load capacity is 650 lbs (1,400 - 750 (5 x
150) = 650 lbs)
5. Determine the combined weight of luggage
and cargo being loaded on the vehicle.
That weight may not safely exceed the
Seite 304
CONTROLS
Cargo area
304
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A88D30 - VI/23
OwnersManuals2.com
available cargo and luggage load capacity
calculated in Step 4.
6. If the vehicle will be towing a trailer, load
from your trailer will be transferred to the
vehicle. Consult this manual to determine
how this reduces the available cargo and
luggage load capacity of the vehicle.
Payload
The maximum payload is the sum of the
weight of the occupants and the cargo.
The greater the weight of the occupants, the
less cargo that can be transported.
Stowing and securing cargo
▷
Cover sharp edges and corners on the
cargo.
▷ Fasten the aids for securing the load to the
lashing eyes in the cargo area.
▷ Small and light cargo: secure with tension-
ing straps or tension bands or with a lug-
gage compartment net.
▷ Larger and heavy cargo: secure with cargo
straps.
▷ Heavy cargo: stow as far forward as possi-
ble, directly behind and at the bottom of the
rear seat backrests.
▷ Very heavy cargo: stow as far forward as
possible, directly behind and at the bottom
of the rear seat backrests. When the rear
seat is not occupied, secure each of the
outer seat belts in the opposite buckle.
Lashing eyes in the cargo
area
General information
Attach auxiliary materials to secure the cargo
such as lashing straps, tensioning straps, draw
straps, or cargo nets to the lashing eyes.
Overview
The lashing eyes are located on the loading sill
and on the side walls of the trunk.
Multifunction hook
General information
A multifunction hook is located on the left and
right side in the cargo area.
Safety information
Warning
Improper use of the multifunction hooks can
lead to a risk of objects flying about, e.g., dur-
ing braking and evasive maneuvers. There
is a risk of injury and risk of damage to
property. Only hang lightweight objects from
the multifunction hooks. Only transport heavy
luggage in the cargo area if it has been ap-
propriately secured.
Seite 305
Cargo area
CONTROLS
305
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A88D30 - VI/23
OwnersManuals2.com
Storage compartment on
the left side
General information
A storage compartment is located on the left
side in the cargo area.
Opening the storage compartment
Turn the screw cap in the cover by 90°, ar-
row 1, and fold down the trim panel, arrow 2.
Through-loading system
Principle
The through-loading system allows the trans-
port of long objects such as skis.
Opening the through-loading
system
1. Fold down the center armrest.
2. Loosen the cover.
3. Pull handle, arrow 1, down and fold trim for-
ward, arrow 2.
Seite 306
CONTROLS
Cargo area
306
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A88D30 - VI/23
OwnersManuals2.com
Things to remember when driving
Vehicle features and options
This chapter describes model-specific equip-
ment, systems, and functions that are currently
available, or may become available in the fu-
ture, even if they are not present in the vehicle.
Additional information:
Vehicle equipment, refer to page 8.
Break-in procedures
General information
Moving parts need to work together smoothly.
The following instructions will help you to ach-
ieve a long vehicle life and good efficiency.
Safety information
Warning
Due to new parts and components, safety
and driver assistance systems can react with
a delay. There is a risk of accident. After in-
stalling new parts or with a new vehicle, drive
conservatively and intervene early if neces-
sary. Observe the break-in procedures of the
respective parts and components.
Engine, transmission, and axle drive
Up to 1,200 miles/2,000 km
Do not exceed the maximum engine and road
speed:
▷
With gasoline engine:4500 rpm and
100 mph/160 km/h.
Avoid full throttle or kickdown under all circum-
stances.
For 760i: The maximum engine power is re-
duced and gradually increased during the first
310 miles/500 km.
From 1,200 miles/2,000 km
The engine and vehicle speed can gradually be
increased.
Tires
Tire traction is not optimal due to manufactur-
ing circumstances when tires are brand new.
Drive conservatively for the first
200 miles/300 km.
Brake system
Brake disks and brake pads must be run in to
avoid possible brake noise. Drive cautiously for
the first approx. 300 miles/500 km.
Following part replacement
Observe the break-in procedures again if com-
ponents mentioned above are replaced.
General driving notes
Closing the trunk lid
Safety information
Warning
An open trunk lid protrudes from the vehicle
and can endanger occupants and other road
users or damage the vehicle in the event of
an accident, braking or evasive maneuvers.
In addition, exhaust gas or water may enter
the vehicle interior. There is a risk of injury or
risk of damage to property. Do not drive with
the trunk lid open.
Seite 308
DRIVING TIPS
Things to remember when driving
308
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A88D30 - VI/23
OwnersManuals2.com
Driving with the trunk lid open
If the vehicle still needs to be driven with the
trunk lid open:
▷ Close all windows.
▷ Greatly increase the blower output.
▷ Drive moderately.
▷ Fasten the trunk lid, e.g., with a tensioning
belt.
Hot exhaust system
Warning
High temperatures can occur underneath the
body, for instance caused by the exhaust
system, while driving. Contact with the ex-
haust system can cause burns. There is a risk
of injury. Do not touch the exhaust system,
including the exhaust pipe, when hot.
Warning
If combustible materials such as leaves or
grass come in contact with hot parts of the
exhaust system, these materials can ignite.
There is a risk of fire and an injury hazard.
Do not remove the heat shields installed and
never apply undercoating to them. Make sure
that no combustible materials can come in
contact with hot vehicle parts while driving, in
Neutral or during parking.
Exhaust gas particulate filter
Principle
The exhaust gas particulate filter collects soot
particles. The soot particles are burned at high
temperatures to clean the exhaust gas particu-
late filter as necessary.
General information
During several minutes of cleaning the follow-
ing may occur:
▷ Temporarily, the engine may run less
smoothly.
▷ A somewhat higher RPM is necessary to
reach usual power development.
▷ A slight smoke formation coming from the
exhaust system, even after the engine is
switched off.
▷ Noises such as those caused by the radia-
tor fan running, even several minutes after
the engine is switched off.
Overrun of the radiator fan for several minutes
is normal even after short trips.
Condensation detected in drive system
Various drive profiles ensure that the drive sys-
tem functions properly. A driving style with
consistently low loads can negatively affect
overall functionality (e.g., condensation forma-
tion in the drive system). Occasionally running
the engine longer with higher loads can coun-
teract this.
The next time you drive outside of town, pro-
ceed as follows for around 30 minutes:
For a gasoline engine:
▷
Deactivate the speed control system.
▷ Activate Sport program.
▷ If possible, drive at varying speeds.
Additional information:
Steptronic transmission, refer to page 128.
Seite 309
Things to remember when driving
DRIVING TIPS
309
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A88D30 - VI/23
OwnersManuals2.com
Attachment point for radio systems
With climate comfort windshield: the marked
area is not covered with heat-reflective coat-
ing.
The marked area can be used for the attach-
ment of radio systems, e.g.:
Climate Comfort laminated glass
The vehicle laminated glass provides complete
protection against the harmful effects of ultra-
violet radiation on the skin.
In addition, Climate Comfort laminated glass
reduces heat radiation and prevents the inte-
rior from becoming too hot.
Mobile radio in the vehicle
Warning
Vehicle electronics and mobile communica-
tion devices can influence one another. There
is radiation due to the transmission oper-
ations of mobile communication devices.
There is a risk of injury or risk of damage
to property. If possible, in the car's interior
only use mobile communication devices such
as mobile phones with a direct connection to
an external antenna or the Personal eSIM in
order to prevent mutual interference and to
deflect radiation from the vehicle interior.
Aquaplaning
On wet or slushy roads, a wedge of water can
form between the tires and road surface.
This phenomenon is referred to as aquaplan-
ing. It is characterized by a partial or complete
loss of contact between the tires and the road
surface, ultimately undermining your ability to
steer and brake the vehicle.
Driving through water
General information
When driving through water, follow the follow-
ing:
▷ Only drive through when the combustion
engine is running.
▷ Prevent the combustion engine from shut-
ting down, e.g., by deactivating Auto Start/
Stop.
▷ Drive through calm water only.
▷ Drive through water only up to a maximum
height of 9.8 inches/25 cm.
▷ Drive through water at a maximum of walk-
ing speed, up to 3 mph/5 km/h.
Safety information
NOTICE
When driving too quickly through deep water,
the water can penetrate the engine compart-
ment, the electrical system, or the transmis-
sion. There is a risk of damage to property.
When driving through water, do not exceed
the maximum indicated water level and the
maximum speed for driving through water.
Braking safely
General information
The vehicle is equipped with an Antilock Brak-
ing System as a standard feature.
Perform emergency braking when appropriate.
To achieve the best possible braking assis-
tance, do not reduce the pressure on the brake
pedal during full braking.
Seite 310
DRIVING TIPS
Things to remember when driving
310
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A88D30 - VI/23
OwnersManuals2.com
Steering is still responsive. You can still avoid
any obstacles with a minimum of steering
movement.
Sounds from the hydraulic circuits indicate that
the Antilock Braking System is regulating.
Objects in the travel path of the pedals
Warning
Objects in the driver's footwell can limit the
pedal travel or block a depressed pedal.
There is a risk of accident. Stow objects in the
vehicle such that they are secured and can-
not enter into the driver's footwell. Use floor
mats that are suitable for the vehicle and
can be safely attached to the floor. Do not
use loose floor mats and do not layer several
floor mats. Make sure that there is sufficient
clearance for the pedals. Ensure that the floor
mats are securely fastened again after they
were removed, for instance for cleaning.
Pedal feel when driving off
After turning on drive-ready state from idle
state, the pedal may feel unusual, e.g., the
pedal travel path may feel short or long. After
the brake pedal has been fully released, the
pedal will feel as usual again.
Driving in wet conditions
In case of wet roads, exposure to road salt or
in heavy rain, gently depress the brake pedal
every few kilometers.
Ensure that this action does not endanger
other road users.
The heat generated while braking dries brake
disks and brake pads and protects them
against corrosion.
In this way the brake power will be available
when you need it.
Hills
General information
Drive long or steep downhill gradients in the
gear that requires least braking effort. Other-
wise, the brake system may overheat and re-
duce braking effect.
You can increase the engine braking effect by
downshifting, going all the way to first gear, if
needed.
Safety information
Warning
Light but consistent pressure on the brake
pedal can lead to high temperatures, brake
wear and possibly even brake system failure.
There is a risk of accident. Avoid placing ex-
cessive stress on the brake system.
Warning
In Neutral or with drive-ready state switched
off, safety functions, for instance engine brak-
ing effect, braking assistance and steering
assistance, may be restricted or not availa-
ble. There is a risk of accident. Do not at-
tempt to drive in idle state or with drive-ready
state switched off.
Brake disk corrosion
Corrosion on the brake disks and contamina-
tion on the brake pads are increased by the
following circumstances:
▷
Low mileage.
▷ Extended stationary periods.
▷ Infrequent use of the brakes.
▷ Aggressive, acidic, or alkaline cleaning
agents.
Corrosion buildup on the brake disks will cause
a pulsating effect on the brakes when braking
slowly - generally this cannot be corrected.
Seite 311
Things to remember when driving
DRIVING TIPS
311
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A88D30 - VI/23
OwnersManuals2.com
Condensation water under the
parked vehicle
When using the automatic climate control, con-
densation water develops and collects under-
neath the vehicle.
Pennant bracket
Safety information
NOTICE
At high speeds, a mounted pennant can
cause damage to the vehicle, the pennant
bracket, and the pennant itself. There is a
risk of damage to property. Do not exceed
a speed of 80 mph / 130 km/h. Remove pen-
nant before trips at high speeds.
Overview
The pennant bracket is located on the side of
the vehicle.
Installation
1.
Remove the protective cap.
2. Insert pennant horizontally.
3. Turn the pennant clockwise by 90° to re-
tain the pennant.
Driving on racetracks
Warning
The vehicle is not designed for use in M Sport
or motorsport-like competition. There is a risk
of accident. Do not use the vehicle for M
Sport or motorsport-like competitions.
Higher mechanical and thermal loads during
racetrack operation lead to increased wear.
Use of the vehicle in M Sport or motor sport
type competition is an improper use of the ve-
hicle and may affect your warranty coverage.
Please consult the “New Vehicle Limited War-
ranty” Booklet for further information on war-
ranty matters.
Seite 312
DRIVING TIPS
Things to remember when driving
312
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A88D30 - VI/23
OwnersManuals2.com
Saving fuel
Vehicle features and options
This chapter describes model-specific equip-
ment, systems, and functions that are currently
available, or may become available in the fu-
ture, even if they are not present in the vehicle.
Additional information:
Vehicle equipment, refer to page 8.
Reducing fuel consumption
Principle
The vehicle contains advanced technologies
for the reduction of consumption and emission
values.
There are some actions you can take to
change your fuel consumption and environ-
mental impact:
▷ Remove unnecessary cargo from the vehi-
cle.
▷ Remove add-on parts, e.g., a rear carrier,
after use.
▷ Close the windows while driving.
▷ Check the tire pressure regularly and in-
crease it as necessary.
▷ Switch off the engine if the vehicle is to re-
main stationary for a longer period.
▷ Practice anticipatory driving and let the ve-
hicle coast more often.
▷ Deactivate functions that are not required,
e.g., rear window heating.
▷ Have the vehicle serviced regularly.
Adaptive recuperation
Principle
The adaptive recuperation supports an antici-
patory and comfort-oriented driving style.
Various sensors analyze the current driving sit-
uation, e.g., the distance to the vehicle in front.
General information
Adaptive recuperation is available depending
on the equipment and national-market version.
The system decides based on the situation if
energy is recovered through recuperation or if
the vehicle is to coast.
In vehicles with mild hybrid technology, the
power of recuperation is adaptive, which
causes the vehicle to decelerate to varying de-
grees when coasting.
Activating/deactivating adaptive
recuperation
Adaptive recuperation is deactivated by acti-
vating SPORT driving mode.
Adaptive recuperation is activated when
changing to another driving mode.
Display
Display in the instrument cluster
Adaptive recuperation can be displayed on the
instrument cluster.
Additional information:
Power gauge, refer to page 153.
Display on the control display
The adaptive recuperation can be displayed on
the control display.
Additional information:
Seite 313
Saving fuel
DRIVING TIPS
313
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A88D30 - VI/23
OwnersManuals2.com
Current driving condition, refer to page 160.
Coasting
Principle
The drive system allows the vehicle to roll
freely with minimal deceleration in selector
lever position D. This driving condition is refer-
red to as coasting. This reduces fuel consump-
tion.
Vehicles with mild hybrid technology do not
consume fuel when coasting.
General information
An anticipatory driving style helps the driver
to use the function often and supports the effi-
cient effect of coasting.
Coasting is automatically adapted to the re-
spective driving situation.
The coasting mode is displayed in the Live Ve-
hicle menu as efficient coasting.
Additional information:
Current driving condition, refer to page 160.
Exemplary driving situations
If a route can be traveled without an antici-
pated need for braking, it is advantageous to
roll.
The following exemplary driving situations may
be suitable:
▷
Rolling on a straight downhill route without
obstacles.
▷ Coasting on a distance without obstacles.
Avoid late or strong braking.
Functional requirements
▷
Selector lever position D is engaged.
▷ Brake is not depressed.
▷ Accelerator pedal is not operated.
▷ Engine and transmission are at operating
temperature.
The function is available in the speed
range from approx. 16 mph/25 km/h to
100 mph/160 km/h.
Operation via shift paddles
Principle
Depending on the vehicle's equipment, the
Coasting mode can be influenced with the shift
paddles.
Activating/deactivating coasting via
shift paddles
Long press the right shift paddle to activate.
To deactivate, actuate the left shift paddle.
System limits
▷ While Active Cruise Control is active.
▷ With defective, dirty or covered sensors.
▷ Driving in the dynamic limit range and on
steep uphill or downhill grades.
▷ Battery charge status temporarily too low
or vehicle electrical system drawing exces-
sive current.
Efficient mode
Principle
Efficient mode helps promote an efficient driv-
ing style.
When certain prerequisites are met the engine
is automatically decoupled from the transmis-
sion in the D selector lever position. The ve-
hicle continues traveling in Neutral to reduce
consumption. The D selector lever position re-
mains engaged.
Seite 314
DRIVING TIPS
Saving fuel
314
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A88D30 - VI/23
OwnersManuals2.com
In addition, the efficiency trainer displays situa-
tion dependent notes to assist with an efficient
driving style.
The achieved extended range is displayed in
the instrument cluster as bonus range.
Overview
Button in the vehicle
My Modes
Configuring Efficient mode
1.
Press the button.
2. "EFFICIENT"
3. "Settings"
4. Select the desired setting.
Resetting the settings
1.
Press the button.
2. "EFFICIENT"
3. "Settings"
4. "Reset settings"
Efficiency trainer
Principle
The system provides assistance for an antici-
patory and comfort-oriented driving style. For
this purpose, map information and sensor data
is used to analyze the current driving situation
such as upcoming speed limits and vehicles
driving ahead. Based on this information, the
driver receives notices for an efficient driving
style early on. The efficiency of the driving style
is evaluated in the control display and shown
in three categories.
General information
The system has different displays to support
the driver with an efficient driving style.
Functional requirements
▷ Selector lever position D is engaged.
▷ Efficient mode is activated.
Display
Power gauge
When the Efficient mode is activated, the dis-
play changes to a special configuration.
Depending on the equipment, some system
information can also be displayed in the Head-
up display.
The efficient range of the power gauge is col-
ored blue. Additionally, the bonus range will be
displayed.
Seite 315
Saving fuel
DRIVING TIPS
315
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A88D30 - VI/23
OwnersManuals2.com
The efficient range is adjusted depending on
the driving situation.
If the power gauge moves within the blue
range, the current driving style is efficient. The
display will change to gray if the driving style is
inefficient.
Bonus range
A modified driving style helps
you extend your driving range.
The range extension is dis-
played as the bonus range in
the instrument cluster.
If the bonus range is shown in gray or is hid-
den, the current driving style is inefficient.
The display turns blue as soon as all condi-
tions for efficient driving are met.
The intervals for resetting the bonus range de-
pend on the settings of the trip data.
Display in case of inefficient driving
style
When driving above the efficient range,
an arrow will be displayed.
For instance, this is displayed for the
following situations:
▷
Excessive acceleration.
▷ Excessive speed.
In addition, a notice to coast in advance is dis-
played.
System limits
For example, the function is not available in
the following situations:
▷
While Active Cruise Control is active.
▷ With trailer towing.
Efficiency evaluation
General information
The efficiency of the driving style, e.g., acceler-
ation, is evaluated on the control display and
shown in three categories. The current trip is
analyzed.
Functional requirement
This function is available in Efficient mode.
Calling up the efficiency evaluation
1.
Apps menu
2. "Vehicle"
3. "Live Vehicle"
Additional information:
Live Vehicle, refer to page 142
Display on the control display
The display of the efficiency analysis shows
the efficiency of the driving style.
The more efficient the driving style, the larger
the area that is displayed in color and the
faster the bonus range increases.
In contrast, a reduced area will be displayed
with an inefficient driving style.
Seite 316
DRIVING TIPS
Saving fuel
316
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A88D30 - VI/23
OwnersManuals2.com
Refueling
Vehicle features and options
This chapter describes model-specific equip-
ment, systems, and functions that are currently
available, or may become available in the fu-
ture, even if they are not present in the vehicle.
Additional information:
Vehicle equipment, refer to page 8.
Follow the following when
refueling
General information
Follow the fuel recommendation prior to refuel-
ing.
When refueling, hook the filler nozzle com-
pletely into the filler pipe. Lifting up the filler
nozzle while refueling causes:
▷ Premature switching off.
▷ Reduced return of the fuel vapors.
The fuel tank is full when the filler nozzle clicks
off the first time.
Make sure that the fuel cap is closed properly
after refueling, otherwise the emissions warn-
ing light may illuminate.
Follow safety regulations posted at the filling
station.
Additional information:
Fuel quality, refer to page 351.
Safety information
NOTICE
With a range below 30 miles/50 km, the
engine may no longer have sufficient fuel.
Engine functions are not ensured anymore.
There is a risk of damage to property. Refuel
promptly.
NOTICE
Fuels are toxic and aggressive. Overfilling of
the fuel tank can damage the fuel system.
Painted surfaces may be damaged by con-
tact with fuel. Escaping fuel can harm the
environment. There is a risk of damage to
property. Avoid overfilling.
Fuel cap
General information
If the fuel filler cap is not fitted correctly, the
emissions indicator light illuminates on the in-
strument cluster.
Additional information:
Indicator/warning lights, refer to page 145.
Safety information
Warning
The retaining strap of the fuel cap can be
jammed and crushed while closing. The cap
cannot be correctly closed. Fuel or fuel va-
pors can escape. There is a risk of injury or
risk of damage to property. Pay attention that
Seite 318
MOBILITY
Refueling
318
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A88D30 - VI/23
OwnersManuals2.com
the retaining strap is not jammed or crushed
when closing the cap.
Opening
1. To open the fuel filler flap, press on the rear
edge, arrow. The fuel filler flap opens.
2. Turn the fuel cap counterclockwise.
3. Place the fuel cap in the bracket attached to
the fuel filler flap.
Closing
1.
Fit the fuel cap and turn it clockwise until
you clearly hear a click.
2. Press on the fuel filler flap until it engages.
Emergency unlocking
It may be necessary in certain situations to un-
lock the fuel filler flap manually, for instance
with an electrical malfunction.
Have the fuel filler flap unlocked by an author-
ized service center or another qualified service
center or repair shop.
Seite 319
Refueling
MOBILITY
319
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A88D30 - VI/23
OwnersManuals2.com
Wheels and tires
Vehicle features and options
This chapter describes model-specific equip-
ment, systems, and functions that are currently
available, or may become available in the fu-
ture, even if they are not present in the vehicle.
Additional information:
Vehicle equipment, refer to page 8.
Tire pressure
General information
The tire condition and tire pressure influence
the following:
▷ The service life of the tires.
▷ Driving safety.
▷ Driving comfort.
▷ Fuel consumption.
Safety information
Warning
A tire with too little or no tire inflation pres-
sure may heat up significantly and sustain
damage. This will have a negative impact
on aspects of handling such as steering and
braking response. There is a risk of accident.
Regularly check the tire inflation pressure,
and correct it as needed, for instance twice
a month and before a long trip.
Tire pressure specifications
In the tire pressure table
The tire pressure table contains all tire infla-
tion pressure specifications for given tire sizes
at ambient temperature. The tire inflation pres-
sure specifications apply to the tire sizes ap-
proved by the vehicle manufacturer for the cor-
responding vehicle types.
To identify the correct tire inflation pressure,
please note the following:
▷ Tire sizes of the vehicle.
▷ Maximum speed for driving.
On the control display
The current tire inflation pressure values and
the intended tire inflation pressure values for
the mounted tires can be displayed on the con-
trol display.
To ensure that they are displayed correctly, the
tire sizes must be stored in the system and
must have been set for the mounted tires.
The current tire inflation pressure value is lo-
cated on each tire.
The reference tire inflation pressure value is
located in the lower area of the control display.
Checking the tire pressure
General information
The tires heat up while driving. The tire pres-
sure increases with the tire temperature.
Tires have a natural, consistent tire pressure
loss.
The displays of inflation devices may under-
read by up to 0.1 bar/2 psi.
Checking via tire inflation pressure
specifications in tire pressure table
1.
Determine the intended tire inflation pres-
sure levels for the mounted tires.
2. Check the tire inflation pressure in all four
tires, using a pressure gage, for example.
Seite 320
MOBILITY
Wheels and tires
320
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A88D30 - VI/23
OwnersManuals2.com
3. Correct the tire inflation pressure if the ac-
tual tire inflation pressure deviates from the
intended tire inflation pressure.
4. Make sure that all valve caps are screwed
onto the tire valves.
The tire inflation pressure specifications in the
tire inflation pressure table only relate to cold
tires or tires at the same temperature as the
ambient temperature.
Only check the tire inflation pressure levels
when the tires are cold, i.e.:
▷ A distance traveled of max. 1.25 miles/2 km
has not been exceeded.
▷ If the vehicle has not moved again for at
least two hours after a trip.
If equipped with an emergency wheel: check
the tire pressure of the emergency wheel in the
cargo area regularly and correct if necessary.
Checking using the tire inflation
pressure specifications on the control
display
1.
Apps menu
2. "Vehicle"
3. "Vehicle status"
4. "Tire Pressure Monitor"
5. Check whether the current tire inflation
pressure levels deviate from the intended
tire pressure value.
6. Correct the tire inflation pressure if the ac-
tual tire inflation pressure deviates from the
intended tire inflation pressure.
The display of current tire pressure on the con-
trol display may be restricted when the vehicle
is stationary. After a short drive, the tire pres-
sure is updated.
After correcting the tire pressure
If equipped with a Tire Pressure Monitor, the
corrected tire pressures are applied automati-
cally. Make sure that the tire settings are cor-
rect. With tires that cannot be found in the tire
pressure values on the control display, reset
the Tire Pressure Monitor (TPM).
If equipped with a flat tire monitor, reinitialize
the flat tire monitor.
Tire inflation pressures up to
100 mph/160 km/h
For speeds of up to 100 mph/160 km/h and for
optimum driving comfort, follow the tire infla-
tion pressure specifications in the tire pressure
table and adjust as necessary.
The tire inflation pressure specifications can
also be found on the tire pressure label on the
driver's door pillar.
Do not exceed a speed of 100 mph/160 km/h.
Seite 321
Wheels and tires
MOBILITY
321
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A88D30 - VI/23
OwnersManuals2.com
Tire pressure values up to
100 mph/160 km/h
740i, 740i xDrive
Tire size Pressure specifications
in bar/PSI
Specifications in
bar/PSI with cold
tires
245/50 R 19 105
H XL A/S
245/50 R 19 105
H XL M+S
245/50 R 19 105
W XL
2.4 / 35 2.4 / 35
Front: 255/45 R
20 105 H XL A/S
2.2 / 32 -
Rear: 285/40 R
20 108 H XL A/S
- 2.2 / 32
Front: 255/45 R
20 105 Y XL
2.2 / 32 -
Rear: 285/40 R
20 108 Y XL
- 2.2 / 32
Front: 255/40 R
21 102 Y XL
2.4 / 35 -
Rear: 285/35 R
21 105 Y XL
- 2.4 / 35
Front: HL 255/35
R 22 102 Y XL
2.5 / 36 -
Rear: HL 285/30
R 22 104 Y XL
- 2.6 / 38
Front: 255/45 R
20 105 V XL
M+S
2.2 / 32 -
Tire size Pressure specifications
in bar/PSI
Rear: 285/40 R
20 108 V XL
M+S
- 2.2 / 32
Front: 255/40 R
21 102 H XL M+S
2.4 / 35 -
Rear: 285/35 R
21 105 H XL M+S
- 2.4 / 35
Emergency
wheel:
T 155/80 R 19
114 M
Speed up to a max. of
50 mph / 80 km/h
4.2 / 60
760i xDrive
Tire size Pressure specifications
in bar/PSI
Specifications in
bar/PSI with cold
tires
245/50 R 19 105
H XL M+S
245/50 R 19 105
W XL
2.4 / 35 2.5 / 36
Front: 255/45 R
20 105 H XL A/S
2.3 / 33 -
Rear: 285/40 R
20 108 H XL A/S
- 2.3 / 33
Front: 255/45 R
20 105 Y XL
2.3 / 33 -
Rear: 285/40 R
20 108 Y XL
- 2.3 / 33
Front: 255/40 R
21 102 Y XL
2.5 / 36 -
Rear: 285/35 R
21 105 Y XL
- 2.5 / 36
Seite 322
MOBILITY
Wheels and tires
322
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A88D30 - VI/23
OwnersManuals2.com
Tire size Pressure specifications
in bar/PSI
Front: HL
255/35 R 22 102
Y XL
2.6 / 38 -
Rear: HL 285/30
R 22 104 Y XL
- 2.7 / 39
Front: 255/45 R
20 105 V XL
M+S
2.3 / 33 -
Rear: 285/40 R
20 108 V XL
M+S
- 2.3 / 33
Front: 255/40 R
21 102 H XL M+S
2.5 / 36 -
Rear: 285/35 R
21 105 H XL M+S
- 2.5 / 36
Emergency
wheel:
T 155/80 R 19
114 M
Speed up to a max. of
50 mph / 80 km/h
4.2 / 60
Tire inflation pressures at maximum
speeds above 100 mph/160 km/h
Warning
In order to drive at maximum speeds in ex-
cess of 100 mph/160 km/h, please observe
and, if necessary, adjust tire pressures for
speeds exceeding 100 mph/160 km/h from
the relevant table on the following pages.
Otherwise, tire damage and accidents could
occur.
For speeds over 100 mph/160 km/h and for
optimum driving comfort, note the pressure
values in the tire inflation pressure table and
adjust as necessary.
Tire pressure values over
100 mph/160 km/h
740i, 740i xDrive
Tire size Pressure specifications
in bar/PSI
Specifications in
bar/PSI with cold
tires
245/50 R 19 105
H XL A/S
245/50 R 19 105
H XL M+S
2.4 / 35 2.7 / 39
245/50 R 19 105
W XL
2.6 / 38 3.1 / 45
Front: 255/45 R
20 105 H XL A/S
2.4 / 35 -
Rear: 285/40 R
20 108 H XL A/S
- 2.5 / 36
Front: 255/45 R
20 105 Y XL
2.4 / 35 -
Rear: 285/40 R
20 108 Y XL
- 2.5 / 36
Front: 255/40 R
21 102 Y XL
2.7 / 39 -
Rear: 285/35 R
21 105 Y XL
- 2.8 / 41
Front: HL
255/35 R 22 102
Y XL
2.8 / 41 -
Rear: HL 285/30
R 22 104 Y XL
- 2.9 / 42
Front: 255/45 R
20 105 V XL
M+S
2.7 / 39 -
Seite 323
Wheels and tires
MOBILITY
323
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A88D30 - VI/23
OwnersManuals2.com
Tire size Pressure specifications
in bar/PSI
Rear: 285/40 R
20 108 V XL
M+S
- 2.8 / 41
Front: 255/40 R
21 102 H XL M+S
2.7 / 39 -
Rear: 285/35 R
21 105 H XL M+S
- 2.8 / 41
Emergency
wheel:
T 155/80 R 19
114 M
Speed up to a max. of
50 mph / 80 km/h
4.2 / 60
760i xDrive
Tire size Pressure specifications
in bar/PSI
Specifications in
bar/PSI with
cold tires
245/50 R 19 105
H XL M+S
2.6 / 38 2.8 / 41
245/50 R 19 105
W XL
2.9 / 42 3.2 / 46
Front: 255/45 R
20 105 H XL A/S
2.6 / 38 -
Rear: 285/40 R
20 108 H XL A/S
- 2.6 / 38
Front: 255/45 R
20 105 Y XL
2.6 / 38 -
Rear: 285/40 R
20 108 Y XL
- 2.6 / 38
Front: 255/40 R
21 102 Y XL
2.9 / 42 -
Rear: 285/35 R
21 105 Y XL
- 2.9 / 42
Tire size Pressure specifications
in bar/PSI
Front: HL
255/35 R 22 102
Y XL
2.9 / 42 -
Rear: HL
285/30 R 22 104
Y XL
- 3.0 / 44
Front: 255/45 R
20 105 V XL
M+S
2.9 / 42 -
Rear: 285/40 R
20 108 V XL
M+S
- 2.9 / 42
Front: 255/40 R
21 102 H XL
M+S
2.9 / 42 -
Rear: 285/35 R
21 105 H XL
M+S
- 2.9 / 42
Emergency
wheel:
T 155/80 R 19
114 M
Speed up to a max. of
50 mph / 80 km/h
4.2 / 60
Tire marking
Tire size
245/45 R 18 96 Y
245: nominal width in mm
45: cross-sectional relationship in %
R: radial tire code
18: rim diameter in inches
96: load bearing capacity
Y: speed code letter
ZR tires: reinforced radial tire for speeds ex-
ceeding 150 mph/240 km/h
Seite 324
MOBILITY
Wheels and tires
324
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A88D30 - VI/23
OwnersManuals2.com
Maximum tire load
Maximum tire load is the maximum permissi-
ble weight for which the tire is approved.
Locate the maximum tire load on the tire
sidewall and the Gross Axle Weight Rating –
GAWR – on the certification label on the driver
door B-pillar. Divide the tire load by 1.1. It must
be greater than one-half of the vehicle’s Gross
Axle Weight Rating – GAWR. Note, front vs.
rear GAWR and tire loads, respectively.
Speed letter
Designation Maximum speed
Q up to 100 mph/160 km/h
R up to 106 mph/170 km/h
S up to 112 mph/180 km/h
T up to 118 mph/190 km/h
H up to 131 mph/210 km/h
V up to 150 mph/240 km/h
W up to 167 mph/270 km/h
Y up to 186 mph/300 km/h
(Y) above 186 mph/300 km/h
Tire Identification Number
DOT Code: DOT xxxx xxx 1923
xxxx: manufacturer code for the tire brand
xxx: tire size and tire design
1923: tire age
Tires with DOT codes meet the guidelines of
the U.S. Department of Transportation.
Tire age
Recommendation
Regardless of the tire tread depth, replace tires
at least every 6 years.
Production date
You can find the tire production date on the tire
sidewall.
Designation Production date
DOT … 1923 19th week of 2023
Uniform Tire Quality Grading
Quality grades can be found where applicable
on the tire sidewall between tread shoulder
and maximum section width.
E.g.: Treadwear 200; Traction AA; Tempera-
ture A
DOT Quality Grades
Treadwear
Traction AA A B C
Temperature A B C
All passenger vehicle tires must conform to
Federal Safety Requirements in addition to
these grades.
Treadwear
The treadwear grade is a comparative rating
based on the wear rate of the tire when tested
under controlled conditions on a specified gov-
ernment test course. E.g., a tire graded 150
would wear one and one-half, 1 g, times as
well on the government course as a tire graded
100. The relative performance of tires depends
upon the actual conditions of their use, how-
ever, and may depart significantly from the
norm due to variations in driving habits, service
practices and differences in road characteris-
tics and climate.
Traction
The traction grades, from highest to lowest,
are AA, A, B, and C.
Those grades represent the tire's ability to
stop on wet pavement as measured under
controlled conditions on specified government
Seite 325
Wheels and tires
MOBILITY
325
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A88D30 - VI/23
OwnersManuals2.com
test surfaces of asphalt and concrete. A tire
marked C may have poor traction perform-
ance.
The traction grade assigned to this tire is
based on straight-ahead braking traction tests,
and does not include acceleration, cornering,
hydroplaning, or peak traction characteristics.
Temperature
The temperature grades are A, the highest, B,
and C, representing the tire's resistance to the
generation of heat and its ability to dissipate
heat when tested under controlled conditions
on a specified indoor laboratory test wheel.
Sustained high temperature can cause the
material of the tire to degenerate and reduce
tire life, and excessive temperature can lead to
sudden tire failure. The grade C corresponds
to a level of performance which all passenger
car tires must meet under the Federal Motor
Vehicle Safety Standard No. 109. Grades Band
A represent higher levels of performance on
the laboratory test wheel than the minimum
required by law.
Warning
The temperature grade for this tire is estab-
lished for a tire that is properly inflated and
not overloaded. Excessive speed, underinfla-
tion, or excessive loading, either separately
or in combination, can cause heat buildup
and possible tire failure.
M+S
Winter tires, as well as all-season tires with
better winter performance than summer tires,
can be identified by the M+S marking on the
tire side wall.
Tire tread
Safety information
Warning
If the tire tread depth is too low, driving safety
may be impaired in critical situations such as
aquaplaning or slush on the road. There is
a risk of accident. The tire tread depth may
not fall below 0.12 in/3 mm for summer tires
and 0.16 in/4 mm for winter and all-season
tires, or observe the statutory regulations on
minimum tread depth.
Minimum tread depth
The tire manufacturer’s wear indicators are
distributed over the tire circumference. These
indicators have a height of min. 0.06 in/1.6 mm
and serve as an indicator for tire tread wear.
The positions of the wear indicators are
marked on the tire sidewall with TWI, Tread
Wear Indicator.
Tire damage
General information
Check your tires regularly for damage, foreign
bodies lodged in the tread, and tread wear.
Indications of tire damage or another vehicle
malfunction:
Seite 326
MOBILITY
Wheels and tires
326
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A88D30 - VI/23
OwnersManuals2.com
▷ Unusual vibrations.
▷ Unusual tire or running noises.
▷ Unusual handling such as a strong ten-
dency to pull to the left or right.
▷ Uneven wear pattern, e.g., increased wear
in the area of the tire shoulder.
Damage can be caused by the following situa-
tions, for instance:
▷ Driving over curbs.
▷ Road damage.
▷ Tire pressure too low.
▷ Vehicle overloading.
▷ Incorrect tire storage.
Safety information
Warning
Damaged tires can lose tire inflation pres-
sure, which can lead to loss of vehicle con-
trol. There is a risk of accident. If tire dam-
age is suspected while driving, immediately
reduce speed and stop. Have wheels and
tires checked. To do so, drive carefully to
an authorized service center or another quali-
fied service center or repair shop. Have the
vehicle towed or transported as needed. Do
not repair damaged tires, but have them re-
placed.
Warning
Driving over curbs, road damage or other ob-
stacles can damage wheels, tires and chassis
components. Larger wheels have a smaller
tire cross-section. The smaller the tire cross-
section, the higher the risk of tire damage.
There may be a risk of accidents and risk of
damage to property. If possible, avoid driving
over curbs, road damage or other obstacles,
or drive over them slowly and carefully.
Exchanging wheels and
tires
Mounting and wheel balancing
Have the wheel mounted and balanced by an
authorized service center or another qualified
service center or repair shop.
Suitable wheels and tires
General information
Only certain wheel/tire combinations are suit-
able depending on vehicle and equipment.
The vehicle manufacturer determines wheel/
tire combinations on the basis of the following
criteria:
▷ Tire size, e.g., tire width, aspect ratio.
▷ Wheel size, e.g., rim diameter, offset.
Ask an authorized service center or another
qualified service center or repair shop about
wheels and tires that are suitable for the vehi-
cle as well as special equipment.
Safety information
Warning
Wheels and tires that are not suitable for
the vehicle can damage parts of the vehi-
cle. There is a risk of accident. The vehi-
cle manufacturer recommends that you use
only wheels and tires that have been recom-
mended for the vehicle type.
Warning
Mounted steel wheels can cause technical
problems, for instance unexpected loosening
of the lug bolts and damage to the brake
disks. There is a risk of accident. Do not
mount steel wheels.
Seite 327
Wheels and tires
MOBILITY
327
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A88D30 - VI/23
OwnersManuals2.com
Warning
Wheel/tire combinations that are not suitable
to the vehicle can impair vehicle handling and
a number of system functions such as the
Antilock Braking System or Dynamic Stability
Control. There is a risk of accident. The man-
ufacturer of the vehicle recommends that you
use wheels and tires that have been recom-
mended by the vehicle manufacturer for the
vehicle type. Following tire damage, have the
original wheel/tire combination remounted on
the vehicle as soon as possible.
Recommended tire brands
Tire types are developed for each vehicle and
optimized specifically for the individual require-
ments of that vehicle, e.g.:
▷
Handling.
▷ Comfort.
▷ Noise characteristics.
Specially developed tires are marked with
a star on the tire sidewall. After replacing
wheels and tires, the vehicle manufacturer rec-
ommends using star-marked tires again. The
vehicle manufacturer recommends that you
use tires of the same make and tread design.
New tires
Tire traction is not optimal due to manufactur-
ing circumstances when tires are brand new.
Drive conservatively for the first
200 miles/300 km.
Retreaded tires
Warning
Retreated tires can have different tire casing
structures. With advanced age the service life
can be limited. There is a risk of accident.
The manufacturer of the vehicle does not rec-
ommend the use of retreaded tires.
Maximum speed
Safety information
Warning
If the maximum permissible speed of your
mounted tires is exceeded, the tires may be
damaged. There is a risk of accident. Do not
exceed the maximum permissible speed of
the tires.
Maximum speed of winter tires
If the maximum speed of the vehicle is higher
than the maximum permissible speed of the
winter tires, the maximum permissible speed
must be indicated with a sign placed in the
field of vision. The info label is available from
an authorized service center or another quali-
fied service center or repair shop.
Winter tires
Winter tires are recommended for operating on
winter roads.
Seite 328
MOBILITY
Wheels and tires
328
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A88D30 - VI/23
OwnersManuals2.com
Winter tires can be identified by the moun-
tain/snowflake icon and the letters M+S on the
tire sidewall.
So-called all-season tires with M+S marking
but without mountain and snowflake icon have
better winter properties than summer tires.
As a rule, all-season tires do not perform the
same as winter tires.
Wheel change between axles
Warning
A wheel change between the axles on vehi-
cles with different tire sizes or rim sizes on
the front and rear axles can cause damage
to the tires and the vehicle. There is a risk of
accident. Do not rotate the tires between the
axles on vehicles with different tire sizes or
rim sizes on the front and rear axles.
Different abrasion patterns can occur on the
front and rear axles depending on individual
driving conditions. The tires can be rotated in
pairs between the axles to achieve even abra-
sion. For more information, contact an author-
ized service center or another qualified service
center or repair shop. After changing, check
the tire pressure and correct, if needed.
Storing tires
Tire pressure
Do not exceed the maximum tire inflation pres-
sure indicated on the tire sidewall.
Storage
▷
Store wheels and tires in a cool, dry and
dark place.
▷ Always protect tires against all contact with
oil, grease, and solvents.
▷ Do not leave the tires in plastic bags.
▷ Remove dirt from wheels or tires.
Repairing a flat tire
Safety precautions
▷ Park the vehicle on solid and non-slip
ground at a safe distance from road traffic.
▷ Turn on the hazard warning system.
▷ Set the parking brake.
▷ Turn the steering wheel until the front
wheels are in the straight-ahead position
and engage the steering wheel lock.
▷ As soon as permitted by the traffic flow,
have all vehicle occupants get out and
make sure that they remain outside the
hazardous area such as behind a guardrail.
▷ If necessary, set up the hazard triangle or
hazard warning lights at an appropriate
distance.
Tire repair set
Principle
With the tire repair set, minor tire damage
can be sealed temporarily to enable continued
driving.
General information
▷
The filled in tire sealant closes the damage
from the inside when it hardens.
▷ Follow the instructions on using the tire re-
pair set found on the compressor and seal-
ant bottle.
▷ The use of a tire repair set can be ineffec-
tive if the tire puncture measures above ap-
prox. 0.16 in/4 mm.
▷ Do not remove foreign objects that have
penetrated the tire. Remove foreign objects
only when they are visibly protruding from
the tire.
▷ The compressor can be used to check the
tire inflation pressure.
Seite 329
Wheels and tires
MOBILITY
329
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A88D30 - VI/23
OwnersManuals2.com
Overview
Storage
Depending on the equipment, storage for the
tire repair set is provided as follows:
▷ In the cargo area under the cargo floor
panel.
▷ In the cargo area on the left or right side.
▷ In the cargo area behind a side trim panel.
Sealant bottle and filler hose
1 Sealant bottle
2 Sealant bottle outlet
3 Filler hose
4 Sealant bottle connection
5 Wheel valve connection
Compressor
1
Compressor
2 Tire pressure display
3 Pressure reducing valve button
4 Sealant bottle mount
5 Connector for socket
6 Power switch
Safety precautions
▷ Park the vehicle as far away as possible
from passing traffic and on solid ground.
▷ Turn on the hazard warning system.
▷ Set the parking brake.
▷ Turn the steering wheel until the front
wheels are in the straight-ahead position
and engage the steering wheel lock.
▷ As soon as permitted by the traffic flow,
have all vehicle occupants get out and
make sure that they remain outside the
hazardous area such as behind a guardrail.
▷ If necessary, set up the hazard triangle or
hazard warning lights at an appropriate
distance.
▷ Remove the warning label for maximum
permissible speed from the compressor
and attach it in a visible location in the vehi-
cle interior.
▷ Remove the warning label from the sealant
bottle and stick it to the rim.
Seite 330
MOBILITY
Wheels and tires
330
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A88D30 - VI/23
OwnersManuals2.com
Preparing the tire repair set
1. Insert the sealant bottle into the mount on
the housing of the compressor.
2. Turn the sealant bottle clockwise by 90° to
the stop.
3. Connect the filler hose to the outlet of the
sealant bottle and turn clockwise by 90° to
the stop.
4. Unscrew the valve cap from the wheel and
screw the connecting piece of the filler hose
onto the valve.
5. With the compressor switched off, insert the
connector into the power socket in the vehi-
cle interior.
Filling the tire with sealing
compound
Safety information
DANGER
If the exhaust pipe is blocked or ventilation is
insufficient, harmful exhaust gases can pene-
trate the vehicle. The exhaust gases contain
pollutants which are colorless and odorless.
In enclosed areas, exhaust gases can also
accumulate outside of the vehicle. There is a
danger to life. Keep the exhaust pipe free and
ensure sufficient ventilation.
NOTICE
The compressor can overheat during ex-
tended operation. There is a risk of damage
to property. Do not run the compressor for
more than 10 minutes.
Filling the tire with sealing compound
1.
With standby state or drive-ready state
switched on, switch on the compressor.
Seite 331
Wheels and tires
MOBILITY
331
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A88D30 - VI/23
OwnersManuals2.com
Let the compressor run for max. 10 minutes
to fill in the tire sealant and reach a tire
pressure of 2.5 bar/36 psi.
While the tire is being filled with tire sealant,
the tire pressure can briefly reach approx.
6 bar/87 psi. Do not turn off the compres-
sor in this phase.
2. Switch off the compressor.
Checking the tire pressure
Read the tire pressure on the tire pressure dis-
play of the compressor. The tire pressure must
be at least 2.5 bar/36 psi.
Tire pressure too high
If the tire pressure is too high, reduce the tire
pressure with the pressure reducing valve on
the compressor.
Minimum tire inflation pressure is not
reached
Do not continue driving unless a minimum tire
pressure of 2.5 bar/36 psi is reached. Contact
an authorized service center or another quali-
fied service center or repair shop.
Minimum tire inflation pressure is
reached
1.
Pull the connector out of the socket in the
vehicle interior.
2. Disconnect the hose from the sealant bottle
and the valve on the wheel.
3. Screw the valve cap onto the valve.
4. Stow the tire repair set in the cargo area.
5. Immediately drive 5 miles/10 km to ensure
that the tire sealant is evenly distributed in
the tire.
Do not exceed the speed limit of
50 mph/80 km/h.
If possible, do not drive at speeds less than
12 mph/20 km/h.
Tire sealant may spray from the damaged
area during the initial wheel rotations.
Adjusting the tire pressure
1.
Stop at a suitable location.
2. Connect the hose directly to the compres-
sor and turn clockwise by 90° until it audi-
bly engages.
3. Unscrew the valve cap from the wheel and
screw the connecting piece of the hose
onto the valve.
4. Insert the connector into the socket in the
vehicle interior.
5. Read the tire pressure on the tire pressure
display of the compressor.
Seite 332
MOBILITY
Wheels and tires
332
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A88D30 - VI/23
OwnersManuals2.com
Do not continue driving unless a minimum
tire pressure of 1.3 bar/19 psi is displayed.
Contact an authorized service center or an-
other qualified service center or repair shop.
6. Correct the tire pressure to 2.5 bar/36 psi.
▷ Increase tire pressure: with standby or
drive-ready state turned on, turn on the
compressor and let it run for a maxi-
mum of 10 minutes.
▷ Reduce tire pressure: Press the pres-
sure reducing valve button on the com-
pressor.
Remove and stow the tire repair set
1.
Switch off the compressor.
2. Pull the connector out of the socket in the
vehicle interior.
3. Disconnect the hose from the compressor
and the valve on the wheel.
4. Screw the valve cap onto the valve.
5. Stow the tire repair set in the cargo area.
Continuing the trip
Do not exceed the speed limit of
50 mph/80 km/h.
Do not exceed a maximum distance travelled
of 125 miles/200 km.
Re-initialize the flat tire monitor or reset the
Tire Pressure Monitor.
Replace the faulty tire and the sealant bottle of
the tire repair set promptly.
Additional information:
▷
Flat tire monitor, refer to page 341.
▷ Tire pressure monitor, refer to page 334.
System limits
If the tire cannot be made drivable, contact an
authorized service center or another qualified
service center or repair shop.
With Tire Pressure Monitor: Using sealant can
damage the air pressure sensor. In this case,
have the electronics checked and replaced at
the next opportunity.
Snow chains
Safety information
Warning
Mounting snow chains on unsuitable tires
can cause the snow chains to come into con-
tact with vehicle parts. There may be a risk of
accidents or risk of damage to property. Only
fit snow chains on tires recommended by
the vehicle manufacturer for use with snow
chains.
Warning
Insufficiently tight snow chains may damage
tires and vehicle components. There may be
a risk of accidents or risk of damage to prop-
erty. Make sure that the snow chains are al-
ways sufficiently tight. Re-tighten as needed
according to the snow chain manufacturer's
instructions.
Fine-link snow chains
The manufacturer of the vehicle recommends
the use of fine-link snow chains. Certain types
of fine-link snow chains have been tested by
the manufacturer of the vehicle and recom-
mended as road-safe and suitable.
For information on suitable snow chains, con-
tact an authorized service center or another
qualified service center or repair shop.
Use
Use is only permitted in pairs on rear wheels
equipped with the tires of the following wheel/
tire sizes:
Seite 333
Wheels and tires
MOBILITY
333
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A88D30 - VI/23
OwnersManuals2.com
Tire size Wheel size Rim offset (IS)
245/50 R19 8.5J x 19 26
Information on the wheel size and rim offset is
located on the inside of the wheel.
The list can also include wheel/tire sizes that
are only suitable for certain models.
Information on wheels and tires approved for
the vehicle can be requested from an author-
ized service center or another qualified service
center or repair shop.
Follow the snow chain manufacturer's instruc-
tions.
If vehicle is equipped with Tire Pressure Moni-
tor: When using snow chains, do not reset the
Tire Pressure Monitor, otherwise, incorrect val-
ues may be displayed.
If vehicle is equipped with flat tire monitor:
When using snow chains, do not initialize the
flat tire monitor, otherwise, incorrect values
may be displayed.
When driving with snow chains, activate the
drive-off support to optimize the drive power.
Maximum speed with snow chains
Do not exceed a speed of 30 mph/50 km/h
when using snow chains.
Rear axle steering during operation
with snow chains
General information
In order to guarantee free movement of the
wheels when operating with snow chains, rear
axle steering must be turned off when snow
chains are mounted.
Rear-wheel steering is switched on again
automatically when the permitted maxi-
mum speed for snow chains is exceeded:
30 mph/50 km/h.
The setting for equipped snow chains can only
be used below 30 mph/50 km/h.
Safety information
Warning
When rear axle steering is switched on and
snow chains are mounted, there can be con-
tact between snow chains and the body.
There may be a risk of accidents or risk
of damage to property. With mounted snow
chains, switch off the rear axle steering.
Switching off rear axle steering
The rear axle steering is switched off by speci-
fying that snow chains are installed.
1.
Apps menu
2. "Vehicle"
3. "Driving settings"
4. "Drivetrain and chassis"
5. "Snow chains"
Tire pressure monitor
Principle
The Tire Pressure Monitor monitors the tire
pressure and issues a warning if the tire pres-
sure has dropped.
General information
Sensors in the tire valves measure the tire in-
flation pressure and tire temperature.
Depending on the tires detected or registered,
the system displays the specified nominal
pressures on the control display and compares
them with the current tire pressures.
If tires are being used that are not specified
in the tire inflation pressure details on the ve-
hicle such as tires with special approval, the
system needs to be actively reset. The system
will then take over the actual tire inflation pres-
sures as the target pressures.
Seite 334
MOBILITY
Wheels and tires
334
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A88D30 - VI/23
OwnersManuals2.com
When operating the system, also note the in-
formation found in the Tire inflation pressure
chapter.
Additional information:
Tire inflation pressure, refer to page 320.
Safety information
Warning
The display of the target pressures is not
a substitute for the tire inflation pressure de-
tails on the vehicle. Incorrect entries in the
tire settings can lead to incorrect target tire
inflation pressure values. In this case, it can-
not be guaranteed that the notification of a
tire pressure loss will be reliable. There is a
risk of injury and risk of damage to property.
Make sure that the sizes of your mounted
tires are displayed correctly and match the
information on the tires and the tire inflation
pressure specifications on the vehicle.
Functional requirements
The following prerequisites must be met for
the system; otherwise, reliable notification of a
tire pressure loss is not assured:
▷
After each tire or wheel change, the system
detects and updates the mounted tires on
the control display and displays them after
a short trip.
Enter the information about the mounted
tires in the tire settings when the system
does not automatically detect the tires.
▷ The Tire Pressure Monitor does not acti-
vate until after driving for a few minutes:
▷ After a tire or wheel change.
▷ After a reset, when using tires with spe-
cial approval.
▷ After changing the tire setting.
▷ For tires with special approval:
▷ After a tire or wheel change, a reset was
performed with the correct tire inflation
pressure.
▷ After the tire inflation pressure was ad-
justed to a new value, a reset was per-
formed.
▷ Wheels with air pressure sensor.
Tire settings
General information
The information about the mounted tires can
be entered in the tire settings if the system
does not automatically detect the tires.
The tire sizes of the mounted tires can be
gathered from the tire inflation pressure details
on the vehicle or directly on the tires.
The tire details do not need to be re-entered
when the tire pressure is corrected.
For summer and winter tires, the tire details
entered last are stored. After a tire or wheel
change, the settings of the tire sets used last
can be selected.
Adjusting the tires
1.
Apps menu
2. "Vehicle"
3. "Vehicle status"
4. "Tire Pressure Monitor"
5. "Tire settings"
6. "Tire selection"
7. "Manual"
8. "Tire type"
9. Select the tire size for the rear axle.
For tires with special approval:
"Other tires"
Observe further proceeding in the perform
a reset section.
10. Select the maximum speed to be driven.
11. "Save tire settings"
Seite 335
Wheels and tires
MOBILITY
335
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A88D30 - VI/23
OwnersManuals2.com
The measurement of the current tire inflation
pressure is started. The measurement prog-
ress is displayed.
Status display
Current status
The system status can be displayed on the
control display, e.g., whether or not the system
is active.
1. Apps menu
2. "Vehicle"
3. "Vehicle status"
4. "Tire Pressure Monitor"
The current status is displayed.
Current tire pressure
The current tire pressure is displayed for each
tire.
The current tire inflation pressures may
change whle driving or depending on the out-
side temperature.
Current tire temperature
The current tire temperatures are displayed
depending on the model.
The current tire temperatures may change
while driving or due to the outside tempera-
ture.
Nominal pressure
The nominal pressure for the tires on the front
and rear axles is displayed.
The specified nominal pressures take the in-
fluence of driving and outside temperature on
the tire temperature into account. The appro-
priate nominal pressure is always displayed,
independent of the weather situation, tire tem-
peratures and travel times.
The displayed nominal pressure may change
and may differ from the tire inflation pressure
details on the door pillar of the driver's door.
The tire inflation pressure can thus be cor-
rected to the value of the displayed target
pressures.
The nominal pressure is immediately adjusted
if the vehicle load status is changed in the tire
settings.
Tire conditions
General information
Tire and system status are indicated by the
color of the wheels and a text message on the
control display.
Any existing messages may not be deleted if
the nominal pressure is not reached after the
tire inflation pressure is corrected.
All wheels green
▷ The system is active and bases warnings
on the target pressures.
▷ For tires with special approval: the system
is active and bases warnings on the tire
inflation pressures stored during the last re-
set.
One to four yellow wheels
A flat tire or major tire pressure loss has occur-
red in the indicated tires.
Gray wheels
It may not be possible to identify tire pressure
losses.
Possible causes:
▷
Malfunction.
▷ During tire inflation pressure measurement,
after confirmation of the tire settings.
▷ For tires with special approval: a reset is
performed for the system.
Seite 336
MOBILITY
Wheels and tires
336
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A88D30 - VI/23
OwnersManuals2.com
For tires with special approval:
performing a reset
1. Apps menu
2. "Vehicle"
3. "Vehicle status"
4. "Tire Pressure Monitor"
5. Make sure that the tire settings are correct.
Tire settings, refer to page 335.
6. Turn on drive-ready state and do not drive
off.
7. Reset tire pressure: "Perform reset".
8. Drive off.
The wheels are displayed in gray and the fol-
lowing is displayed: "Resetting tire pressure…".
After a travel time of several minutes, the set
tire inflation pressures are accepted as the
predefined tire inflation pressures. The reset is
completed automatically while driving.
After a successfully completed reset, the
wheels on the control display are shown in
green and the following is displayed: "Reset
successful."
You may interrupt this trip at any time. When
you continue driving the reset resumes auto-
matically.
Messages: for tires without special
approval
General information
When a flat tire is indicated, the Dynamic Sta-
bility Control may be turned on.
Safety information
Warning
A damaged regular tire with low or no tire
inflation pressure impacts handling such as
steering and braking response. There is a risk
of accident. Do not continue driving. Repair
the flat tire or replace the wheel.
With recommended tire pressure test
Message
An icon with service information is shown on
the control display and, if necessary, in the My
BMW App.
Icon Possible cause
Leak detected on the tire.
Measure
Check the tire pressure and correct as needed.
If a tire inflation pressure check is
required
Message
An icon with a Check Control message appears
on the control display.
Icon
Possible cause
Inflation was not carried out accord-
ing to specifications, for instance
when the tire has not been suffi-
ciently inflated or in the case of a nat-
ural steady tire pressure loss.
Measure
Check the tire pressure and correct as needed.
Seite 337
Wheels and tires
MOBILITY
337
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A88D30 - VI/23
OwnersManuals2.com
If the tire inflation pressure is too low
Message
A yellow warning light is illuminated in
the instrument cluster.
In addition, an icon with a Check Control mes-
sage appears on the control display.
Icon Possible cause
There is a tire pressure loss.
Measure
1.
Reduce the vehicle speed. Do not exceed a
speed of 80 mph/130 km/h.
2. At the next opportunity, for instance at a fill-
ing station, check the tire inflation pressure
in all four tires and correct if necessary.
If there is a significant tire pressure
loss
Message
A yellow warning light is illuminated in
the instrument cluster.
In addition, an icon with the affected tire ap-
pears in a Check Control message on the con-
trol display.
Icon
Possible cause
There is a flat tire or a major tire
pressure loss.
Measure
1.
Reduce your speed and stop cautiously.
Avoid sudden braking and steering maneu-
vers.
2. Read the description on what to do in case
of a flat tire.
Actions in the event of a flat tire, refer to
page 339.
Messages: for tires with special
approval
General information
When a flat tire is indicated, the Dynamic Sta-
bility Control may be turned on.
Safety information
Warning
A damaged regular tire with low or no tire
inflation pressure impacts handling such as
steering and braking response. There is a risk
of accident. Do not continue driving. Repair
the flat tire or replace the wheel.
If a tire inflation pressure check is
required
Message
An icon with a Check Control message appears
on the control display.
Icon
Possible cause
Inflation was not carried out accord-
ing to specifications, e.g., the tire
has not been sufficiently inflated.
The system has detected a wheel
change, but no reset was done.
The tire inflation pressure has fallen
below the level of the last reset.
No reset was performed for the sys-
tem. The system issues a warning
based on the tire inflation pressures
stored during the last reset.
Seite 338
MOBILITY
Wheels and tires
338
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A88D30 - VI/23
OwnersManuals2.com
Measure
1. Check the tire pressure and correct as
needed.
2. Perform a system reset.
If the tire inflation pressure is too low
Message
A yellow warning light is illuminated in
the instrument cluster.
In addition, an icon with a Check Control mes-
sage appears on the control display.
Icon Possible cause
There is a tire pressure loss.
No reset was performed for the sys-
tem. The system issues a warning
based on the tire inflation pressures
stored during the last reset.
Measure
1.
Reduce the vehicle speed. Do not exceed a
speed of 80 mph/130 km/h.
2. At the next opportunity, for instance at a fill-
ing station, check the tire inflation pressure
in all four tires and correct if necessary.
3. Perform a system reset.
If there is a significant tire pressure
loss
Message
A yellow warning light is illuminated in
the instrument cluster.
In addition, an icon with the affected tire ap-
pears in a Check Control message on the con-
trol display.
Icon
Possible cause
There is a flat tire or a major tire
pressure loss.
No reset was performed for the sys-
tem. The system issues a warning
based on the tire inflation pressures
stored during the last reset.
Measure
1. Reduce your speed and stop cautiously.
Avoid sudden braking and steering maneu-
vers.
2. Read the description on what to do in case
of a flat tire.
Actions in the event of a flat tire, refer to
page 339.
Actions in the event of a flat tire
1.
Identify the damaged tire.
Check the tire pressure in all four tires,
for instance using the tire pressure display
from a tire repair set.
For tires with special approval: when the
tire pressure in all four tires is correct, the
Tire Pressure Monitor may not have been
reset. In this case, perform the reset.
If no tire damage can be identified, con-
tact an authorized service center or another
qualified service center or repair shop.
2. Repair the flat tire, for instance with a tire
repair set or by changing the wheel.
Using a sealing compound, for instance
from the tire repair set, may damage the
wheel electronics. Have the electronics re-
placed at the next opportunity.
System limits
Temperature
The tire inflation pressure depends on the
tire's temperature.
Seite 339
Wheels and tires
MOBILITY
339
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A88D30 - VI/23
OwnersManuals2.com
Driving or exposure to the sun will increase the
tire temperature, thus increasing the tire infla-
tion pressure.
The tire inflation pressure is reduced when the
tire temperature falls again.
These circumstances may cause a warning
when temperatures fall very sharply.
Following a temperature-related warning, the
target pressures are displayed on the control
display again after a short distance.
Sudden tire pressure loss
The system cannot indicate sudden and se-
rious tire damage caused by external circum-
stances.
Failure performing a reset
Tires with special approval: the system will not
function correctly if a reset was not performed,
for example a flat tire may be indicated al-
though the tire inflation pressures are correct.
Malfunction
Message
The yellow warning light flashes and is
then illuminated continuously. A Check
Control message is displayed. It may
not be possible to identify tire pressure losses.
Measure
▷
A wheel without air pressure sensor is
mounted: Have the wheels checked as
needed.
▷ Fault caused by systems or devices with
the same transmission frequency: The sys-
tem automatically reactivates after leaving
the area of the interference.
▷ For tires with special approval: the system
was unable to complete the reset. Perform
a system reset again.
▷ If the Tire Pressure Monitor malfunctions:
Have the vehicle checked by an authorized
service center or another qualified service
center or repair shop.
Declaration according to NHTSA/
FMVSS 138 Tire Pressure Monitoring
System
Each tire, including the spare (if provided)
should be checked monthly when cold and in-
flated to the inflation pressure recommended
by the vehicle manufacturer on the vehicle
placard or tire inflation pressure label. (If the
vehicle has tires of a different size than the
size indicated on the vehicle placard or tire
inflation pressure label, you should determine
the proper tire inflation pressure for those
tires.) As an added safety feature, the vehi-
cle has been equipped with a tire pressure
monitoring system (TPMS) that illuminates a
low tire pressure telltale when one or more
of your tires is significantly under-inflated. Ac-
cordingly, when the low tire pressure telltale
illuminates, you should stop and check your
tires as soon as possible, and inflate them to
the proper pressure. Driving on a significantly
under-inflated tire causes the tire to overheat
and can lead to tire failure. Under-inflation also
reduces fuel efficiency and tire tread life, and
may affect the vehicle's handling and stopping
ability. Please note that the TPMS is not a
substitute for proper tire maintenance, and it
is the driver's responsibility to maintain correct
tire pressure, even if under-inflation has not
reached the level to trigger illumination of the
TPMS low tire pressure telltale. The vehicle
has also been equipped with a TPMS malfunc-
tion indicator to indicate when the system is
not operating properly. The TPMS malfunction
indicator is combined with the low tire pres-
sure telltale. When the system detects a mal-
function, the telltale will flash for approximately
one minute and then remain continuously il-
Seite 340
MOBILITY
Wheels and tires
340
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A88D30 - VI/23
OwnersManuals2.com
luminated. This sequence will continue upon
subsequent vehicle start-ups as long as the
malfunction exists. When the malfunction indi-
cator is illuminated, the system may not be
able to detect or signal low tire pressure as
intended. TPMS malfunctions may occur for a
variety of reasons, including the installation of
replacement or alternate tires or wheels on the
vehicle that prevent the TPMS from function-
ing properly. Always check the TPMS malfunc-
tion telltale after replacing one or more tires
or wheels on the vehicle to ensure that the re-
placement or alternate tires and wheels allow
the TPMS to continue to function properly.
Flat tire monitor
Principle
The flat tire monitor detects a tire pressure
loss while driving and issues a warning if the
tire pressure has dropped.
General information
The system detects tire pressure loss on the
basis of rotation speed differences between
the individual wheels while driving.
In the event of a tire pressure loss, the diame-
ter and therefore the rotational speed of the
corresponding wheel changes. The difference
will be detected and reported as a flat tire.
The system does not measure the actual infla-
tion pressure in the tires.
Functional requirements
The following prerequisites must be met for
the system; otherwise, reliable notification of a
tire pressure loss is not assured:
▷
After a tire or wheel change, an initialization
was carried out at the correct tire pressure.
▷ After the tire pressure was adjusted to a
new value, an initialization was performed.
Status display
The current status of the flat tire monitor can
be displayed, e.g., whether the flat tire monitor
is active.
1. Apps menu
2. "Vehicle"
3. "Vehicle status"
4. "FLAT TIRE MONITOR"
The status is displayed.
Initialization required
An initialization must be performed in the fol-
lowing situations:
▷ After the tire inflation pressure has been
adjusted.
▷ After a tire or wheel change.
Performing initialization
When initializing, the set tire inflation pressures
serve as reference values in order to detect a
flat tire. Initialization is started by confirming
the tire inflation pressures.
Do not initialize the system when driving with
snow chains.
1.
Apps menu
2. "Vehicle"
3. "Vehicle status"
4. "FLAT TIRE MONITOR"
5. Turn on drive-ready state and do not drive
off.
6. Start the initialization with: "Perform reset"
7. Drive off.
The initialization is completed while driving,
which can be interrupted at any time.
The initialization automatically continues when
driving continues.
Seite 341
Wheels and tires
MOBILITY
341
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A88D30 - VI/23
OwnersManuals2.com
Messages
General information
When a flat tire is indicated, the Dynamic Sta-
bility Control (DSC) is turned on, if needed.
Safety information
Warning
A damaged regular tire with low or no tire
inflation pressure impacts handling such as
steering and braking response. There is a risk
of accident. Do not continue driving. Repair
the flat tire or replace the wheel.
Indication of a flat tire
A yellow warning light is illuminated in
the instrument cluster.
In addition, an icon with a Check Control mes-
sage appears on the control display.
Icon Possible cause
There is a flat tire or a major tire
pressure loss.
Measure
1.
Reduce your speed and stop cautiously.
Avoid sudden braking and steering maneu-
vers.
2. Read the description on what to do in case
of a flat tire.
Actions in the event of a flat tire
1.
Identify the damaged tire.
To do this, check the tire pressure in all four
tires, for instance using the tire pressure
display from a tire repair set.
When the tire inflation pressure in all four
tires is correct, the flat tire monitor may not
have been initialized. In this case, initialize
the system.
If tire damage cannot be identified, contact
an authorized service center or another
qualified service center or repair shop.
2. Repair the flat tire, for instance with a tire
repair set or by changing the wheel.
System limits
The system may be delayed or malfunction in
the following situations:
▷ A natural, even tire pressure loss in all
four tires will not be recognized. Therefore,
check the tire inflation pressure regularly.
▷ Sudden and serious tire damage caused
by external circumstances cannot be recog-
nized in advance.
▷ The system has not been initialized.
▷ When driving on a snowy or slippery road.
▷ Sporty driving style: slip on traction wheels,
high lateral acceleration (drifting).
▷ When driving with snow chains.
Changing wheels/tires
General information
When a tire repair set is used, the wheel does
not always need to be changed immediately
in the event of a breakdown when there is tire
pressure loss.
If necessary, a suitable wheel change tool, e.g.,
a jack, is available as an accessory from an
authorized service center or another qualified
service center or repair shop.
Seite 342
MOBILITY
Wheels and tires
342
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A88D30 - VI/23
OwnersManuals2.com
Safety information
Warning
The jack is only provided for short-term lifting
of the vehicle for wheel changes. Even if all
safety precautions are observed, there is a
risk of the raised vehicle falling if the jack tips
over. There is a risk of injury or danger to life.
When the vehicle is raised with the jack, do
not lie under the vehicle and do not switch on
the drive-ready state.
Warning
Placing supports, e.g., wooden blocks or sim-
ilar, under the jack may reduce its ability to
bear weight because of the limited height.
The load-carrying capacity of the wooden
blocks may be exceeded and the vehicle may
tip over. There is a risk of injury or danger to
life. Do not place supports under the jack.
Warning
The jack, issued by the vehicle manufacturer,
is provided in order to perform a wheel
change in the event of a breakdown. The
jack is not designed for frequent use, e.g.,
changing from summer to winter tires. Using
the jack frequently may cause it to become
jammed or damaged. There is a risk of injury
and risk of damage to property. Only use the
jack to change an emergency or spare wheel
in the event of a breakdown.
Warning
The jack may slip on soft, uneven, or slippery
ground, e.g., snow, ice, tiles, etc. There is a
risk of injury. If possible, change the wheel on
a flat, solid, slip-resistant surface.
Warning
The jack is optimized for lifting the vehicle
and for the jacking points on the vehicle only.
There is a risk of injury. Do not lift any other
vehicle or cargo using the jack.
Warning
When the jack is not inserted into the jacking
point provided for this purpose, the vehicle
may be damaged or the jack may slip when
it is being cranked up. There is a risk of injury
or risk of damage to property. When cranking
up the jack, ensure that it is inserted in the
jacking point next to the wheel well.
Warning
A vehicle that is raised on a jack may fall
off of the jack if lateral forces are exerted on
it. There is a risk of injury and risk of dam-
age to property. While the vehicle is raised,
do not exert lateral effort on the vehicle or
pull abruptly on the vehicle. Have a stuck
wheel removed by an authorized service cen-
ter or another qualified service center or re-
pair shop.
NOTICE
Using an impact wrench to loosen or tighten
the wheel lock bolt can damage the wheel
lock bolt. There is a risk of damage to prop-
erty. Only use a lug wrench to loosen and
tighten the wheel lock bolt.
Seite 343
Wheels and tires
MOBILITY
343
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A88D30 - VI/23
OwnersManuals2.com
Securing the vehicle against rolling
away
General information
The vehicle manufacturer recommends to ad-
ditionally secure the vehicle against rolling
away when changing a wheel.
On a level surface
Place wheel chocks or other suitable objects in
front and behind the wheel that is diagonal to
the wheel to be changed.
On a slight downhill gradient
If you need to change a wheel on a slight
downhill grade, place chocks and other suit-
able objects, for instance rocks, under the
proper side of the wheels of both the front and
rear axles to block the car from rolling downhill.
Lug bolt lock
Principle
The wheel lug bolts have a special coding. The
lug bolts can only be released with the adapter
which matches the coding.
Overview
The adapter of the lug bolt lock is in the on-
board vehicle tool kit or in a storage compart-
ment close to the onboard vehicle tool kit.
▷ Lug lock bolt, arrow 1.
▷ Adapter, arrow 2.
Unscrewing
1.
Attach the adapter to the lug lock bolt.
2. Unscrew the lug lock bolt.
3. Remove the adapter after unscrewing the
lug bolt.
Screwing on
1.
Attach the adapter to the lug lock bolt. If
necessary, turn the adapter until it fits on
the wheel lug bolt.
2. Screw on the lug lock bolt. The tightening
torque is 101 lbs ft/140 Nm.
3. Remove the adapter and stow it after
screwing on the lug bolt.
Seite 344
MOBILITY
Wheels and tires
344
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A88D30 - VI/23
OwnersManuals2.com
Safety precautions
▷ Park the vehicle on solid and non-slip
ground at a safe distance from road traffic.
▷ Turn on the hazard warning system.
▷ Set the parking brake.
▷ Turn the steering wheel until the front
wheels are in the straight-ahead position
and engage the steering wheel lock.
▷ Engage a gear or move the selector lever to
position P.
▷ As soon as permitted by the traffic flow,
have all vehicle occupants get out and
make sure that they remain outside the
hazardous area such as behind a guardrail.
▷ If necessary, set up the hazard triangle or
hazard warning lights at an appropriate
distance.
▷ Depending on vehicle equipment, remove
the wheel change set and, if necessary, the
emergency wheel from the vehicle.
▷ Secure the vehicle additionally against roll-
ing away.
▷ Loosen the lug bolts a half turn.
▷ For air suspension: disable the air suspen-
sion level adjustment.
Two-axle ride level control, refer to
page 271.
Jacking points
The jacking points are located at the indicated
positions.
Jacking up the vehicle
Warning
Hands and fingers can be jammed when us-
ing the jack. There is a risk of injury. Comply
with the described hand position and do not
change this position while using the jack.
1. Hold the vehicle jack with one hand, ar-
row 1, and grasp the jack crank handle or
lever with your other hand, arrow 2.
2. Insert the jack into the rectangular recess of
the jacking point closest to the wheel to be
changed.
3. Extend the jack by turning the jack crank
handle or lever clockwise.
Seite 345
Wheels and tires
MOBILITY
345
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A88D30 - VI/23
OwnersManuals2.com
4. Take your hand away from the jack as soon
as the jack is under load and continue turn-
ing the jack crank handle or lever with one
hand.
5. Make sure that the car jack foot extends
vertically and is at a right angle beneath the
jacking point.
6. Crank the vehicle up until the entire jack
surface is on the ground and the cor-
responding wheel is lifted max. 1.2 in-
ches/3 cm above the ground.
Mounting a wheel
Mount one emergency wheel only, as required.
1.
Unscrew the lug bolts.
2. Remove the wheel.
3. Put the new wheel or emergency wheel on
and screw in at least two lug bolts in a
crosswise pattern until hand-tight.
When non-original light-alloy wheels of the
vehicle manufacturer are mounted, the ac-
companying lug bolts may have to be used
as well.
4. Hand-tighten the remaining lug bolts and
tighten all lug bolts well in a crosswise pat-
tern.
5. Turn the jack crank handle counterclock-
wise to retract the jack and lower the vehi-
cle.
6. Remove the jack and stow it securely.
After the wheel change
1. Tighten the lug bolts crosswise. The tight-
ening torque is 101 lbs ft/140 Nm.
2. Stow the faulty wheel in the cargo area, if
necessary.
3. Check tire inflation pressure at the next op-
portunity and correct as needed.
4. Re-initialize the flat tire monitor or reset the
Tire Pressure Monitor.
5. Check to make sure the lug bolts are tight
with a calibrated torque wrench.
6. Drive to the nearest authorized service cen-
ter or another qualified service center or
repair shop, then have the damaged tire
replaced.
Emergency wheel
Principle
In the event of a flat tire, the emergency wheel
can be used in place of the wheel with the
faulty tire. The emergency wheel is only in-
tended for temporary use until the faulty tire/
wheel has been replaced.
General information
Mount one emergency wheel only.
Also check the tire inflation pressure of the
emergency wheel in the cargo area regularly,
and correct it as needed.
Safety information
Warning
The emergency wheel has particular dimen-
sions. When driving with an emergency
wheel, changed driving properties may oc-
cur, for instance reduced directional stabil-
ity when braking, longer braking distance,
and changed self-steering properties in the
limit range. There is a risk of accident. Drive
Seite 346
MOBILITY
Wheels and tires
346
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A88D30 - VI/23
OwnersManuals2.com
moderately and do not exceed a speed of
50 mph/80 km/h.
Overview
The emergency wheel and wheel change set
are located in a bag in the cargo area.
Removing the emergency wheel
1. Loosen the strap at the buckles.
2. Detach the snap hooks of the tensioning
straps at the lashing eyes.
3. Remove the bag containing the emergency
spare wheel and wheel change set from the
cargo area.
4. Open the bag, then remove the spare
wheel and wheel change set.
Inserting the emergency wheel
1.
Stow the emergency spare wheel and
wheel change set in the bag.
2. Place the bag in the cargo area.
3. Attach the snap hooks of the tensioning
straps at the lashing eyes.
4. Fasten the tensioning straps. Make sure
that it is correctly and firmly seated.
Seite 347
Wheels and tires
MOBILITY
347
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A88D30 - VI/23
OwnersManuals2.com
Engine compartment
Vehicle features and options
This chapter describes model-specific equip-
ment, systems, and functions that are currently
available, or may become available in the fu-
ture, even if they are not present in the vehicle.
Additional information:
Vehicle equipment, refer to page 8.
Overview
6-cylinder engine
1 Filler neck for washer fluid
2 Fresh air intake
3 Jump-starting, positive battery terminal
4 Oil filler neck
5 Coolant reservoir, auxiliary cooling
6 Coolant reservoir, engine
7 Jump-starting, negative battery terminal
8 Vehicle identification number
Seite 348
MOBILITY
Engine compartment
348
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A88D30 - VI/23
OwnersManuals2.com
8-cylinder engine
1 Jump-starting, negative battery terminal
2 Vehicle identification number
3 Filler neck for washer fluid
4 Fresh air intake
5 Jump-starting, positive battery terminal
6 Coolant reservoir, auxiliary cooling
7 Coolant reservoir, engine
8 Oil filler neck
Hood
Safety information
Warning
Improperly executed work in the engine com-
partment can damage vehicle components
and impair vehicle functions. There is a risk
of an accident and damage to property.
The manufacturer of the vehicle recommends
that, in the effort to avoid such risks, work in
the engine compartment be performed by an
authorized service center or another qualified
service center or repair shop.
Warning
The engine compartment accommodates
moving components. Certain components in
the engine compartment can also move with
the vehicle switched off, for instance the radi-
ator fan. There is a risk of injury. Do not reach
into the area of moving parts. Keep articles of
clothing and hair away from moving parts.
Warning
There are protruding parts, for instance lock-
ing hooks, on the inside of the hood. There
is a risk of injury. If the hood is open, pay
attention to protruding parts and keep clear
of these areas.
Seite 349
Engine compartment
MOBILITY
349
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A88D30 - VI/23
OwnersManuals2.com
Warning
An incorrectly locked hood can open while
driving and restrict visibility. There is a risk
of accident. Stop immediately and correctly
close the hood.
Warning
Body parts can be jammed when opening
and closing the hood. There is a risk of in-
jury. Make sure that the area of movement of
hood is clear while opening and closing.
NOTICE
Folded-out wipers can be jammed when the
hood is opened. There is a risk of damage to
property. Make sure that the wipers with the
wiper blades mounted are folded down onto
the windshield before opening the hood.
NOTICE
When the hood is closed, it must engage on
both sides. Pressing again can damage the
hood. There is a risk of damage to property.
Open the hood again and then close it ener-
getically. Avoid pressing again.
Opening hood
The lever for unlocking the hood is located be-
hind the footwell trim.
1.
Pull the lever, arrow 1.
Hood is unlocked.
An acoustic signal and a notice in the in-
strument cluster indicate that the hood is
open.
2. Release the lever and pull it again, arrow 2.
Hood can be opened.
3. Be careful of protruding parts on the hood.
Closing the hood
Energetically close the hood from approx.
20 in/50 cm.
The hood must engage on both sides.
Seite 350
MOBILITY
Engine compartment
350
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A88D30 - VI/23
OwnersManuals2.com
Operating materials
Vehicle features and options
This chapter describes model-specific equip-
ment, systems, and functions that are currently
available, or may become available in the fu-
ture, even if they are not present in the vehicle.
Additional information:
Vehicle equipment, refer to page 8.
Fuel recommendation
General information
Depending on the region, many filling stations
sell fuel that has been customized to winter
or summer conditions. Fuel that is available
in winter, for instance helps make a cold start
easier.
Gasoline
General information
For the best fuel efficiency, the gasoline should
be sulfur-free or very low in sulfur content.
Fuels that are marked on the gas pump as
containing metal must not be used.
Fuels with a maximum ethanol content of
10 %, i.e., E10, may be used for refueling.
The power and consumption specifications re-
fer to operating with RON 98 E10 fuel
When using minimum quality AKI 87 fuel, there
may be knocking noises as well as driving and
acoustic abnormalities. These have no effect
on the engine service life.
Safety information
Caution
The use of poor-quality fuels may result in
harmful engine deposits or damage. Addi-
tionally, problems relating to drivability, start-
ing and stalling, especially under certain envi-
ronmental conditions such as high ambient
temperature and high altitude, may occur.
If drivability problems are encountered, we
recommend switching to a high quality gaso-
line brand and a higher octane grade — AKI
number — for a few tank fills. To avoid harm-
ful engine deposits, it is highly recommended
to purchase gasoline from Top Tier retailers.
Failure to comply with these recommenda-
tions may result in the need for additional
maintenance.
Warning
Even small quantities of the wrong fuel or
wrong fuel additives can damage the fuel
system and engine. Furthermore, the cata-
lytic converter can be permanently damaged.
There is a risk of injury and risk of damage to
property. Do not refuel or add the following in
the case of gasoline engines:
▷
Leaded gasoline.
▷ Metallic additives, for instance manga-
nese or iron.
Do not press the Start/Stop button after refu-
eling with the wrong fuel. Contact an author-
ized service center or another qualified serv-
ice center or repair shop.
Seite 351
Operating materials
MOBILITY
351
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A88D30 - VI/23
OwnersManuals2.com
NOTICE
Fuel that does not comply with the minimum
quality can compromise engine function or
cause engine damage. There is a risk of
damage to property. Do not fill with fuel that
does not comply with the minimum quality.
NOTICE
Incorrect fuels can damage the fuel system
and the engine. There is a risk of damage
to property. Do not use fuels with a higher
ethanol content than recommended. Do not
refuel with fuels containing methanol, e.g. M5
to M100.
Recommended gas quality
BMW recommends AKI 91.
Minimum fuel grade
BMW recommends AKI 87.
If you use gasoline with this minimum AKI Rat-
ing, the engine may produce knocking sounds
when starting at high external temperatures.
This has no effect on the engine life.
Engine oil
General information
The engine oil consumption and engine oil
properties depend on the driving style and op-
erating conditions.
Therefore, regularly check the engine oil level
after refueling by taking a detailed measure-
ment.
The engine oil consumption can increase in
the following situations, for instance:
▷ Sporty driving style.
▷ Break-in of the engine.
▷ Idle operation of the engine.
▷ With use of engine oil types that are not
recommended.
Different Check Control messages are shown
on the control display depending on the engine
oil level and engine oil properties.
The vehicle manufacturer recommends having
the engine oil changed by an authorized serv-
ice center or another qualified service center
or repair shop. The suitable viscosity grade is
indicated on a sign in the engine compartment.
Safety information
NOTICE
An engine oil level that is too low causes en-
gine damage. There is a risk of damage to
property. Immediately add engine oil.
NOTICE
Too much engine oil can damage the engine
or the catalytic converter. There is a risk of
damage to property. Do not add too much
engine oil. If there is excess engine oil, have
the engine oil level corrected by an author-
ized service center or another qualified serv-
ice center or repair shop.
Seite 352
MOBILITY
Operating materials
352
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A88D30 - VI/23
OwnersManuals2.com
NOTICE
Engine oil that is not changed in timely fash-
ion can cause increased engine wear and
thus engine damage. There is a risk of dam-
age to property. It is recommended that you
do not exceed the service intervals indicated
in the vehicle.
Electronic oil measurement
General information
The electronic oil measurement has two
measuring principles:
▷ Monitoring.
▷ Detailed measurement.
When making frequent short-distance trips or
using a sporty driving style, for instance when
cornering aggressively, regularly perform a de-
tailed measurement.
Monitoring
Principle
The engine oil level is monitored electronically
while driving and can be shown on the control
display.
If the engine oil level is outside its permissible
operating range, a Check Control message is
displayed.
Functional requirements
A current measured value is available after ap-
prox. 30 minutes of normal driving.
Displaying the engine oil level
1.
Apps menu
2. "Vehicle"
3. "Vehicle status"
4. "Engine oil level"
The engine oil level is displayed.
System limits
When making frequent short-distance trips or
using a sporty driving style, it may not be pos-
sible to calculate a measured value. In this
case, the measured value for the last, suffi-
ciently long trip is displayed.
Detailed measurement
Principle
The engine oil level is checked when the vehi-
cle is stationary and displayed via a scale.
If the engine oil level is outside its permissible
operating range, a Check Control message is
displayed.
General information
During the measurement, the idle speed is in-
creased somewhat.
Depending on vehicle equipment, an optimum
operating range for racetrack use is displayed
on the scale.
Functional requirements
▷
Vehicle is parked in a horizontal position.
▷ The drive-ready state is switched on by
pressing the Start/Stop button.
▷ The engine is at operating temperature.
▷ Selector lever in selector lever position N or
P and accelerator pedal not depressed.
Performing a detailed measurement
1.
Apps menu
2. "Vehicle"
3. "Vehicle status"
4. "Engine oil level"
5. "Oil level measurement"
6. "Start measurement"
The engine oil level is checked and displayed
via a scale.
Seite 353
Operating materials
MOBILITY
353
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A88D30 - VI/23
OwnersManuals2.com
Adding engine oil
General information
Only add engine oil when the message is dis-
played in the instrument cluster. The top-up
quantity is indicated in the message shown on
the control display.
Only add suitable types of engine oil.
Safely park the vehicle and switch off drive-
ready state before adding engine oil.
Take care not to add too much engine oil.
Safety information
Warning
Operating materials, for instance oils,
greases, coolants, fuels, can contain harmful
ingredients. There is a risk of injury or danger
to life. Follow the instructions on the contain-
ers. Avoid the contact of articles of clothing,
skin or eyes with operating materials. Do not
refill operating materials into different bottles.
Store operating materials out of reach of chil-
dren.
NOTICE
An engine oil level that is too low causes en-
gine damage. There is a risk of damage to
property. Immediately add engine oil.
NOTICE
Too much engine oil can damage the engine
or the catalytic converter. There is a risk of
damage to property. Do not add too much
engine oil. If there is excess engine oil, have
the engine oil level corrected by an author-
ized service center or another qualified serv-
ice center or repair shop.
Overview
The oil filler neck is located in the engine com-
partment.
Additional information:
For an overview, refer to page 348.
Adding engine oil
1. Opening the hood.
Opening, refer to page 350.
2. Open the lid counterclockwise.
3. Add engine oil.
4. Close the lid.
Engine oil types to add
General information
The engine oil grade is critical for the service
life of the engine.
Only add with the types of engine oil which are
listed.
Safety information
NOTICE
Oil additives can damage the engine. There
is a risk of damage to property. Do not use oil
additives.
Seite 354
MOBILITY
Operating materials
354
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A88D30 - VI/23
OwnersManuals2.com
NOTICE
Incorrect engine oil can cause malfunctions
in the engine or damage it. There is a risk
of damage to property. When selecting an
engine oil, make sure that the engine oil has
the correct oil specification.
Suitable engine oil types
When topping up engine oil, the following oil
specification applies:
Gasoline engine
BMW Longlife-01 FE.
BMW Longlife-22 FE++.
The BMW Longlife-22 FE++ oil specification is
not suitable for the 60i gasoline engine.
Alternative engine oil types
If an engine oil suitable for continuous use
is not available, up to 1 US quart/liter of an
engine oil with the following oil rating can be
added:
Oil specification
API SL.
API SM.
API SN.
Viscosity grades
When selecting an engine oil, make sure that
the engine oil has a suitable viscosity grade.
The suitable viscosity grade is indicated on a
sign in the engine compartment.
More information about suitable oil specifica-
tions and engine oil viscosity grades can be
requested from an authorized service center or
another qualified service center or repair shop.
Coolant
General information
Coolant consists of water and coolant additive.
Not all commercially available coolant addi-
tives are suitable for the vehicle. The vehicle
manufacturer recommends using coolant with
the BMW LC-18 specification. Do not mix cool-
ant additives of different colors. Use a 50:50
mixing ratio of water to coolant additive. Infor-
mation on suitable coolant additives can be
provided by an authorized service center or
another qualified service center or repair shop.
Safety information
Warning
With the engine hot and the cooling system
open, coolant can escape and lead to scald-
ing. There is a risk of injury. Only open the
cooling system with the engine cooled down.
Warning
Additives are harmful and incorrect additives
can damage the engine. There is a risk of
injury and risk of damage to property. Do not
allow additives to come into contact with skin,
eyes or articles of clothing. Use suitable addi-
tives only.
Seite 355
Operating materials
MOBILITY
355
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A88D30 - VI/23
OwnersManuals2.com
NOTICE
Too much water reduces the cooling and an-
tifreeze properties of the coolant. There is a
risk of damage to property. Use a 50:50 mix-
ing ratio of water to coolant additive.
Coolant level
General information
The coolant may be overfilled in the coolant
reservoir when the vehicle is delivered from the
factory. Run longer to achieve the normal cool-
ant level.
The nominal coolant level is indicated by the
maximum mark in the filler neck of the coolant
reservoir.
Additional information:
For an overview, refer to page 348.
Checking the coolant level
1.
Let the engine cool down.
2. Opening the hood.
Opening, refer to page 350.
3. Turn the lid of the coolant reservoir slightly
counterclockwise to allow any excess pres-
sure to dissipate, then open it.
4. Open the coolant reservoir lid.
5. The coolant level is correct when it is just
below the maximum mark in the filler neck.
6. Close the lid.
Disposal
Comply with the relevant environmen-
tal protection regulations when dispos-
ing of coolant and coolant additives.
Washer fluid
General information
All spray nozzles are supplied from one tank.
Use a mixture of tap water and windshield
washer concentrate. If desired, a windshield
washer concentrate containing antifreeze can
be used.
Recommended minimum fill quantity: 0.4 US
gal/2 liters.
Safety information
Warning
Some types of antifreeze can contain harmful
substances and are flammable. There is a
risk of fire and an injury hazard. Follow the in-
structions on the containers. Keep antifreeze
away from ignition sources. Do not refill op-
erating materials into different bottles. Store
operating materials out of reach of children.
United States: the washer fluid mixture ratio
is regulated by the U.S. EPA and many in-
dividual states; do not exceed the allowable
washer fluid dilution ratio limits that apply.
Follow the usage instructions on the washer
fluid container.
Use of BMW’s Windshield Washer Concen-
trate or the equivalent is recommended.
Warning
Washer fluid can ignite and catch fire on con-
tact with hot engine parts. There is a risk of
injury or risk of damage to property. Only add
washer fluid when the engine is cooled down.
Seite 356
MOBILITY
Operating materials
356
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A88D30 - VI/23
OwnersManuals2.com
Next, fully close the lid of the washer fluid
reservoir.
NOTICE
Silicon-containing additives in the washer
fluid for the water-repelling effect on the win-
dows can lead to damage to the car wash.
There is a risk of damage to property. Do
not add silicon-containing additives to the
washer fluid.
NOTICE
Mixing different windshield washer fluid con-
centrates or antifreeze can damage the
washer system. There is a risk of damage
to property. Do not mix different windshield
washer fluid concentrates or antifreeze. Fol-
low the information and mixture ratios pro-
vided on the containers.
Overview
The washer fluid reservoir is located in the en-
gine compartment.
Refilling washer fluid
1. Pull out the filler neck with the cover closed.
2. Open the lid and add washer fluid.
3. Close the lid and press the filler neck down
again.
Malfunction
The use of undiluted windshield washer fluid
concentrate or alcohol-based antifreeze can
lead to incorrect readings at temperatures be-
low +5 ℉/-15 ℃.
Seite 357
Operating materials
MOBILITY
357
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A88D30 - VI/23
OwnersManuals2.com
Maintenance
Vehicle features and options
This chapter describes model-specific equip-
ment, systems, and functions that are currently
available, or may become available in the fu-
ture, even if they are not present in the vehicle.
Additional information:
Vehicle equipment, refer to page 8.
BMW maintenance system
Principle
The maintenance system provides service no-
tifications and thereby provides support in
maintaining road safety and the operational
reliability of the vehicle.
General information
In some cases, scopes and intervals of the
maintenance system may vary according to
the country version. Replacement work, spare
parts, fuels and lubricants, and wear materials
are calculated separately. Further information
is available from an authorized service center
or another qualified service center or repair
shop.
Condition Based Service
Principle
Condition Based Service determines the main-
tenance recommendation using sensors and
special algorithms that take into account the
operating conditions of the vehicle.
The maintenance measures are determined
taking into account the individual usage profile
of the vehicle.
General information
Service notifications can be displayed on the
control display.
Additional information:
Service notifications, refer to page 161.
Service data in the vehicle key
Information on the service notifications is con-
tinuously stored in the vehicle key. An author-
ized service center can read this data out and
suggest a maintenance scope for the vehicle.
Therefore, hand the service advisor the vehicle
key with which the vehicle was driven most
recently.
Stationary periods
Stationary periods during which the vehicle
battery was disconnected are not taken into
account.
In such cases, have any time-dependent main-
tenance measures, e.g., brake fluid, engine oil,
and microfilter/activated-charcoal filter checks,
performed by an authorized service center or
another qualified service center or repair shop.
Maintenance Booklet for US
Models
Please consult your Maintenance Booklet for
additional information on the performance of
service and maintenance work.
The manufacturer of the vehicle recommends
that maintenance and repair be performed by
an authorized service center or another quali-
fied service center or repair shop. Records of
regular maintenance and repair work should
be retained.
Seite 358
MOBILITY
Maintenance
358
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A88D30 - VI/23
OwnersManuals2.com
Diagnostic socket
General information
Devices connected to the diagnostic socket will
trigger the alarm system after locking the vehi-
cle.
Remove devices connected to the diagnostic
socket before locking the vehicle.
Additional information:
Indicator/warning lights, refer to page 145.
Safety information
NOTICE
The socket for Onboard Diagnosis is an in-
tricate component intended to be used in
conjunction with specialized equipment to
check the vehicle’s primary emissions sys-
tem. Improper use of the socket for Onboard
Diagnosis, or contact with the socket for On-
board Diagnosis for other than its intended
purpose, can cause vehicle malfunctions and
creates risks of personal and property dam-
age. Given the foregoing, it is strongly rec-
ommended that access to the socket for On-
board Diagnosis be limited to an authorized
service center or another qualified service
center or repair shop, or other persons that
have the specialized training and equipment
for purposes of properly utilizing the socket
for Onboard Diagnosis.
Position
There is an onboard diagnostic port for read-
ing out vehicle data on the left side of the vehi-
cle.
Emissions
▷ The warning light illuminates:
Worsening emissions, e.g., due to
an incorrectly fitted fuel cap. Have
the vehicle checked as soon as pos-
sible.
▷ The warning light flashes under certain cir-
cumstances:
This indicates that there is excessive misfir-
ing in the engine.
Reduce the vehicle speed and have the ve-
hicle checked immediately; otherwise, se-
rious engine misfiring within a brief pe-
riod can seriously damage emission control
components, in particular the catalytic con-
verter.
Have the vehicle checked by an authorized
service center or another qualified service cen-
ter or repair shop.
Seite 359
Maintenance
MOBILITY
359
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A88D30 - VI/23
OwnersManuals2.com
Replacing components
Vehicle features and options
This chapter describes model-specific equip-
ment, systems, and functions that are currently
available, or may become available in the fu-
ture, even if they are not present in the vehicle.
Additional information:
Vehicle equipment, refer to page 8.
Onboard vehicle tool kit
The onboard vehicle tool kit is located in the
left storage compartment of the cargo area.
Turn the cover lock, arrow 1, and fold out the
trim panel, arrow 2.
Wiper blades
Safety information
NOTICE
The window may sustain damage if the wiper
falls onto it without the wiper blade installed.
There is a risk of damage to property. Hold
the wiper firmly when changing the wiper
blade. Do not fold in or switch on the wiper
without a wiper blade installed.
NOTICE
Folded-out wipers can be jammed when the
hood is opened. There is a risk of damage to
property. Make sure that the wipers with the
wiper blades mounted are folded down onto
the windshield before opening the hood.
Replacing the wiper blades
1. To change the wiper blades, bring wipers
into fold-out position.
Fold-out position of the wipers, refer to
page 172.
2. Fold out and hold the wiper arm firmly.
3. Squeeze the retaining spring, arrow 1, and
fold up the wiper blade, arrow 2.
4. Remove the wiper blade forward from the
detent.
5. Insert the new wiper blade in reverse order
of removal until it locks in place.
6. Fold in the wipers.
Lights and bulbs
General information
Lights and bulbs make an essential contribu-
tion to driving safety.
Seite 360
MOBILITY
Replacing components
360
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A88D30 - VI/23
OwnersManuals2.com
All headlights and lights are designed using
LED technology at least.
In the event of a malfunction, the vehicle man-
ufacturer recommends having an authorized
service center or another qualified service cen-
ter or repair shop perform any necessary work.
Safety information
Warning
Intense brightness can irritate or damage the
retina of the eye. There is a risk of injury. Do
not look directly into the headlights or other
light sources. Do not remove the LED covers.
Headlight glass
The inside of the headlight glass can fog up
in cool or humid weather. When driving with
the lights switched on, the condensation evap-
orates after a short time. The headlight glass
does not need to be changed.
If, despite driving with the headlights switched
on, moisture such as water droplets increas-
ingly forms in the light, have the headlights
checked.
Vehicle battery
General information
The battery is maintenance-free.
More information on the battery can be re-
quested from an authorized service center or
another qualified service center or repair shop.
Safety information
DANGER
Contact with live components can lead to an
electric shock. There is a risk of injury or dan-
ger to life. Do not touch any components that
are under voltage.
Warning
Vehicle batteries that are not compatible can
damage vehicle systems and impair vehicle
functions. There is a risk of an accident and
damage to property. Only vehicle batteries
that are compatible with the vehicle type
should be installed in the vehicle. Information
on compatible vehicle batteries is available at
an authorized service center or another quali-
fied service center or repair shop.
Registering the battery to the
vehicle
The vehicle manufacturer recommends hav-
ing an authorized service center or another
qualified service center or repair shop register
the vehicle battery to the vehicle after the bat-
tery has been changed. Once the battery has
been registered again, all comfort features will
be available without limitation and any Check
Control messages displayed which relate to
comfort features will disappear.
Charging the battery
General information
Make sure that the battery is always suffi-
ciently charged to guarantee that the battery
remains usable for its full service life.
A discharged battery is indicated by a
red indicator light.
Seite 361
Replacing components
MOBILITY
361
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A88D30 - VI/23
OwnersManuals2.com
Charge the battery when acceleration is insuffi-
cient.
The following circumstances can have a nega-
tive effect on the performance of the battery:
▷ Frequent short-distance drives.
▷ Stationary periods of more than one month.
Safety information
Warning
Battery chargers that charge the vehicle bat-
tery via sockets or cigarette lighters in the ve-
hicle may overload or damage the 12 V elec-
trical system. There is a risk of injury or risk
of damage to property. Only connect battery
chargers for the vehicle battery to the jump-
start terminals in the engine compartment.
Charging the battery
Charge the battery only when the engine is off
and via the jump-start terminals in the engine
compartment.
With Mild Hybrid technology: charge the bat-
tery only when the hood is opened.
Additional information:
Jump-start terminals, refer to page 368.
Power interruption
After a power interruption, some equipment
needs to be newly initialized or individual set-
tings updated, for example:
▷
Parking brake, refer to page 138.
▷ With Memory function: store the positions
again.
▷ Time: update.
▷ Date: update.
Deep sleep mode
Use deep sleep mode for long stationary peri-
ods.
Additional information:
Idle state, refer to page 40
Mild Hybrid technology
Principle
Part of the Mild Hybrid technology is a battery
that works with a voltage of 48 volts. Mild Hy-
brid technology can lower the fuel consump-
tion.
Safety information
DANGER
Contact with live components can lead to an
electric shock. There is a risk of injury or dan-
ger to life. Do not touch any components that
are under voltage.
General information
The battery for mild hybrid technology is lo-
cated below the cargo area floor.
Notice
Do not exchange or work on the battery for the
Mild Hybrid technology.
Disposing of old batteries
Have old batteries disposed of by an
authorized service center or another
qualified service center or repair shop,
or take them to a collection point.
Maintain the filled battery in an upright position
for transport and storage. Secure the battery
so that it does not tip over during transport.
Seite 362
MOBILITY
Replacing components
362
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A88D30 - VI/23
OwnersManuals2.com
Fuses
General information
The fuses are located at different places in the
vehicle.
Information on the fuse layout and the posi-
tions of the fuse boxes is available on the In-
ternet: fusecard.bmw.com.
Safety information
Warning
Incorrect and repaired fuses can overload
electrical lines and components. There is a
risk of fire. Never attempt to repair a blown
fuse. Do not replace a nonworking fuse with a
substitute of another color or amperage rat-
ing.
Replacing fuses
The vehicle manufacturer recommends having
the fuses replaced by an authorized service
center or another qualified service center or
repair shop.
Seite 363
Replacing components
MOBILITY
363
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A88D30 - VI/23
OwnersManuals2.com
Breakdown Assistance
Vehicle features and options
This chapter describes model-specific equip-
ment, systems, and functions that are currently
available, or may become available in the fu-
ture, even if they are not present in the vehicle.
Additional information:
Vehicle equipment, refer to page 8.
Hazard warning system
Hazard warning system button
The red light in the button flashes when the
hazard warning system is turned on.
Warning triangle
The warning triangle is located on the inside of
the tailgate.
Press on the release, arrow 1, and swivel the
cover down, arrow 2.
First-aid kit
General information
Depending on the vehicle equipment and na-
tional-market version, the vehicle is equipped
with a first-aid kit.
Some of the articles have a limited service life.
Check the expiration dates of the contents reg-
ularly and replace any expired items promptly.
Storage
Storage for the first-aid kit is provided in the
left storage compartment of the cargo area.
Turn the screw cap in the cover by 90°, ar-
row 1, and fold down the trim panel, arrow 2.
BMW Assist
Principle
In the event of a breakdown, accident or if you
have any questions about the vehicle, BMW
Assist can be used to contact BMW Group's
customer support.
Seite 364
MOBILITY
Breakdown Assistance
364
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A88D30 - VI/23
OwnersManuals2.com
General information
The offering depends on the vehicle equip-
ment and the national-market version.
For more information on this service, the vehi-
cle manufacturer recommends contacting an
authorized service center or the hotline/cus-
tomer support.
Starting services
1. Apps menu
2. "All apps"
3. "BMW Assist"
4. "BMW Assist"
A voice connection to customer support is be-
ing established.
BMW Roadside Assistance
Principle
BMW Group Roadside Assistance can be con-
tacted if assistance is needed in the event of a
breakdown.
General information
In the event of a breakdown, data on the ve-
hicle's condition is transmitted to the BMW
Roadside Assistance.
There are various ways of contacting BMW
Roadside Assistance.
▷
Via additional text in the Check Control
message.
▷ Via a call with a mobile phone.
▷ Via the BMW app.
Functional requirements
▷
Active ConnectedDrive contract, equipment
with intelligent emergency call or BMW
ConnectedDrive services.
▷ Cellular network reception.
▷ Standby state is switched on.
Starting BMW Roadside Assistance
manually
If the vehicle is equipped with Teleservices,
support is first offered through Teleservice Di-
agnosis and, where applicable, then through
Teleservice Help.
1. Apps menu
2. "All apps"
3. "BMW Assist"
4. "BMW Roadside Assistance" or select the
desired service.
Follow the displays on the control display.
A voice connection is established.
Teleservice Diagnosis
Teleservice Diagnostics enables detailed vehi-
cle data to be transmitted via cellular networks,
which is necessary for vehicle diagnosis. This
data is transmitted automatically. It may be
necessary to approve this on the control dis-
play.
Teleservice Help
Depending on the country, Teleservice Help
enables an in-depth diagnosis of the vehicle by
BMW Roadside Assistance via wireless trans-
mission.
You can launch Teleservice Help by requesting
it through BMW Roadside Assistance.
1.
Park the vehicle in a safe place.
2. Set the parking brake.
3. Turn on control display.
4. Consent to Teleservice Help.
BMW Accident Assistance
Principle
BMW Group Accident Assistance can be con-
tacted if assistance is needed in the event of
an accident.
Seite 365
Breakdown Assistance
MOBILITY
365
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A88D30 - VI/23
OwnersManuals2.com
General information
If the vehicle sensors detect a minor to moder-
ately severe accident, which did not deploy any
airbags, a Check Control message is displayed
in the instrument cluster. In addition, a text
message appears on the control display.
When BMW Accident Assistance is triggered,
data on the vehicle's condition is sent to BMW.
Functional requirements
▷ Active ConnectedDrive contract, equipment
with intelligent emergency call or BMW
ConnectedDrive services.
▷ Cellular network reception.
▷ Standby state is switched on.
Starting BMW Accident Assistance
If an accident is detected automatically
A text message relating to BMW Accident As-
sistance appears on the control display.
The connection can be established directly:
"Contact accident assistance"
The Check Control message for BMW Accident
Assistance can also be called up from the
stored Check Control messages for a certain
length of time.
Additional information:
Check Control, refer to page 144.
Starting BMW Accident Assistance
manually
BMW Accident Assistance can also be con-
tacted independently of the automatic accident
detection function.
1.
Apps menu
2. "All apps"
3. "BMW Assist"
4. "BMW Accident Assistance" or select the
desired service.
Follow the displays on the control display.
A voice connection is established.
Emergency Call
Intelligent emergency call
Principle
In case of an emergency, an emergency call
can be triggered automatically by the system
or manually.
General information
Depending on the vehicle equipment and na-
tional-market version, the vehicle is equipped
with an Assist system.
Only press the SOS button in the headliner in
an emergency.
The Intelligent Assist system establishes a
connection with the BMW Response Center.
For technical reasons, the emergency call can-
not be guaranteed under unfavorable condi-
tions.
Overview
The SOS button is located in the head-
liner.
Seite 366
MOBILITY
Breakdown Assistance
366
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A88D30 - VI/23
OwnersManuals2.com
Functional requirements
▷ Standby state is switched on.
▷ The Assist system is functional.
▷ The integrated SIM card in the vehicle has
been activated.
Automatic triggering
Under certain conditions, for example if the
airbags are deployed, an emergency call is au-
tomatically triggered immediately after an acci-
dent of corresponding severity. Automatic Col-
lision Notification is not affected by pressing
the SOS button.
Manual triggering
1.
Tap the cover flap.
2. Press and hold the SOS button until the
LED in the area of the button illuminates
green.
▷ The LED is illuminated green when an
emergency call has been initiated.
If a cancel prompt appears on the control
display, the emergency call can be aborted.
If the situation allows, wait in the vehicle
until the voice connection has been estab-
lished.
▷ The LED flashes green when a connection
to the BMW Response Center has been es-
tablished.
The BMW Response Center then makes
contact with the occupants of the vehicle
and initiates further steps to help.
Even if you are unable to respond, the
BMW Response Center can take further
steps to help you under certain circumstan-
ces.
For this purpose, data that serves to deter-
mine the necessary rescue measures, for
instance the current position of the vehicle
when it can be determined, is transmitted
to the BMW Response Center.
Even if the BMW Response Center is no
longer heard through the loudspeakers, the
BMW Response Center may still be able to
hear the occupants of the vehicle.
The BMW Response Center ends the emer-
gency call.
Malfunction
The function of the emergency call may be im-
paired.
The LED near the SOS button flashes for ap-
proximately 30 seconds. A Check Control mes-
sage is displayed.
Have the vehicle checked by an authorized
service center or another qualified service cen-
ter or repair shop.
Jump-starting
General information
If the battery is discharged, the engine can
be started using the battery of another vehicle
and two jumper cables. Only use jumper ca-
bles with fully insulated clamp handles.
Safety information
DANGER
Contact with live components can lead to an
electric shock. There is a risk of injury or dan-
ger to life. Do not touch any components that
are under voltage.
Warning
If the jumper cables are connected in the
incorrect order, spark formation may occur.
There is a risk of injury. Pay attention to the
correct order during connection.
Seite 367
Breakdown Assistance
MOBILITY
367
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A88D30 - VI/23
OwnersManuals2.com
Warning
In the case of body contact between the two
vehicles, a short circuit can occur while jump-
starting. There is a risk of injury or risk of
damage to property. Make sure that no body
contact occurs.
Preparation
1. Check whether the battery of the other ve-
hicle has a voltage of 12 volts. The voltage
information can be found on the battery.
2. Switch off the engine of the assisting vehi-
cle.
3. Switch off any electrical components in
both vehicles.
Jump-start terminals
The jump-start terminals are located in the en-
gine compartment.
Additional information:
For an overview, refer to page 348.
Open the covers of the jump-start terminals.
Connecting the cables
Before you begin, switch off all unnecessary
electronic systems/components such as the
radio on the assisting and receiving vehicles.
1.
Open the lid of the jump-start terminal.
2. Attach one terminal clamp of the positive
jumper cable to the positive battery termi-
nal, or to the corresponding jump-start ter-
minal of the vehicle providing assistance.
3. Attach the terminal clamp on the other end
of the cable to the positive battery terminal,
or to the corresponding jump-start terminal
of the vehicle to be started.
4. Attach one terminal clamp of the negative
jumper cable to the negative battery termi-
nal, or to the corresponding engine or body
ground of assisting vehicle.
5. Attach the second terminal clamp to the
negative battery terminal, or to the corre-
sponding engine or body ground of the ve-
hicle to be started.
Starting the engine
Never use spray fluids to start the engine.
1. Start the engine of the assisting vehicle and
let it run for several minutes at an increased
idle speed.
If the vehicle to be started has a diesel en-
gine: let the engine of the assisting vehicle
run for approx. 10 minutes.
2. Start the engine of the vehicle that is to be
started in the usual way.
If the first attempt to start the engine is not
successful, wait a few minutes before mak-
ing another attempt in order to allow the
discharged battery to recharge.
3. Let both engines run for several minutes.
4. Disconnect the jumper cables in the reverse
order.
Check the battery and recharge, if needed.
Tow-starting and towing
General information
Depending on vehicle equipment, deactivate
the air suspension level adjustment.
Two-axle ride level control, refer to page 271.
Safety information
Warning
Individual functions may not work correctly
when towing with Forward Collision Mitiga-
tion enabled or Cruise Control switched on.
There is a risk of accident. Switch off Forward
Seite 368
MOBILITY
Breakdown Assistance
368
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A88D30 - VI/23
OwnersManuals2.com
Collision Mitigation and Cruise Control before
towing.
Steptronic transmission:
Transporting the vehicle
General information
Do not transport the vehicle by towing it.
Safety information
NOTICE
The vehicle can be damaged when towing
the vehicle with a single lifted axle. There
is a risk of damage to property. The vehicle
should only be transported on a loading plat-
form.
Warning
The vehicle can become damaged when lift-
ing and securing it.
There is a risk of injury or risk of damage to
property.
▷
Lift the vehicle using suitable means.
▷ Do not lift or secure the vehicle by its tow
fitting, body parts, or suspension parts.
Pushing the vehicle
To remove a broken-down vehicle from the
hazardous area, push it for a short distance at
a speed of no more than 6 mph/10 km/h.
Additional information:
Rolling or pushing the vehicle, refer to
page 130.
Tow truck
The vehicle should only be transported on a
loading platform.
Towing other vehicles
General information
Switch on the hazard warning system, de-
pending on local regulations.
If the electrical system has failed, clearly iden-
tify the vehicle being towed by placing a sign or
a warning triangle in the rear window.
Safety information
Warning
If the approved gross vehicle weight of the
towing vehicle is lighter than the vehicle to
be towed, the tow fitting can tear off or it will
not be possible to control handling. There is
a risk of accident. Make sure that the gross
vehicle weight of the towing vehicle is heavier
than the vehicle to be towed.
Warning
Different levels of braking may occur when
towing with adaptive recuperation. There is a
risk of accident. Deactivate adaptive recuper-
ation before towing.
Seite 369
Breakdown Assistance
MOBILITY
369
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A88D30 - VI/23
OwnersManuals2.com
NOTICE
If the tow bar or tow rope is attached incor-
rectly, damage to other vehicle parts can oc-
cur. There is a risk of damage to property.
Correctly attach the tow bar or tow rope to
the tow fitting.
Tow bar
The tow fittings used should be on the same
side on both vehicles.
If it is impossible to avoid mounting the tow
bar at an inclination, note the following:
▷ Free movement is limited when cornering.
▷ The tow bar will generate lateral forces if it
is secured with an inclination.
Tow rope
Observe the following notes when using the
tow rope:
▷ Use nylon ropes or straps, which will enable
the vehicle to be towed without jerking.
▷ Make sure the tow rope is not twisted when
fastening.
▷ Check the attachment of the tow fitting and
tow rope in regular intervals.
▷ Do not exceed a towing speed of
30 mph/50 km/h.
▷ Do not exceed a towing distance of
3 miles/5 km.
▷ When driving off to tow the vehicle, make
sure that the tow rope is taut.
Tow fitting
General information
The screw-in tow fitting should always be car-
ried in the vehicle.
The tow fitting can be screwed in at the front
or rear of the vehicle.
The tow fitting is found in the onboard vehicle
tool kit.
Observe the following notes when using the
tow fitting:
▷ Use only the tow fitting provided with the
vehicle.
▷ Turn the tow fitting at least 5 turns clock-
wise and screw it in as far as it will go. If
necessary, tighten with a suitable object.
▷ After use, unscrew the tow fitting counter-
clockwise.
▷ Use the tow fitting for towing on paved
roads only.
▷ Avoid lateral loading of the tow fitting, for
instance do not lift the vehicle by the tow
fitting.
▷ Check the attachment of the tow fitting in
regular intervals.
Additional information:
Onboard vehicle tool kit, refer to page 360.
Seite 370
MOBILITY
Breakdown Assistance
370
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A88D30 - VI/23
OwnersManuals2.com
Safety information
NOTICE
If the tow fitting is not used as intended, there
may be damage to the vehicle or to the tow
fitting. There is a risk of damage to property.
Follow the notes on using the tow fitting.
Screw thread for tow fitting
Press on the mark on the edge of the cover to
push it out.
Tow-starting
Do not tow-start the vehicle.
Start the engine by jump-starting, if possible.
Have the cause of starting issues corrected by
an authorized service center or another quali-
fied service center or repair shop.
Additional information:
Jump-starting, refer to page 367.
Seite 371
Breakdown Assistance
MOBILITY
371
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A88D30 - VI/23
OwnersManuals2.com
Vehicle Care
Vehicle features and options
This chapter describes model-specific equip-
ment, systems, and functions that are currently
available, or may become available in the fu-
ture, even if they are not present in the vehicle.
Additional information:
Vehicle equipment, refer to page 8.
Washing the vehicle
General information
Regularly remove foreign bodies such as
leaves or snow in the area below the wind-
shield.
Wash the vehicle frequently, particularly in win-
ter. Intense contamination and road salt can
damage the vehicle.
Additional information:
Fold-out position of the wipers, refer to
page 172.
Safety information
NOTICE
When washing with an open fuel filler flap,
damage may occur. There is a risk of dam-
age to property. Close the fuel filler flap be-
fore washing. Clean dirt behind the fuel filler
flap with a cloth.
NOTICE
If the function for automatically opening/clos-
ing the driver’s door is activated, the driver’s
door may open unintentionally, e.g. when
washing the vehicle. There is a risk of dam-
age to property. In situations where the driv-
er’s door must remain closed, deactivate the
hands-free opening/closing function.
Steam cleaner and high pressure
cleaner
Safety information
NOTICE
When cleaning with high pressure cleaners,
components can be damaged due to the
pressure or temperatures being too high.
There is a risk of damage to property. Main-
tain sufficient distance and do not spray too
long continuously. Follow the operating in-
structions for the high pressure cleaners.
Distances and temperature
▷ Maximum temperature: 140 ℉/60 ℃.
▷ Minimum distance from sensors, cameras,
seals and lights: 12 inches/30 cm.
▷ Minimum distance from glass sunroof:
31.5 in/80 cm.
Automatic car washes or car
washes
Safety information
NOTICE
Improper use of automatic car washes can
cause damage to the vehicle. There is a risk
of damage to property. Follow the following
instructions:
Seite 372
MOBILITY
Vehicle Care
372
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A88D30 - VI/23
OwnersManuals2.com
▷ Give preference to cloth car washes or
those that use soft brushes in order to
avoid paint damage.
▷ Do not drive through a car wash with
guide rails higher than 4 in/10 cm to
avoid damage to the body.
▷ Observe the tire width of the guide rail to
avoid damage to tires and rims.
▷ Fold in exterior mirrors to avoid damage
to the exterior mirrors.
▷ Deactivate the wiper and, if necessary,
rain sensor to avoid damage to the win-
dow wiper system.
Driving into a car wash
NOTICE
Selector lever position P is automatically en-
gaged when standby state is switched off.
The wheels are blocked. There is a risk
of damage to property. Do not switch off
standby if the vehicle is meant to coast, e.g.,
in a car wash.
In a car wash, the vehicle must be able to roll
freely.
Some car washes do not permit persons in the
vehicle. The vehicle cannot be locked from the
outside when in selector lever position N. A
signal sounds when an attempt is made to lock
the vehicle.
Additional information:
Rolling or pushing the vehicle, refer to
page 130.
Driving out of a car wash
Ensure that the vehicle key is in the car.
Turn on drive-ready state.
Additional information:
Drive-ready state, refer to page 42.
Lights
Do not rub wet lights dry and do not use
abrasive or acidic cleaning agents or cleaning
agents containing alcohol.
Soak areas that have been dirtied, for instance
from insects, with auto shampoo and wash off
with water.
Thaw ice with de-icing spray; do not use an ice
scraper.
Fresh air intake for automatic
climate control
Safety information
NOTICE
After opening the hood, foreign bodies or liq-
uids may enter the automatic climate control
via the fresh air intake under the hood. There
is a risk of damage to property. Follow the
following instructions:
▷ Make sure that no foreign bodies or liq-
uids enter the fresh air intake, e.g., when
washing the engine or cleaning the area
under the windshield.
▷ Do not direct the steam jet or high-pres-
sure cleaner at the fresh air intake.
▷ Regularly check the fresh air intake and
remove foreign bodies.
Overview
Seite 373
Vehicle Care
MOBILITY
373
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A88D30 - VI/23
OwnersManuals2.com
After washing the vehicle
After washing the vehicle, apply the brakes
briefly to dry them; otherwise, braking effect
can be reduced. The heat generated while
braking dries brake disks and brake pads and
protects them against corrosion.
Completely remove all residues on the win-
dows to minimize loss of visibility due to
smearing and to reduce wiper noises and
wiper blade wear.
Vehicle care
Vehicle care products
General information
BMW recommends using vehicle care and
cleaning agents from BMW. Suitable vehicle
care products are available from an authorized
service center or another qualified service cen-
ter or repair shop.
Safety information
Warning
Cleaning agents can contain substances that
are dangerous and harmful to your health.
There is a risk of injury. When cleaning the
interior, open the doors or windows. Only use
products intended for cleaning vehicles. Fol-
low the instructions on the packaging.
Vehicle paintwork
General information
Regular vehicle care contributes to driving
safety and value retention. Environmental in-
fluences in areas with elevated air pollution
or natural contaminants such as tree resin or
pollen can affect the vehicle paintwork. Tailor
the frequency and extent of the vehicle care to
these influences.
Aggressive substances such as spilled fuel, oil,
grease or bird droppings must be removed im-
mediately to prevent alterations or discolora-
tions of the finish.
Matte paintwork
Only use cleaning and care products suitable
for vehicles with matte paintwork.
Leather care
Remove dust from the leather regularly, using
a cloth or vacuum cleaner.
Otherwise, particles of dust and road grime
chafe in pores and folds, and lead to heavy
abrasion and premature degradation of the
leather surface.
To guard against discoloration such as from
clothing, clean leather and provide leather care
roughly every two months.
Clean light-colored leather more frequently be-
cause contamination on such surfaces is sub-
stantially more visible.
Use leather care products; otherwise, dirt and
grease will gradually break down the protective
coating of the leather surface.
Remove aggressive substances, e.g.,
sunscreen, immediately to prevent alterations
or discolorations of the leather.
Synthetic leather care
Clean synthetic leather regularly with a damp
microfiber cloth or vacuum cleaner.
Otherwise, dust and road grime particles will
rub into pores and folds, causing significant
abrasion and premature degradation of the
surface.
In case of major soiling, use a moist soft
sponge or microfiber cloth with suitable interior
cleaners.
Immediately remove aggressive substances,
e.g., sunscreen, to prevent alterations or dis-
colorations of the synthetic leather.
Seite 374
MOBILITY
Vehicle Care
374
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A88D30 - VI/23
OwnersManuals2.com
Fabric care
General information
In case of major contaminations such as bev-
erage stains, use a moist soft sponge or micro-
fiber cloth with a suitable interior cleaners.
Immediately remove aggressive substances,
e.g., sunscreen, to prevent alterations or dis-
colorations of the fabric.
Safety information
NOTICE
Open hook and loop fasteners on articles of
clothing can damage the seat covers and
other cloth upholstery in the vehicle. There is
a risk of damage to property. Ensure that any
Velcro® fasteners are closed.
Upholstery material care
Vacuum regularly with a vacuum cleaner.
Clean extensively down to the seams. Avoid
rubbing the material vigorously.
If upholstery material containing cashmere is
soiled, use only a damp, soft sponge with a
suitable interior cleaner.
Textile care
Use a microfiber cloth for cleaning minor con-
tamination.
Dampen the cloth with water.
If fabrics containing cashmere are soiled, use
only a damp, soft sponge with a suitable inte-
rior cleaner.
Caring for special components
Displays, operating elements, and
protective glass of the Head-up
display
NOTICE
Surfaces can be damaged by improper
cleaning, e.g., by using chemical cleaners, or
from moisture or liquid of any kind. Physical
damage to the material is possible.
▷ Avoid pressure that is too high and do
not use any scratching materials.
▷ Use a dry, clean antistatic microfiber
cloth for cleaning displays.
▷ Clean the operating elements and, de-
pending on vehicle equipment, the pro-
tective glass of the Head-up display with
a damp microfiber cloth and standard
household dish soap.
Light-alloy wheels
When cleaning the vehicle, use only neutral rim
cleaners having a pH value from 5 to 9. Do not
use abrasive cleaning agents or steam clean-
ers above 140 ℉/60 ℃. Follow the manufac-
turer's instructions.
Aggressive, acidic or alkaline cleaning agents
can destroy the protective coating of adjacent
components such as the brake disk.
After cleaning, apply the brakes shortly to dry
them. The heat generated while braking dries
brake disks and brake pads and protects them
against corrosion.
Chrome surfaces
Carefully clean Chrome surfaces, especially in
case of exposure to road salt, with plenty of
water and added auto shampoo as needed.
Seite 375
Vehicle Care
MOBILITY
375
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A88D30 - VI/23
OwnersManuals2.com
Rubber components
Environmental influences can cause surface
contamination of rubber parts and a loss of
gloss. Use only water and suitable cleaning
agents for cleaning.
Treat especially worn rubber parts with rubber
care products at regular intervals. When clean-
ing rubber seals, do not use any silicon-con-
taining vehicle care products in order to avoid
damage or noises.
Wiper blades
The wiper blades are cleaned by using the
washer system.
Avoid cleaning the wiper blades manually, as
this may reduce wiper performance.
Fine wood parts
Clean the fine wood veneer and fine wood
components with a damp cloth. Then dry with
a soft cloth.
Kenaf
Only treat parts made of Kenaf fibers using a
suitable care product.
Plastic components
NOTICE
Solvent cleaners that contain alcohol or sol-
vents such as lacquer thinners, cold cleaning
agents, fuel and such, can damage plastic
parts. There is a risk of damage to property.
Clean with a microfiber cloth. Dampen the
cloth lightly with water, if needed.
Do not soak the headliner.
Seat belts
Warning
Chemical solvent cleaners can destroy the
fabric of the seat belts and lead to seat belts
no longer having their protective effect. There
is a risk of injury or danger to life. Use only a
mild soap solution for cleaning the seat belts.
Dirty belt straps impede the reeling action and
thus should be avoided for safety reasons.
Use only a mild soap solution for cleaning the
installed belt straps.
Seat belts should only be allowed to retract if
they are dry.
Rear head restraint cushion
The cover must be washed by hand.
Inner cushion cannot be washed.
Carpets and floor mats
Warning
Objects in the driver's footwell can limit the
pedal travel or block a depressed pedal.
There is a risk of accident. Stow objects in the
vehicle such that they are secured and can-
not enter into the driver's footwell. Use floor
mats that are suitable for the vehicle and
can be safely attached to the floor. Do not
use loose floor mats and do not layer several
floor mats. Make sure that there is sufficient
clearance for the pedals. Ensure that the floor
mats are securely fastened again after they
were removed, for instance for cleaning.
The floor mats can be removed from the inte-
rior for cleaning.
If the floor carpets are very contaminated,
clean with a microfiber cloth and water or a
textile cleaner. To prevent matting of the car-
pet, rub back and forth in the driving direction
only.
Seite 376
MOBILITY
Vehicle Care
376
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A88D30 - VI/23
OwnersManuals2.com
Sensors and camera lenses
General information
To clean sensors and camera lenses, use a
cloth moistened with a small amount of glass
detergent.
Cleaning the front camera and
rearview camera
If soiling is detected, cleaning of front camera
and rear-view camera is offered on the control
display or can be switched on manually.
1.
Apps menu
2. "Vehicle"
3. "Parking"
4. "More"
5. "Camera cleaning"
6. Select the desired setting.
Taking the vehicle out of service
When the vehicle is shut down for longer
than three months, special measures must
be taken. For more information, contact an
authorized service center or another qualified
service center or repair shop.
Seite 377
Vehicle Care
MOBILITY
377
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A88D30 - VI/23
OwnersManuals2.com
Technical data
Vehicle features and options
This chapter describes model-specific equip-
ment, systems, and functions that are currently
available, or may become available in the fu-
ture, even if they are not present in the vehicle.
Additional information:
Vehicle equipment, refer to page 8.
General information
The technical data and specifications in the
Owner's Manual are used as guidance values.
Vehicle-specific data may deviate from this,
for instance due to the optional equipment
chosen, national-market version, or country-
specific measuring process. More specific val-
ues can be obtained in approval documents,
on the vehicle info label, or from an authorized
service center or another qualified service cen-
ter or repair shop.
Dimensions
The dimensions can vary depending on the
model version, equipment version or country-
specific measurement procedure.
The height of the vehicle can also differ, e.g.
due to tires and vehicle load.
BMW 7 Series
Width with mirrors in/mm 86.3/2,192
Width without mirrors in/mm 76.8/1,950
Height in/mm 60.8/1,544
Length in/mm 212.2/5,391
Wheelbase in/mm 126.6/3,215
Turning radius diameter
without xDrive and Integral Active Steering ft/m 42.3/12.9
without xDrive and with Integral Active Steering ft/m 39.7/12.1
with xDrive and without Integral Active Steering ft/m 43.0/13.1
with xDrive and Integral Active Steering ft/m 40.4/12.3
Seite 378
REFERENCE
Technical data
378
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A88D30 - VI/23
OwnersManuals2.com
Weights
BMW 740i Series Sedan
Permissible gross weight lbs/kg 6,140/2,785
Payload lbs/kg 1,098/498
Approved front axle weight lbs/kg 2,954/1,340
Approved rear axle weight lbs/kg 3,373/1,530
BMW 740i xDrive Sedan
Permissible gross weight lbs/kg 6,283/2,850
Payload lbs/kg 1,111/504
Approved front axle weight lbs/kg 3,064/1,390
Approved rear axle weight lbs/kg 3,417/1,550
BMW 760i xDrive Sedan
Permissible gross weight lbs/kg 6,570/2,980
Payload lbs/kg 1,124/510
Approved front axle weight lbs/kg 3,241/1,470
Approved rear axle weight lbs/kg 3,549/1,610
Filling capacities
BMW 7 Series
Fuel tank, approx. US gal/liters 19.5/74.0
Observe further information on fuel quality, re-
fer to page 351.
Seite 379
Technical data
REFERENCE
379
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A88D30 - VI/23
OwnersManuals2.com
Appendix
General information
Any updates to the Owner's Manual of the ve-
hicle are listed here.
Updates made after the
editorial deadline
The following chapters were updated in the
printed version of the Owner's Manual after
the editorial deadline for the Integrated Own-
er's Manual in the vehicle had closed:
▷ Operation: Opening and closing: Automatic
doors: Hands-free opening/closing of driv-
er’s door: Safety instructions.
▷ Operation: Seats, mirrors, and steering
wheel: Front seats: Front seat calibration:
Calibrating the front seats.
▷ Operation: Seats, mirrors, and steering
wheel: Seat belts: Safety function.
▷ Operation: Safety: Active Protection: Func-
tion.
License Texts and Certifications
USA/Canada
Basis Central Platform
Canada
Lear
IC: 6276A-BCP01
This device complies with part 15 of the FCC
Rules and Industry Canada license-exempt
RSS standard(s). Operation is subject to the
following two conditions:
(1) This device may not cause harmful interfer-
ence, and
(2) this device must accept any interference
received, including interference that may cause
undesired operation.
Le présent appareil est conforme aux CNR
d'Industrie Canada applicables aux appareils
radio exempts de licence. L'exploitation est
autorisée aux deux conditions suivantes: (1)
l'appareil ne doit pas produire de brouillage,
et (2) l'utilisateur de l'appareil doit accepter
tout brouillage radioélectrique subi, même si le
brouillage est susceptible d'en compromettre
le fonctionnement.
Visteon
IC 11505A-BCP01
ISED CANADA
This device complies with Industry Canada li-
cence- exempt RSS standard(s).
Operation is subject to the following two condi-
tions:
(1) this device may not cause interference, and
(2) this device must accept any interference,
including interference that may cause unde-
sired operation of the device.
Le présent appareil est conforme aux CNR
d'Industrie Canada applicables aux appareils
radio exempts de licence.
L'exploitation est autorisée aux deux condi-
tions suivantes:
(1) l'appareil ne doit pas produire de brouillage,
et
(2) l'utilisateur de l'appareil doit accepter tout
brouillage radioélectrique subi, même si le
brouillage est susceptible d'en compromettre
le fonctionnement.
USA
Lear
Seite 380
REFERENCE
Appendix
380
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A88D30 - VI/23
OwnersManuals2.com
TTR-BCP01
This device complies with part 15 of the FCC
rules.
Operation is subject to the following two condi-
tions:
(1)This device may not cause harmful interfer-
ence, and
(2)This device must accept any interference re-
ceived, including interference that may cause
undesired operation.
Visteon
FCC ID: 2AA98-BCP01
FCC
This device complies with part 15 of the FCC
Rules. Operation is subject to the following two
conditions:
Operation is subject to the following two condi-
tions:
(1) this device may not cause interference, and
(2) this device must accept any interference,
including interference that may cause unde-
sired operation of the device.
Changes or modifications not expressly ap-
proved by the party responsible for compliance
could void the user’s authority to operate the
equipment.
Seite 381
Appendix
REFERENCE
381
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A88D30 - VI/23
OwnersManuals2.com
Everything from A to Z
Index
0-9
2-axle air suspension, see Two-axle level con-
trol 271
3D view 250
48-volt technology, see Mild Hybrid technol-
ogy 362
A
ABS, see Antilock Braking System 212
Acceleration Assistant, see Launch Control 132
Acceleration sensor, see G-Meter 158
Accessories and parts 9
Accident Assistance, see BMW Accident Assis-
tance 365
Accident prevention, see Active Protection 208
Acoustic pedestrian protection 126
Activated carbon filter, see Interior filter 285
Activation points, panorama view 252
Activation word 54
Active Blind Spot Detection 193
Active comfort chassis, see Executive Drive
Pro 271
Active Cruise Control, Distance Control, see
Speed control systems 218
Active Guard, see Collision warning sys-
tems 178
Active Park Distance Control 257
Active Protection 208
Active roll stabilization 271
Active Steering, integral 215
Adaptive 2-axle air suspension, see Two-axle
level control 271
Adaptive lighting functions 168
Adaptive recuperation 313
Adding engine oil types 354
Additional camera view displays 246
Additives, engine oil types 354
Adjusting speed to route 239
After run of fan, see Exhaust gas particulate
filter 309
Airbags 174
Airbags, warning light 176
Air circulation, see Recirculated-air mode 280
Air conditioning, climate 279
Air distribution, manual 279
Air drying, see air conditioning 279
Air flow, automatic climate control 278
Air outlets, see Ventilation 284
Air pressure, tires 320
Air quality 285
Air suspension, see Two-axle level control 271
Air vent, see Ventilation 284
Alarm, avoiding 99
Alarm system 97
All-season tires, see Winter tires 328
All-season tires, tread 326
All-wheel drive, see BMW xDrive 214
Amazon Alexa Car Integration 57
Ambient light 169
Android Auto, see Owner's Manual for Naviga-
tion, Entertainment, Communication 6
Antifreeze, see Washer fluid 356
Antilock Braking System 212
Anti-theft protection, lug bolt lock 344
Apple CarPlay, see Owner's Manual for Navi-
gation, Entertainment, Communication 6
Applications see Owner's Manual for Naviga-
tion, Entertainment, Communication 6
Applications, see Owner's Manual for Naviga-
tion, Entertainment, Communication 6
Apps, see Owner's Manual for Navigation, En-
tertainment, Communication 6
Aquaplaning 310
Artificial engine noise, see Acoustic pedestrian
protection 126
Assistance, BMW 364
Assistance with breakdown 364
Seite 382
REFERENCE
Everything from A to Z
382
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A88D30 - VI/23
OwnersManuals2.com
Assisted Driving Mode, lane keeping, see
Speed control systems 218
Assisted Driving Mode Plus, see Speed control
systems 218
Assisted View 158
Attachment point for radio systems 310
Audio player, see Owner's Manual for Naviga-
tion, Entertainment, Communication 6
Audio, see Owner's Manual for Navigation, En-
tertainment and Communication 6
Authorized service center, see BMW Accident
Assistance 365
Authorized service center, see BMW Roadside
Assistance 365
AUTO H button, see Automatic Hold 139
Automatic camera perspective 249
Automatic climate control 274
Automatic control, headlight 165
Automatic Curb Monitor, exterior mirror 116
Automatic deactivation, front-seat passenger
airbags 176
Automatic dimming, see Automatic High Beam
Assistant 163
Automatic doors 82
Automatic headlight control 165
Automatic High Beam Assistant 163
Automatic Hold 139
Automatic locking 96
Automatic Parking Assistant 259
Automatic Parking Assistant Professional 259
Automatic Parking Assistant, see Maneuver
Assistant 264
Automatic program, automatic climate con-
trol 276
Automatic time setting 158
Automatic transmission, see Steptronic trans-
mission 128
Automatic unlocking 96
Automating routines, BMW Intelligent Personal
Assistant 58
AUTO program, automatic climate control 276
Auto Start/Stop function 126
Average consumption, see Trip data 156
Axle loads, approved 379
B
Backrest curvature, see Lumbar support 106
Backrest, seats 104
Backrest tilt 105
Backrest width 106
Back-up Assistant 268
Back-up Assistant Professional 268
Bandages, see First-aid kit 364
Bar for tow-starting/towing 370
Base position, rear seats 109
Battery, disposing of 362
Battery, vehicle 361
Being towed, see Tow-starting and tow-
ing 368
Belts, see Seat belts 110
Blind spot collision warning 193
Blocking, power window, see Safety switch 103
Blower, see Air flow 278
Bluetooth audio, see Owner's Manual for Navi-
gation, Entertainment, Communication 6
Bluetooth connection, see Owner's Manual for
Navigation, Entertainment, Communication 6
BMW Accident Assistance 365
BMW app, see Owner's Manual for Navigation,
Entertainment, Communication 6
BMW Assist, see Owner's Manual for Naviga-
tion, Entertainment and Communication 6
BMW Curved Display 48
BMW Digital Key 90
BMW Drive Recorder 205
BMW Gesture Control 59
BMW IconicSounds 273
BMW ID 69
BMW iDrive 44
BMW Intelligent Personal Assistant 53
BMW Live Cockpit Plus, see BMW Curved Dis-
play 48
BMW Live Cockpit Professional, see BMW
Curved Display 48
BMW maintenance system 358
BMW Natural Interaction, see BMW Gesture
Control 59
BMW Operating System, see BMW iDrive 44
BMW Roadside Assistance 365
Seite 383
Everything from A to Z
REFERENCE
383
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A88D30 - VI/23
OwnersManuals2.com
BMW SIM Reader, see Owner's Manual for
Navigation, Entertainment, Communication 6
BMW Theater Screen, see Owner's Manual for
Navigation, Entertainment, Communication 6
BMW Touch Command 58
BMW xDrive 214
Boost, see Sport Boost function 133
Bottle holder, front, see Cup holder, front 302
Bottle holder, rear, see Cup holder, rear 302
Bracket, flag 312
Brake assistant 212
Brake disks, see Brake system 308
Brake pads, see Brake system 308
Brake system 308
Braking, information 310
Breakdown assistance 364
Break-in 308
Break-in procedures 308
Break recommendation, see Fatigue alert 209
Brightness, control display 49
Button, central locking system 93
Buttons on the steering wheel 30
Button, SOS, see Intelligent emergency
call 366
Button, Start/Stop 126
Bypassing, see Jump-starting 367
C
Cable for tow-starting/towing 370
Calibration of the front seats 107
California Proposition 65 Warning 9
Call, gesture control 60
Camera cleaning 377
Camera, instrument cluster, see Driver Atten-
tion Camera 210
Camera lenses, care 377
Camera perspective, automatic 249
Camera perspective, semi-automatic 249
Camera, rearview camera 248
Cameras, see Vehicle sensors 35
Camera view aid lines 246
Can holder, front, see Cup holder, front 302
Can holder, rear, see Cup holder, rear 302
Captain’s Chair, see Executive Lounge Seat-
ing 108
Care
372
Care, displays, screens 375
Care, Head-up display 375
Care, light-alloy wheels 375
Care, vehicle 374
Cargo 304
Cargo area 304
Cargo area, securing, see Valet parking
mode 95
Cargo straps, see Lashing eyes in the cargo
area 305
Car key, see Vehicle key 74
Carpet, care 376
Car seats, see Transporting children safely 120
Car wash 372
Car wash, automatic 372
Car wash view 251
Catalytic converter, see Hot exhaust gas sys-
tem 309
CBS, see Condition Based Service 358
Cell phone, see Owner's Manual for Naviga-
tion, Entertainment and Communication 6
Center armrest, front 301
Center armrest, rear 301
Center console 32
Central display area, instrument cluster 155
Central Information Display (CID), see Control
display 48
Central locking switch, see Central locking sys-
tem 93
Central locking system 93
Central screen, see Control display 48
Changes, technical, see For Your Own Safety 8
Change, wheels and tires 327
Changing parts 360
Changing wheels 342
Charging cradle 294
Charging smartphone, see Wireless charging
tray 294
Charging tray for smartphones, see Wireless
charging tray 294
Chassis number, see Vehicle identification
number 13
Check Control 144
Checking the engine oil level electronically 353
Children, seating position 120
Seite 384
REFERENCE
Everything from A to Z
384
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A88D30 - VI/23
OwnersManuals2.com
Children, transporting safely 120
Child restraint seats 120
Child restraint systems, mounting 121
Child restraint systems, see Transporting chil-
dren safely 120
Child safety latch 125
Child safety locks 125
Child seat installation 121
Child seat, mounting 121
Child seat mountings LATCH 122
Child seats, see Transporting children
safely 120
Chrome-plated surfaces, care 375
Chrome surfaces, care 375
Cleaning, see Care 374
Climate comfort laminated safety glass 310
Climate comfort windshield 310
Climate control 274
Climate, fresh air intake 373
Closing with the Key Card 89
Closing with the smartphone, see BMW Digital
Key 90
Clothes hooks 303
Coasting 314
Coasting with idling engine 314
Coat hooks 303
Collision warning systems 178
Comfort Access 80
Comfort entry 110
Comfort exit 110
Communication, see Owner's Manual for Navi-
gation, Entertainment and Communication 6
Compact wheel, see Emergency wheel 346
Comparison of entries, see Entry compari-
son 46
Compartments in the doors 301
Compressor 330
Concierge Service, see BMW Assist 364
Condensation on the window surfaces 281
Condensation water under the parked vehi-
cle 312
Condensation, windshield 281
Condition Based Service 358
ConnectedDrive, see Owner's Manual for Navi-
gation, Entertainment and Communication 6
ConnectedDrive services, see Owner's Manual
for Navigation, Entertainment and Communi-
cation 6
Connected Music, see Owner's Manual for
Navigation, Entertainment, Communication 6
Connecting mobile devices to the vehicle 62
Connection, electrical devices, see Sockets 292
Consumption, see Trip data 156
Contactless operation of the trunk lid 88
Contacts, see Owner's Manual for Navigation,
Entertainment, Communication 6
Continued driving with a flat tire, see Tire Pres-
sure Monitor 334
Continued driving with flat tire, see Flat tire
monitor 341
Control display 48
Controller 49
Control systems, driving stability 212
Convoy Assistant, Assisted Driving Mode Plus,
see Speed control systems 218
Coolant 355
Coolant level 356
Coolant temperature, see Engine tempera-
ture 154
Cooling, maximum 280
Cooling system 355
Cornering light 168
Corrosion, brake disks 311
Cosmetic mirror 292
Cross Traffic Warning 203
Cruise Control, Cruise Control, see Speed con-
trol systems 218
Cruise Control, see Speed control systems 218
Cruising range 159
Cup holder, front 302
Cup holder, rear 302
Current driving condition 160
Curved Display 48
Cushions for rear head restraints, care 376
Customer support 364
D
Damage, tires 326
Dashboard 30
Dashboard, see Instrument cluster 141
Seite 385
Everything from A to Z
REFERENCE
385
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A88D30 - VI/23
OwnersManuals2.com
Dashcam, see BMW Drive Recorder 205
Data memory 10
Data protection, settings 68
Data, see Personal data, deleting 68
Data, technical 378
Date 158
Day, see Date 158
Daytime driving lights 167
Daytime running lights 167
Deep sleep mode 41
Defrosting, windshield 281
Deleting, personal data 68
Departure schedule, see Pre-ventilation 285
Departure time, preconditioning via Remote
Engine Start 288
Departure time, pre-ventilation 286
Destination input 6
Diagnostic connection 359
Diagnostic socket 359
Digital Key 90
Digital Key, see BMW Digital Key 90
Dimensions 378
Dimmable interior mirror 117
Dimming exterior mirror 116
Direct dial buttons, see Shortcuts 47
Display and operating concept, see BMW
iDrive 44
Display, iDrive 46
Displaying information on parking assistance,
see Assisted View 158
Display lighting, see Instrument lighting 168
Display panel, see Instrument cluster 141
Displays 141
Displays and icons 7
Displays for the vehicle, see Live Vehicle 142
Display speed limit, see Speed Limit Info 216
Disposal, coolant 356
Disposal, vehicle battery 362
Distance Control, see Speed control sys-
tems 218
Distance to vehicle driving ahead, see Speed
control systems 218
Distance Warning, see Park Distance Con-
trol 254
Door handle lighting, see Welcome lights 166
Door opening angle 253
Drive mode Efficient, see My Modes
134
Drive mode Personal, see My Modes 134
Drive mode Sport, see My Modes 134
Drive-off assistant, see Dynamic Stability Con-
trol 212
Drive-off monitoring 258
Drive-off support 214
Drive power reduced 153
Driver activity, see Driver Attention Camera 210
Driver Assistance, parking, see Parking assis-
tance systems 243
Driver assistance systems 216
Driver Attention Camera 210
Drive-ready state, see Operating condition of
the vehicle 40
Drive Recorder 205
Driver profiles 69
Driver profiles, welcome screen 69
Drive sound, see BMW IconicSounds 273
Driving 126
Driving Assistant, see Collision warning sys-
tems 178
Driving comfort 271
Driving condition, display 160
Driving dynamics, setting 213
Driving Experience Control, see My Modes 134
Driving notes 308
Driving off, see Drive-off support 214
Driving stability control systems 212
Driving, Start/Stop button 126
Driving through water 310
Driving tips, see General driving notes 308
DSC, see Dynamic Stability Control 212
DTC, see Setting for increased driving dynam-
ics 213
Dynamic Drive 271
Dynamic Stability Control 212
Dynamic Traction Control, see Setting for in-
creased driving dynamics 213
E
Efficiency Coach, Efficient mode 315
Efficient drive mode 314
Efficient Mode 314
Efficient Mode, see My Modes 134
Seite 386
REFERENCE
Everything from A to Z
386
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A88D30 - VI/23
OwnersManuals2.com
Efficient rolling, see Current driving condi-
tion 160
Electronic oil measurement 353
Electronic Stability Program ESP, see Dynamic
Stability Control 212
Emergency brake, see Emergency Stop Assis-
tant 202
Emergency braking, see PostCrash –
iBrake 209
Emergency call 366
Emergency release, fuel filler flap 319
Emergency release, glove compartment 300
Emergency release, transmission lock 131
Emergency Stop Assistant 202
Emergency unlocking, trunk lid 89
Emergency wheel 346
Energy savings, see Gear shift indicator 152
Engine, automatic Start/Stop function 126
Engine compartment 348
Engine coolant 355
Engine idling when driving, see Coasting 314
Engine noise, artificial, see Acoustic pedestrian
protection 126
Engine oil filler neck 354
Engine oil, topping up 354
Engine oil types to add 354
Engine sound, see BMW IconicSounds 273
Engine start, see Drive-ready state 42
Engine start, see Jump-starting 367
Engine stopping, see Drive-ready state 42
Engine temperature 154
Entering a destination, see Owner's Manual for
Navigation, Entertainment, Communication 6
Entering an address, navigation, see Owner's
Manual for Navigation, Entertainment and
Communication 6
Entertainment, see Owner's Manual for Navi-
gation, Entertainment and Communication 6
Entertainment, selection list in the instrument
cluster 151
Entry assistance, exit assistance 110
Entry comparison 46
Equipment, interior 290
Error indicators, see Check Control 144
eSIM telephony, see Owner's Manual for Navi-
gation, Entertainment, Communication 6
ESP Electronic Stability Program, see Dynamic
Stability Control 212
Evasion Assistant, see Forward Collision Miti-
gation 179
Event Data Recorder EDR 13
Exchange, wheels and tires 327
Executive Drive Pro 271
Executive Lounge Seating 108
Exhaust gas particulate filter 309
Exhaust gas system 309
Exhaust, see Exhaust gas system 309
Exit Warning 188
Exterior lighting, locked vehicle 167
Exterior mirror 115
Exterior mirror, Automatic Curb Monitor 116
Exterior mirror cameras, see Vehicle sen-
sors 35
External start, see Jump-starting 367
Eyelet for towing 370
Eyes, see Lashing eyes in the cargo area 305
F
Factory settings, see Vehicle data, resetting 68
Failure message, see Check Control 144
Fan after run, see Exhaust gas particulate fil-
ter 309
Fastening seat belts, see Seat belts 110
Fatigue Alert 209
Fatigue Alert, see Driver Attention Camera 210
Fatigue warner, see Fatigue Alert 209
Fault indicators, see Check Control 144
Filler neck for engine oil 354
Filter, see Interior filter 285
Fine wood parts, care 376
First-aid kit 364
Flag bracket 312
Flat tire, changing wheels 342
Flat tire, continued driving, see Flat tire moni-
tor 341
Flat tire, continued driving, see Tire Pressure
Monitor 334
Flat tire message, see Flat tire monitor 342
Flat tire message, see Tire Pressure Moni-
tor 338
Flat tire monitor 341
Seite 387
Everything from A to Z
REFERENCE
387
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A88D30 - VI/23
OwnersManuals2.com
Flat tire, repairing 329
Flat tire, see Flat tire monitor 341
Flat tire, see Tire Pressure Monitor 334
Flat tire warning light, see Flat tire monitor 342
Flat tire warning light, see Tire Pressure Moni-
tor 338
Floods, driving through 310
Floor carpet, care 376
Floor mats, care 376
Fold-away position, wiper 172
Fold-out position 172
Foot brake 310
Footrest 108
Forward Collision Mitigation 179
Forward Collision Warning, see Forward Colli-
sion Mitigation 179
For Your Own Safety 8
Fresh air intake, climate 373
Front airbags 174
Front camera, see Vehicle sensors 35
Front lights, replacing, see Lights and
bulbs 360
Front passenger's side exterior mirror, tilting
down, see Automatic Curb Monitor 116
Front passenger airbags, automatic deactiva-
tion 176
Front radar sensor, see Vehicle sensors 35
Front-seat passenger airbag, indicator light 177
Front seats 104
Fuel 351
Fuel filler cap 318
Fuel filler flap 318
Fuel gauge 159
Fuel quality 351
Fuel recommendation 351
Fuel tank, see Filling capacity 379
Fuses 363
G
Garage door opener, see Integrated Universal
Remote Control 290
Gasoline 351
Gasoline particulate filter, see Exhaust gas
particulate filter 309
Gasoline quality 352
Gear change, Steptronic transmission
128
General driving notes 308
Gesture Control 59
Gestures, see BMW Gesture Control 59
Glare shield, see Sun visor 292
Glove compartment 300
G-Meter 158
GPS navigation, navigation, see Owner's
Manual for Navigation, Entertainment, Com-
munication 6
Gross vehicle weight, approved 379
Guest profile, see BMW ID 69
H
Handbrake, see Parking brake 137
Hand-held transmitter, alternating code 291
Hands-free device, see Owner's Manual for
Navigation, Entertainment, Communication 6
Hands-free system 6
Hazard warning system 364
Head airbag 174
Headlight control, automatic 165
Headlight flasher 162
Headlight glass 361
Headlights, care 373
Headlights, replacing, see Lights and
bulbs 360
Headlights, turning up, dimming, see Auto-
matic High Beam Assistant 163
Headliner 33
Head restraint cushions, care 376
Head restraint pillow 114
Head restraints and seats 104
Head restraints, front 112
Head restraints, rear 113
Head-up display 143
Head-up display, care 375
Head-up display, position, saving see Memory
function 118
Heated steering wheel 283
Heavy cargo, stowing 305
Height, vehicle 378
High beams 162
Highway Assistant, Assisted Driving Mode
Plus, see Speed control systems 218
Seite 388
REFERENCE
Everything from A to Z
388
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A88D30 - VI/23
OwnersManuals2.com
Hills 311
Holder for beverages, front 302
Holder for beverages, rear 302
HomeLink, see Integrated Universal Remote
Control 290
Homepage, see Internet 7
Hood 348
Horn 30
Hotel function, see Valet parking mode 95
Hot exhaust gas system 309
Hotline, see Customer support 364
Hour, see Time 158
I
iBrake – PostCrash 209
Ice warning, see Outside temperature 154
IconicSounds 273
Icons and displays 7
Identification marks, tires 324
Identification number, see Vehicle identification
number 13
iDrive 44
ID transmitter, see Vehicle key 74
Ignition key, see Vehicle key 74
Inclination 105
Indicator light, front-seat passenger airbag 177
Indicator lights 145
Individual air distribution 279
Individual settings, see BMW ID 69
Inductive charging, smartphone, see Wireless
charging tray 294
Information 6
Information on Driver Assistance, displaying,
see Assisted View 158
Information window, control display 47
Initialization, see flat tire monitor 341
Input, iDrive 46
Installation of child restraint systems 121
Instrument cluster 141
Instrument lighting 168
Instrument panel, see Instrument cluster 141
Integral Active Steering 215
Integrated key 75
Integrated Owner's Manual in the vehicle 6
Integrated Universal Remote Control 290
Intelligent emergency call
366
Intelligent Personal Assistant 53
Intended use 8
Interior camera 296
Interior equipment 290
Interior filter 285
Interior lights 168
Interior lights, locked vehicle 167
Interior mirror 117
Interior mirror, automatic dimming feature 117
Interior motion sensor 98
Internet page 7
Intersection Collision Warning, see Forward
Collision Mitigation 179
Interval indicator, see Service notification 161
J
Jacking points 345
Jacking points for the vehicle jack 345
Jam protection system, windows 101
Journey data 156
Joystick, Steptronic transmission 128
Jump-starting 367
Jump-starting terminals 368
Jump-start terminals 368
K
Kenaf, care 376
Key Card 89
Keyless Go, see Comfort Access 80
Key, mechanical 75
Key, see Vehicle key 74
Kickdown, Steptronic transmission 128
Knee airbag 175
L
Labeling 324
Lane boundary 190
Lane Change Assistant 233
Lane change with active destination guid-
ance 240
Lane departure warning 190
Seite 389
Everything from A to Z
REFERENCE
389
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A88D30 - VI/23
OwnersManuals2.com
Lane Keeping Assistant with active side col-
lision protection, see Side Collision Warn-
ing 195
Lane keeping, Assisted Driving Mode, see
Speed control systems 218
Lane lines, additional camera view dis-
plays 246
Lane threshold, warning 190
Language, setting 55
Lashing eyes in the cargo area 305
LATCH child seat mountings 122
Lateral Parking Aid 249
Launch Control 132
Leather care 374
LED headlights, changing, see Lights and
bulbs 360
Legrest 108
Length, vehicle 378
Letters and numbers, entering 46
Level control, see Two-axle level control 271
Light-alloy wheels, care 375
Light carpet, see Welcome Light Carpet 166
Light in exterior mirror, see Active Blind Spot
Detection 193
Light in exterior mirror, see Cross Traffic Warn-
ing 203
Lighting 164
Lighting, speakers 170
Light replacement, see Lights and bulbs 360
Lights 162
Lights and bulbs 360
Lights, care 373
Light switch 164
List, instrument cluster, see Selection lists 151
Live Cockpit Plus, see BMW Curved Display 48
Live Cockpit Professional, see BMW Curved
Display 48
Live Vehicle 142
Load 305
Loading 304
Loading the cargo area, see Cargo 304
Local time, see Time 158
Locking, see Opening and Closing 74
Locking, settings 95
Locking the rear automatic climate control 276
Lock, lug bolts 344
Long idle times, see Deep sleep mode
41
Loop 370
Low beams 166
Lower back support, see Lumbar support 106
Lug bolt lock 344
Luggage straps 305
Lumbar massage, see Rear seat massage 109
Lumbar massage, see Seat massage 107
Lumbar support 106
M
Maintenance 358
Maintenance recommendation, see Condition
Based Service 358
Maintenance, see Service notification 161
Maintenance system, BMW 358
Make-up mirror 292
Malfunction, vehicle key 77
Maneuver Assistant 264
Manual brake, see Parking brake 137
Manually unlocking doors, see Integrated
key 75
Manual mode, transmission 131
Map, see Owner's Manual for Navigation, En-
tertainment, Communication 6
Map update, see Owner's Manual for Naviga-
tion, Entertainment, Communication 6
Matte paintwork 374
Matt paint, care 374
Maximum cooling 280
Maximum speed, display, see Speed Limit
Info 216
Maximum speed, winter tires 328
Medical supplies, see First-aid kit 364
Memory function 118
Messages, see Check Control 144
Messages, see Owner's Manual for Naviga-
tion, Entertainment, Communication 6
Meters, see Instrument cluster 141
Microfilter, see Interior filter 285
Mild Hybrid technology 362
Minimum tread depth, tires 326
Minute, see Time 158
Mirror position, saving, see Memory func-
tion 118
Seite 390
REFERENCE
Everything from A to Z
390
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A88D30 - VI/23
OwnersManuals2.com
Mobile devices, connecting 62
Mobile phone, see Owner's Manual for Navi-
gation, Entertainment and Communication 6
Mobile radio in the vehicle 310
Mobile Service, see BMW Accident Assis-
tance 365
Mobile Service, see BMW Roadside Assis-
tance 365
Mobility System, see Tire repair set 329
MODE button, see Speed control systems 218
Modifications, technical, see For Your Own
Safety 8
Moisture in headlight, see Headlight glass 361
Monitor, see Control display 48
Mounting of child restraint systems 121
MP3 player, see Owner's Manual for Naviga-
tion, Entertainment, Communication 6
Multifunction hook 305
Multi-function steering wheel 30
Multifunction steering wheel, buttons 30
My BMW app, see Owner's Manual for Naviga-
tion, Entertainment, Communication 6
My Modes 134
N
Neck restraints, front, see Head restraints,
front 112
Neck restraints, rear, see Head restraints,
rear 113
Neutral cleaner, see Light-alloy wheels,
care 375
Notifications, see Owner's Manual for Naviga-
tion, Entertainment, Communication 6
No Turn on Red function 201
Nylon rope for tow-starting/towing 370
O
OBD, see On-board diagnosis 359
Obstacle marking, additional camera view dis-
plays 246
Octane number, see Gasoline quality 352
Odometer, see Trip data 156
OFF display, instrument cluster, see Standby
and Drive-ready state 154
Oil filler neck
354
Oil level, checking electronically 353
Oil service interval, see Service notification 161
Oil, topping up 354
Oil types to add, engine 354
Old battery 362
On-board computer, see Trip data 156
On-board diagnosis 359
Onboard toolkit 360
On-call service, see BMW Accident Assis-
tance 365
On-call service, see BMW Roadside Assis-
tance 365
One-touch signaling 162
Opening and closing 74
Opening and closing the cargo area 86
Opening and closing the trunk lid 86
Opening with the Key Card 89
Opening with the smartphone, see BMW Digi-
tal Key 90
Operating condition of the vehicle 40
Operating principle, see BMW iDrive 44
Operating system, see BMW iDrive 44
Operating temperature, see Engine tempera-
ture 154
Operation via voice 53
Optional equipment, see Vehicle equipment 8
Outside temperature 154
Overheating of the engine, see Engine temper-
ature 154
Overwintering, see Long-term vehicle stor-
age 377
Owner's Manual via voice operation, BMW In-
telligent Personal Assistant 55
P
Paint, vehicle care 374
Paintwork 374
Panel heating 283
Panic alarm, see Panic mode 98
Panic mode 98
Panorama View 251
Panorama View, see Panorama View 251
Panoramic display, see Owner's Manual for
Navigation, Entertainment, Communication 6
Seite 391
Everything from A to Z
REFERENCE
391
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A88D30 - VI/23
OwnersManuals2.com
Park Distance Control 254
Parking aid lines, additional camera view dis-
plays 246
Parking assistance systems 243
Parking assistant 259
Parking Assistant Plus, see Parking assistance
systems 243
Parking Assistant Professional, see Parking
assistance systems 243
Parking Assistant, see Park Distance Con-
trol 254
Parking Assistant, see Parking assistance sys-
tems 243
Parking brake 137
Parking brake function, see Active Park Dis-
tance Control 257
Parking lights 166
Parking view, gesture control 60
Parking with Automatic Hold 139
Particulate filter, see Exhaust gas particulate
filter 309
Parts and accessories 9
Pathway lighting 167
Pathway lighting, turning on 167
Payload 305
Payload, technical data 379
PDC, see Park Distance Control 254
Pedestrian protection, acoustic 126
Pedestrian Warning, see Forward Collision Mit-
igation 179
Pennant 312
Performance display, see Sport displays 161
Personal Assistant 53
Personal data, deleting 68
Personal eSIM, see Owner's Manual for Navi-
gation, Entertainment, Communication 6
Personal hotspot, see Owner's Manual for
Navigation, Entertainment, Communication 6
Personal Mode, see My Modes 134
Personal profile, see BMW ID 69
Personal settings 68
Physical units, see Units of measurement, set-
ting 159
Pillow for head restraints in the rear 114
Plastic parts, care 376
Pop-up 47
Possible gestures, gesture control
60
PostCrash – iBrake 209
Power Display, instrument cluster 153
Power failure 362
Power interruption 362
Power Meter, see Power Display 153
Power windows 99
Pre-conditioning 286
Pressure monitor, tire, see Tire Pressure Moni-
tor 334
Pressure, tires 320
Pressure warning, see Flat tire monitor 341
Pressure warning, see Tire Pressure Moni-
tor 334
Pre-ventilation 285
Prevention of rear-end collision, see Rear-end
collision preparation 197
Primary user, see BMW ID 70
Protective function, windows, see Jam protec-
tion system 101
Push-and-turn reel, see Controller 49
R
Racing track 312
Radar sensors, see Vehicle sensors 35
Radiator fan, see Exhaust gas particulate fil-
ter 309
Radiator fluid 355
Radio information, see Owner's Manual for
Navigation, Entertainment, Communication 6
Radio, see Owner's Manual for Navigation, En-
tertainment and Communication 6
Radio stations, see Owner's Manual for Navi-
gation, Entertainment, Communication 6
Rain sensor 171
READY display, instrument cluster, see
Standby and Drive-ready state 154
Real Time Traffic Information, see Owner's
Manual for Navigation, Entertainment, Com-
munication 6
Rear automatic climate control 274
Rear axle steering, see Integral Active Steer-
ing 215
Rear-end collision preparation 197
Seite 392
REFERENCE
Everything from A to Z
392
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A88D30 - VI/23
OwnersManuals2.com
Rear lights, replacing, see Lights and
bulbs 360
Rear seat massage 109
Rear seats 107
Rearview camera 248
Rearview camera, see Vehicle sensors 35
Rear-view mirror, exterior 115
Rearview mirror, interior 117
Rear window defroster 282
Recirculated-air mode 280
Recirculating air filter, see Interior filter 285
Recommended tire brands 328
Recuperation, adaptive 313
Reduced drive power 153
Refueling 318
Release fuel filler flap, manual 319
Remote 3D View 253
remote control, see Remote Control Park-
ing 267
Remote control, see Vehicle key 74
Remote control, universal 290
Remote Engine Start, see Stationary climate
control 286
Remote parking 267
Remote services, see Owner's Manual for Nav-
igation, Entertainment, Communication 6
Remote Software Upgrade 64
Renewal, wheels and tires 327
Replacement, wheels and tires 327
Replacing bulbs, see Lights and bulbs 360
Replacing light diodes, see Lights and
bulbs 360
Replacing parts 360
Replacing the battery, vehicle key 75
Reporting safety malfunctions 14
Reserve warning, see Range 159
Reservoir, washer fluid 356
Resetting, vehicle data 68
Reset, Tire Pressure Monitor 337
Reset, vehicle settings 68
Restricted Driving, see BMW Digital Key 90
Retreaded tires 328
Reversing Assistant 268
Risk of collision when exiting 188
Roadside Assistance, see BMW Roadside As-
sistance 365
Roadside parking lights
166
Roller sunblind, rear window 101
Roller sunblinds, rear side windows 101
Rolling code hand-held transmitter 291
Rolling to a stop with engine decoupled, see
Coasting 314
Roll stabilization, see Active roll stabiliza-
tion 271
RON, see gasoline quality 352
Roofliner 33
Rope for tow-starting/towing 370
Route and Intersection Assistant, see Adjust-
ing speed to route 239
Route, navigation, see Owner's Manual for
Navigation, Entertainment, Communication 6
Rubber components, care 376
S
Safe braking 310
Safe Exit, see Exit warning 188
Safe Share function, see BMW Digital Key 90
Safety and warning, see Collision warning sys-
tems 178
Safety locks, doors, and windows 125
Safety package, see Active Protection 208
Safety switch, windows 103
Safety systems, see Airbags 174
Safety systems, see Collision warning sys-
tems 178
Satellite radio, see Owner's Manual for Navi-
gation, Entertainment, Communication 6
Saved stations, see Owner's Manual for Navi-
gation, Entertainment, Communication 6
Screen, see BMW Curved Display 48
Screen, see Control display 48
Sealing compound, see Tire repair set 329
Seamless mode change, see Remote Control
Parking 267
Seat belt reminder, see Seat belt warning 111
Seat belts 110
Seat belts, care 376
Seat belt warning 111
Seat calibration 107
Seat cooling 282
Seat cooling distribution 282
Seite 393
Everything from A to Z
REFERENCE
393
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A88D30 - VI/23
OwnersManuals2.com
Seat heating 282
Seating position for children 120
Seat massage 107
Seat position, saving, see Memory function 118
Seats and head restraints 104
Seats, front 104
Seats, rear 107
Securing, cargo 305
Selection list on the instrument cluster 151
Selector lever, Steptronic transmission 128
Semi-automatic camera perspective 249
Sensors, care 377
Service and warranty 10
Service notification 161
Service notifications, see Condition Based
Service 358
SET button, see Speed control systems 218
Setting driving dynamics, see My Modes 134
Setting the time, see Time 158
Shift lights 155
Shift paddles on the steering wheel 131
Shift point display 152
Shift point indicator, tachometer 155
Shift recommendation for fuel-efficient driving,
see Shift point display 152
Shortcuts, iDrive 47
Side airbag 174
Side Collision Warning 195
Side protection, see Automatic camera per-
spective 249
Side view 250
Signaling, horn 30
Signals when unlocking, see Confirmation sig-
nals 96
SIM Reader, see Owner's Manual for Naviga-
tion, Entertainment, Communication 6
Sitting safely 104
Sleep mode, see Operating condition of the
vehicle 40
Slipperiness, see Outside temperature 154
Slippery road, see Outside temperature 154
Smallest turning circle, vehicle 378
Smartphone, see Owner's Manual for Naviga-
tion, Entertainment and Communication 6
Smartphone, using via voice control 57
Snapshot camera, see Interior camera 296
Snow chains
333
Sockets, electrical devices 292
Soft-close automatic, doors 94
Soft-close automatic function 94
Software Update, see Remote Software Up-
grade 64
Software Upgrade, see Remote Software Up-
grade 64
Soot particulate filter, see Exhaust gas particu-
late filter 309
SOS button, see Intelligent emergency call 366
Sound settings, see Owner's Manual for Navi-
gation, Entertainment, Communication 6
Sound system, see Owner's Manual for Navi-
gation, Entertainment, Communication 6
Spare tire, see Emergency wheel 346
Speaker lighting 170
Speed control systems 218
Speed Limit Assist 237
Speed Limit Assistant 237
Speed limit device, speed limiter, see Speed
control systems 218
Speed limit, display, see Speed Limit Info 216
Speed limiter, manual, see Speed control sys-
tems 218
Speed Limit Info 216
Speed warning 216
Sport Boost function 133
Sport displays 161
Sport Mode, see My Modes 134
SPORT PLUS setting, see Setting for in-
creased driving dynamics 213
Sport program, transmission 128
Stability control systems 212
Standard equipment, see Vehicle equipment 8
Standby, see Operating condition of the vehi-
cle 40
Start/stop, automatic function 126
Start/Stop button 126
Starting aid terminals 368
Starting, see Drive-ready state 42
Starting the engine, see Drive-ready state 42
Starting the engine with the Key Card 89
Stationary climate control via Remote Engine
Start 286
Seite 394
REFERENCE
Everything from A to Z
394
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A88D30 - VI/23
OwnersManuals2.com
Stations, see Owner's Manual for Navigation,
Entertainment, Communication 6
Status control display, tires 336
Status information, iDrive 45
Status of Owner's Manual 8
Status, vehicle 160
Steering column adjustment 117
Steering, see Integral Active Steering 215
Steering wheel, adjusting 117
Steering wheel, buttons 30
Steering wheel heating 283
Steering wheel position, saving, see Memory
function 118
Steptronic Sport transmission, see Steptronic
transmission 128
Steptronic transmission 128
Stopping the engine, see Drive-ready state 42
Storage compartment, cargo area 306
Storage compartments 300
Storage, tires 329
Storing the vehicle 377
Stowage, cargo 305
Straps for cargo, see Lashing eyes in the cargo
area 305
Summer tires, tread 326
Sun visor 292
Supplementary Owner's Handbooks 7
Supplementary Owner's Manuals 7
Switches, see Dashboard 30
SYNC program, automatic climate control 281
System language, setting, see Language, set-
ting 55
T
Tachometer 153
Tail light, changing, see Lights and bulbs 360
Taking the vehicle out of service 377
Tank volume 379
Technical changes, see For Your Own Safety 8
Technical data 378
Telephone, see Owner's Manual for Naviga-
tion, Entertainment and Communication 6
Telephone, selection list in the instrument
cluster 151
Teleservices, see Owner's Manual for Naviga-
tion, Entertainment, Communication 6
Temperature, automatic climate control 277
Temperature display, see outside tempera-
ture 154
Theft alarm system, see Alarm system 97
Thigh support 106
Through-loading system 306
Tilt alarm sensor 98
Tilt, backrest 105
Tilting down, front passenger's side exterior
mirror, see Automatic Curb Monitor 116
Time 158
Time of day, see Time 158
Time setting, automatic 158
Time zone 158
Tire brands, recommendation 328
Tire change 327
Tire damage 326
Tire identification marks 324
Tire inflation pressure 320
Tire marking 324
Tire pressure 320
Tire Pressure Monitor 334
Tire pressure monitoring, see Flat tire moni-
tor 341
Tire Pressure Monitor, reset 337
Tire pressure, tires 320
Tire pressure warning, see Flat tire moni-
tor 341
Tire repair set 329
Tires and wheels 320
Tire sealant, see Tire repair set 329
Tire settings 335
Tire tread 326
Title, gesture control 60
Tools 360
Torque display, see Sport displays 161
Touch Command 58
Touchpad, Controller 51
Tow bar 370
Tow fitting 370
Towing 368
Tow rope 370
Tow-starting 368
Seite 395
Everything from A to Z
REFERENCE
395
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A88D30 - VI/23
OwnersManuals2.com
Traction control system, see Dynamic Stability
Control 212
Traffic bulletins, see Owner's Manual for Navi-
gation, Entertainment, Communication 6
Traffic Jam Assistant, Assisted Driving Mode
Plus, see Speed control systems 218
Traffic light and sign warning 198
Transmission, see Steptronic transmission 128
Transporting children safely 120
Travel & Comfort System 294
Tread, tires 326
Trip data 156
Trip odometer, see Trip data 156
Trunk, emergency unlocking 89
Trunk lid, contactless operation 88
Trunk lid, emergency unlocking 89
Trunk, see Cargo area 304
Turn indicators, see Turn signals 162
Turning circle lines, additional camera view
displays 246
Turning circle, vehicle 378
Turning display, see No Turn on Red func-
tion 201
Turn signal, indicator light 149
Turn signal, replacing bulbs, see Lights and
bulbs 360
Turn signals 162
Turn Warning, see Forward Collision Mitiga-
tion 179
Two-axle level control 271
U
Ultrasonic sensors, see Vehicle sensors 35
Unintended alarm, see Unintentional alarm,
avoiding 99
Unintentional alarm, avoiding 99
Units of measurement, setting 159
Units, see Units of measurement, setting 159
Universal remote control 290
Unlocking, see Opening and Closing 74
Unlocking, settings 95
Unlocking the transmission lock, electronic 131
Updates made after the editorial deadline 8
Upgrade, see Remote Software Upgrade 64
Upholstery material care 375
Upper backrest, front
106
Upper retaining strap, top tether 124
USB audio, see Owner's Manual for Naviga-
tion, Entertainment, Communication 6
USB port, position in vehicle 293
Used battery, disposing of 362
Use, intended 8
User, see BMW ID 69
Using menus, see BMW iDrive 44
V
Valet parking mode 95
Vanity mirror 292
Variable steering, see Integral Active Steer-
ing 215
Vehicle battery 361
Vehicle breakdown, see Breakdown assis-
tance 364
Vehicle care 374
Vehicle care products 374
Vehicle data, resetting 68
Vehicle equipment 8
Vehicle identification number 13
Vehicle issues 364
Vehicle key 74
Vehicle key, additional 74
Vehicle key, loss 75
Vehicle paint, care 374
Vehicle paintwork 374
Vehicle sensors 35
Vehicle status 160
Vehicle storage 377
Ventilation 284
Ventilation, see Pre-ventilation 285
Venting, see Ventilation 284
Version Software, see Remote Software Up-
grade 64
Video recording, see BMW Drive Recorder 205
Video, see Owner's Manual for Navigation, En-
tertainment and Communication 6
VIN, see Vehicle identification number 13
Vision Access, see Automatic doors 82
Voice activation system 53
Voice control 53
Seite 396
REFERENCE
Everything from A to Z
396
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A88D30 - VI/23
OwnersManuals2.com
Voice control, see BMW Intelligent Personal
Assistant 53
Voice recognition 53
Volume, gesture control 60
Volume, see Owner's Manual for Navigation,
Entertainment, Communication 6
W
Wake word 54
Warning for crossing traffic 203
Warning function for incorrect driving direction,
see Wrong Way Warning 200
Warning function for oncoming traffic, see For-
ward Collision Mitigation 179
Warning function, rear-end collision 197
Warning light in exterior mirror, see Active
Blind Spot Detection 193
Warning light in exterior mirror, see Cross Traf-
fic Warning 203
Warning lights 145
Warning messages, see Check Control 144
Warning systems for collision hazards 178
Warning triangle 364
Warning when exiting 188
Warning when opening doors, see Exit Warn-
ing 188
Warranty 9
Warranty Booklet, see Warranty 9
Washer fluid 356
Washing the vehicle 372
Washing, vehicle 372
Water on roads 310
Water, see Condensation water under the
parked vehicle 312
Website, see Internet 7
Weights 379
Welcome Light Carpet, see Welcome light 166
Welcome lights 166
Welcome screen, driver profiles 69
Wheelbase 378
Wheel base, vehicle 378
Wheel change 342
Wheels and tires 320
Wheels and tires, exchange 327
Widgets, iDrive 45
Widgets, instrument cluster, see Central dis-
play area 155
Width, vehicle 378
Wi-Fi connection, see Owner's Manual for
Navigation, Entertainment, Communication 6
Window, defrosting 281
Window fogging 281
Windows, powered 99
Windshield cleaning system, see Wiper sys-
tem 170
Windshield, climate comfort 310
Windshield, defrosting 281
Windshield, removing condensation 281
Windshield washer fluid, see Washer fluid 356
Windshield wipers, see Wiper system 170
Winter storage, see Long-term vehicle stor-
age 377
Winter tires 328
Winter tires, tread 326
Wiper blades, changing 360
Wiper fluid, see Washer fluid 356
Wiper, fold-away position 172
Wipers, see Wiper system 170
Wiper system 170
Wireless charging, smartphone, see Wireless
charging tray 294
Wireless charging tray for smartphones 294
Wood parts, care 376
Wordmatch principle, see Entry comparison 46
Workshop, see Service notification 161
Wrong Way Warning 200
X
xDrive 214
Y
Yield warning 198
Seite 397
Everything from A to Z
REFERENCE
397
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A88D30 - VI/23
OwnersManuals2.com
BMW DRIVER'S GUIDE APP.
YOUR DIGITAL VEHICLE INFORMATION.
The BMW Driver's Guide app explains the equipment of your
vehicle and offers further scopes and functions:
All information surrounding navigation,
entertainment and communication
Photorealistic animations for various
vehicle functions
Keyword search
360° view: Explore your vehicle
interactively inside and out
Smart Scan for Apple iPhone: Icon
and optical character recognition on the
buttons in the vehicle
Available in more than 30 languages
Can be used offline after download
01405A88D30 ue
*BL5A88D30009*
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A88D30 - VI/23
OwnersManuals2.com
